Actions

Work Header

Longest Novel

Chapter Text

Prelude (2018)

In the year 2018, there was a man in his house. This man was on the lower end of middle-aged. He had turned 44 just this year. His name was T.K., and he was sitting around in his house. On this day, he was thinking about his career and pondering what he should write his next book about. T.K. had published his first book in 2000 when he was just 26 years old.

Before then, he had odd jobs that he worked in order to give him some form of income. At first, writing had just been a way of getting some money, but then his work had turned out to be a bestseller - the profits proving to fund his next project and so it slowly grew from there.

Eventually, he had covered almost every genre to some extent of success and failure depending on the book he'd written. He had made about one book per year for his now devoted fans and almost every one of his books had been some form of a best-seller. He now decided that at this point in his career he should write an autobiography - a book about the real-life experiences of his youth. T.K. figured there was no need to publish yet another book on a genre or series that he might not have been all that invested in.

It was at this point that he thought that if he wanted to truly capture his experiences, then it would be crucial to cover some of the most important events. That way, he figured, his audience would hopefully enjoy his story as much as he anticipated he would write it. There was one adventure that he had gone through when he was about twelve years old, the year of 1986, that he thought people would be interested in.

As he came to this conclusion, memories popped up in his mind.

This was when he finally made his choice. He grabbed the phone and called his best friend. Joe was the name of his friend who was going to be helping him out with this project. He and Joe had been having a decently running friendship ever since the adventures of 1986. He and Joe were forced to get along but as they had started to put differences aside, they were able to have a lot of really good conversations about life. T.K. thought that maybe Joe would be able to help him plan out the stories he wanted to share with the world.

Joe was five years older than T.K., meaning that Joe was born in the year 1969. A much less significant difference than when they were kids. T.K. was thinking of all of this as he had called his friend. He tried to think of the best way to tell Joe of his plans. How would Joe react? But he didn't have all that much of a chance to ponder this as Joe had answered the phone call pretty much right away.

"So T.K., what are you up to?" Joe asked. He was not asking that in a mean way, but rather in an honest, almost childlike curiosity. It was rare to get a call from T.K.

Without much hesitation, T.K. explained to him the idea he had had that morning and that he was just trying to make a new book. As Joe heard that, it made him very shocked and confused at first but then he just thought of his friend and tried to come up with what to say.

"I guess that I will help you out. Just give me some time to get to your house. Once I get there, then we can start." Joe had said.

T.K. sighed in relief. Not only would he have some help in this project of his, but he would not be forced to go through these memories all alone. With that, T.K. thanked Joe, hung up, and started waiting.

About an hour passed before Joe had made it to his house. As T.K. was waiting, he naturally brought out his journal and started to write in it. One thing to write about came to his head right away.

He thought of the fact that George H.W. Bush had died two days ago. As a life-time Republican, T.K. was devastated over the fact that the president that had helped make him a Republican had died. Prevailing President Trump, who also was a Republican and on the second year of his term, had made a public speech giving his sympathy of the president's death and telling the country that they should be united for their common mourning of former president Bush.

He was the second longest-lived president, just two months shy of 94 years old. The only president who had lived longer was Jimmy Carter, as he was still alive.

T.K. had been really sad over this whole thing and there was nothing that he could really do to express his sadness. He was currently living in a place that was largely democratic. Chaicago, Illinois was somewhere that T.K. hated to live in since he had not wanted to be called racist just because he had different political views compared to them. T.K. had never voted Democratic because he rationalized that even if the candidate for the Republicans were largely terrible as people, such as the aforementioned Donald Trump, T.K. always went by their policies and their ideas, not their personality. That was what made him never once vote Democrat. Obama was a nice person in his view, but Trump did share his policies more, same as Romney, McCain, both Bushes in all the elections they ran, and Bob Dole. Damn, even if Jar-Jar Binks was running as a Republican he would feel like he'd have to vote for him. Donald Trump had got his vote due to policies and ideas, despite the fact that T.K. hated him as a person.

T.K. decided to stop thinking politically for a little bit since it always made him angry to be considered a minority where he lived. So instead of thinking politically, for the time being, he looked at the pictures in his living room. There were three pictures that stood out to him especially. One of him when he was young and in his prime in his adventures, one of his wife when he had met her at the age of nineteen (he was thirty-six years old at the time), and one of their son Trent, who was five years old by this point.

Before T.K. could think too much more on that issue, he heard a knock on his door and got up as fast as he could. He started to walk to the door. He paused and took a deep breath, knowing with a 95 percent certainty who this person could have been. But he opened it just a couple of seconds later and greeted his friend Joe with as much excitement that he could muster under the circumstances. He was aware of how they were just about to start talking about the hardest experience of his entire life.

"So T.K., when do you plan on getting ready for this?" Joe had asked.

T.K. didn't respond right away. He decided that there was nothing else that he could do that would make putting this thing off any longer more tolerable. So he just nodded and led Joe inside the house that his friend had not been inside of for almost six months. They hung out every other week, but almost always at the college that T.K. taught at.

T.K. taught at a Community College for Creative Writing during his spare time to get him some money while he was working on his books. He taught his class every weekday for 75-minute sessions His class was worth six credits. The reason he did daily classes was that he was wanting to get the idea in his students' heads that you can't take a break from your writing or else the characters and story start to feel more like fictional characters and not like real events and people. Of course, they weren't real events and people, but good storytelling means those things should almost feel real. It was a quick and easy job for some quick and easy money and he enjoyed it.

"I think we should probably just get started with this as soon as possible. So we can make as much progress possible in the time frame that we have." T.K. had said.

Joe knew that T.K. was right. Both of them agreed that when they would write this story, they would just write the stuff that came to their head. After all, many of these things they were remembering for the first time in years.

Right when Joe and T.K. started to write their book, T.K. started to have a flashback of something in his past. The flashback had started back in the year 2010. It was when T.K. was walking down the street with a box in his hand. As he was walking down the street, he was getting ready to start his teaching job at the community college. This would be his first year here. He was not really sure if he would be able to do a good job teaching or not. But he was hoping that his first year would not be a total disaster. That was a very easy goal he thought to himself.

As he was walking around, he was trying to find a place to sit down for a couple of minutes to take a break. After all, he was starting to get a little bit tired from all of the walking and he was wanting to just let his legs rest up a little bit. Which was a little bit strange sounding. But he was just feeling that way. After he was walking around for another few feet, he spotted a girl who looked to be a young adult sitting down on the main staircase. She seemed to be really lost in thought. T.K. wondered if there was anything he could do to assist her.

When he had sat down next to her, he was thinking about the least creepy and friendliest way to approach her. "Hey, I saw that you looked pretty down. I know that it's sort of strange for me to come to you. Considering that we have never met... But I just couldn't help but wonder if you needed any help right now. If you don't, I will just leave you be."

When T.K. had said that, the girl looked up at him as if to show her confusion. She was not really expecting him to be there. She even considered opening up to this stranger. After all, he was being nice and it would be kind of mean to shoot him down when he was trying to reach out to her. He was being much nicer than half the people she did know.

The girl let out a pent-up breath before quietly replying. "I don't really know what I'm supposed to be doing with my life anymore. I was signing up for college at the start of the year, but I have no idea what I want to do. I'm starting to regret signing up in the first place and I wished I went to a different place now. I really wish I didn't listen to my parents and that I just went with what I thought was right for my own sake." The girl said.

T.K. seemed to think about that and he wondered what he could say to her to make her feel better. "What do you think is making you question your own choices? I have not been in the college before, but I am going to be a teacher there and this will be my first year. I think that you should just take a deep breath and take things one day at a time. That is the way that I usually go at things. I go at it one day at a time and hey, it's worked for me so far," T.K. said, offering her a smile. He was tempted to put his hand on her shoulder in a comforting way, but he did know better than to do so.

"Well, I wanted to go out and meet some new people and make some new friends. I was getting really tired of being in this town and I hated growing up in it. High school was not that great and really ruined my idea of this town. I applied to a college in a different town. But my parents had found the application and then they put the letter back in my room. I knew then that they were going to force me to stay here. It really hurt me to know that they didn't care at all about what I wanted or the choices I was trying to make." The girl said and then T.K. sort of had an idea of how this had felt but he could not really try to help her besides motivation and nice words.

"I had a lot of things that my parents did not want me to do. And I wanted to do these things so bad that I started to rebel. I got in trouble quite a bit when I was even younger than you are. I really wish that I started to go out and be more independent, but then again I have some great stories to tell my class for writing pieces. And that is one way to look at it. At least if for nothing else, you can look at this as a possible life story and you can tell this story to all your friends and children when you finally grow up." T.K. said and then he was wondering what she was thinking about him saying this.

"I have no idea how you are able to look at things so brightly and not have a bad outlook on anything related to life. Honestly, it does impress me quite a bit. How do you do it? How are you able to keep such a good attitude on all of this and never want to give up? You seem to be that one type of guy that no matter what happens, you would never want to let anybody down. You really remind me of somebody I knew ten years ago," the girl said. She then held her hand out. "My name is Catherine. What's your name?"

"My name is T.K. Shioda. Well, you should probably call me Mr. Shioda when you see me in class. I don't really think that people will want me to refer to myself as my first name and all that. So I don't really care. But whatever, I guess if you want to do it this way, then I think that you should be able to have that choice." T.K. said, and then he shook her hand and that was when Catherine had pieced it together.

"That explains why I felt like I knew somebody like you. Didn't you have a babysitting job in 2000? I think that that explains why I knew you. I think that I was one of the people that you were babysitting back in the day." Catherine said and then when she had said that, T.K. looked at her and started to examine her face. When he did, flashes started to come to his mind and he realized that she indeed was the girl that he had babysat in the summer ten years ago, and now she was all grown up.

"Oh my god, you actually were that girl that I had known back in the day. There were several kids that I helped babysit and they were sort of like your friends. Like the really like strong one. Well, strong for the young age that you guys were. Then there was the one who you hung out with but they didn't talk much. I remember how you would always be asking me what I was doing, you were such a curious kid. I'd almost dare to say you had a crush on me." T.K. was sort of living down memory lane now that he was talking to Catherine. She laughed when she was thinking about how silly she had been.

"Yeah, I thought of you like my shining knight. I really thought that if I tried to get you to notice me, then you would. But you seemed to always be more realistic and always looking at the law and reading thick chapter books. But it was one of those things that always seemed to get to me every time. But I guess that it is all behind us now," Catherine said. She looked over at T.K. and she was wondering if what she was thinking about could possibly work out or if it was just a silly dream.

She looked over at Mr. Shioda shyly. "To be totally honest, I never really got over that. I still have had that hope that you would come to me. I've dated other people, but I guess that you were always stuck in my mind. And I guess that since I am now nineteen, that I would be old enough to at the very least ask you this finally. Mr. Shioda, will you be willing to go on a date with me?" Catherine asked. T.K. thought about it and after he had thought about it for a moment, he realized that he might not get another chance to have a relationship any time soon. He hadn't dated since 2004, which was six years ago by now.

"I know that this is unprofessional, but I think that I will accept your offer. I think it might be nice to go on a date or two with you. You seem like a very nice young woman," T.K. said. Once the words left his mouth, the two of them were blushing and T.K. felt a little strange accepting the idea to go on a date with a barely legal lady.

Chapter Text

Chapter 1: The Tide of Death

All the way back in 1966 Minnesota, there was a house with a younger man. This guy was trying to find a better job than the one he did have. He was a sixteen-year-old high-school dropout who was considered to be one of the true origins of an 'emo asshole'. The name of this man was Ken. He had felt like his older brother would be a total disaster to the world and was trying to find a way to keep him from leaving the house as often as he did.

His older brother was named Sam, and he was about three years older than Ken. The two of them have had a very bad relationship with each other and neither of them had been able to get along for much more than a week or two. Every time that they had tried to be nice to each other, it would be ruined right away. Ken was thinking about this as he was reading one of his history books. He hated going to school. But the one thing that could get behind was the history class. He had been reading a bunch of history related books when he had gotten the chance since he was a pretty curious person. One of the books that he had been reading was about a few presidents and the work that they had been doing during their time in office. Such as the term of William McKinley and the elections that he had been given against the relatively young, fierce, and outgoing William Jennings Bryan.

Ken was putting the book down after he had decided that he needed a little bit of a break from all of this reading and spacing out. There was also the fact that he had read this book like six or seven times already since he had 'forgotten' to return it when he dropped out in his sophomore year. Ken started to consider what else he should spend his time doing. He was dissatisfied with his very poor rating job. It was just at a gas station and the job was nothing if underwhelming. It only gave him the most basic of wages.

"Hey, Ken, what the fuck are you doing?" Sam asked when Ken was just staring at the ceiling in thought. As he was doing this, Sam had thought that Ken was being useless once again and that there would be a good chance to treat him like shit once again. Ken turned his chair around and saw that Sam was holding some drumsticks.

"What are you doing with those?" Ken asked. Sam considered his rebuttal. There was a valid reasoning behind all of this. Sam put the drumsticks onto the top of their dresser that was next to the door.

"No, I asked first, what are you doing?" Sam asked. Ken decided that maybe he should just answer his brother and get it over with. Then Sam would be able to just drop it and then he could go back to his own thing. At least it wasn't as bad as other times Sam tried to bullshit with him.

"Well, I was just reading some of my history books to memorize some facts. I'm not in school anymore man. I have to keep my mind sharp. But I don't think you really care at all. After all, the only thing you talk about is how I need to do something. Or get a hobby. At least I'm doing something right now." Ken said.

Sam decided to back down a bit. Sam did say he wanted Ken to get a hobby. He just didn't think it would be reading some boring books. Typical of his brother to choose something this lame.

"I thought you would get back into writing in your notebooks again like how you did in seventh grade. At least then you were working towards making some form of literature. You were writing your own story. Hey, I did send you that one notebook a couple of months ago. Why not go into that a little bit more?" Sam asked. Ken decided that he didn't want to tell Sam the truth. He had filled it up already and did so in about a month. Besides, Ken did not really want to write a biography or a lifelong story, but he felt like it should be something that he'd come back to every few years or so. He still hated admitting that his brother knew him better than he knew himself.

"Well, that was something that I did really enjoy doing back at the time that it happened. However, I don't really know if I can keep up writing and filling journals over and over again. I think that it was a good thing to do twice and it captured two parts of my life very well. But in the end, I don't think I would be able to do it for the rest of my life. Maybe in another few years from now, when I am like twenty or twenty-one, I will do another one. So that way I can see the difference in my life now to four to five years from now." Ken had said.

Sam decided that he didn't really want to argue with Ken. Even if he had thought that this was totally ridiculous. "Well, whatever works for you I guess. I would have done something else myself. But I mean, you are your own person, Ken. So go on and just do something that you think will work out your own way." Sam said and then when he said that, he walked off in a bit of a huff. Ken wondered idly how long it would be until Sam came back.

As he was thinking this, he was reflected of his time that he had to deal with Brad and their messed up plans for prom. There was something that was totally crazy albeit way more noteworthy than Joe and Matt's prom plans twenty years later. Ken then sort of thought that Brad and he could have been really good friends. They had only hung out two or three times since prom. But Ken had started to think that maybe that was for the better. Since he had only talked to Brad a couple of times, Ken figured they hadn't had time to ruin their first impressions of each other. And Ken would not want that to happen at all.

When he was done thinking about Brad and their prom adventures, Sam had shown back up in Ken's room. This confused Ken.

"I thought that you would have been out for a bit longer," Ken told Sam.

Sam chose to ignore Ken's statement. "So Ken, do you have anything that you are going to be able to do?" Sam asked just to fuck with Ken. Ken sighed and shook his head.

"I am going to be hanging with Susan. At least Susan and I will be doing something that is of worth. Susan and I have made so much progress in the last couple of months that I think she and I might go on to the next level soon," Sam said.

Ken was unsure what he meant by that. After all, it was no secret that Sam and Susan were having sex with how much Sam bragged about it and all that shit. That meant Ken must be talking about buying a ring. "Sam, are you actually thinking of... marrying Susan?" Ken asked. He was barely able to ask the question without feeling a sudden wave of every single emotion that he could remember having faced in his life. He tried to imagine what it would be like having Susan become his sister-in-law. He didn't hate Susan. In fact, he liked her more than he liked Sam most times. He was just not really sure how to take the sudden news.

"It's on the table now. I'm sure that once you get to see just how happy we are, you will work hard to support us however you can. Maybe if you start to prove yourself more, then I will think about inviting you to the wedding. But of course, you would have to earn it. Being my brother does not instantly mean that you get top treatment from me. Believe it or not," Sam told Ken.

Ken was still very happy that Sam was going to be making some great progress with Susan. But the more that Sam was a dick about it, the more that Ken did not want anything to go well for Sam anymore. Which he knew was mean and kind of petty, but that was how he felt.

"Well, maybe you shouldn't just hang out with Susan all the time and maybe do other things of actual merit in your life. You could use a hobby yourself that isn't just bragging about getting laid. Maybe you wouldn't be a total asshole then." Ken said.

Sam shook his head. He was trying to be nice to Ken for once and then he had ruined it without even trying to cooperate. "You need to stop being one yourself and maybe instead start to think about how I am making doing." Sam said and stomped off.

Ken was again alone to take that moment in. He knew that there might be a certain level of truth to what his brother accused. But it still sounded totally dickish when it came out of Sam. Sam had a way of always sounding a dick no matter how he tried to prove his point on literally anything. It could almost be another brag-worthy talent of his. That is if Sam was able to see how it had worked out so well.

Sam knew that the more he talked with Ken, the more that he would just get pissed off over his whiny little brother. He needed to grow up and it needed to happen real fucking quick. He had no idea when it would happen though was the thing that had scared the shit out of him so badly. Either way, Sam just had to leave the area to get some space.

Ken was thinking of how great it was going to be when Sam would finally break up with Susan. It would show Sam that he was not perfect and everything about the guy was a total and utter failure. Ken knew he'd be ready to laugh his ass of when it happens. Ken stood up and left his history book on the table since he'd thought that maybe Sam was actually right on that matter at least. He heard his mother's footsteps as she headed towards his room.

"Kevin, do you want to talk to me? Are you in an okay mood right now?" Ken's mother called. She was the only one who used his real name. Ken had told people to stop calling him Kevin after seventh grade, when he really started to change as a person and wanted something to reflect on it. But even since then, she would seemingly never give up on calling him Kevin.

"I was just having an argument with Sam. Sorry if we were being loud. I just thought to myself that I hoped he and Susan were going to break up eventually. It doesn't seem fair that Sam gets such great things to happen to him. But then Sam had told me that he was actually planning on proposing to Susan soon."

When Ken had told his mother that last little bit, she almost seemed on the verge of shedding tears. She thought that it would be great to have a daughter-in-law. She had always wanted a daughter and knew it was the closest she'd likely ever get. Especially with how rowdy Ken and Sam had turned out. But then again, she was just glad that she had kids at all.

"I can't believe that I am going to be a mother-in-law soon. I always liked Susan and think that she does a good job helping keep Sam calmed down. I think they have a really good connection, Ken. You shouldn't try and tell him that they are going to break up. Sam likes her and you should not try to ruin their happy moments," his mother said.

Ken shook his head before looking his mom straight in the eye. "Well, I'm sorry that your daughter in law will be married to one of the worst sons on the face of the planet. He's nothing but filth," Ken said.

She scowled before regaining her composure at the harsh words. Then she just looked at him as if he really did not get it at all. "You know what, maybe one day you will know what it's like to have kids. Maybe you'll understand the bond that grows with them and how much you want them to succeed in their lives. No matter what you like to admit, a kid is something that changes a person in ways that are completely unpredictable. I only hope once that happens to you that you start to grow into something else entirely." Ken's mother said.

Ken just stood up turned away from her to make sure that he wasn't looking at her.

"Maybe you are right. But I just don't get it right now. I feel like I can be critical of Sam when I feel that he has some major problems," Ken said. He turned around to see his mother again. She remained silent and left the room. Ken just sat down where he was thinking of getting ready to go to sleep.

He decided that he'd want to revisit some old experiences since he had not much else to do. Ken grabbed the second notebook that he had filled up. He started reading about the conversations that he and Brad had had as well as his encounters with that guy who had been in his Wayside life and had consequently ruined his life forever. He and Brad had got into a big conflict with that guy since he had ruined their Prom. It all ended with a huge fight, including a part with the police. Unlike in Wayside, where when they were let out they were practically heroes. Ken had thought that Brad and him should go on and hang out again. He could use a good friend right now. As much as Ken did not want to admit it, Sam was a little bit right on this whole thing.

"You know, maybe Sam is right in this case," Ken was saying under his breath. He shook his head as if he could not believe that he had actually said those words out of his mouth. He continued on reading the shit that he had written after he had dealt with Brad and Prom, such as trying to get done with his homework assignments as fast as he could. Soon enough, he had gotten more work in one week done than he had done in his first two years of high school. By the time the semester ended, it was his only semester in which he got a perfect five credit card. Every other semester before that point, he had failed at least one class before. Those classes and the credits that they had given him had finally brought him around to a 2.6 GPA for that semester, which was the highest that he had ever reached during high school. Not that he thought that this was necessarily going to be a turning point. But simply he was just too tired of school, and when there was finally a time that it had looked like he was actually making some real progress on this, it was thrown away. He didn't really have any good patience skills over this whole thing. But then with his drop out, he just needed to find a way to make his life good. At least better than working at a fucking gas station.

After a few minutes of Ken just sort of waiting around and doing nothing besides reading his old notebook, there was yet again another knock on his door. Ken turned around to see that his father was right there. He allowed his father to come into the room and then his father sat down on the bed a couple feet away from him. Ken wondered what type of rant he was going to be given from all of the arguments. Not that he really wanted to know. But he just knew that it was going to be coming.

"Are you going to talk to me about Sam and how we need to get along again? Because to be honest, I am tired of talking about Sam and thinking about him. I just want to be able to talk about something else for once," Ken said.

His father thought for a moment before replying. "You know, I was going to do that originally until you told me what you just said. So I will go along and respect your wishes for the time being. I will say something related to Sam for a quick moment and then I will switch back into a conversation that is not related to him at all. Anyway, there is something that I was originally going to be giving to Sam back in the day, but as time has passed on he is showing very obviously that he does not want this. I thought that maybe you would want to have this. Since you have a chance of getting into this field of career. And with that, here you go." His father said before he took something out from behind him to give to Ken.

"What is this? Why are you giving this to me?" Ken had asked when he had finally gotten to realize what he had been given. It was a police hat, and when he had seen this, he was wondering what his father was doing with it. He knew that this was what his father had done as a job and he had also known that he had had this as his first police hat. Which had made things even more strange for him.

"I thought that there was a chance that you might want to be in the job. I just thought that it would be really nice of me to offer it to you. And with that, I thought that even if nothing else, you would at least like having it as a visual piece. So I guess that if you want to wear it or become a police officer, then I am glad for you." His father had explained and then he put his hand on Ken's shoulder.

"Are you doing it soon? Retiring I mean," Ken asked. His father nodded - he was pretty old after all. At the age of seventy seven years old, he was by far the oldest parent at the graduation for Sam.

"There comes a point in which you have to throw the towel in eventually. So I think that with it coming soon, I need to start considering passing it onto somebody else in the family. That is if you actually have an interest in the career," his father said.

Ken considered what his father had been saying for a moment before nodding a little bit. He thought that he had understood what his father had said. But he still was not really one hundred percent certain what this meant for him. "Well, I will think about it at the very least. If you want me to become a cop, I might as well work towards it for the time being. I have no idea what I want to be when I grow up. At some point, I might find something that I like more. But unless I do, I can always fall back on this." Ken said and then he was hoping that his father would find this to be a fair idea.

"Well, you know, just whatever works for you is what matters. I won't bother you too much about it unless you start to follow something that is clearly not your dream or goal," Ken's father said. Ken's father looked at Ken a little bit, wondering what his son was thinking at that moment. But it didn't really matter since his father stood up and headed out of the room.

Ken then shook his head. Ken had wondered just how many more interruptions he was going to have to deal with in the next hour. He was seriously getting tired of people always coming in and talking to him and acting like what they need to say to him is just totally worth getting in his way all the fucking time. Ken just laid down on his bed and decided that he was going to try and take a little bit of a nap.

Ken closed his eyes and found himself having a dream about Wayside. He was thinking about what things would have been like had he not been forced out of the place. Well, to be fair, he was never really forced to go down there. But he did leave the place and completely against his own ambitions. Once he had gotten really involved in the dream, he started to have a bunch of terrible thoughts to it all. He dreamt about getting killed off by some sort of snake-like creature. Which was really confusing at that moment. Like the snake creature literally had nothing to do with Wayside or anything like that. He dreamt about the walls starting to close in on him and his friends, nearly killing the entire classroom before Todd came in to save the day. That was when Ken had woken up all of a sudden and then a few seconds after he had done so, he looked around and saw that his room was just like normal. He put his hand up to his head and rubbed his temples, trying to clear the terrifying thoughts, but was interrupted by a knock of the door.

Ken sat right up right away and he walked out to the front of the house. His parents had beaten him there, but he still did want to see what had happened. His mother had opened the door and then his father stood up next to them both. Then Ken was right behind his father. "What are you doing here?"

Ken's mother had asked this very question when she had seen the police officer there. That was exactly the type of people that had always made Ken's parents scared. Since his father was a police officer, it had meant that there was a terrible event that needed to be worked out and that his father would have to go out of his free time to go and help. That or Ken and Sam had done something wrong, and since Sam had usually never done anything wrong, it always was Ken who had done something. In fact, they had taken that into consideration when Ken's mother had looked directly at Ken and was giving him a 'what did you do' look on her face.

"I have some very bad news for you. Your son Sam was found dead near the football field. The death had come to us about twenty minutes ago. We made sure to come down here as soon as possible. We're waiting for results from forensics. But there was a gun found on the scene. I'm afraid that leaves it at either a suicide or a murder. I'm very sorry for your loss," the police officer had said.

Ken's mother had pretty much stopped hearing anything that was going on as she started to walk away.

"My wife will not be able to handle this very well. I think I might have to take a couple weeks off myself. I'll call the office soon," said Ken's father, the officer nodded in understanding.

Ken's father closed the door behind the police officer. Ken just slowly walked back into his room. Neither of his parents forced him to do something else. They all had their own ways to grieve. Ken was thinking a little bit about Susan and then when he thought about Susan, he had come to his own choice that he needed to see her and speak to her immediately. It was not really all that hard of a choice and he knew that it was a terrible thing to have to tell her. But honestly it was better for her to know that way than just having her find out on the news or the paper. He remembered a year or so ago when there was a school student that had died and all that was shown of their death was a fucking news paper article. Ken knew this was something that would really break her, and having it be done in person would be way better than this.

"Dad, I will be heading on over to see Susan right now. I think that she needs to know about the news," Ken said. He started to mess around with the clothes in his room, thinking of what would be most appropriate to wear in a situation like this. He was not really sure why he was doing this. But damn if he didn't make sure that he would have some nice clothes on to talk to her.

"Well, if you think that you need to go on and do this, then so be it. I will not argue with you," Ken's father had said.

Ken found a brown coat and then he found a red shirt and some black pants. He closed the door for some privacy. Then he put his clothes on. Once he put the clothes on, he walked out of the room and then he looked over at his father. "I'll see you guys soon. I think I will be back in a couple of hours. If I'm not back by then, I'll call letting you know what's going on." Ken said and then he walked out of the house.

Once he was out of the house, his mother was crying and screaming at her husband to bring him back home or else she will run out there to go out and get him herself. His father had said that he needed to find his own way and that Ken knew what he was doing much more than people gave him credit for. "He will be fine tonight. I doubt that fate will be cruel enough to take both of our sons away from us on the same day. If that were the case, I would start to think that maybe we were terrible parents and that we had nearly deserved it," Ken's father said and shook his head. Then he hugged his wife tightly. Ken was now totally out of sight from their house. Ken was running since he wanted to make sure that he would be over at Susan's house as soon as possible and make sure that he would help her out as long and as much as he was able to.

Ken's father was getting ready to sit down when he saw something that looked like a light where it reasonably shouldn't be. He stood up and started to walk over to the basement of the house. The closer he got, the more he began to presume what was down there. Soon enough, Ken's father was downstairs and he was now in the middle of the basement. That was when he saw the man who had been out of his life for several decades. Ken's father thought that it was over with for good. But he knew right away that this was the man responsible for Sam's death.

"I was not expecting you to be here. Why have you not aged lately? Unless my math skills doubt me, you should be over a hundred years old," Ken's father said to the man in the purple jacket. The man looked to be in his thirties. In truth, he was even older than Ken's dad.

"Oh Bill, I thought that you would have a much better greeting than this to your old lost friend. I thought that maybe you would maybe even be a bit excited to see me once again. I wanted to give you this tape. I think that it will truly show you all of the great work that I have been able to do with your son. I truly had a lot of fun with that weak child. Your younger son is a much better boy. He's one that I think will truly help me out." The man in the purple jacket gave Bill the tape, although most people knew Bill by the alias Nigel, and then when Nigel looked back up again he saw that this guy was gone as quickly as he had appeared.

Before Nigel went back up stairs, he walked up to the old and hidden television he had down there and put it in the more advanced VHS player. It was something that would not come along for decades still, but he had been around in a very advanced world and therefore had been able to get the true first copy of this machine. As he began watching the tape, he saw a large football field and he knew exactly what was going to happen. As if to show that what he was thinking was true. He saw Sam walk inside the field shown on screen, the man in the purple jacket walked forward to talk to him.

"So Sam, you have decided that you were going to show up after all. I am a little bit impressed that you had the balls to show your face," the guy in the purple jacket had said.

Sam was shaking in fear since he truly knew what was going to happen. "I was wanting to tell you that I don't want to do this anymore. I'm telling you that this project is over with forever. I never wanted to do this in the first place. I was an idiot to let you tell me what to do. But this is too far. I was able to tolerate it at first, but it ends now. Unlike my brother, I have honor," Sam had said. He turned away as if to leave the purple-clad man just then.

The man in the purple jacket laughed as his response. "Sadly, I will not take no for an answer." The guy in the purple jacket took out a gun and started shooting Sam in the back over and over until he was no longer moving. As if to rub it in the viewer's face, he kept shooting the boy with each step he took near the body. He shot him down again and again until he ran out of bullets. "Nobody ever turns down the king of the digital world." The man in the purple jacket said left the soccer field with the gun dropped next to Sam. As he was out of the football field, there was split second blink and you miss it flash of a figure in a red robe.

Nigel saw the tape end that way and then he took the tape out and wrote with his pen one word: EVIDENCE! He knew that there was nothing he could do now and if it was leaked now, Nigel would be accused of being the murderer. Instead, he would buy his time. Justice for his older son would be done eventually. But he was an old man, and if there was one thing being old taught you, that was that patience is a virtue. He walked up and when he was in Ken and Sam's room, he put it in a small box next to Sam's bed so that if something happened to this house and it was looked into, that tape can be found and everybody would know Sam did not kill himself. This would be the last thing he would do in his long life of service to the world.

With all of this going down, Ken was running on his way over to Susan's house and it was raining just a bit as he was running there. The rain wasn't so bad at that point in time. He was more worried about reaching the other side of the town, which was where Susan lived. She was a little under an hour away even with him running for a good part of the time. But that was something that Ken had thought about for a little bit but did not let it ruin his idea of getting there. Helping Susan out was far more important than just sitting home and letting the seconds pass until Ken would reach Sam's age, or even higher. Which now would be able to become at least some form of a possibility.

He was thinking about a ton of stuff realted to Sam. He was thinking about all the times when he and Sam would get into fights and Sam would try and get Ken to change his ways even though Ken thought that he was already doing a good job setting up his own path. But then he was thinking about all the times when Sam would make threats with Ken about the stuff that he did in Wayside and how much he was going to threaten to tell his parents what he did during Wayside. Sam would threaten to tell them just how bad Ken really was and why they should be ashamed that they raised somebody like Ken. Some of the stuff that he said to Ken was truly crazy and overall vile.

After it had taken him a while, Ken was starting to think more of the good times that he had with Sam before he died. There were a few positive memories. While he hated Sam sometimes, he did feel like there were a couple of moments that he had that were worth it. Such as the time when Sam had taught him how to play with bubbles. Ken was about six years old at the time and when he had done that, he thought that the two were going to be great friends for life. That was before Sam had started to become very fucking hostile towards him every single day.

Then soon enough, there was the time when Ken was eight and Sam had convinced him that he would be able to go far in his dreams and ambitions. Ken had no idea what those were but the way that Sam had said it made him believe for a moment that maybe there was a truth to it and when there was that thought to him, he wanted to try even harder for Sam. He would lose that attitude after a few months and Sam would be even harder on him.

There was how Sam and Ken had started to be able to go on and try and get closer with each other during the time that Ken was at Wayside. Which was yet again another point in his life that things were going well for him. And all of that included Sam as well. Which was something that Ken was also missing about being in that place. But then as soon as Ken had left that school and he had gone down to a normal school for his eighth grade year, once again things had started to go back to him and Sam not getting along. They would start to get into fights every couple of weeks and Sam would say that he never truly supported the stuff that he did in Wayside. Sam was just glad that Ken was not busy being stupid and that he had actually supported him at the moment just to sort of help Ken get more done.

Then in his first couple of years of him being in high school, Ken and Sam had talked a bit about what Sam could do with Ken in terms of helping him out in highschool. Ken thought that this was a good idea that the two of them could get closer since Sam could help him with school work. And with helping him out at school then Ken could be able to learn the ups and downs of how things were in school. But this had only happened like three or four times per school year. Only when Ken had thought that he would really need the help of Sam.

"The more that I think about it, the more that I realize Sam and I didn't have all that many things in common in the end," Ken had said and then he sighed. This should have been a moment that he should have been really making Sam seem like the best person ever. But there was just no way that he could have done that without feeling like he was sort of lying to himself. Which he thought was even worse than being honest. After about half an hour or so of walking on his way to Susan's house, he was reaching her front yard and with each forwarding step on the way to the door, he was thinking about the best way to tell her. He was just hoping that Susan would not get angry that he did this. Ken just wanted to make things easier for her so that he could go home and put all this unpleasantness behind him for a while.

Chapter Text

Chapter 2: The Ascension Starts (1966)

Eventually, Ken knocked on the door of Susan's house. Once he had knocked on the door, he was thinking of the way that he could tell her the news. There was no real way that he could say it without making it feel like he had just not cared at all. Which was sort of true. At least in comparison to how much his parents and Susan had cared. But he was trying his absolute hardest to find something that he could do right.

"Ken, what are you doing here?" Susan asked when she had seen that Ken was the one there and not Sam. Eventually Ken found what he felt could be a somewhat decent way that he could tell her the news.

"Well, I just wanted to come by because I have to give you some really, really bad news. Sam has died today. I only found out about an hour ago and I knew I had to come here as soon as I heard. He was found at the soccer field is what the police said. So there you go, that is the news for you. I'm sorry that you had to hear this, but I have no other way that I can tell you this," Ken told her.

Susan shook her head, it was a lot to take in at once. It had looked like she was about to start crying at that very moment and that she needed somebody to be there for her very badly.

"Why did it have to be him of all people? He and I were making so much great progress together. I thought we were going to get married soon! That was what I was feeling from him anyway. I knew we were in love," Susan had said.

Ken thought about it. Yeah, he had hated Sam a lot. But Susan had really thought that he was something special and because of that, he was sad for her. Ken was just hoping that this would be over within a moment and he was hoping that Susan would actually be more forgiving of Ken than she would be of the terrible job that the police were sure to do. Ken thought that they clearly didn't care about what they are doing at all.

"I'm sorry that you have lost the person that you loved. I know that you were really close to him. He had wanted to marry you actually. I don't think it will be too big of a deal if I tell you now." Ken had told Susan and then when he had said that, Ken and Susan looked at each other for a moment. Then Ken started to turn to leave.

At first, Susan was thinking that it would be good for Ken to leave the area. But then, she thought about it for a moment. "Ken, can you please stay here for the time being? I know that you guys were not close, but it seemed like you guys both respected me in some sort of mutual way. I can't stand being alone after this horrible news. Could you please just be with me for the night?" Susan asked.

Ken nodded. He didn't really think about it too much since he thought that this was going to lead to somewhere of a disaster. But then Ken just walked on over.

"Thank you for staying here. I really needed you." Susan thanked Ken and then she closed the door. Then Ken had walked on over to the living room. As he was doing that, Susan was thinking of what to do now that Ken was in her house.

"I don't really know what else to do. I am just going to stay here for you and once you feel like you can be alone, then I will leave you alone." Ken was saying as he was looking around the living room. He was not really too familiar with this house. He only had been there three or four times before. And the last time that he was there was prom night, which was by far the craziest night of his entire life. He still wasn't entirely sure what the fuck had happened during prom night that year, but that probably just meant that whatever happened was a lot of fun.

"I think that I will not be ready to let you leave the house for a while. I think that I want you to be in the house at least for the rest of the night. It's fine if you sleep on the couch, it just makes me feel better knowing that someone is in the house with me," Susan said.

Ken just nodded in response. He was not really going to argue with that logic.

"Well, you know, I think that I should contact my parents to let them know that I will be here. After that, I think that I will be able to hang with you for the next several hours," Ken said and then he laughed. He was so glad that he was presented this opportunity. He just wanted to be with Susan and get to know the girl that he had liked for so long. He wanted to get Susan's attention now since Sam was gone. He knew that this was a terrible thing to do, but it was just all that he wanted in the end of the matter. About a minute or so later, Susan walked from her kitchen and then sat down on the couch. She looked at Ken and she had two glasses in her hands. Ken wondered if she was going to give him a drink. But he decided not to react to that at all. If she wanted to give him some booze, then so be it, but he wasn't going to ask her.

"I wouldn't worry about letting them know," Susan had told Ken.

Ken was thinking that maybe Susan was right. "So Susan, what are your plans in life now? Or do you even have any at this point?" Ken asked.

Susan looked at him and just seemed like she couldn't believe that he had said that. She would have thought that he would have waited for that bug of question for a little bit. Then she shook her head slowly and put her arms around him.

"You've never been the subtle one, I know. I probably will just focus on my studies again. You know, make sure that I'm going to pass all my classes in college. Since I signed up for that. But with Sam out of the way..." Susan had to take a pause before she could possibly continue that sentence. "With Sam out of the way, I can focus all on that and never again be focusing on something else." When Susan said that, tears started to come down once again. She was not able to handle it at all. Ken then put his head on her shoulder and they just stared at the wall. Then Ken couldn't say anything since he wanted to appreciate the silence that they were having.

"Well, do you think that you even enjoy working in college anymore or do you think that it will just be really hard, maybe even impossible for you to work on this?" Ken had asked.

Susan had thought about it and then she shook her head. She then told him that she couldn't be sure until she tried, then maybe she will be able to move on from Sam as fast as she could and as much as she could. "After all, there comes a point in which I have to go back to my education. If I don't go back to my education, then all of my work will go to waste. Also if I wait for too long before I go back to it, then I will start to just lose what I have spent so much trying to remember and then all of this will be too hard for me to do and then I will start to think about dropping out at that point," Susan said, almost starting to ramble at this point.

"You know, I don't even think that I have any sort of education goals after I am out of high school. In fact, I don't even think I will go on and complete high school. To be totally honest, I think that I am going to go on and drop out of the fucking place since I just hate it so much." Ken said and then he sounded like he was going to get super angry when he had even just thought about school. "There are zero things in high school that I had enjoyed."

"At least high school is better than people dying. At least you are young enough to where you don't have to have real life to deal with yet," Susan said.

When she said that he didn't have to deal with real life, Ken looked at her and was pissed off at that.

"Actually, I should have thought a little bit more before I had said that since you do have Sam as your brother." When Sam came out of her mouth, that was when she did cry. And then that was when Ken felt like he needed to be there for her again.

Without thinking too much about what what he was doing, Ken moved her arms that were wrapped around him up to his neck. He put his arms around her waist and pulled her close. "Is this okay?" Ken asked quietly, hoping Susan wouldn't decline him.

"I knew what I was doing when I invited you in," Sarah answered.

With that, Ken quickly closed the distance between them and kissed Sarah. She shoved her fingers into his hair, wanting him as close as possible. They kept kissing, Sarah opening her mouth for Ken as he trailed his hands up her sides. He wasn't entirely sure what he was doing, but he knew he wanted to make Sarah feel good - especially after what must have been a terrible loss with his brother. He knew that she was much more upset about Sam's death than he could ever have imagined, and he wanted to make it up to her in every way that he could.

After kissing her for a few minutes, he wanted to get this show on the road and decided to pull Susan into his lap. He took a break from kissing her just to help unbutton her blouse. Susan wasn't the least bit shy and after undoing her bra and throwing it on the floor by the couch, she lifted Ken's shirt off as well, admiring his toned chest. She positioned herself so that she was straddling his thighs and could grind against him just a bit. Without any hesitation, Ken reached for the bare breasts Susan was practically shoving in his face. He'd never felt a girl before and realized he'd really been missing out all this time.

Susan hummed her approval of getting her tits squeezed and buried her hands in his hair, tugging a bit to encourage him to take her nipple into his mouth. Ken quickly complied, suckling one of her nipples while using his right hand to play with her other one. His left hand crept up her thigh and under her skirt to feel her soft skin. He stopped sucking on her flesh and instead ran some kisses across her chest and up to her neck. Susan sighed at the feeling and tilted her head down to keep kissing Ken.

Ken took the opportunity of having both of his hands freed to get a double handful of Susan's plush ass and ground her down on his dick. She felt so warm and smelled amazing. "Susan could you show us to the bedroom?"

After Susan dragged him to her room, she quickly turned off the lights and reached for his belt buckle. "Are you always this eager?" Ken asked jokingly. Susan scoffed at him before undoing his belt and pulling his pants and boxers down to his feet. She was on her knees in front of him and smiled up at him.

"I guess so. I just want to let you know how happy I am that you stayed with me," she replied. Susan grabbed his dick with her right hand and licked up under the bottom of his dick. Ken stopped her so he could sit on the bed, feeling that his knees might buckle. Susan complied and moved back towards him. This time she swallowed down the first few inches of his meat, swirling her tongue around the head on her way back up. Ken gasped and found it was his turn to put his hands in her hair as he enjoyed his first ever blowjob. Susan bobbed her head for a few more minutes before pulling off wetly and crawling up on the bed next to him. She stripped off her skirt and panties, gesturing for him to come over.

He laid on top of her, feeling the newly exposed skin and kissing her deeply.

"Whenever you're ready," said Susan, before opening her legs to him. Ken nodded and took his time looking over the now naked Susan, wanting to remember every moment for the future. Not wanting to keep her waiting, Ken lined himself up and slowly pushed into her pussy until he was balls deep. Susan gasped at the feeling, she was almost sure that Ken was better endowed than his brother from the fullness of her cunt. She scooted down a bit to put a leg over one of his shoulders and told him he could move.

What Ken lacked in experience, he made up for in enthusiasm, keeping a steady and constant thrusting into the moaning Susan below him. He kept one hand on the bed for leverage but couldn't resist cupping one of her handful sized breasts with the other. Susan pulled him down for a kiss, whining in his ear and taking the chance to give a lovebite below his ear. Ken knew he couldn't hold on much longer and worked on pumping harder to get Susan over the edge. Susan was enjoying herself thoroughly and gave Ken a hard slap on the ass, encouraging him to go even deeper.

Finally, Susan's moans got louder and Ken knew she was close. He kept going as long as he could, feeling the pressure building in his balls. He came hard in her, thrusting through his orgasm. As he stopped moving, Susan pulled him down for one last kiss before moving away from him to pull up the rumpled covers of the bed. She beckoned him to join her under the blankets and he happily complied. And that was how Ken fell asleep, spooning up against Susan in her bed, a happier moment in his life completely unthinkable.

Soon enough, Ken woke up in the morning well before Susan did. He looked at the time and saw that it was 7:28 in the morning. So even then he had a full night of sleep. Ken stood up and then rubbed his eyes a little bit and then started to walk around. He got to the living room and then put his clothes on. Then he got around and then walked to the front door and opened it. Then he turned around and heard that Susan was still fast asleep. He didn't want to wake her or possibly upset her so he walked out of the house without even closing the door at all.

Ken started to slowly walk home and as he was doing so, he was sort of pretending like the events of the night before had never even happened at all. Not that they were bad, but he didn't want to get into a shit load of trouble over this whole thing. His parents were not against him having sex. However, they were against the idea of no protection and probably even more against the idea of him getting laid with his brother's girlfriend less than a fucking day after his brother had died.

Once Ken had been outside, the more that he was starting to feel a little insane in his head. And in hindsight, he would not even pretend that he was actually in the right place. But he really felt like he needed to get to the bottom of his brother's death. He did not even care that he was not a huge fan of Sam or anything like that, but the fact is that the death of his brother would be a big thing in his life and that he needed to figure out what the hell was going on.

So instead of actually going back to his house, he instead decided that he would play a little bit of detective work. Yeah, a sixteen year old doing this was really insane, but he felt like it was better than the cops probably doing nothing and not being too smart and just playing it off as a suicide when in reality it couldn't be.

Ken walked around for a few minutes when he found a homeless man. The homeless man was holding a bowl out and the bowl was asking for some simple funds. Normally Ken would not care less about this stuff, but for some reason, seeing this guy made him think that he actually had an idea where Sam was before his death for a strange second.

"Did you happen to see a guy come by here yesterday? He looked quite a bit like me, but he wore glasses and was a couple of years older than me. I just need to know for some personal information. I really don't want to have no lead ins right now." Ken was saying and then as he had said that, the homeless man looked up at Ken and they seemed to consider what he had said before they would give a real answer one way or another.

"I don't think I saw anything like..." Right when he was saying that, he stopped and looked up as if he finally remembered something after all. "Yeah I did see him. He came here yesterday and he gave me a dollar. He didn't really say anything, just told me to use the money properly before he headed on and then left. There was nothing really to it, but he seemed to be really focused. As if his life depended on what was going on at that current moment."

As he had said that, Ken nodded and he was starting to piece more pieces together and he was not really liking where all of these pieces were going and he was hoping that he was wrong. But he seriously doubted that he was wrong about any of this, and that was the thing that was scaring him the most. "Thank you for your answer. I don't have any money on me. So I can't really give you anything." Ken said and then he started to walk down the streets. As he was walking down the streets again, it began to rain once again. He was not really getting why it was raining so much the last two days. It was almost like it was a sign of some things to come.

The more that he was walking, the more that the passing of cars on the street and the buzzing noise that they always made didn't really seem to get to him at all. Each person that walked by him treated him as if he was just a different figure in the grand scheme of things.. He was not really ready to be in the streets right now since it was getting as wet as it was.

But as he was thinking all about this, there was a light in the distance that got to him. He seemed to think that maybe he should head there to see what was going on. He felt like he actually was going to be able to find something there that he could use to help find out who killed Sam. As he was running there really fast, the people around him were wondering what the hell was going on with him and if he was starting to go just maybe a little bit crazy. Which Ken would admit that in hindsight that perhaps he had actually been going a little nuts. And he would think that he should have just let the event be what it was in a chance to look back at it again.

As Ken was running, the light was getting closer to him as it was not moving at all and it was just standing there for him to reach it. The more that he was getting closer, the more that it had looked like a person who was projecting themselves to be really bright - probably to try and attract Ken there.

Soon enough Ken reached this person and they were a person that looked like a general mail man. But when they started to talk to Ken, the more that he was able to see through it that this person was not really normal. "I have seen many things. I have seen your brother's death and I saw what had caused it. I have been working to see everything in the world so I would have more knowledge than any being on the universe," the man was saying. Ken stopped and wondered what exactly they were getting at. Was this man sort of like the monsters that he had run into during Wayside?

"Why not tell me what happened to my brother? I have been trying to figure that out for the last several minutes. I just really want to be able to put that to rest. I want to know what made my brother die. I don't want to live not knowing for my entire life." Ken said and then as he was saying this, he was getting close to shedding some tears but then due to the fact that this was going on in progressively worse rains he knew that the man would not really be able to see what he was feeling inside thankfully.

"Follow me if you want to know more about the death of your brother," The mail man looking guy said as his face suddenly grew so emotionless that ken was suddenly sure that this was just some form of monster that he had never been able to encounter before. As they were slowly going away, the light was coming back and they were gaining distance on Ken. With that, Ken was running as fast as possible to be able to go there and see where this thing was heading. But the more that he was running and his clothes were getting damp, the more that he was certain he was being led to the soccer field.

The time that it took to get to the soccer field was probably about twenty or so minutes. And that was in a full-on sprint. The entire time that he was going there, the more that people around him seemed to start to worry for his sake and think that maybe there truly was something going on and that they needed to find him some help. Once at the field, he saw the guy once again and they were happening to stand right in the exact place that the man in the purple jacket had been standing earlier.

"You can't escape your destiny forever Ken. You were lucky to put it off for another four years by leaving Wayside. But everybody can be able to only put something off for so long. It is time for you to be able to face what is ahead of you." The mail man looking guy was saying and the longer that the conversation would go on, the more that would change.

"What destiny are you talking about? Was it a destiny that was meant to kill my brother just because he is not me and that some fucked up beyond me being decides that he just isn't worth keeping alive? I am not a fan of him, but he deserved so much better." Ken said and he was purely angry now and the mail man has his face slightly changed to one that looked like it was burnt off a small amount, which confused Ken even more.

"I am just a normal guy. I have no greater point to any of this existence here. I have not really done anything that will be worth making me a huge part of your guys insane plot. So can you please just start to leave me alone more often?" Ken asked and he held up his hands as if he was just sort of defeated by all of this and that he had wanted this to be all over with for the rest of his life. The mail man with a burnt face started to twitch a little bit.

"You know when you just sit around your room doing nothing? You know how it is like to waste time? Everybody just sits around and wastes time and lets things be given to them and they don't try and go on to serve a fuller purpose in life. There is nothing that a person really does to justify themselves living for the vast majority of their life. They are pampered, expected to have the older people just be there to take care of them when they really should be out and trying to live out life of their own. With all the useless time and information gathering up, nothing can be filtered out in time." The mail man said and half of his face was just showing flesh and nothing else.

"None of this is making any sense. Why does what I do in my personal time affect you at all and why do you even care what I do on my own time?" Ken asked and started to walk a few steps away as if to show that he doesn't want to have this conversation at all anymore and the idea of talking with this man anymore was just starting to make him really uneasy.

"Data is always being made. Everything that is going on and everything that is happening is creating data. Every time you watch something at tv or every time you write something on a piece of paper, you are creating even more data for the world to digest and vomit out again when nobody wants it anymore. Nothing in here really matters and everything will just get worn down eventually. All data over time will be rendered useless." The mail man was turning more flesh covered and Ken was starting to tell that this thing was not really a human.

"Cut the lecture and put that off to the side. Just tell me why Sam died and tell me what had caused his death? When I find out why he died and who did it, I will just leave you alone and I will never get in your way ever again for the rest of both of our days." Ken said and then he was watching very carefully as if to see what the reaction to this thing would even be or if they do not have anything to say and that this was all just one big lie.

"You do not seem to get it. Sam's death is just another piece of data. All you have to do in order to figure out who killed Sam is just look for the man in the purple jacket. Eventually you will be able to see him and then when you find him, you can ask him why he did it?" The mail man was just totally covered with flesh and blood. And Ken still feeling as if there was something to him wanted to get some more questions out of them before he would leave for good.

"Do you really know where this guy is or are you just pulling my leg and if you know where he actually is, how about you just give me that information and then I can be able to leave you alone." Ken said and then when he had said that, the flesh and blood monster was just laughing and they seemed to be finding the struggle that Ken was having to be funnier the more that he was watching him starting to break down.

"It will be pretty easy to find him. Once you see a guy in a purple jacket, you will be able to see who he is and you will figure it out right away." The thing that was now pretty much a full on zombie started to give off a really creepy smile and then that was when Ken was thinking that he should just leave the place and just drop this question before it truly led him off stray and messed everything up even more than it was fucked up by that point in time.

"Yeah whatever, I am sure that when I see him, he will be pretty hard to miss. I am not even going to try and deal with you anymore." Ken said and then when he was starting to walk away, the door to the stadium of the soccer field locked and then he was forced to be in there for a undetermined amount of time and he had no idea what he was going to do about it. Ken turned around and he saw that this zombie thing was starting to come to him and Ken knew that he he had to do something to fight for his own survival just to leave this place, which was totally insane.

"If I have to fight to get out of here, I guess that I might as well." When Ken had made the choice that he was going to fight in order to survive, he turned around to see the zombie like thing. He started to run right down the pathway in order to reach the zombie. The faster that he was going, the more that he was picking up speed. Then soon enough, he jumped out and tackled the zombie down the the ground and then gave a couple of really good punches.

This seemed like it was going to be a really easy battle to do but then out of nowhere, the zombie like thing grew really large arms sort of out of nowhere and then threw Ken right down to the ground and then they changed their arm into a sort of sword like arm. Ken took a moment to really take in the confusion he was having, but when he was done with his obvious confusion, he jumped back up and started to get away from this thing before it could slash him up or anything.

He eventually reached a table that looked like all the drinks used for gaming would go on there. Ken went under the table and flipped the table over as a way to defend himself and give himself even just a few more minutes to sort of try and figure everything out and what the hell he was going to do. The sword arm stabbed through the table and then Ken could see it get less than a inch away from his arm. Ken gulped and he was scared that he was going to get killed at any second.

Ken stood up and then he picked up a bottle that was originally on the table and then he threw it right at the zombie. He knew that this was not really a good tool to help fight back with, but he was just wanting to use something that could give him even the tiniest bit of a one up given the situation. This bottle throw distracted the zombie for literally just a fraction of a second. But it was indeed long enough for him to get up and start running through the bleachers and find something that he could use to actually save himself considering the fact he would die in a moment.

The zombie started to run behind Ken and they were going at about his rate but to sort of make up for that and to make Ken really fucking scared was the fact that they were able to just jump past a bunch of the bleachers and not really have a second thought on it while Ken had to be smart about how he was moving around. There was just so much that Ken was trying to process and honestly the idea of dealing with a zombie killer was just too much for him to actually handle.

The more that he was running, the more that Ken was just looking down he was hoping for even the smallest chance that he could find the gun that the guy in the purple jacket, or as it was very vaguely described to him, would be there and then Ken could use that to defend himself with. He might be able to even take that thing out with this gun shall he be able to find it.

The zombie creature started to leave the bleachers and this was making Ken very confused. He was wondering why this thing was leaving him alone at the moment or if this was just a strange method to try and gain more speed on him in some strange fashion. Ken started to run to the top of the bleachers and he knew that he was not being very smart about what he was doing since there was barely any backing that he could be safe on shall he fall down and go right to his death. Which would be really terrible for his parents since he would be dead just a day after Sam and he knew that his parents would hate that.

He was starting to really hate himself for what he was doing right now. He should have just accepted Sam's death and left it alone. After all he was not even a fan of Sam, so there was no real reason for him to actually try and figure any of this out. And now here he was pretty much risking his life to figure out something that really does not matter in the long run. He was dead, and that was all there was to it. Did there really need to be a essay long answer on why he was.

Soon enough, Ken found the gun that he was looking for. Somehow there was actual ammo in it even though as Nigel would know, all the bullets were used. Ken checked and there were only two shots in it though. So Ken really had to make it count if he actually wanted to take this thing down as soon as possible. Right when he turned around, he saw the zombie thing right behind him. They took out their arm again and showed him just how sharp their arm was and Ken was thinking that there was no way in the world he could be able to escape that.

But then afterwards, Ken kicked the thing down the entire flight of bleachers and then when they were going down, Ken took his first shot and it barely hit the zombie's leg. Ken knew that he was going to have to be really smart about his second shot if he even wanted a vague chance of being able to take this thing out with the gun. But despite the fact that this was not even close to killing him, he knew that this thing would be a little bit slower as a result of the gun shot. Which showed something good might have come out of it.

Ken speedran down his way down the entire bleachers in order to get to the normal field again. He jumped down and then when he was at the field again, he saw the zombie like thing run down the entire bleachers and he was getting really close to Ken. Ken had held up his gun and then when he was holding up the gun, he was aiming the gun right at the direction if order to actually get some good shot at them and defeat the zombie.

When the zombie was getting closer and closer, Ken took the shot and the bullet took several seconds to reach them and with the course of several seconds, the zombie had actually managed to reach only a couple feet away from Ken. But then bullet seemed to go through the theoretical heart of this zombie and then they started to wonder what was going one and then they fell down to the ground. Ken dropped the gun down to the ground and then when he had done so, he saw the zombie explode.

When the battle was over,, he heard a voice call out to him that was really strange. "You seem to know what you are doing. You were at the fact of death and you somehow managed to escape it. That is a lot more impressive than I would have thought for just a normal human like you." The thing said and then Ken turned around to see this thing wearing all black and they did look like a human themselves which was odd.

"You look to be a human yourself, what the hell are you talking about?" Ken asked and then when he asked that, he started to look down and he was trying really hard to see what the facial expression of this man was. He was not really finding anything no matter how hard he tried and he was starting to think that maybe there was something to this that was all a lie and that he truly was not even seeing this guy at all.

"You may think I am a human. But as you learned from that man you just fought, that looks can be a little bit of a trick. You need to figure things out for your own. I want you to see the truth and ideals of the species we are for yourself." The man was saying and he was starting to float on over to Ken and this was when Ken was wondering if he had just been really high or something and that none of this was actually true. But when he saw the thing get closer to him, the more that he figured that this thing was actually real and that he walked into a boundary he never thought possible.

"I seriously do not even know what is going on right now with me. I am just seeing things right now. That is the only way that it makes any form of sense what the fuck is happening. I really do not have any clue what I am supposed to be do right now." Ken said and then he saw the gate to the soccer field open again. Ken started to walk on in that direction but then the strange guy called out to him.

"You are no different than any other human. Only thinking about how to survive to the next day. Only thinking about what will make you go on and move forward. You never once think about what it is like to care about other people. Many people just do nothing with their life and end up being useless or end up just trying to pass down the family line. You don't seem to get how much of a bleak world that you live in and it is all the fault of your families and the families before you." The guy said and Ken had to stop to wonder what the hell this guy was on and where they were heading with this.

"You think that you have done so much to actually help out people. Truth is that most of these things would have been able to be taken care by that person on their own. They would have never needed your help. You just thought that you were being helpful and you thought that you had actually done something good. But in reality you just benefited yourself and nobody else. All you did was benefit the way that you would be looked at by others." Ken was taking a few steps more when he had heard this since he was wanting to just get the hell out of there and figure out more of what happened to Sam.

"Nobody ever really cares about the fate of the world. They live out their lives without any second thought to the general world and are willing to fight in wars just to make sure they are the ones who win and live on. The future generations are forced to pick up the mess that the previous one makes and they think they do such a good job but then in the end they end up ruining things even worse than the generation before it and it just keeps getting worse with each generation until one day the world will be over." Ken was only a few feet away from the front gate but the lecture that was being given to him was still going on and on.

"The world owes you nothing and there is no need to even pretend that it owes you a damn thing. Nobody would ever really care about what really benefits the world or so called human rights. It is a flawed idea that many people realize is not really true and that human rights are not deserved as all of the stuff that they do is just a mess. And there is nothing that they can be able to get right besides just being able to pass on the family line because people have been told from the start of their lives that you must mate with somebody and pass down the seed." Ken was slowly down at this point because he knew that this lecture would not stop no matter what he would do.

"Nobody ever tells you how to raise that seed. There are even some people that don't even bother to pass down the scene because they are willing to commit sins inside their bedroom. All that will happen is that one day the world will eventually die off because people are too busy procreating and the result not really being able to be taught good and important lessons besides how to basically be bigger than their fathers. All seeds grow up to be disappointments that in the end will only go down as people in history books if they are lucky enough. Books that will eventually be destroyed and thrown away because in ten years, nobody will ever use them anymore and they are outdated. You do not really realize just how much in danger the world is in." The man said and then Ken was trying to figure out what really is the whole point of this.

"One day you will be on a bed looking up and closing your eyes for the final time but just before you actually do so, you start to wonder what you really did with your life and you realize all those wasted months, years, decades. You realize that you did nothing good to benefit humanity. Nobody ever lives on and no matter how much you try and how much you try to put it off, we will all die. What will you do to finally change the idea that you will be useless with no passing of your knowledge you are meant to build up?" Right before Ken left, he decided to stick around just to hear one more thing from this lunatic.

"You will probably not even do the bare minimum. You might not even try and raise the seed you create to make sure they grow to become a important plant. Hell, given your personal thoughts and what you may want to do, I would not be surprised if you never pass down a seed at all and that you just become a useless man who just ends off his family line due to passing it down at least once." The guy said and then when he had said that Ken walked out of the soccer field and slammed the door.

Ken would not ever have to deal with the problem of not passing down the seed. That was already done even though he did not know of it yet. But the problem was that Ken would never really know what to do with this and he never really even try to make up for the problems he caused and ever raise a seed until it was too late for that to become a fully bloomed plant and only three fourths of what could be. That is what the man would say if they had ever met again, which they did not. Ken knew from then forward, he would do the best to not only make his spot in history, but to pass down the family line when he was read and make things good in the long run to prove that thing wrong. All he would do is right now try to figure out what to do with Sam, but that was a good first step. But he thought he would pay a quick visit to a old friend of his from a couple of months ago.

When this was all over, Ken was heading down to Brad's house. if had to pick a time, it was probably eleven o'clock in the morning. Not too early, but it sure as hell was not really late either. Ken thought that it was late enough for him to possibly return home and have his parents not be waiting at the door and that they might be doing things of their own by this point in time. That was what he was thinking and hoping at the very least.

But as Ken was thinking about this, he was getting very near the front entrance of Brad's house and the streets had now been bustling even worse than they had been earlier now that not only was not raining anymore but there was nothing going on anymore and that the different stores were now all open. It was to show that people were now getting into their different things in that day without really giving a fuck what was happening at all in the grander scheme of things. Not only that, but every phone booth that Ken could even try to use if he had wanted to was all being used. Ken always hated how much things were happening during this part of the day and how busy everything was.

When Ken had reached the front yard of Brad's house, he took a deep breath and he was ready for this to all end much sooner than chances would probably be giving to him. "Hey kid, you really should washen up when you get home. You seriously look like you have been in a fight right now." The guy who was walking behind Ken for like ten minutes said and then he took a brief note on a note card.

"Thanks for the suggestion I suppose." Ken said and he sounded so defeated in that moment that the other guy added another note and walked away. Ken just knocked on Brad's door and when he had done so, he looked around and saw the worn down trees and the mowed lawn for a good moment. As well as the always open garage door that never really had any sort of a entrance so technically anybody could come in at any moment. Ken had considered it a couple of times since he met Brad but never really did so due to not wanting to scare Brad out of his ever loving mind.

When Brad answered the door, he took a second to think about what was going on until he pieced it all together. "Oh Ken, I heard the news of Sam. I honestly thought that this was all over. I truly thought that this guy was gone forever. What are you going to do about the man in the purple jacket?" Brad asked and Ken shook his head to show he truly had no idea at all.

"I really wish that I knew what I wanted to do. But here I am, pretty much on the verge of giving up on everything and seeing that I really have nothing else to do beside just possibly give up and admit that the fight is all over with for good and that there truly is nothing that I can do about it now. I think I might show up to the police to try and tell them what I learned. But none would take me seriously." Ken said and then he looked at Brad for any possible ideas that he could come up with.

"Ken, you know that nothing you could possibly say will make them believe you. You know as much as we don't want to admit it that in many fronts, you are going to be a one man army when it comes to this and that you are going to have to do a lot of this on your own. I really wish that none of this happened. It just shows that nothing we ever do really matters in the long run and that he might be one person who could possibly be able to live on forever despite what we may try and do." Brad said and then Ken nodded as if he was glad that at least Brad seemed to get it and that he was not totally alone on all of this at the moment.

"I am so sorry that you were ever dragged into any of this and that I was not able to keep you out of the fight. I feel like you are much too good of a man to ever be forced to deal with this and the fact that you do really sort of makes me more sad than I ever probably should be on this. I just hope that next time I try and track him down, he really be gone. That is if I even go on and try at all on this anymore or if I just give up on it for good from here on forward." Ken said and then he looked around and he was seeing a black cat just sit down and they rubbed themselves on him a little bit and it felt a little bit warm during the whole time and Ken just did not really give a shit at all anymore what was doing what.

"You didn't know any better. Then again, who really does know what to do when you are fighting with a seamlessly immortal being that will just not give up no matter what you do. Tell you what, I will drive you down to the police station and stay with you when you try to tell them what you saw. They will probably not believe you, but given how things are in this place now and all the things I seen you have to deal with, I sort of do by default." Brad said and then with that, the two of them walked down to Brad's car and inside Brad took off and Ken was used to the smell of untaken out cigarettes in this car and he really didn't fucking care about his friends smoking habits at all in the long run. It was his choice and he only started after the prom incident. Besides, it was the persons choice if they wanted to smoke or not, not Ken's choice.

When Ken and Brad were driving, Ken was starting to think about things that he was going to do and what he was going to possibly say to the police officers. "So what do you really plan to do if they do not decide to believe you, which you must admit is very possible." Brad said and then Ken just shrugged as if thinking that certainly will find a way no matter what may happen.

"Just because they may not want to believe me at the moment, doesn't mean that I won't at least try and prove them wrong. I need to try at the very least. I may not like my brother. But I need to try and serve him justice." Ken said and then Brad took out a cigarette and he started to smoke it as he was thinking about what Ken was saying to him and thinking if he could add anything.

"I admit I do admire how determined you are to do the right thing even when things are most likely to never turn out that way at all. Always makes me admire the way that a person can look at life." Brad said as they were finally pulling up to the police station for Ken to try and give the information.

Once inside of the police station, Ken was looking around and seeing people all over the place running in and out and he saw a couple of officers grabbing boxes that must have been used for evidence and putting them away as if to get them stored away for good and for the officers to never have to worry about them ever again. They seemed to not really give a shit what was going on in the life of Ken and Brad. "Do you think that maybe they are just simply too busy to look into what happened and that even if they had wanted to help out, that maybe they just could not?"

"Well, I still do want to give this a try and see if maybe I can be able to make any changes to their opinions of this." Ken said and then they walked into one of the many offices where once inside, Ken and Brad sat down despite the officer not giving them any real permission to do so. He was a fatter guy, probably closer to two hundred sixty pounds. He was eating a donut and he was reading a couple of case files. He was the general cop you would see in a movie.

"There always seem to be something you want to tell me. What is it this time and please keep it quick this time before I have to write up yet again another report with you. Honestly, I have no idea how your father is such a good man at his job when you can't behave for more than twenty minutes." The cop said and then Ken decided not even bother saying anything to that since he was just being an ass.

"Look, I think I may have something that can prove the fact that somebody murdered my brother and that it was not a suicide at all." Ken said and then when he said that, the police officer rolled his eyes as if he was not seriously believing that he was hearing shit like this again and that he was having to deal with more insane stuff with Ken again. Which was something he was seriously tired off in the truth.

"Look Ken, I know that you don't and that you are just a big load of bull and that you are giving me a bunch of bullshit. Please just keep it away from me. I don't want to deal with this. Just go home and come to me with real evidence that is not just a bunch of words." The officer said and then Ken stood up and was ready to rant when Brad put his hand to Ken's arm as if warning him to spare the possible risk of further trouble. Ken then just flipped off the police officer and left the place to show that he was not going to deal with this jackass anymore and then Ken left the police station with one police officer dressed in a black coat and blue shirt and yellow tie looked over and thought that maybe Ken had some merit. So he decided he would follow Ken and maybe see what he had to say.

It was then when Ken decided he truly needed to go home and that it was time for him to give this up and not beat the dead horse anymore than he had already been doing by this point in time. He felt like his parents would already be pissed off with him being gone this long and he wanted to limit the rant as much as he possibly could for his own sake.

It was probably around 12 in the afternoon, and about two thirds of the way home, he saw that there was an alleyway. He had never even noticed that this alleyway was there before in his life. Not knowing why he even cared now of all times, he started to walk down the alleyway. He was staring at the sky and as he was doing so, he had started to feel like there was something that was going to happen at any fucking moment. But he stopped thinking about that until he got to about half way down the alleyway. Then once he was there, he had found a man in a purple jacket.

"No way. Not you again." Ken said and he was on the verge of freaking on in a sort of PTSD style. The man in the purple jacket raised his hands and walked quietly a couple of steps. Ken had figured out that this guy was probably the one who had killed Sam pretty much right away. The guy started to make a couple of noises and Ken was not even caring at all.

"Well, since it seems that you already know who I am, I won't really worry about trying to make us trying to get to know each other again. But with that out of the way, I think that we need to talk about something else." The man with the purple jacket said and then Ken turned around and he was already starting to think about Sam a little bit.

"Wait a second, did you kill my brother? Were you the one that had killed my fucking brother?" Ken asked and then he was on the verge of picking a fight with this asshole. He didn't even say yes and Ken already knew that he was the one who had done it. Then the guy in the purple jacket raised his right index finger for a short second.

"I will not confirm or deny that I was the one who had done it. I will say though that I know everything about it. But that's not the thing that I had wanted to speak about. The thing I wanted to talk with you about was the fact that I have something even bigger and better for you." After he said that he turned around to be right behind Ken. Then he did something that sounded like popping his fingers. "I think you would like what I am going to show you."

"What are you doing?" Ken asked and then the guy in the purple jacket just snapped his finger. After he snapped his finger, there was a giant blue shape that was starting to be made. A gate had been created and then Ken shook his head. The guy in the purple jacket had explained that there was going to be a great adventure that Ken would be able to go on and that there was something that he would be able to appreciate.

"I know that you are not a very open person. But I think that this will change your ideas." The guy with the purple jacket pushed Ken right into that blue gate. Then afterwards, the gate closed and the guy in the purple jacket smiled as the gate closed. Then he started to walk away and then this was the end of the start to their great rivalry. No matter how much time had passed, Ken would never be able to forget this moment in his life. But then again, there was no real way that he could.

That was the last moment in life in which Ken had really any sort of childhood innocence. It was pretty much from this moment forward that Ken was forced to into adulthood and lost all of that carefree ness that he ever had and he was pretty much turning into that type of person that many people would grow to love or grow to hate.

Chapter Text

Chapter 3: The Date (1986)

It all started in late July of the year 1986 at Wayside Minnesota. What had been happening that night was a date between two high school students. The name of the guy who was getting the date with a girl was Joe. Joe was 17 and thought of himself to be very socially awkward. The girl's name was Aurora and she was in the same grade as Joe. The two of them were heading to their senior year soon and they were both getting ready for the fact that they were going to be leaving school in a year. They both had important choices ahead of them for what to do with their lives..

Joe was trying to not be so worried about this date that night. The main reason he was so scared of it was because he had never gone on a single date in his life and he was worried that he was going to fail miserably. No, he wasn't just a little bit worried. He was fully terrified that this would fail that he was going to never be able to be on a date ever again for the rest of his life.

His older brother was helping him get ready for the date. His older brother was a guy named Jim. He was much older than Joe. Joe was seventeen while Jim was thirty six, the younger end of middle aged at the time. He was getting used to the fact that he was starting middle aged, but in the end, he was not at all that worried about it. He was more worried about being really old than anything else. But he still had like three or so decades before he could start being considered old. Once he was sixty five, he was old in his eyes regardless of what people will try to tell him.

"Hey Jim, do you have any sort of advice on what I should do during the date? I have no idea what the hell to do." Joe was saying as Jim stopped for a second. He was about to head out of that room when Joe had asked him that question and then he turned around to see Joe. Jim thought about what could best suit Joe or just in general regardless of the fact if he were talking to Joe or if he were talking to a different person entirely.

"Well, one piece of advice that I will always give somebody is that they should not be messy about the way that they eat. If they are messy about the way that they eat, then they might as well not even try to go on a date at all since nobody wants to see something like that. And when I say nobody, I truly do mean nobody." Jim said and then Joe thought about how he could so called not eat messy. Just make sure that no food gets on his shirt was one way that he could do that he assumed.

"Is there any piece of advice that you would want to give to me specifically that you think will be able to benefit me more than anybody else? I feel like that is what is really going to save me during this whole date." Joe said and then Jim thought about it. He touched his glasses for a moment in the exact way that Joe had done it. Then he nodded and decided that he had something that he would be able to give to Joe as advice. Something that as Joe said, he specifically could improve on.

"Well, just don't be worried about having a conversation. When you go on to talk with her, just don't worry about what is going on. Just speak to her and carry the conversation like how you would on a normal situation. And don't try and act all like you don't know what you are saying. Just pretend like you know what you are talking about, even if you actually don't know what is going on." Jim said and Joe decided that maybe this was a good piece of advice and that maybe he should follow it.

"I think that things will be easier for me once I am at the date more. I think that if I talk to her for like an hour or so, then I will be involved in the conversation enough to actually talk with her for more than a couple of sentences at a time before there is a moment of strange silence." Joe decided as he realized that Jim was not really sure what Joe really knows he was saying at all.

"Well, just take my word for it and take it easy. Just like I said, act like this is a normal conversation. Which it really is. Just at a place with you buying the food." Jim said and and then Joe looked at the time. He had decided that he was ready to go on this date now. Well, he wasn't really ready. But he had to since he was getting close to the time anyways. So he stood up and thanked Jim for the conversation and then the two shook their hands. Joe then left the room.

"I hope that this goes well. Tell me how the date went when the date is over. I would be very interested to see how it goes. Well, hear I guess." Jim said and then Joe had left the house entirely. Joe was going to have to remember that. He had doubted that he would remember this in a few hours from now. But then again, Jim can always just remind him and then once he was reminded on that, then he could give Jim his answer. It was just that simple in reality, and there wasn't anything rocket science like to that. Joe got in the car and started to drive away to Aurora's house.

Soon enough, Joe had reached Aurora's house after about ten minutes or so of driving. As he was driving there, he was thinking about the advice that Jim was giving him as well as other things that he had heard that he could do for his date. From a bunch of different resources and all that. He knew that he needed to take it seriously, but he couldn't.

Aurora had left the house and then she saw Joe sitting there in the drivers seat. She smiled and then ran on over to the car and then got right inside of it. She laughed when she saw Joe sort of looking at her as if he were unsure of what to make of her. "So Joe, where are we going to go?" Joe laughed as if he had realized that the place he was going to was a terrible idea.

"Well, I am going to take you to dinner. There is this diner that I heard about once or twice. I thought that I would try it out and see if it is any good." Joe said and then as soon as he said that he felt like he was doing something extremely stupid by not trying it before he sent her there. As if he should have seen if the food was any good before he actually took her there. Aurora seemed to not really consider it as she patted his leg and then Joe started the car and he started to drive.

"Well you know, my brother and I had talked for a little bit and he was just giving me some points and tips for this date. I have never been on a date before, so I have no idea how to do it all. I don't think that it really matters all that much if I tell you the truth on that. I am just sort of hoping that this place is actually as good as I think it is and that I don't fuck up at all in this." Joe was now going on a slight ramble and Aurora had sort of enjoyed hearing him sound stupid. Not because she was a terrible person and wanted to see him fuck up. But there was something that was a little cute about him not knowing what he is doing.

"Joe, I wouldn't really worry about it all that much. Just take me there and then we will see just how good you are at this. Give it a chance." Aurora said and then Joe decided to remain silent. He didn't think that there was anything else that he could say that could change Aurora's mind. As he was driving, he was thinking about how he could be able to continue this conversation and see how the two of them could expand on their knowledge that they both had of each other. "Well, how about we talk a little bit about what we each plan on doing once we leave high school." Aurora decided to continue the conversation after a minute or two, and they were now half way or so of the way to the dinner. "I think that when I grow up, I feel like going into civil engineering. I know that sounds a little out there to most people, but I like that field."

"Well, as least you have a goal. I don't really even have one. And that is something that I know is a really big problem. The fact that I still have not come up with a single idea on what I want to do in my life shows that I am going into adulthood as a total idiot. That is all that there is to it." Joe said and then when he finished his sentence, he opened the car door since he had finally parked in the parking lot of the diner. "Let's get the hell out of here and get into that diner."

Aurora agreed and then the two of them left the car and went right into the diner. Once they were in the diner, there was a bunch of booths open and Joe had waited for a second. That was when he had realized that they didn't need to make any sort of reservations. They could just walk right to one of them. Aurora and Joe reached the third seat booth and Joe took the second seat and Aurora took the first seat. The waiter came along and gave them some menus.

"You know, I think that you will find something soon enough. I had no idea what I wanted to do until last year. When I was getting a job interview at that career fair. Looking at the jobs, I thought that the one that got to me the most was actually the idea of civil engineering. So here you go, that is my reasoning to do it." Aurora explained and Joe put his hand to his lips for a second before he continued the conversation.

"I think that I had ideas on what I wanted to do in my life. Then every time that I came up with ideas on what to do, I would give up on them and then decide to try and reach for something else. I think that every single school year, I have literally changed my ideas on what I had wanted to do." Joe said and then he started to list off some of the ideas that he had.

"Like in freshmen year, I wanted to be a actor. Then I wanted to be a police officer sophomore year. Last year I wanted to be a writer for a little bit. Now this year I have no idea what the fuck I want to do." Joe said as he kept switching every three words or so between the menu as well as the girl that he was on the date with. Then when the waiter came along she asked them if they wanted anything.

"I want a cheeseburger and a strawberry milkshake." Joe said and then Aurora had ordered to get a double cheeseburger as well as a vanilla milkshake. She got a medium while Joe got a large. So in the end, the burger sizes and shake sizes had sort of evened out. Now the waiter just got the menus and got ready to make some of the food. Joe and then Aurora turned to each other again so that way they can finally focus on the conversation again.

"Seems like we both like to have easy food. Nothing that takes too long to cook." Joe said and then he laughed a little bit. He took his glasses off and this had shocked Aurora, but she decided to remain silent. "But anyways, about life after high school. Since that was the subject we were talking about. I think that when I graduate high school, I might go on and try to get a community college degree. Then afterwards, I will go on to a full on university with all of my transferred credits."

"Yeah, I am going to go right into the full on university. I am not going to fuck around with just a community college. There is literally no reason for me to after all. Being in the next place of my life I will feel like does require me going to a university instead of just being in a community place. But since you have no idea what you want to do in life, I feel like maybe it would be best for you to continue on staying here. You know, being in this place for a couple more years to start to get yourself more into what you feel like you will want." Aurora said and then she put her hand on Joe's.

"I just hope that I have made the right choice at the end of the day. I just have a feeling that this is something that I will regret doing in the end of it all. I have a feeling that there will be a part of me that wishes I either never gone on to college as well as maybe just going on to a university instead. I have a feeling that in the end, I feel like that I am wasting what I have in life that every body has that is needed. And that is time." Joe said as he thought on the concept of time. The concept of time was something that Joe took really took very seriously.

"Well, if you feel like time is the most important thing in your life, then maybe you should try to find a job in life as soon as possible. But in reality, every body wastes a lot of time. Or what would be considered a waste by a lot of people. I think that in the end, wasting time is the thing that will get at people the most." Aurora mostly agreed with Joe, but she still thought that Joe was a bit over worried about this. There was nothing about time that really worried Aurora too much. Well, aside from a movie that she hated or a class that she hated and then she would feel like she wasted all of those hours that are added up in the end.

"I don't even know what fucking job I would go on and get. I just don't know. I like to go out and do work. But I don't know if I could do some work forever and full time the way that people do that. I hate this so much. I hate not knowing what to do and I just hate it when everybody acts like I have no life and I try to argue with them but I know that deep down, they truly are right." Joe said and then when Joe had said that, he punched the table a little bit. But then he realized he was making a scene, and calmed down by about fifty percent afterwards.

"I think that once you go on and get a job, things will start to go easier. You will start to feel a little sad that you never were able to find a job sooner and you will feel like you should have found one sooner rather than later. That was what I had felt when I started to look for a job. I never have gotten one fully, but I got a couple of part time ones. Such as me getting a job at the aquatic center a little bit since I thought that this job would have worked. That had worked for about two or so months before I decided that I had to work more on my job than anything else. Which was a little sad for me to admit, but I had to sort of make peace with that whole fact." Aurora said and then when she said that, she put her hands behind her head and then Joe considered that when she had been saying that.

"I think that I just need to find one first. I think that this is something that we can both agree on." Joe said and then when he had said that the waiter came along and then put the food at the plate in order to let them have some food and all that. "Thank you for the food." Joe said and then the waiter walked away. Joe and Aurora looked at each other and smiled for the fraction of a second.

"So what is your family like. Sorry for changing the subject. But I just don't really want to talk about college or jobs anymore. I think that I will start to actually go angry when I think about it more." Joe said and then Aurora thought about it. She was not really even sure if she wanted to talk about family. But she decided to let Joe have what he had wanted.

"Well, my father and I have been able to get along pretty well the last few years. He and I have been able to talk a lot on my past and everything. We have been able to go and examine everything and see what I really want in life. In fact, he is somebody who has been able to give me a lot of advice when I needed it on what I could do. Especially when I needed the advice and he was willing to go on and give me it when I ask him for it." Aurora said and Joe nodded. She seemed to be getting along with him more than Joe had been able to.

"I am sort of the same way. My father and I have been getting along better at least than how we had been able to back like even five years ago. Five years ago, he was the most abusive person who would just do everything to make sure that I will not get anything that I want no matter how badly I wanted it. But in the last four or five months, it seems like he is trying to grow up a little bit. At one point, he hit me. But now it seems like he is trying to change that. He asked me what I would do and he also helped me get ready with this date for you. He seems to be getting more of a interest in what is going on in my life and for that I have to be a little bit thankful and all that. Even if it turns out to chance in the end, I still have to feel glad over what I am starting to finally get now." Joe said and then he took the first bite of his meal and then Aurora had a little bit of the shake that she had ordered.

"Well, that is good. At least he is making progress. Everybody has to make progress when they grow up and become better people. Just be glad that he is willing to help you at all. Or at the very least is willing to talk to you now. Be glad that he is not the way that he was five months ago." Aurora said and Joe had considered that to be a valid way of looking at it all.

The two had talked a little bit more on the subject of parents. Joe admitted that he only had his father as a parent and that he had no idea what the hell was going on with his mother. But he had not known of her existence for like the last several years. He thought that she might be dead, but he was not sure. Aurora had talked about hoer her mother was such a great mom. She worked a lot and by her working a lot, she had been able to provide a ton of money for the sake of the family. She always loved how her mother had been able to do nothing besides work on her job and her family and then get money for the family. It had shown Aurora that she really did care. They also talked about a couple of other things over the course of a couple of hours.

"I think that having siblings is one of the strangest things that a person could have. I don't think it is exactly a bad thing. But I do think that it does change your social perception on so many things that having at least one sibling makes you totally different than if you were a only child." Joe said and then Aurora wondered what Joe meant by that.

"Well, I don't have any siblings right now. I don't really know what makes my social perception of life any different than you. But I don't think that you are lying to me. So I am curious on what you are talking about. So would you be willing to explain to me?" Aurora said and then when she said that, Joe thought on something that she would have to admit to being true.

"Well, when you have a sibling with you, there is always a feeling of competition that you have with them. This feeling of competition is something that just drives you into every single thing that you do. I always try to out perform Jim, and while he always wins, I know that this can be not only motivation to make me better. But then beyond that, I realize that you can still respect your siblings even if you want to be better than them." Joe said and then Aurora wondered what type of competitions that Joe had during his life with Jim.

"Well, I always tried to show Jim that I can do certain things. Such as you know, being a better boyfriend to a girl than him. He never really had a strong girlfriend in his life. He always ended up breaking up with them. The longest girlfriend that he had was two years. The shortest was one that lasted a messily nine days. Which is just insane. Although Jim has already won the earliest to virginity thing. And I know that this is a given since he is so much older than me. But I mean like the age that we lose it in. Since Jim was sixteen when he lost it, and I am already seventeen and I still am one." Joe admitted as he always wondered what it would be like to go on and have sex for the first time.

"Don't worry about it. I'm still one after all. I never really been all that interested in having it. However, that being said, if the chances coming up and I get to have sex with a guy, then I will go on and have it. That is just how simple it is really." Aurora confessed and Joe felt so much better knowing that she was one to. So it wasn't like he was a complete novice and that maybe he did stand a chance after all.

"Well, I have wanted to have it for a long time. But I have never been able to get a girl to like me at all. I have gotten close to asking girls out but then they always turned me down every fucking time. You are the first girl that I have ever asked out that accepted me. I wonder if you ever been on any dates with any guys." Joe said and he continued eating since he was at pretty much the ending of his meal.

"I think that I have dated a couple of guys before. But I never had anything that lasted more than like five or so months. I just always got turned away from him near the end for whatever reason and I break up with him. I'm always the one who breaks up with him, not the only way around. I just date him and let him go when I am ready." Aurora said in a humor way since she was trying to make a joke around it but Joe thought about that for a moment.

"Well, we have been here for a while." Joe said and looked at the time on his watch. He couldn't believe that they put a steak knife in the middle of the burger. That was still pissing him off and it had already been like an hour since that shot happened. "I don't want the people in the diner have to kick us out due to time, so I think that we better start heading out." Joe said and then he stood up and held his hand out. Aurora grabbed his hand and then they headed out of the diner.

"Did you enjoy the date at all?" Joe asked and he was hoping that Aurora would say yes. Joe got inside of the car and then Aurora got inside of it as well. That was when Joe started the car and then they began to ride off. Aurora pit her seat belt on before she finally decided that maybe she needed to answer him finally.

"I think that it was probably the best date I have had in a little while. Although I still hated how bad that diner food was." Aurora said and then Joe snapped his fingers. He was so glad that she had beaten him to it. He thought that the food in the diner honestly sucked quite a bit, but he didn't want to say it. But since she was the one that had said it, he would be able to say it and talk about how terrible it was.

"I don't even get why that was so damn expensive. It just made no fucking sense to me. I thought that it would have been a easy pay place to go to. After all, it was supposed to be a fifties diner, and I thought that as a result of it being a fifties diner, it would have been cheap. Well, at least compared to other places I go to. I have been to modern places that were cheaper than that place." Joe was saying and then as he was saying that, Aurora was laughing as she was listening to him rant. Not because she thought the rant was stupid, but he was just so funny when he was angry.

"Well, have you been to a restaurant or a fast food place before with somebody else?" Aurora asked and she wasn't even asking him to try and prove a point or anything, but she was just curious to see what he had to say. If he did actually have any sort of experience on that sort of stuff. Joe laughed at hear as if what she had asked him was a great piece of comedy.

"No, I haven't gone to any of that stuff with anybody else on a date. I have done it a couple of times with somebody else with some so called friends that I was trying to make at the time. However, I have gone several times by myself throughout my high school years. Well, through out my high school years up until this point." Joe said and then when he answered her question, Aurora decided that maybe Joe needed some more experience if he wanted to actually know what he was talking about. But Joe waited for her to say that, but she actually didn't. Which made Joe feel like she didn't want to argue with him, if she even was trying to in the first place.

"Yeah, I guess I shouldn't be asking you when I haven't been all that much better on. Even when I would go on a date with a guy, I would let him pay for everything. I never had to deal with the paying of a date or anything. So I guess that I shouldn't be trying to act like I am such a expert on this subject when if anything, I am less of an expert on this than you. At least you actually paid for a date now." Aurora said and then she laughed and when she had laughed, Joe felt like he did some good and he laughed along with her.

"So what are you going to tell your parents about this date? Do you think you will tell them if it was a success or a failure?" Joe asked and he felt like he really needed to know if he was considered a success or not. That is, if she was telling the truth with her answer and all that.

"I think that I will tell them that it was a better success than I thought that it would have been. No offense, but when I heard you ask me on a date, I thought that you were going to be a mess. But I knew that I needed to give you a chance. Just like how my father told me to do when somebody asked me on a date on my freshmen year. Then when I thought on that, I waited for you and seeing how you talk and when you sort of put your sort of nerd like personality aside, then you can get a good conversation across." Aurora answered and the more that he heard her answer, he was starting to have mixed responses on what she said. He didn't feel defeated, but he didn't feel like he was a great player or anything like that after all.

"But would you think that you would ever want to go on a date with me again? Please just say yes or no. I want you to be honest with me." Joe said and then when Aurora heard him ask her that question, she knew that she had to make a hard choice. But she wasn't really sure if she knew what Joe would think either way.

"I think that I might like to do it again. I guess that I would say yes. But I don't know if I would want to go to a dinner like that again." Aurora said and then when Aurora had said that, Joe laughed. He wasn't even sure why he was laughing, but that was all that he could do by that point. "But now we will talk about you. What will you tell your parents."

"I will tell them that the dinner fucking sucked but that the conversation and what we had talked about was good. If they ask me what we talked about, I will start off and talk about one or two things. Then when we talk about one or two things, or when I say that in my answer, I will go more in detail if I feel the need to. If they ask for more, then I will tell them more until they either don't want to hear it anymore or until I don't even have anything else to tell them." Joe said and then he looked over at the sky. He realized that he was only a couple of blocks away from the house.

"Do you think that your parents will like your answer? Or at least your father I guess. I also wonder what your brother will also think about that." Aurora sort of pondered out loud and then Joe decided that he didn't really want to talk about this anymore. It was just something that he didn't even want to think about anymore. He just wanted to go home and relax and have a nice night and move on with his life the next day. Then pretty much pretend like his life was just the same that it always was.

"So Joe, do you think that you will be ready for high school? Well, I mean our last year of high school? Yeah, if you were not ready for high school, then you would be kind of screwed by this point in time." Aurora said and then that was her turn to laugh. Joe then thought about it for a little bit longer.

"I guess that I will be as ready as I can on this. I don't think that you will truly ever will be totally ready for school no matter what year you are in. That is what I am sort of thinking at the very least. So I will not really worry about it all that much at all." Joe said and then he stared even more at the lights of the street. That was when Aurora had tried to think of how she could continue this conversation. If she even could at this point. Maybe it was just dead at this point.

Thankfully for her at least, she would not have to really try all that hard. Joe had pulled up at her yard about forty seconds after Joe had finished his reply. Once Joe had pulled up at yard, he looked at Aurora once again. "Aurora, I really enjoyed this date. I don't know if you enjoyed it as much as I did. But I hoped that you at least did enjoy it a little bit. That diner really didn't ruin it as much for me as I may try and make it out to sound."

"Well Joe, I will be interested to try it again. But I don't think that I will do it soon. I need to take a couple of days to really think about what this date was and if I actually did enjoy it or not. I want to give it some hindsight before I make a true decision." Aurora said and then she held her hand out. Then Joe shook it and once she had shook his hand, the two of them stared at each other. Then Aurora left the car and Joe yelled good night at her. She yelled good night at him back and then she closed the door.

Joe waited until she had got inside of her house. Once the door was closed, he waited another two seconds and then Joe started to drive off. As he drove off, he was thinking really hard about what she had said and how she needed some time to think about that. This was when Joe started to feel like maybe she didn't really enjoy it as much as she had said she did. Or maybe if she enjoyed it even more, which would be a true victory for Joe.

The more that Joe was driving, the more that Joe was thinking about all of this. After about five or ten minutes, the more that Joe was not even thinking all that much about getting home in time. After all, he was like seventeen. He assumed that he was old enough to stay out all night one night. Even if Joe got in trouble over it, he could just say that he lost track of time. Which that part was true. But then after about forty minutes of him driving around for no real reason, he found a rest stop. This was when Joe decided that he was beyond tired. So he drove on over to it and then he parked the car. Then he turned the car off and closed his eyes. For the first and last night of his life, Joe slept in the drivers seat of a car. And he was glad that he didn't get like murdered or anything like that.

When Joe was asleep, he was having a really strange dream about something in the past and about a guy he only knew when he was a younger guy and living in the apartment with several other people. This dream seemed out of nowhere then, but as time went on, Joe was realizing he was sort of seeing the origin story of a man who would grow up to be one of his best friends in the later years of his life.

Chapter Text

Chapter 4: The Skating Life

The dream had all started and right when it started, there was a really generic couple of words to show what the time was as if to show Joe just when this was taking place to help him figure out what the hell was going on a little bit better. It was saying 'May 1986' which mean that it would have been two to three months prior and therefore was a little bit recent, but also long enough ago to show that maybe things are not always the same anymore at the same time.

The dream just showed a couple of kids walking out of their school after the school day was over. The three of them seemed to be enjoying their conversation decently well. Or as well as one could be able to enjoy a conversation when you had just left school and you wanted to just get your minds off of the rigors of school and all of that stuff. One of them had black hair and he was wearing a red shirt and he had blue pants, as if he wanted to be dressing up as a normal boy. Nothing that really seemed all that strange to Joe.

Then as this was going on, there was the guy, a man of slightly darker skin walking right next to him and they seemed to be talking. By slightly darker skin it was not meaning like a different race, just more tan in a way. He had a bunch of frizzy hair and he seemed like he was trying way too hard to be like some form of soccer star or something like that. Joe did not really pay much attention to this guy, but he did sort of like the youth and ambition that he obviously had.

The girl that was with them had purple hair, which was something really strange for Joe to try and handle seeing. But it was not all that big of a deal to be totally honest. Maybe she just dyed it or something like that. This was the story that he was telling himself. After all it just did feel like the story that was the most realistic for him to think up of at that time. He thought that maybe those three were going to have some sort of strange love triangle lol.

"I can't wait until it is summer. I am so tired of all of these gross and old papers gathering up in my back pack. I want something else to do for once." The tan one was saying and Joe can tell that he had the most stuff on him and therefore was probably the least good student when he saw that his back pack was really fucking filled up. Joe was looking to see the back packs of the others and the girls was less heavy than tan boy, but still relatively heavy while black haired boy had the least heavy load in his back pack.

"T.K., how is it that you are able to do all of this school work so well? I think that it is like a fucking talent that you have that keeps it so that you are able to be as fast of a learner as you are. You seem sort of like a genius. I mean, already in Geometry and we are just in sixth grade. Like god damn." The tan guy was saying as if to really sort of capture just how impressed he was with this whole thing, and he seriously wanted some advice from T.K. regarding the matter.

"I just sort of set aside ninety minutes or so every night before I go to bed on nothing besides school. The other several hours of the day I just have some fun like the normal kid our age, but on the last ninety minutes or so before bed when I am trying to find at least something to do, I just sit down and do as much work in school as I can and I just stay on top of all the work and that is how I am able to make things work out so well honestly. Just being realistic with my time and my schedule." T.K. said and then after he had said that, the other two just rolled their eyes as if thinking he was like a fucking nerd here.

"Well, I am not doing anything like that. Thanks for trying and pretend like we are even a tenth as crazy as you are when it comes to school." The guy who was having a little bit of a tan said, and T.K. would later call him Davis, which made it easy to remember his name as that was a easy to remember name honestly. Like Davis would one of the easiest names that you can find on a general basis when walking around the city.

"I don't know Davis, maybe T.K. does have a good idea going here. After all, he is doing good in school. Lord knows you need to do better in school. No offense, but you and I both know that this is the truth." The girl with the purple hair said and then Davis was trying way too hard not trying to think that she was doing her best to make him try and become the way she wanted him to be, but that was something that maybe was not really all that big of a deal.

"Well Yolei, I think that if you or Davis want my help here, then I can help you guys out at any point. I would never turn down one of my friends on the idea of helping the, So just if you want something, just come to me and I will see what I can do to help you out there." T.K. said and then that was when he had felt like he needed to get something going on his agenda of that day. Davis was busy that day, so maybe there was nothing he can do there, but maybe he could eventually find something with Yolei.

"I need to be heading out. See you two later. Are you still around to hang out on Friday like usual?" Davis said and then as he was starting to head out, T.K. yelled that he was and then that was just how they had been able to make some simple plans. Nothing really too much to it, just them both saying that they wanted to do something and them pretty much just agreeing to do that. They agreed to meet up at the arcade.

After T.K. and Yolei decided that they would start to go on and just hang out for a little bit on their own, this was when Yolei was just sort of talking about some things that she thought were pretty cool. "Have you seen some of the skaters around town lately? I saw them playing around a couple of days ago when my older brother was just screwing around with his friends. When his friends showed up, they were talking about how they were getting into skating and all that stuff. I decided to watch their skating and when I saw their skating, I realized just how cool it actually was.

"I have heard about it. But I have never tried anything of it before. Maybe I should start and try it out soon enough. I think that maybe this would be pretty interesting to do." T.K. was saying and after he told Yolei that, she smiled and then she thought that maybe they could do that for their next hang out session that day. She mentioned that she knew where the skating shop was due to the fact that when she was hanging out with her brother, they had stopped by the skating shop for a moment and she saw a bunch of boards that they could actually stay at.

"Well, I think we should try this out. Just follow me to the store and I think the two of us could get a board going for you." Yolei was saying and then after she had said that, T.K. and her started to head off in that direction and as they were heading off in that direction, Yolei was just talking about how much fun it was to see the different styles of boarding and stuff. "Just watching all of their moves were really impressive, I never thought that I would actually see them pulling off some of the most impressive moves in history. I wonder how long he has been doing this to be even half as impressive as he had been able to perform that day." Yolei said and then T.K. was wondering if maybe he could actually be all that great at it and he was thinking that maybe he could take from her and her brother can give him a lesson or two on how to do a good job skating.

"I have heard about skating before. Matt had talked about it once or twice. But he truly did not really seem too highly about the whole thing. I guess that maybe Matt and I are allowed to view differently on some things after all." T.K. told Yolei and then Joe would later learn that that Matt was the older brother of T.K., and that they were both going to be working with him a shit ton coming up later.

"Your brother always seems to look at things very negatively. No offense to you when I am saying that, but he never seems to be looking at things on the positive end. I feel like he just in general does not really feel too highly of the world. Just strange how even you have a better outlook on life than he does and you have had your share of talking crap about the world and stuff." Yolei decided that she would probably let T.K. go on this whole thing with Matt and she just wanted to see him start his skating life.

So with that, Yolei and T.K. eventually reached the front of the skating store. The two of them walked right inside of the room and they were totally ready to go on and start to get something with the skateboard. T.K. was ready to start skating since he thought that the skating was going to be the best part about this whole thing. He thought that maybe he could get some advice from Yolei's brother on how to be a good skater and then that would be a good hobby to pick up.

The owner of this store walked up to T.K. and Yolei and after they had done so, they were looking at the two of them to try and figure out which once they wanted to help out. Well not really a whole want to help out as much as really sort of needed to help out since they was most likely no fucking way that a young lady like Yolei would actually want to go around and do stuff like skating. So it was probably out of default going to be T.K. who was going to ask for some help on this whole thing.

"I think that you should be looking in this section of the store to find a skateboard that will fit with you. Fitting is the first thing that really matters when you are trying to find something that will be good for your skating needs." The owner of this store had said as he led T.K. on over to the right hand corner of the store and there were like a good nine or ten boards that were open for T.K. to go on and choose from. T.K. now was looking at the boards and he was wondering if he actually could do even a hint of a good job on the whole skating thing even with a good board.

"I think I want this one." T.K. said after he pointed at a blue board. He saw that this one seemed to be the normal size of something that he would use. The owner of the store nodded and then pulled the board off of the rack and then let T.K. go around and do a short ride on this to see if he was actually going to do what he had needed to do. So when the board was handed to him, T.K. just placed the board on the ground and he was ready to go and try the whole thing out.

After T.K. had placed the board on the ground, he started to ride the board very slowly. He was not really wanting to get himself into any damage or anything. He was just riding his foot across the board and when he was doing this, the guy who owned the store was watching and then Yolei was excited to see that T.K. was going to probably start going around and skating. After doing this for like a minute or so, T.K. got off of the board and then afterwards he walked to the owner of the store.

"I will take it." T.K. said and then after he said this, he gave the guy who owned the store like ten dollars which was two more than was needed for the store. Afterwards, he was given a helmet for free to help him be a little bit safe for skating. Then with that, T.K. and Yolei walked out of the store and they were getting ready to get a little bit of skating going on and seeing if they actually could get more in the hang of this whole thing than Yolei looked over at T.K.

"I think that you should start riding along already. I think that you would really enjoy the riding here. I don't want you to put the money to waste." Yolei said and then T.K. looked over at her and then he shrugged. There was no real reason why he shouldn't do this. So he decided that he would start to do the riding. So he got on the ground with the board and then he started to do the riding and then as he did the riding, the hill was really fast to go down and Yolei was slowly running behind him so that way at the very least they would be in the same area of the block.

As T.K. was riding down the hill, he was just throbbing all over the place trying to just get himself not tripping. But when he was not trying to trip, he was just on the verge of screaming the whole time, but there was a little bit of honor to him, or what he was thinking was honor and then he was not screaming this whole time. But this whole thing was just a little bit of a silly moment more than anything else. Yolei had did pretty good considering the fact that she was just running to keep up with him the whole time.

Soon enough, T.K. had reached what had looked like a giant entrance to a house. This was when T.K. thought that maybe he could go inside since the door was wide open. But before he went inside the building, he was thinking that this was a terrible idea and that he was just needing to get the hell out of there as soon as possible. He was falling down and as he fell down, the board went right inside of the house and then he was right on the yard of the house. That was when Yolei showed up to see the situation that T.K. was in now.

"T.K., are you going to try and get your board or are you going to just it all alone and give up on the idea of skating?" Yolei asked and then when she had asked that, T.K. looked over and then he was shaking his head and then when he was shaking his head, the more that Yolei was thinking that T.K. had a lot of balls for a young man of his age.

"I used ten dollars on this. I hate the very idea of wasting my money, so I am going to get the board and then come back here. I know that maybe this is not the smartest thing to do, but I just do not want to waste anything so this is going to be what I will do." T.K. said and then after he had said that, Yolei just stood there as she watched T.K. enter the house to get the skateboard. He was going to grab the board, and then once he was done, he was going to go on and head right out of the place and then he would go home and that would be a good idea.

So when T.K. was inside of the house, he saw the board right away and then he grabbed the board. That was not really the hard part that was going to fuck everything up. But then soon enough, he saw that there was a guy smoking in the house and he seemed to be having some fun while he was just sort of giving zero fucks in the whole thing. Before he went back out to see Yolei once again, T.K. thought that maybe for a second he could walk inside the room and see what exactly he was actually smoking.

T.K. walked inside of the room and after he had walked inside of the room, he saw that the guy was stopping the moment that he saw T.K. out of the corner of his eye. When he saw T.K., he stood up and then he placed the cigarette on his glass plate and then he started to walk towards T.K. with his board. "Why are you inside of this house? Do you not know that you should not be allowed to go inside of other peoples properties?"

"Look here, I lost my skateboard and then it skated inside of here and after it skated in here, I wanted to grab it and then I got it and now I am heading out. I won't mess around here anymore, and then I will never tell anybody else what you are doing here." T.K. was telling the truth and then he was about to head out of the house when the guy managed to grab the board out of T.K.'s hand but despite what T.K. was thinking he was going to do, he did not break the board he was just looking at it and then the anger on his face was slowly starting to wear off there.

"I used to skate back in the day. I gave up on it after I started to hang out with my high school friends. They were smoking all the time and at first, I thought that it was dumb and I thought that nobody should want to do it. But then I tried it out and then as more time passed by, the more that I did it. Soon enough, I started to do it every day and I forgot everything about skating, everything about the ideas that I had for school when I left home, and I just kind of have been spending the money I earn on smoking and drinking." The guy was saying and then he handed T.K. back the board and T.K. just looked at him wondering why there was even this dumb of information given to him this whole time.

"Sorry for that, I was not really expecting that information. I think that I need to head out. Maybe you can help me with the skating." T.K. had said and then he was looking at the stuff that this guy was smoking. He thought that maybe he should come along and maybe smoke up a little bit. It seemed interesting and fun to do. But then the guy who had been talking with T.K. for this time looked over and saw what T.K. was thinking and then he grabbed T.K. by their arm and pushed him to the wall.

"I will not give you any of those. You should not even ask me for that. I do not want you to do this. If you are going to start smoking, then you should not even have this skate board at all." This guy said and then he moved T.K.'s left arm up a crap ton and then T.K. actually heard a crack and then T.K. screamed like a little fucking girl over there.

Then afterwards T.K.'s arm was let go and T.K. could only hold the skate board with his fucking right arm. Then he was trying as hard as he can to not think about what he just been forced to deal with. T.K. was starting to head out of the house and right when he was heading out of the house, there was the guy looking at him and then he sighed in annoyance and thought that maybe there was something that they could do here after all.

"Give yourself a arm cast, come back here after school tomorrow, then we can go back down to the skate park. I will give you one lesson, but nothing more than that. I think that this is the least that I can do after I broke your arm." The guy said and then he shook his head and then T.K. was thinking that despite how much he hated pain and felt like he was a little girl by showing his pain over this, he just ran out of the house and there was a single tear down his face as a result of all of this pain. Yolei saw what happened and then ran on over to T.K.

"Damn, what the fuck happened? I heard your scream well from out here." Yolei said and then she saw the broken arm and then she was about to freak the fuck out there for a second. "Oh my god, we need to get you to the fucking hospital as soon as possible. You are going to have a lot to explain to explain to your mom when you are done with that and come home." Yolei said and she looked at T.K. smiling a little bit. She thought that it was kind of cute to see T.K. be a little badass with a broken arm.

Soon enough, T.K. and Yolei went to the hospital and after he went inside of the hospital for a terrible injury for the second time in his life and the first time in two years, T.K. got himself a arm cast and then T.K. did not really think it was as bad as people were making it out to be. He did not need his left arm to skate and then do his school work. He could just use his right arm for both and then Yolei was looking at T.K.

"I think that Davis will think this is totally sick when you show up to school tomorrow with that skateboard and that arm cast. I think you will be the most popular kid at school for a couple of days. Maybe we can get yourself excused from a couple of assignments. What happened in there tough to get your arm so busted in the first place?" Yolei was saying and T.K. was more focused on the time at that moment. It was like past six in the evening at that moment and T.K. was thinking his mother was probably really worried then.

So it took a little while and he was not excited to do this, but T.K. made it back to his house and then afterwards, he placed the skateboard right in his room before anybody could possibly even notice him being gone at all. But then afterwards, there was his mother who called out to T.K. to see what was going on and to see if maybe he would actually explain some things to her on why it was taking him a million years to come home that night. "T.K., you had scared the shit out of me when you had not been coming home for so long. You should have let me know what the hell you were doing." His mother said and T.K. was placing his arm right at the side of the door and it was covering up the arm cast.

"I'm sorry, I just had a lot of school stuff going on. It really slipped my mind. It won't happen again. At least I won't do it again without telling you in the morning." T.K. said and then he walked inside of the room and he decided to get right to his own personal work. Then when this happened, his mother thought that he was telling the truth and that one mistake was just something that she could forgive.

It was after T.K. was left alone that T.K. was just thinking of something that he could do in that moment of time or something like that. He was just thinking that he felt like he could do, such as train up his skating and just seeing if he could improve his skills or something like that. He decided that he would just work on his school work for the time being and then on the next school day he would get ready for his practice on skating further.

On the next school day, T.K. woke up really early and then he placed the skateboard right at the outside of the house just for his mother to not notice and right before she could look over and see what he was doing, T.K. was yelling out to her "I will be working at school tonight when I am done, be back around the same time as I was last night." T.K. said and then when he was saying this he grabbed the skateboard once again and then he started to ride the board again all the way to school."

"I guess that he is starting to be like Matt now. Just going around and staying around like all night. I guess that maybe there is nothing that I can do about it. He is just sort of doing his own thing." His mother said and she was still blind to the fact that he had the arm cast and he was going try putting off that fact as long as possible even though he knew that she was going to get pissed if this was the case and he had not told her well in advance.

T.K. was riding his whole way to school and there was just some huge thrill to it the entire time. There was no way that the broken arm was going to take away from his skating, although T.K. was just sure not to make his broken arm touch the board or anything like that and that it was just his main one this entire time. As he was riding, he was just thinking about how much he was going to just kill it when he was training with that old guy and he had heard about this race coming up in a few days and he was hoping that he was going to do a great job with the race.

Soon enough, T.K. had made his way to school and once he was in front of the school, everybody instantly looked over at him and they all thought that he was some super badass and sexy guy. He had his skateboard right on his right arm, his back pack with only one strap and then he saw that there was his arm cast and then Davis looked over at T.K. and he was shocked at the fact pretty much everybody was looking over at him thinking he was the next popular dude.

"Wow, I was not expecting this to change your reputation in just a couple of minutes. This is the first time I ever seen everybody look at you. Yolei told me all about your arm and I was expecting that, but I was not expecting the board or the whole popularity thing." Davis said and as he had said that, there was a couple of girls that walked by and they were laughing when they were walking by the two guys and they thought that it was just really funny to see these two guys now.

"This whole thing makes no sense. I think that maybe we are just being laughed at and not being laughed with." T.K. had said and then he was wondering what he could do now. He placed the board on the ground and then Davis looked amazed at what he was doing. "I guess that maybe I can ride around here for a little while to get to my next class." T.K. said and then afterwards, he started to kick the ground and he was starting to ride his board. The arm cast was something T.K. had to watch out for before he could get too crazy here.

It took like two minutes for him to reach the other side of the school where his first class was, and when he had done so, he walked inside of the school and had the board on his side as well. Then he sat down at his assigned chair and he was just sitting through his math class, which he really hated to sit through no matter what the lesson material had been at all. He was noticing that the teacher did not give a fuck about his broken arm and that they wanted to teach their lesson and move on through all of that stuff.

The school day was pretty slow aside from the transitions and lunch period. During the lunch period, T.K. was sitting with Davis and Yolei and they were talking with each other. They were talking about the stuff that they were going to do after school. "I need to do a skating lesson with this guy that fucked up my arm. Maybe I can actually win the skating race coming up. I want to partake in that now. I think that you and Davis can join me if you guys want to watch the whole thing." T.K. said and the others looked at each other to see what was going on.

"I think that this is a good enough idea. I think that maybe we can spend a couple of hours skating around right now. I feel as if this will be a pretty fun thing to do right now." Davis decided and then Yolei decided that she was going to get on board with this whole thing. After this, T.K. was thinking about how great it was going to be to skate around and just not give a single fuck about anything else in the world at this moment. They just wanted to have a good time right now.

That was when there was this girl that walked up to T.K. and wanted to comment on his arm. "That arm cast makes you look really badass." She said and then she took out a sharpie. T.K. was confused at this at first but then after he realized what she was doing, he held out his arm cast while smiling and then she started to write her name on sharpie. Her name was written on the cast and was the first name to do so, and the name was 'Molly.' Then she looked up at T.K. and was smiling a little bit.

Afterwards, T.K. looked over at Yolei and Davis. "This is totally fucking sick. I am going to see if I can get other people to sign it lol." T.K. said and then he stood up and started to walk around the lunch room. That was when Yolei turned around to look at Davis. She rolled her eyes as if not able to believe the way that T.K. was getting over his head with all of this stuff about his arm injury. She at least was able to still talk with Davis for the moment right then and there.

"I wonder how badly his fame will get to him when he starts to show his skating moves to everybody else." Yolei said and she was starting to sort of regret giving him the idea of buying this and she had hoped that when T.K. was doing this, only Davis and Yolei would get a share of the fame and not just him taking it and hogging the whole thing. She was a little jealous she would admit, as she didn't want to admit it, but she did have a little bit of crush on T.K. despite only knowing him for about two months with her being the new student who showed up in April, pretty fucking late in the year.

"Don't worry about it Yolei. Just let him have a couple of days or fame and when he realizes that nobody cares anymore, then maybe he will start to hang out with us again. I think that is just how it is going to go. I know how it is to be popular for a week and then nobody gives a shit about you ever again. I will tell you that story later." Davis told Yolei and he was looking over at T.K. who was just getting a shit ton of names on his arm cast. Davis was in the same spot as Yolei, but he liked her and that was hard for him since she realized that she liked T.K., and that T.K. did not really give a shit at all.

T.K. was just going around and he went around the entire cafeteria and as he was going around, he was pretty much all done after about five or ten minutes. He sat down when he was done and then he counted all of the names that were on his cast now. "Thirteen names, that is pretty impressive. I thought that I was only getting like five or something." T.K. said and then he looked at the two friends as if he had caught jack pot.

"How long are you going to have this? I think that maybe you should get that off you soon enough so that way you can have a full body to help you with skating." Yolei said and then as she was saying this, T.K. did not like to admit it but she was right. He did need to lose it if he wanted to improve his skating. But the bell rang and it was time for the rest of the day afterwards.

When the whole school day was over, T.K. got out of his class and this was when he was ready to start his skating lessons with that one asshole. Davis and Yolei got to reach him just in time and then they went through the same pattern as the previous day and as he was riding, the sounds of the cars and the smell of gross mud was not really going past him as he was more focused on the zooming noise of the skating.

The entire time that he was flying around, his arms were flying around like absolutely crazy and this was starting to go absolutely crazy at this moment and all that stuff. But then it took only five minutes when going at full speed to get down to the house of that one guy who was smoking a ton and was deciding to go on and try and help out T.K. for a little while. As this was going on, Yolei and Davis were only like ten yards away from T.K. when he eventually reached that guys house. Then afterwards, T.K. jumped off of the skateboard and then he grabbed the board and knocked right at the door of his helper.

There was the guy who was putting his cigarette down and then he was not really smoking it at all. He had considered smoking, but it was a huge task for him to actually not do it. Then he looked down at T.K., Yolei and Davis. This guy was staring at T.K. and then when he staring at the three of them, he shook his head as if trying to figure out what the hell was going on now. "I guess that it is time for you guys to start your guys next lesson." This guy said and then he snapped his finger. "However, we should go to the skate park."

"Alright, let's go on and do this." T.K. said and then after he had said that, there was the guy who went to his car and then called Davis and Yolei to go to the car and they would just drive to the park. Then when that was going on, T.K. would be forced to ride down there with his board and he had to go as fast as he could to be able to see if he could actually beat the car. Which T.K. knew he could not do, but he liked how this guy had enough hope in T.K. that he could at the very least try this whole thing.

So T.K. was riding down the hill as fast as he possibly could. He was still trying to get used to this thrill of riding a board. He was just getting through this whole thing and he had felt like this whole thing was just over the top for him. He felt like he just needed to embrace this whole thing no matter how insane this whole thing was. That was when T.K. thought that he was still seeing the car still.

As he was seeing the car, he was thinking that maybe he would not beat the car, but he could at the very least make it respectable at the same time. He was going faster and faster and as he was getting faster, that was when the car was getting closer to him for a moment until he saw the car parking. This was when T.K. saw that this was the park and that T.K. needed to stop as soon as possible, which would prove to be the hardest part.

Soon enough, T.K. was trying to get himself to stop and then when he was getting close, he fell off of the board and he flew onto the ground and he gave himself a pretty lit fucking scar. He stood up and then when he was standing up, he looked on over at Davis and Yolei as well as the mentor guy. The guy shook his head not able to believe that T.K. was actually wanting to do this thing at all.

"Well, this is not really a great first day of teaching. Seems as if we have a really long ass way to go. But we need to still try and we need to get through this whole thing together. Your friends will be here to support you. I guess that maybe you will see this and all of this." He said and then he grabbed the skateboard from the ground and that was when T.K. was wondering what the hell was going on here. T.K. walked right next to Davis and Yolei and he was just watching calmly. The guy placed his foot on the board and then he was getting ready to start riding.

This guy was riding along the skating ring and he showed such great form and it looked like he was able to really show people how skating could truly be more of an art than people had been able to think of it before. He was just going at like what seemed like twenty miles per hour. He was jumping up and down and he was doing a bunch of moves that looked like there were from movies that would take place in the early 2000's as T.K. would later learn over a decade later. It took him less than five minutes to go around the entire ring twice and do all of his favorite spins at least once.

Then when he was done, he skated up the large slope and then he yelled in excitement and then handed T.K. the board. T.K. was totally amazed at what he was seeing and then T.K. was wondering just how he was going to beat that. "I have not done this in such a long time that I didn't know I even had those moves with my mind still and I am impressed that I can do it still. I guess that maybe I will actually be able to help you out after all."

"How am I going to be even a tenth as good as you?" T.K. was saying and then when he was saying this, he placed the board on his feet and he was not really sure how he was going to handle this whole thing. The guy was thinking and then before T.K. could mutter out even another sentence from his mouth, the guy kicked the board and then T.K. was now forced to start riding.

As this was going on, he was riding down the slope really fast and T.K. turned around as fast as he could to make sure that he could actually take this thing as best as he could. He started swinging around and his body felt like it was going to fall off of the board several times and T.K. had the fear that he didn't have a helmet on and he was worried at what would happen to him. So after he was riding for a while, and he was thinking his skull was going to be busted, he jumped up and then when he was jumping up, he barely managed to reach the end of the ring and then he was panting in terror.

The guy who had decided to start teaching T.K. to skate was staring at him in disapproval. He grabbed T.K. by the hand and then he slid down the ring to grab the board and then he walked up the stairs to get back to T.K. "If you want any chance to win the skating race, you are going to have to really step up your game. This is getting sad for me to watch. I need you to start to get more serious about this. But we can continue this tomorrow. Let's all go out for dinner, I will pay for this one."

"This is crazy." Davis said after this whole thing was starting to go in like mach speed. T.K. thought that this was awesome that all of this was happening, but at the same time he could not himself to agree with Davis that this whole thing was actually going really fast and he did for a short moment think that maybe they should be taking it a little bit slower than they have been at this point in time. But he did not think about this too much as the guy who was teaching him to skate brought them on over to the local pizza place.

"So do you have any friends that you talk with? I think that you should show us some of your friends." Yolei said and she seemed to be genuinely interested in seeing how he was like on his own personal time. The guy seemed to think about it and then he decided that there was no harm in telling them how he was like. After all, they were starting to be his friends and he felt that it was always good to be honest with his friends no matter what the situation would be or if it would ruin the friendship.

"Well I have a few friends. They pretty much forced me away from skating and got me into doing drugs and stuff. If I could go back to my fifteen year old and tell myself to cut the shit off before I started, then I would have done it. I think that it is too far gone for me to change anything. The only thing that can be said that is good is the fact that I have a girlfriend, but she thinks that she does not want to date me anymore with the habits I have. I think I should end my friendship with these people soon..." This guy was saying out loud but quiet enough for only the group to hear after they had ordered their generic pepperoni pizza. The place smelled like over cooked pizza and grease but the group did not care too much.

"Why is your girlfriend going to break up with you over this?" Yolei asked since while she was able to see the problem with drugs and how it can be dangerous for your over all health, it was something that did not really make her think that you should lose your relationship as a result of it. This guy seemed to think there was not enough he could say here to make them really get it.

"Well, when you smoke the first time, it is like you are on the top of the world. It is like the first time that you ever masturbate. The first couple of times you really enjoy it, but the more that you do it the more that your brain forces you to think that you need it and then when that happens, then you start to think that nothing is as important as this. It slowly gets to the point in which the people around you become unimportant and then you throw them to the wayside and then afterwards, you will only be the shadow of a man." He had said and after this, T.K. thought about that and thought that maybe he should never try and masturbate or at the very least get too deeply into it.

So with that, the group all started to think more about what was happening with the race. "When the race goes on, do you think that you can be able to convince your girlfriend to come along with the race? I think that she will be willing to join the audience if you are actually willing to race. I think that maybe doing this race can get you to start to go back to your old habits and not doing something that you do not really like at all." T.K. had said and then after he had said that, the guy looked at the group and he was not really sure if this would actually work out too well.

"I doubt that this will really work out the way that you will want it to. However, I do think that I will go on to the race just to see if I truly still have it. I think that this is something that I will really do for myself and not really for anybody else. I am not doing this for love and not for war, I am doing this for my own personal gain." He decided and then T.K. looked at the arm cast and all of the signatures. Looking back on it, he did feel a little bit bad for basically doing just that with his race now.

"I guess that everybody had room to improve I suppose. So when you are done with the race, do you think that you will ever talk with us ever again?" Davis asked trying to get into the conversation and breaking his relative silence by that point in time since he felt like that was a really good question to ask the dude. This dude was thinking a little bit more and he would answer that one final question before they headed home since they had been at the greasy and gross tasting pizza place for almost an hour by then.

"I guess it all really depends. If you guys still want to hang and feel the urge to do it, then I will be more than willing to still hang out with you three after the skating race. After all, age is not really that big of a thing with friends. I do have some friends in my thirties. I do think that I need to make sure that I make you guys come home by a certain time though to make it so that there is some showing of responsibility with you while hanging with me." He said and then the group talked for about another five minutes until they all decided to head out and head to their houses.

So the group got back in their car and as they were all in the car heading to the different houses, T.K. was thinking about this whole skating idea. This idea was already a day old and he was honestly thinking that the whole group could be able to actually help him out here. This whole idea could really make or break the rest of the school year to be honest and he was watching the sun set, and he was honestly a little bit worried how his mother would feel about this whole thing. But he decided that he would cross that bridge when he got there and all of that stuff.

Soon enough, T.K. had come home and when he had come home, he just went and closed the door. He was super glad that his mother was actually out at work that night and that she was coming home super late. She left a note at the front door to let him know about this. He sighed in relief to know that he was going to be safe for another night with this whole thing and let the cast be on for another night. But as he was doing this, he went right to his homework and decided that he still needed to do that to remain a relatively good student. Once it was ten in the evening, he went to bed and it was around this time when the skating mentor decided to talk with his girlfriend a little bit.

It was raining as he knocked on her door and he was getting totally soaked by this point in time, and his clothes were all wet so he felt like he was probably going to get sick sometime soon. "Clair, sorry for not seeing you for a couple of days. I have been trying to help some people out right now." He was saying and then after he had said that, Clair looked at him a little bit confused. She was thinking that maybe he was just trying to find a fast way in the house with all the rain that was going on.

"Just come on inside. I think that you just need to warm up a little bit." Clair said and then she let him inside of the house and then after he had said that, he sighed in relief and then he was sitting down and looking around her house. He always wanted to help her out and get into a bigger house, since there was pretty much just a huge living room and nothing else besides a bathroom. She slept on the couch and had only coffee tables for her stuff to be put on. Her television was always super small and only showed black and white. He knew that she was poor, but he felt like he could help her out.

"I found some guys a couple of days ago and they really started to make me see some of the stuff that I enjoyed when I was a kid and I wanted to help them out be as good as possible at their new hobby. I think that maybe skating is something that will bring the next generation to do something else besides just sitting around in their house doing nothing all day. I hate how unproductive the younger kids are being these days." He said and then Clair was staring at him as if thinking that she was starting wonder the situation of their relationship.

"So you are willing to help some kids that you never have known until just a couple of days ago, but you have known me for years and have been dating me for a fair amount of time. All you do is just make empty promises to help send your money to me and you keep telling me that you and I are actually going to improve our situation from now on. But all you do is just spend all your money on weed and just give nothing to me at all despite you promising over and over again that you would. Please explain what makes them different from me.

You and I have never actually been able to do real boyfriend and girlfriend stuff lately. We never have been able to go on a date, we have never been able to even just meet up for a simple coffee. Pretty much every time we do something is something that I have to wait for you to just show up and pretty much decide that we should hang out and pretty much just watch this dumb television all day when I barely even know what is going on at all." Clair had vented off her anger on the situation over to him and then he stood up.

"Look, I realize that I am doing some pretty bad stuff. I want to change that though. Seeing these kids has given me some good ideas on how to change. I will try and grow sober. I will never talk to those guys again if that is what you want me to do. If I can grow sober, then maybe I can start giving you some money that I earn every month and maybe we can go on some dates and then you can start to change your house." He tried to defend himself but Clair shook her head.

"You have been giving me this same story every single time and honestly I am sick and tired of it. I don't want you to give me this same excuse anymore, when you can barely even keep up your rent. Just save it and stop lying to me this stuff. Just please stop making excuses and if you want to change, and you actually mean it, then give it up. You have an addiction, and this addiction is starting to kill you." Clair told her boyfriend and then he was pondering the stuff that she had told him.

"I know that I keep saying the same stuff over and over again. I know that I have never been able to go sober for more than three or four days. I know that this is something that you probably want to just give up on, but I want to try and do this. I want to change, and I want to over come this addiction." He told Clair as Clair just held his face with her hands and shook her hand.

"Please don't do this anymore. Don't come back until you have actually make a real attempt to change. When you do that, then maybe we will actually discuss this stuff more and then I guess that maybe I will give you a tenth chance in a row. But I am not wanting to make any decisions yet given your previous record." Clair led him out of the house and then before he left she yelled out to him.

"Your clothes are still wet. Before you leave, at the very least take this bag. When you get home, maybe you should change into these dry clothes." Clair threw him the clothes and then after she did this, he wrapped the bag up so rain would not get on them and then he left the house. He started to head on home and he was thinking more and more on everything that was going on here. First he was in an addiction, his girlfriend basically indirectly dumped him, and now he is pretty much looked at as somebody who will never be able to pick up his life at all, which as much as he hated to admit it was probably true.

It took a while for him to walk home and the entire time that he was walking home, the rain was just doing small drizzle. He did not really mind a small drizzle, but it was just something that always bothered him. On the nineteen years that he had been on earth, there was nothing that ruined his walking and going to different places than just a bunch of rain. Soon enough when he did reach his house, he grabbed his glad plate, his lighter and all of his weed and then threw it in the trash can. Then while the lights were still dim in the room, he opened up the bag.

All that was in there was a short sleeve blue shirt and a pair of blue jeans that had a hole on the knees for both of them. There was also a pair of glasses that he totally forgot he ever had. When he examined the clothes a little bit more closely, he remembered that these were the clothes that had worn when he had first started to date Clair and that he probably never got his clothes again. Not giving any less of a shit, he opened his window and let some breeze in while he slept on the couch for the night.

After this, there was a guy who was standing on the other side of the street. He was watching the house and he was having some Vader style breathing. He was wearing a gas mask and he was holding something in his left hand. Soon enough, he figured that he was probably going to have to do something to help this guy out. He was not going to let this guy ruin anything anymore, and he was tired of seeing him constantly make promises that he would never keep.

Chapter Text

Chapter 5: This Young Love

The next day of school was pretty normal and T.K. had talked with Molly once again. "Hey, so do you guys want to watch my skating race when it comes up in a couple of days? I think that you would really enjoy watching me do this race. I want to get as many of my friends to watch this as possible." T.K. said and then he felt strange calling Molly his friend when he barely even fucking knew her, but it really did not matter all that much. Molly was reading her class book when he asked this question, but then when he asked her, she looked up and saw that T.K. was giving her the puppy eyes.

"I think that it would be fun to watch your race. Where does it take place?" Molly asked and that was when T.K. was fucked, since he did not really remember where the race was. He had to take a couple of seconds to think about it and he was sweating a little bit, and his knees were weak. But then he remembered suddenly that it actually did just take place at that school front entrance and he felt stupid for not remembering at all.

"Just at the front of the school. I will be racing with all of the experts of the town. I think that I will have a decent chance of winning, but that is only because I have the best teacher ever for skating." T.K. answered and he felt really not confident as he was saying this and the more that he was talking, the more that he felt like he was lying through his fucking teeth the whole time. Molly thought that there was a chance that he could be telling the truth, so she did not really give a crap about this.

"I wish you great luck. I would love to see how much you have improved your skills in just the course of a couple of days. But maybe if you win, maybe we should hang out a little bit and see where it can lead." Molly said and then gave T.K. a carrot and T.K. was wondering what was weird about this glasses wearing, orange shirted girl that she thought giving him a carrot was sexy. And they were technically way too young to be thinking about this stuff. He stood up though and headed out with a blush on his face and then the rest of the school day was pretty lame and nothing really happened.

Once the school day ended, T.K. rode right down to the house of his mentor and his friends both had something to do, so neither one of them could really make it that day. As this was going on, he was glad that he could just have a clear cut focused mind set. After he had knocked on the house door, T.K. took a look around just to see just how much cleaner the front yard than it was earlier. In fact, it made T.K. think that maybe there was a robber. There was some simple stuff that was missing like a rusty anchor that really made no sense being there in the first place.

"Came here early, I think we should get to work right away." The mentor said and then after he said this, he was seeing the strange and confused look on T.K.'s face and decided that he would explain this a little bit. "Got into a fight with my girlfriend and I made her a promise that I would try and sober up and all that but she said that she didn't believe me after me doing shit like this for so long." He said and then afterwards, he looked at the board. "I think that I should buy myself one so I can be ready for the race coming up."

"It would be awesome if we all did that race. I think that we should all get a board or something, maybe Davis can join the race." T.K. said and he was being rather big and unrealistic when he had said this. It was something that he knew was probably never going to happen, but it was fun to pretend that this was going to be the case. But after this, T.K. just went to the park with the guy who was just teaching him new moves.

Once they had made it to the skating park, the guy was looking around and he was wondering just how much more there would have to be. "If you want to have even a slim chance of winning, you are going to have to make a shit ton of improvements here. There is no way that you are going to be able to win the race if you have the talents that you have now. You really need to start improving a lot now." He said and then he was wondering how rough he would have to be with T.K. before it would get too rough and like he was doing too much.

T.K. jumped right into the skating ring and as he jumped right in the skating ring, he was starting to get a lot more comfortable than he was at the start of this before. He was not swinging around and feeling like he was going to crack his skull the whole time. In fact, after he was starting to get more into it the whole thing started to get easier. He actually started to go around the skating ring a couple of times before starting to feel like he could start doing tricks and by tricks like meaning pretty much skating down the rails and all of that stuff. T.K. had skated around for like ten minutes before he felt like he needed to stop.

The guy who was teaching him this stuff was just staring right at him. "Wow, you seem to be getting in the hang. Give it another day or two, and maybe you will actually be able to win this race after all. I seem to have thought that maybe you could not do it, but you seem that you can actually pull off a victory here if you try hard enough."

So T.K. and the guy sat down at a bench and then after he sat down next to the guy who was teaching him, T.K. looked up at the guy and asked the first question he should have asked all these days ago. "What is your name?" T.K. asked and he was thinking that the arm cast was not really making too much of a difference here and he thought that maybe he could just keep this on for a while.

"My name is Harold. Not really all that impressive after like three days of build up. I just thought that it was not really all that important to let you know my name. But since you wanted to know so badly, there you go. I live alone as you can see, and my parents both live on their own. My mother lives about an hour away and I moved out on my eighteenth birthday because I decided that I couldn't handle my previous house anymore. I barely see my father, just once every couple of years and then he stays for like a week and then he leaves to just be gone for another couple of years. Last time I saw him was on my graduation last year." Harold explained and then he explained more of his life.

"I lived in a town that seemed to be a little more bleak than I would like it to be. There was always some sort of crime going on and the guy who was elected mayor just seemed to be more focus on advancing technology, and more focused on the idea of making us sound like the most advanced place ever rather than working to help the citizens of the town. My mother always seemed to be trying too hard to keep me safe, something about my father and her previous boyfriend. I don't get it. But I decided I wanted the fuck out and that was how it was." Harold decided that he was talking too much on this and then he decided he wanted to talk about T.K. now.

"So why are you doing this at all? Is there anything that is making you really think that this is such a great idea in the first place." Harold waited for T.K. to respond and there was sweat coming down his face and he was thinking that maybe there was no true answer and that he truly only did it for fame, something Harold hated.

"I know that you are probably not wanting to hear me say this, but I think that I am just doing this for the fame of this. I have been trying to come up with a good reason to do this, but honestly I do not really have one right now. It is terrible to admit this, but I guess that I don't really have one right now." T.K. had said and then as he had said this, Harold seemed to think that there was a way that T.K. can change his looks on this whole thing.

"I really hope that you can change your looks on things later on. I think that you should try and change the whole view point on this. I don't want you to do something here and then realize that you guys don't really all that many things to do. Please do it for something, even if it is for the sake of getting a girlfriend. You should get one soon, and if you wait for one then honestly you might make some mistakes I will make." Harold had said and then after he had said that, T.K. thought that he did have a chance with Yolei or Molly. Although he did view Yolei as a friend and he knew Davis liked her more, but Molly on the other hand he could work out.

"What if nobody wants to date me or nobody likes me back? I feel then there is no point in it at all." T.K. said and then after he had said that, Harold seemed to think that there could be a valid point that T.K. had there despite him not wanting to admit it. He remembered back when he first met Clair while they were in early high school. He was making some new friends and there was that one guy with black hair and had a pair of shoes that were totally fucking wrecked. Then he decided to go to the short stop like store just to buy something to drink and on his way there he saw Clair was walking there and he decided to introduce himself to her and that was how it had slowly started.

"Honestly, you just need to take the chance. You never know if you don't try. I have been told that, and I do agree. Just trying and even failing is better than sitting there and putting in no effort at all. We are the modern age, we are the next generation even if we do not really feel it. We should grow up and try to change how we are to be the best possible version we can be so when we have a kid we are ready for them to be good children and people. After all, I am already older than my father was when I was born and the same age my mother was, and I am probably going to realistically have a child soon if I do start to change things with Clair." Harold was saying and then T.K. decided that the slightly older former skating hero had a good way of looking at it.

"Maybe one day I will have the balls to ask somebody out. I feel too scared to do it. I feel like my grades will start to fall apart if I don't." T.K. said and then that was when Harold shook his head as if T.K. did not really get it, the truth about reality that nobody really wanted to admit.

"Look, it does not matter what those textbooks say. Those are all filler just for cheap words. My father talked with me about it once a couple of years ago. Democracy is just a plot from the government to try and get the people to think that their voices really matter when in reality the people just try and get some power. When you are growing up, people just try hard to fight for certain power and do nothing besides just that. You don't really earn it, you just cheat the system. You don't work with somebody and actually win them over. Corruption is lying deep in the world, in both worlds as my father places it. I think he might be crazy, but if there is even a five percent chance that he is telling the truth, I am not willing to take the risk anymore." Harold told T.K. and that was when T.K. realized just how much truth there had been to it and that maybe the only way to truly change something may be to actually do it yourself. Not get elected, because then you get part of a system that just tries to one up you. No, you are a free and independent agent who works on his own to do the things he wants. Although he wondered what Harold meant by the two worlds thing, which was strange.

But then soon enough, the two decided that it was time for them to leave each other, and then T.K. skated his way back to the middle school and he was hoping that maybe he could find Molly there. He was thinking about the modern generation, the need to be there for your children when you grow up but the need to grow up and become the best man possible, he thought about in a way the modern age of love if that made sense. He was only twelve so he had no fucking idea what love was, but god damn there was no real fucking reason to not at least try and see what it is like.

The entire time he was skating, he was jumping up and down and doing some tricks of his own, even using his arm casted arm to do some flips and he did a spin at one point of his own body before he landed on the board once again and he did not even care that he had no helmet on. Helmets were just a ploy. This modern love was the more important piece of trying to survive, not making sure your skull didn't get bruised. Sirens were driving by with their sounds playing to a tone deaf T.K., annoyed drives telling him to be more safe when he jumped over them one time with his board, and then when he actually rode under a bus at one moment with himself ducking a million degrees all the way up several hills to the middle school.

When he reached the middle school, he found Molly on her way home from all the work she done. T.K. hopped off his board and picked it up perfectly with the arm on his arm cast, not giving a shit about the pain anymore as it would be fine. "Hey Molly, do you want to come over to my house and kill some time?" T.K. asked and then Molly looked at him as if she could not believe that he would ask her.

"I would love to." Molly said as she got on the board with T.K. and wrapped her arms around him as he skated the two of them on over to his house and he was liking how she gripped him, making him feel important and like he was going to save her in case something terrible happened. He hoped that neither Davis or Yolei would see this.

It took ten minutes or so, but when T.K. was done, he hopped off the board and threw it in his room and then he and Molly were inside of his room right away. "Going to be doing some homework, will grab something to eat when I am hungry." T.K. said and then afterwards he slammed the door with his good arm and he was ready to just hang out with Molly and take things easy for a little bit.

"Wow, how did you get so good at this whole skating thing in just two days? You seem to be a natural at this? Are you just a natural born genius who can do anything?" Molly asked and then T.K. shook his head as if thinking that claim was silly.

"No not at all, aside from like three or four friends, including you, I can barely keep a social conversation. Trust me, you are like a exception to that. I don't really have that great of qualities outside of the learning field. On the personal level I have a long way to go. I just want to win the race though." T.K. responded and he rubbed the gross sweat off of his shirt and then he threw the shirt on the ground and picked up a better yellow one and then flopped on the bed.

"I think that you should be more careful about bringing people over. I mean you don't want to give people the wrong impression. Did you even think about that at all?" Molly asked and then T.K. laughed as if thinking it was no big deal, after all Matt brought home girls all the time. Well, friends to be more exact. He was already dating Sadie.

"Trust me it is not a big problem. As long as I stay on top of my school work, nobody would give a shit. That is all that matters. Even some of my friends do not really think that it matters all that much to be honest. I guess I am not really sure. Maybe you can give me your thoughts on that in a little bit. I am not really sure what to do now." T.K. said and he did not want to do school work at all and Molly thought they can just strike a normal conversation.

"Well, no matter what goes down, I feel glad to know that I am starting to make some new friends lately. My brother Matt was really wanting me to get some new friends, so I guess that he is getting what he wanted, as Davis and Yolei were my only friends. I wouldn't count this young eight year old boy named Cody since he is more Yolei's friend than mine." T.K. said and then after he had said this, Molly thought of something really funny that would make even T.K. laugh even if T.K. was not the most socially great person.

"I want to add something on your cast, I think that it would be really funny." Molly said and then she pulled out her sharpie again. Knowing what was going on, T.K. held out his arm and he was getting ready for the signature already. Molly walked up to him and then she wrote on the cast 'V-Loser' and then T.K. was wondering what the context about this was. Like it wasn't something that triggered him or anything, but it was a little strange. She explained it in a couple of words "Well if people look at you as a loser, why not just embrace that and maybe work really hard on the skating race and then everything would be all better."

"I don't think that I want to work on school tonight. I think that I am going to skip it tonight." T.K. said and for the first night in like forever, and that it would slowly start a down going trend that would slightly increase over time. Despite this not being what his parents wanted, but this was the way that T.K. had wanted it to be. Molly smiled and then after he had said that, she wondered why he cared so much about school anyways.

"I think that you can do just fine without working too hard on school. Just sort of enjoy the moment while it is lasting now." Molly was saying just doing her best trying to make T.K. sort of not really worry about things at that moment. But then T.K. wiped his face and then he laid down on his futon for a moment and he was wondering what to do now. He wanted to keep talking with Molly, but he was really fucking tired and maybe needed to sleep.

"I really want to keep talking a little bit longer, but I don't really know how much more I can do of this right now. I think that I am going to go to bed right now." T.K. said and then after he had said that he placed his hand over his eyes and then after less than a minute he was fucking out. Molly decided that she would stay the night, so she got on T.K.'s real bed and then afterwards, she put the blanket over herself and then when she did that, both of them slowly went to sleep, Molly wondering just how this really went by in the first place.

The next day of school, T.K. rode his board over to the school with Molly on him like he did before and he was getting really used to this and he was enjoying doing that with her. Soon enough, he got off his board when he reached the front school yard and his wheels were already like getting scratched up to show the amount of use going on and then afterwards, he found Davis and Yolei. "Hey you two, so the race tomorrow is going to be fucking lit and I hope that I will at the very least get in the top three."

"You seem to be getting much more serious about this. I think that maybe you should work with that one guy a little bit more if it is tomorrow." Yolei said and she seemed a little bit jealous when she saw Molly and she was hoping that she did not make any crazy advancements with her. She was hoping soon enough the two would just get over it and then she would have a chance to get him again. Davis was yawning since he was fucking tired.

"I am really fucking tired. Just sort of had the strange motivation to do my homework last night. I did it and now I am starting to get ready to turn it all in." Davis said and it was strange how this was like the first time that he ever did this and it was sort of like the reversing of roles from here since T.K. was not doing it for like the first time ever. T.K. wondered what was going to happen now with this whole thing and if Davis would suddenly become a better student.

All of a sudden, there was the bell to go to school for the day and then that school day was just sort of the normal and people were wondering how much longer T.K. was going to be using the arm cast. He did not really care all that much since he was taking his finals already and everybody was just wanting summer. It was so close to the end of the year that everybody just wanted to hone it in now, even though T.K. decided at the last minute to slack off and Davis decided at the last minute that he all of a sudden gave a shit. But it did not really matter all that much when the school day was over and T.K. only had a couple of finals left after this.

Davis, Yolei and T.K. headed down to Harold's house and as they had reached his house, he was taking things a little bit slowly. "Just working on a car right now. I have a contract on my job to work on this car, since I work with cars on my job." Harold said and T.K. was interested in knowing that he was a car mechanic, and this was very interesting and he was wondering if he was any good on this job at all. He got out from under the car, deciding he could finish it when he was done with these young kids.

"When you guys had left, I decided that I would buy a skateboard and help myself out on the race, since I really wanted to do the race." Harold said and then that was when T.K. was interested on that and he wondered if he was even going to win the race. But that did not seem to matter as the group went down to the skating ring once again, and the session was mostly the same as it was the previous day and there was no real reason for T.K. to start doing anything differently.

The session lasted twice as long as the previous day due to the fact that they both wanted to be extra ready for the race. "I feel like I could actually be able to pull myself in the top three. If I manage to do so, I will be so happy and I would not ever feel like this was something that I felt like I wasted my time on here." T.K. said after the session was over and T.K. was just totally covered in sweat and he was feeling his hair starting to go all over the place. Harold was tempted to laugh over this, but he decided that he would be a little bit more respectful just in case.

"Honestly, I think that you can be able to pull this off. I have not really seen any skaters really all that great. I think you might pull off a last minute victory, or top three if that is all that you really want." Harold said to T.K. and then when this was going on, Davis and Yolei started to talk with one another. T.K. was already focused on talking with Harold, and they were pretty much side things and watchers in the eyes of their pro friend.

"So Yolei, want to go to my house now? I have this really awesome game that I can show you. It seems that you are a little bit more interested in video games than most girls our age." Davis was saying and then Yolei thought about that, it was true that she was more interested in games than usually. Besides, she can bitch about T.K. liking Molly to Davis, and then Davis can get some more school work done perhaps.

"Yeah sure, let's do it. They probably are going to be more focused on the race anyways." Yolei said and then after she had said this, the two of them started to head out of the skating park and Yolei yelled out to them "We are going to hang out at Davis's house, if you guys want to hang out with us later, then we will just be waiting probably." Yolei had said and then afterwards, the two of them started to head out now.

"It seems like they are a little bit losing interest in this. I wonder if you should start to hang out with the more. Are you sure that this is not affecting your friendships and all that at all?" Harold said and then he placed his hand on T.K.'s shoulder and then nodded. "You should probably try and head there and talk with them. Please, this is something I don't want you to fuck up on and I don't want you to make any of the same mistakes that I do." After Harold said this, T.K. nodded and headed out on to Davis's house to try and speak reason to them.

It took T.K. about forty minutes to skate to Davis's house and the whole time that he was doing so, he was wondering what shit he and Yolei were saying about him and what he was going to be able to do to try and make them see his view and make them see that he meant nothing wrong. If they were even feeling angry with him, who fucking knew maybe they were just wanting to hang out and there was nothing wrong. He hated all of this second guessing and he felt like when the race was over, he was just going to try and enjoy his summer as much as possible without all of the drama.

When he reached the front door of Davis's house, he was taking a bunch of deep breaths and then he knocked on the door a couple of times. Davis was just talking with Yolei for a little bit and not really paying attention to what was going on at all. "Honestly, I am starting to really regret telling T.K. that he should get a skateboard, and I thought that it would have been a great idea at the time. But I guess that I was wrong about this after all." Yolei was telling Davis and then he turned his chair around and was wondering what he could say to her here.

"Honestly Yolei, don't worry about it. Once the race is over, he will probably have no desire to keep up at this anymore, and then when he is done with this, then maybe he will start to go back to his normal self. I really would not stress this all that much. Just let it go out, I know that you think it sucks he is making progress with Molly, but honestly he likes her and thinks that maybe he has a chance with her. Why not just let him try and be happy?" Davis just did not understand girls and there was no way that Yolei was going to condense it down to a few fucking sentences for him to start to get it now.

"I just thought that maybe I would have a good chance on getting him to like me. But then after he started talking with Molly, I was starting to see that maybe this was not what was going to happen and I guess that I was not really ready for this type of rejection." Yolei told Davis and then Davis stood up and then he was doing some pull ups on the bar over his door.

"It is not really a rejection until he tells you that he doesn't want to date you. Just think about it this way, there are several people at the school. Just not getting this one is not really going to be all that big of a deal. You will be able to find somebody who will like you soon enough and then you will start to like them back, and everything will be all good." Davis was doing pull ups that entire time and when he was done, he jumped down.

"I guess that maybe you are right. I do need to probably take it easy. Maybe you should answer the door though, I heard a couple of knocks just now. I think that this might be T.K." Yolei said and then after she said that, she started to calm down and she was starting to pull it together in the way that Davis said she should. Davis walked to the door and then he answered it and then he saw that it was indeed T.K. just tired as fuck and needing a break.

"Sorry for being so late, but he told me that I should probably talk with you guys and make sure that everything is alright." T.K. had said and then after he had said this, Davis nodded and let T.K. inside of the house to let him stay there for a little while. It was a decent idea, although none of this was really that big of a deal despite what Yolei may have been trying to make it all out to be. But this was still a good chance for them to all speak and just have fun.

Once T.K. was inside of the bedroom, he was looking at Yolei and she was looking a lot less annoyed than she had been earlier, almost as if she was glad that T.K. was there and she was willing to put everything else to the side and just hang out with him for that moment and time. T.K. wondered just how much they could really talk about this before Yolei would tell him to shut the fuck up. So he was just thinking of different things to talk about, like maybe Yolei's brother or Davis's game.

"So what is the game that you got Davis? I heard you talking with Yolei about it a little bit before you guys left. Maybe we can play it a little bit, and then we can just have some fun for a few hours. Forget about everything else for now." T.K. said and then after he made that suggestion, Davis decided that this was a good way to start the moving on with this. So with that, Davis stood up and got the game and then Yolei was looking at T.K. to see what was going on with him, minus the skating.

"It's called the Legend of Zelda. I was going to the arcade a little bit and found it. I was hearing that there was no cartridge about it and after that was told to me, I was a little sad about that since it was such a fun game that I played at that time. So with this, I came home wanting to play it as much as I can here, and then when I came home, I actually found the game and it was on a cartridge, it was magically there and I wondered what made me find this. But I won't complain, so I can play it as much as I can." Davis told T.K. and Yolei and that was when everything Yolei was thinking about was thrown to the Wayside and even she was beyond interested to check this whole thing out.

"Yeah I want to see what you are playing lately." Yolei said and then she got excited and then after this, Davis started to play the game and after the main menu of the game T.K. and Yolei were both entranced in what they were seeing and at the time, it was like the biggest game that they had ever seen and it seemed to be much more ambitious than plenty of movies that they had seen. It was something truly great to witness.

For the next five hours or so, Davis tried to play the game and he had to restart two or three times, but with each restart, T.K. was taking notes and Yolei was giving some motivation, but it took a long time even though Davis did eventually beat the game in the long run. It was like eleven a clock in the evening when Davis had beat the game, and then after he had beaten the game, T.K. congratulated Davis for the game and then T.K. grabbed his board to head out of the house.

As T.K. was half a block down the street, Yolei had called out to him. "So can we talk for a moment?" Yolei asked and then T.K. stopped his riding and then turned around and once again grabbed the board with his hand with the arm cast. "I know that you are really into this now, and I feel bad for trying to put you off from doing this. Sorry for doing that. I want you to win that race, since you have put a lot of work this and I think that you are ready to win this race. Davis and I are going to watch you."

T.K. thought about this and then he said "Well thanks. I know that I have been putting a lot of time to this the last few days and that you are probably wanting to to hang out with you guys more. I promise that after the race is over with, I will start to hang out with you guys more." T.K. wondered how much more Yolei would want to talk before he had to head out.

"Crazy that we are out this late. I have never done this before. I think that this is the start to the end of our childhood now. I think we are starting to grow more into young adults." Yolei said and while T.K. did think this was out of nowhere, she was probably wanting to change the subject and then after she changed the subject, T.K. thought about it and then he seemed to somewhat agree with her sentiment.

"I guess that we are growing up after all. Soon we will be in seventh grade, and once we grow into our next grade, I guess that maybe some of our interests are starting to change. I think that they are starting to change already, with the skating and all of that stuff." T.K. said and then after he had said that Yolei was hiding her blush in the night time and then afterwards she said that he was probably right and then T.K. started to skate off to home once again.

T.K. returned home and then he was being super quiet and then he fell right asleep as soon as his body hit the bed and then after this, he was getting ready to rest a lot for his skating race. He hoped that he was going to win this, since if he did not he would feel like he would have wasted his time doing this. But that would have not been something that he wanted to even start to consider. As he was asleep, he was careful to place his broken arm under the blanket in case Matt or his parents were inside of the room and saw him for a second or two.

On the next day of school, T.K. honestly did not put all that much effort into his tests at all and he was just wanting to get the day over with so he can get to the race. Besides, just having his arm constantly on the table was really starting to hurt and he hated how much it was making him unaware of what was going on. So the two factors when put together really could not give him a good time with the tests. But it all did not matter by the time that the day was over and he was able to start to get ready for the race coming up.

As T.K. was getting ready for the race, that was when he got on his board. He took a moment to rub his arm over how much it had heart, but he did not want to get too bothered by it. Molly walked up to him to try and get one last thing of motivation to him and make him look at things differently before he starts to perhaps beat himself up over him possibly losing the race. She thought he needed that pretty well right then and there.

"I thought that maybe you were going to be beating yourself up if you did not win the race, and I wanted you to know that you should not do this. It is just a simple skating race. Nothing more nothing less. It would be awesome to see you win, but let's try and be real here. You have only been doing this a week. You might not even get in the top three." Molly said and then as she had said this, T.K. stopped and looked forward. She did have a good point as much as he had hated to admit that, but he thought more on what he had done now by this point.

"I guess that it is not what really matters right now. I guess that we need to just keep working on our friendship. But right now I need to focus on my race, and I can't really get my mind off of anything else right now. I am sorry that I sound like this, but I guess that this is possibly going to be the end of my time of racing and skating. Well, I guess it depends. I need to shut up and start to focus on winning the race right now." T.K. had said and then after he was saying this, Molly nodded and realized that he was right. They needed to just focus on letting T.K. win the race.

"Tell Yolei and Davis that I thank their patience and willingness to be there when I am doing all of these races and skating sessions." T.K. said that one final thing and then afterwards, Molly headed off and then she started to head off towards the other two friends. T.K. walked up to the rest of the racers and he took a moment to see which ones were probably going to be trouble and which ones would most likely be really easy to take care of.

As T.K. was ready for the race, there was a guy who was narrating out loud to get them all ready to start racing. Soon enough he called out that they needed to start racing. After the announcement was made, everybody started to ride as fast as possible. In the eight that were riding, there was one that clearly never skated until that day and probably just got the board that very day for a last minute par take. It was obvious since they started to fall down on the ground after he was riding for a couple of seconds and after he fell down once, he tried to do a second round of skating until he fell down again and afterwards he knew that he had lost the race so he already went back to the starting line when he had just skated for like forty seconds.

There were only seven left who were racing. As T.K. was racing, he was making sure that he was not paying attention to all of the ads that were going around and were probably trying to distract T.K. during the races. All of the ads seemed to be talking about different construction projects across the nation and their opening days. T.K. honestly did not care less, but in the second or so that T.K. glanced at one of the ads it was showing this one hundred story building being built in the city to sort of capitalize on this huge budget increase. Even though it would have been ten times more useful to have the budget increase go to schooling or something like that, but whatever.

T.K. focused back on the race and as he was watching, he saw another one of the skaters skating by but then he got on the side walk by mistake and when he had done so, he skated right to a wall and then he flew off his board and landed hard on his ass. That just left six more contestants left in the race.

So he kept on focusing on the race as he kicked the ground a couple more times and as he was kicking the ground, he was moving along very fast and the hill was going by at what felt like mach speed. When he saw a ledge he could gain a few seconds on, he skated to that place and then skated down that ledge to give himself even a few second lead, but a lead was still a lead and he was going to work with this thing now.

With him now in the lead for a few seconds, there was one contestant that had a shit ton of ache who probably had no life besides just watching tons of porn was catching up to him in the hopes to get in the lead himself. T.K. thought that this was going to be really easy so he just sped himself up a little bit and then the guy started to try too hard to catch up to him and on one of their strides on the ground, his foot slipped and he fell right hard on his ass, taking out another contestant and there were only four left.

Soon after this guy was taken out, there was this punk black guy who was riding really fucking fast even when compared to T.K. and Harold, and he was soon enough able to totally get well ahead of the two of them and after they had gotten ahead of both our heroes, T.K. was wanting to at the very least beat this one. There was one more guy right behind T.K., as Harold made it to second place again, and he was just trying hard not to get out of the race to be honest.

It was pretty much at this point where it was a three way race and T.K. was just trying to find a way to stay in the race and stay ahead of this one guy. Well that was not really going to be too hard as when he was riding, he hit the curb and then he flew ahead several inches into the air and then he skidded across the ground and he was out of the race, making it a three way race and T.K. the race had now reached the one mile point, so they were a decent portion into it now.

T.K. was now pretty much on a straight street, so he was riding fast and faster and soon enough, after he had been building up speed for a while, he was now in second place again and then he was starting to catch up to the leader and then the guy started to increase the gap once again and then T.K. was losing his second place speed and then Harold had caught up and was ahead of him again, so now he was wondering just how well he could do in comparison.

Soon enough, they were having to race in a bunch of curves and swerving parts of the street and T.K. was doing his best to not fall down and lose the race, since he thought that he could have a decent chance of actually at the very least finishing this race. Either way he was going to get at least the bronze medal by default but he was hoping it would turn into the gold medal, totally forgetting about the talk he had with Molly earlier.

It was pretty much a switching back and fourth back and fourth for like twenty minutes or so until the three of them finally managed to reach the ending street. By this point, Harold was only a couple of feet behind and he started to kick up his speed a lot and after doing so he was able to pull through last second and win the race by about three seconds. The black guy who was really good at this race had finished second and by a few seconds T.K. managed to actually finish but he got in third place.

But right as he was finishing, his board hit a rock and then he flew forward and the crowd was watching in horror as he sky rocketed into the air once again and then soon enough he hit the ground, his first landing part being his left hand, and then he landed on the ground with his left arm behind him bending and cracking even worse so that it was like the bones were ripped in half. By this point, T.K. let out a huge holler of pain that lasted all of ten seconds before he stood up and then high fived Yolei, Davis, Molly and Harold with his right hand. "That was totally badass, I don't even care about the hand."

Harold looked over at T.K.'s arm and then T.K. slowly grabbed the board with his right hand and Harold was wondering what was going on. "I think that we should take you to the hospital now so you can get a stronger cast or something like that." Harold had said this and then when he was thinking this, there was something going on that made everybody stop. Harold started to walk T.K. to his car and he yelled at Davis to get their rewards so they would not really be forced to let T.K. have a ruined arm even longer than he already would have to.

It took a couple of hours, and a lot of pain and screaming, but the doctors managed to get T.K. to calm down long enough for them to put an even stronger arm cast on him that would be able to endure stronger falls and situations like the one that T.K. decided to get himself into with the skating. The doctor on his way out told T.K. to not fuck up his arm again since if he did, there would be nothing left to give him for it so he better be careful with the arm. Now that the skating race was over with, T.K. saw no reason he couldn't be.

As T.K. was being driven home, it started to rain again. Harold didn't mind it so much this time with the fact he was in a car. But then after he pulled up to T.K.'s drive way, he looked over at T.K. and said "You better just tell your parents the truth now. There is only so much that you can get out of lying about the arm." After Harold said this, T.K. got out of the car despite not liking this. He walked to the front of his house and then he went to his bedroom. he would tell them tomorrow, but tonight he just needed to rest his arm for the first time in a week.

Right when he sat down on his chair, T.K. found a small piece of paper and he took it out. He pulled out a pen and then he was staring at it. It was going to be really hard to write with one hand, and he knew that it was not going to amount to anything, but he just needed to do something. So he lowered the blue ball point pen onto the paper and he wrote down on the paper "Can teenagers truly grasp love and friendship?" He asked this in response to Molly and the rest of the group.

Right after T.K. wrote that down on his paper, his mother walked into the room to get T.K.'s stuff for laundry and then she saw the skateboard and his arm cast. She then yelled when she saw that and demanded he explained this to her. "I got into skating and I broke my arm, I was going to possibly tell you tomorrow." T.K. answered and then his mother looked like she was ready to tell at him. But instead she just walked out of the room to control her anger.

After this had gone down, T.K. turned off his light in annoyance and he was pissed the fuck off at himself. He laid down on his bed and it took about five minutes or so, but he did eventually get himself to bed. After he started to go to sleep, the feeling of the house started to go down hill a little bit. But while he was asleep, there was something strange that went down, but he actually ended up getting his third place bronze medal from a man who was watching placing it in his room. This was the guy in the gas mask and he just simply said "Thank you." And then he had headed off.

As that happened, Davis and Yolei decided to stay at her house for the night. Davis told his parents he would stay with Yolei that night right after he had come home and then after he was staying there, he looked at her. He thought that there was a lot of stuff that they could talk about. "Sorry that T.K. seems to be more focused on personal hobbies and his arm than he was about you." Davis was saying and he gave zero fucks about it, honestly he was just wanting the subject to just drop now.

"Honestly as long as he is enjoying what he is doing, I guess I have no right to bitch about this whole thing. I think that maybe he will change his mind on a lot of things over time. But for now, I guess that he just needs to see what his life style and changes are going to be like." Yolei decided and as she was saying this, Davis stood up and started to walk around a little bit more to sort of get his thoughts a little bit more straightened out.

"I wonder how much more he will be taking this skating stuff and make it his main hobby. I guess that he will only keep this up for another few days or so. He has broken his arm two times already, I really doubt that even he will have the willpower to do it a third time. He will probably give up now since he is really smart on that level, but maybe he will keep this shit up a lot longer than we ever think he will." Davis gave his prediction and then Yolei was curious to see what was really going on in both these guys heads. She then remembered she needed to watch Cody soon.

"Totally changing totally, I think we need to watch Cody. Well, not we, but I do. If you want to join me doing so, you are more than welcome to do so. This is going to be tomorrow, and you can do whatever you want." Yolei said and then after she had said this, Davis thought that it was probably better for him to do this than force T.K. to hang out with him when this whole disaster was going down.

"Yeah, I will help watch Cody with you Yolei. Since I have nothing else to do and I can't really mess around with T.K. with his arm and he really needs the rest now." Davis said and then after he had said this, Yolei sighed in relief due to the fact that she always hated watching Cody all on her own. So with this, Davis and Yolei were getting onto more positive topics to talk about that for once not related to stuff like the racing that T.K. wanted to do and such.

"I wonder just what Cody will want us to do?" Davis was sort of pondering since Cody was always sort of more on the calmer side of things, and that he never really liked to do anything too crazy and ambitious. So this was something that Davis always did wonder every time he seen the kid if they started to change. One of these days, when Cody was older, he was going to take him out on the town and hopefully they would both be old enough to go to some place like the local bar or the strip joint. But he did not want to say that out loud since he did not want to ruin any thoughts that Yolei had with him.

"I would not really think that he is doing anything, he never does anything besides just read science books and try way too hard to expand some never ending desire for knowledge. He needs to go outside and play more. I think that is what we will do tomorrow. Maybe take him out to the park and try to get him some new friends, I am sure he will like it." Yolei looked up at the boring ceiling of Davis's room and wondered just how she can remodel it to make it less boring.

As this had been happening, Harold sat down in his living room tempted to smoke another. He even stared at the joint for a minute or so just not really too sure what to think. Then he stood up and then left it on the table, deciding to leave it alone. He had another place to visit now. It was the most important place to go to. He grabbed his car keys and as he had done so, he turned around and saw that there was his golden trophy standing there, even though he never had it in the first place. There was something written next to it saying "Keep your mind clear and aim for your true goals and you will see what life has in store for you." That was something his father used to say to him, and then he shook his head in wonder as he left the house and to his car as the sound of the never ending rain was getting to him now.

Harold drove on over to Clair's house trying to think of something to tell her. Then he remembered something for a moment. He drove right back to his house and then he rummaged through his stuff again and found the clothes that Clair had given him a moment ago. He grabbed the clothes and then put them on and then he went down to his garage and grabbed a shovel. With that, he left the house once again and drove to the soccer field.

It took like half an hour to drive there, but he took out his shovel and started digging while the empty field and game score lights from the last game were flashing right behind him and he was digging harder until he dug a hole seven feet deep into the ground. He found a small box in there. Right where he and Clair had placed it all those months ago. He took out the box and by this point his clothes were totally covered with grime and rain as he was looking inside and found a video that Clair recorded back in the day that she wanted her and him to watch when he felt more dedicated to tackle this relationship. He ran to his car again with the tape and all the other tiny things of the box and he was ready for her to show this to him with the empty box, the shovel, and the seven foot hole now in the football field for somebody else to deal with.

As he was driving down to Clair's house, the ads of hundred foot buildings, ideas of the next flying cars, transportation from Japan and United States by a single track instead of a plane were playing. Harold took it calmly as he saw people talking to each other and watching as they were all getting soaked to the core and a couple of homeless people trying to get money. Harold wondered how long it would take for hoover boards to come to earth and how long it would take before robots would take up the entire army. From what he read, androids were already starting to become a thing and the projects have been going on since the 30's, but now public knowledge was leaked of it.

After Harold pulled up at her parking lot Clair saw this happen and she opened her window and saw Harold with his old clothes and the tapes. "I'm sober now!" Harold yelled and she seemed to see the more truthful side to him when he said this, and then she decided to let him inside the house once again, but this time in a much more approved situation and then they popped in the tapes to start watching them.

"It seems like everything will go to the way that they should have been." Clair said as she wrapped her arms around Harold and was messing around with the shirt that he had. Harold looked down at her and he wondered if she was taking this the way that he had expected. Perhaps it would be time, but they should wait until the tape was finished and they would not have any distractions.

Meanwhile at the soccer field, there was a guy in a gas mask staring down at the seven foot hole. He touched the dirt and then he examined it closely and he knew that in just those ten to fifteen minutes it took the young man to get from there to his girlfriends house, that the monster already started heading there. With that, he took out something that looked like a lightsaber from Star Wars and then turned it on to reveal a red blade and then he turned whispered "Nobody messes with my family." Then he headed out of the soccer field to take on this monster.

The next day, T.K. woke up and he saw a duffel filled up in front of of clothes, a red journal and six blue ball point pens, extra wrapping for his arm cast in case he needed it, and the bag was on top of his skateboard. He grabbed the bag after he zipped it up, feeling the pain in his arm even worse now than he did before and his mother just said simply to him "Your father is picking you up in ten minutes and taking you to a summer camp with Matt. He and I both agreed that this is going to teach your discipline and how to act when around other people. Something that you clearly lack. We agreed on this last night and you will only be taking what is in that bag and your skateboard. We will not be debating this, and Matt was already going to the camp, so he is going to watch you. While you are on your way there, your father will talk to you more on this." His mother said and then he looked down at his arm cast and the pain was killing him. He truly was not super man. He truly did need to treat his body better. So he nodded, grabbed his bag and the board and then headed outside waiting on the steps staring out to the streets all sad feeling like he didn't want to do this and he was just staring at his broken arm hating himself for the next nine minutes before his father showed up.

Soon enough his father pulled up in the drive way and T.K. just placed the duffel bag and skateboard inside of the car and he got in shot gun seat. After he did so, he looked over at his father and the car started driving by. "In other recent news, scientists have been called down to examine the dead body of something that looked like a dog like seven foot tall monster that was found dead in a side walk around seven in the morning. There was a giant gash on the side of this monster and it has left people wondering if aliens do exist after all." T.K.'s father's face turned cold when he heard that and he instantly changed the channel on the radio.

It took about an hour or two to drive there and T.K. quickly fell asleep and his father would glance down every few seconds to really ponder what went wrong with his kid to make him think this was a great idea in the first place. But when the drive was over, T.K.w as forced to wake up and his father said to him before he left "Treat your brother well, treat your cabin mates well and most of all don't do anything dangerous. We don't want a second broken arm. Go to cabin six, that is where Matt is." After that, T.K. left the car with his items and went to cabin six like his father asked and when he did, he saw his brother there setting up the cabin.

"The others will be coming soon. Better make yourself at home. This will be your home for the next three months." Matt said and then T.K. flopped the duffel bag on the coffee table and his board right next to one of the beds and he flopped right onto the bed with his broken arm over his eyes to cover sunlight.

It was then when Joe woke up from his dream totally out of it. He saw that it was one in the after noon and he got right out of the car, having no idea where he was. He walked up to the first building he could find to ask for directions and he found one. It was made of wood and looked like it was over fifty years old. Joe knocked on the door and as he saw the door open there was six people in the cabin. All of them were younger than him, ranging from twelve to sixteen. It was after he saw that there was a guy with a broken arm and a V-Loser sign on it that he knew he walked into the summer camp he seen in his dreams. But before that could be asked about, there was snow falling down from the sky... in July.

Chapter Text

Chapter 6: The Terrible Night at the Casino (1966)

After Ken had woken up for the first time in some place that he was not even sure if he was imagining or not, he was just trying to figure some things out for himself as to find out where he was and what he needed to do in order to get himself back to at least some form of normalcy. It was hard for him to even comprehend ninety percent of the stuff that he was seeing. But he was willing and forcing himself to at the very least try.

He saw that there was a giant bedroom. As he was looking around the giant bedroom, there was a huge bottle with heads in it as well as things that showed mementos as if the place was sort of like a treasure room that he had been forced to be thrown inside. As if he was actually a treasure for the person who had lived in here and that Ken was going to be killed and then put up in the house and then the next time that a person was here, they would be wondering just what the fuck was even going on. "Oh, the young man is waking up again. He seems to be confused about everything is going on. Maybe he will be willing to finally talk with me now that he is able to comprehend what is around him." The thing that was in the house said and then the more that Ken looked at them, the more that he was wondering if this was even a real human. It really did not even look like a human at all. They had actually looked like a octopus thing that was wearing a doctors clothes and they were looking at Ken as if wondering what the hell Ken was even like in the first place.

"Where the hell am I? Last time I checked, I was dealing with something that looked like a blue gate. Now I am here in front of something that looks like a octopus doctor. I feel like I am dreaming or something." Ken had said and then when he had said that, the octopus thing looked at Ken and then they smiled and they were wondering what Ken was even talking about.

"I have never seen anything like you before. You look like something that I had heard about in books before. As if you were somebody who has come back to life years after your kind has gone extinct." This thing was saying to Ken and as they had been talking more, the more that Ken was really starting to think that he was dreaming after all. Which was more realistic than anything that was going on at the moment. That was what he was telling himself at the very least. But then he stood up and he was feeling like he was already going to fall on the ground.

"I can barely walk at all. I feel like I am a little bit sick. Please explain to me what is going on right now. I can't stay here and not have any answers." Ken said and he was walking around slowly and each step that he had taken was getting a little bit easier for him to do this. Then with that, he tried to take things slowly and the slower that he was going, the better that he had been able to walk on this whole way.

"You probably need to relax for a little bit longer. You may not want me to tell you this. But I found you asleep in the forest. I did not really know what to expect of you when I first saw you. When I found you, I took you in and have been taking care of you since then and trying to make sure that when you did wake up, you would be ready to take on what is going on around you and you will be ready for the new life that you are most likely going to have to try to live." The octopus thing said and then Ken turned around to see what the hell they were actually talking about.

"What is going on? How long was I out? Please just tell me the truth." Ken said and then when he had said that, the octopus creature was quiet a little bit and then when they were quiet for a little bit, Ken was preparing himself for some news that he knew was going to be really hard for him to take in. He knew that there was no way that he was going to take this whole news too well and he knew that he was probably going to freak out.

"You have been in a coma for a decently long time. Probably longer than you have been in your entire life to this point in time. You have been asleep for eleven days. Right now it is July 31st, and you have been here ever since July 20th. I hope that you are not going to freak out too much over this news. I tried my best to make sure that you could wake up, but I did not really find a way that can get you up. I am very sorry for you." The octopus thing said and then Ken looked at the mirror close by and Ken could not believe he had been away from home for nearly two weeks. Asleep nearly two weeks. Nearly two weeks since Sam had died. He wondered if his parents thought he himself was dead as well

"What can I do now? I really need to get back to my house and I need to let them know that nothing is going on and that I am totally fine. I have a feeling that they are going to be really scared to see that I have been gone for so long and when I come back and show them that I am alive, they are going to be super happy and that this is going to get them so happy that it will make up for everything so far." Ken said and he was starting to get more serious about being with his parents again and showing them he was totally fine and at least one child was alive of theirs.

"Well, I don't really think I have a way to help you find your house. That is sort of out of my power. I hope that this does not really bother you too much. I'm sorry dude, but this is your own life now. You need to start to accept the fact that there is nothing of your past that will be given back to you. You are alone now and once you step outside of this house, you are going to be alone. How old are you?" The octopus thing was saying and then when they asked Ken that, he looked over at the strange being as if wondering what the point of that was.

"I'm sixteen years old. Not really all that old. I doubt that I will be able to last too long on my own. But if that is truly how it is and that is all I can do, then I guess that maybe I will accept this challenge." Ken answered and then the octopus guy looked at Ken and they were wondering how Ken could say that sixteen was not that old. That would be old enough to sort of take care of themselves and accept the terrible reality of being alone.

"Sixteen is more than old enough for you to go out and live your life in the outside world. There is a lot of stuff that somebody your age can do. So please don't give me the fact that you are not old enough. Despite what your culture will try to tell you, sixteen is in fact an adult and you better start treating yourself like one. But yourself whatever you want, do what you need to survive. But the fact is that you are on your own. You are not a kid anymore, take charge. Be the man that you are supposed to be." The octopus had said and then when they had said that, Ken started to get near the entrance of the house.

"Well, if this is what you believe in and what you think that I can do right now that can give me some good resources to handle this world of your world more?" Ken asked and then he looked at the octopus thing looked at Ken and they thought about his question. It was a valid question, but they were not really sure if there was any good answer of if there was nothing that can be given to him at this very moment until he went out and explored more. But then they remembered something.

"There is a swords master. Quite a interesting digimon. If you go to them and tell them that I sent you there and that you need to be taught some moves, they will probably be more willing to work with you than normally. So yeah, try that place out and maybe you can actually be able to get some good training and that way you can have something to defend yourself with." The octopus digimon that Ken assumed that was what this thing was now said and then Ken was slowly realizing this was the world that it was, not one he would have any good weapons besides a fucking centuries old thing that would break down upon hitting something hard.

"Okay here is the thing, I don't think that I can be able to fight things off with a sword. So while I am able to appreciate your offer and the fact that you want to help me, but I just do not see myself being able to put this thing to use. However, I could be wrong and if I am wrong, I will come to that training house and then maybe I will be able to use your sword master training house after all." Ken said and then as he had said that, the digimon looked at Ken as if trying to see if he could survive out there on his own.

"Please young man, do not mess with me. If you do not see that guy, I will most likely see you dying here. I do not want to see you die so soon after you have woken up. Just go there and tell him that you were sent here by me. This will make things so much better for you. Trust me, I know that I am telling the truth here." The octopus digimon said to Ken and when they had said that, Ken was starting to think that maybe they were right and that Ken really should check this thing out after all.

"Fine, you win. I will go out and give it a try. After all, if for nothing else, it might be able to get a few days to see what the hell this world is like and why you think I need to do all of this after all. I don't really know if this will work out too well or not, but I will see what I can be able to do here before I start to do things that will start to get even more dangerous for me. Since I have a feeling I am going to be in danger a lot coming up." Ken said and then he turned to the house door and the digimon had said one final thing to him.

"If you find the man in the purple jacket, do not come to him. Just leave him as fast as possible. He has all intentions to just use you and then when he is done using you, he will throw you away and then you will die sooner than Sam had been able to die. I know all about Sam. After all, I heard what you were saying during your sleep." The octopus digimon said that one final thing, and then when they had said that, Ken left the house and he started to go on and investigate the world and seeing what he could do. He was not really too sure if this place was really going to be the place that this digimon had been hyping up, but there was always the good idea to give it a chance and see what the hell was going on here and what he can do to survive.

When he was outside of the house, he saw that there was a small town that looked like it had been used for the setting of some form of western setting. Ken was going to go around and he was going to see if maybe he could get some advice from any of these things on what the hell a digimon was. It was just so strange since he felt like he was inside of a fiction world when this was supposed to be real life. This stuff was really fucking with him more than it probably should have by this point in time.

Ken then saw that there was a bar and he walked up to it. If the digimon that was talking to him earlier was saying that Ken was already an adult despite only being sixteen years old, maybe he could get away with lying and saying that he was going to be old enough to drink. Yeah, it was really silly for that to be the first thing for him to think about, but this was going to be something that he was probably never going to be able to do again so he was going to take care of it. Afterwards, when he was at the bar, Ken saw that there was no sign saying the limit to how old he had to be to go inside of this bar. He decided that he was going to give this a try after all and see what would happen.

So Ken walked on inside of the bar and when he was inside of the bar, he saw that there was probably a ton more of these so called digimon in the area. Some of them looked like wolf rip offs and while Ken would agree that it had looked cool, he was still very much confused and he had no idea how he was going to be able to figure any of this out. So Ken sat down in one of the chairs and he was looking around to see what type of drink he would be able to have and get away with it.

"Hey, I would like a scotch." Ken said and then he looked down and then he saw that he had thirty dollars in his pocket. He thought that maybe the digimon who took care of him slipped in some money so that way he would be able to have something that could get him going and that way he could be able to buy some things. The digimon looked at him and then nodded. The digimon was a brown dog with what looked like grey armor as their clothes. Ken probably thought that whatever the hell this thing was, he was probably looking at something that served in a war. Or whatever the hell a war was in this world and all that. The digimon started to make Ken the drink he had asked for with no reference to saying he might be too young.

"Here you go, that will be two dollars." The digimon said and then Ken pulled out three dollars, two for the payment and one for the tip. The digimon looked down at this and they decided not to mention the fact that they had paid one more than they had said he needed. He never got a tip before, so they do not really get the concept of what being a tip was like and all of that stuff. This was when Ken was going to bring up the point that was really confusing him this whole time and he needed to just get at least some form of answer.

"Why did you not tell me that I was too young to drink? I thought that there was an age that I had to be in order to actually drink, or am I just going crazy?" Ken was saying and then that digimon started to look at Ken as if he totally were insane and was wondering what the hell this guy was on and if he was just messing around this whole time. Then they thought that it was no real big deal.

"There is no drinking age. You can drink pretty much as soon as you can be able to pay for the drink. We have six year old drinking here and it doesn't bother me. As long as they have the money that is needed to pay, then we are all good." The digimon had said and then when the digimon said that, Ken was taking the drink and just said that he was a little bit confused and was sorry if he had caused any sort of confusion for that guy as well. Then when he was drinking, everything was going pretty decently and he was just sort of getting himself to actually enjoy being in this world after all and he thought that maybe this type of world would actually be something he could get used to.

"Hey, do you know of how I can get to the swords master near by here? I was told that I needed to find this one guy and then he could teach me the things I needed to know to be able to survive in this world." Ken said to the digimon who was serving up the bar and he was wondering what the hell Ken was talking about, but they decided that they were probably just trolling around and that Ken was just sort of out of his mind right now.

"Just walk for a couple of hours. They are near the exit of a road but down a very large pathway in order to avoid anybody coming in there. I don't know the exact house, but that is what I have heard form before." The digimon said and then Ken finished his drink and then he slammed down the cup just hard enough to make a noise but soft enough to not break it and then he thanked the digimon and then he headed on out away.

When Ken was out of the bar, he was walking down the edge of this pathway and he was getting ready to confront this digimon and whatever they were going to be able to teach him. He needed a strong thing with him for him to be able to actually survive in this whole world. He had no real clue what he was going to do here, and he had no real clue if he was even going to be accepted into this at all. In fact, he was pretty sure that he was not going to be accepted. But he could come up with a good reason for him to maybe get a couple of days. Maybe if he said that he was only going to be there for the weekend, then maybe the digimon would be more willing to work with him then since it would only be for one weekend. But that was what he was thinking at that moment. He was not really even sure if that was going to be how it would go. But he was sort of getting his hopes up.

The more that he was walking down these barren streets, the more that Ken was hearing about different things about how the world was just barely saved from total destruction a few months ago and now it is going back to the mess that it already had been just two months later and that they needed to start to work together again to make sure that the world did not get fucked up once again. It was making Ken wonder how the world so called nearly ended a couple of months ago and how it also so called only built up again to be sort of taken away once more. It just simply strange for him and he was not really sure what he was going to feel when he found out the truth.

The closer that he was to accepting the fact that he was not going to be returning home anytime soon, if he ever would at all, the more that he was just wanting to figure out what was going on here and he was needing to see if he could help out at all. While when he grew older, he started to gain much more cynical and hateful than he had ever been before, there was still a period of time back in the day when he was still wanting to help out and he had actually thought of the idea that he was able to make a true difference. But he started to think as he slowly got older and older that this was just not going to happen and when he started to think that this was not going to happen, the more that his world was becoming more of the one that his friends and the general world would know of him as when he had gotten much older.

This was getting really hard for him to really get used. Just because he had started to accept the fact that he was going to be doing this in the first place and the fact that he was not really going to be ready for anything that was going to be thrown at him, but he was still going to very much try since he knew that there was nothing that could be worse than just sort of wasting your life away. That was something he learned in his freshmen year. That you need to always work as hard as you can and make sure that you never waste any of your time since time is precious and everybody should try to do all with it that they are able to really do.

After the sun was starting to set, Ken had seen the pathway that he thought he was going to have to start going down. Ken figured that he should get going down there right away. As he was walking down this pathway, he was slowly having this strong feeling that this was where he needed to be and not only that, but maybe he should have always been there right from the start and that he should have never wasted any time just going around to any other place and that he should have been spending the last eleven days here instead of just sleeping around and wasting all of his time sleeping and being in a short term coma.

The pathway took nearly fifteen minutes for him to actually go down this pathway and he was kind of amazed at how long it had actually taken for him to be going down there, as he thought he would have been able to reach it much faster. But soon enough, after just going down a pathway with trees all at the side so there was no interference, he eventually reached the front door. He knocked at the front door of this place and when he knocked at the door, he was thinking about what to say. Soon enough, the door answered and he was shocked at how little he needed to wait at all for this. "Hey, I was told that this would be a good place for me to go to when I woke up for the first time in several days and that maybe you should be able to help me out find my way and get something I can use to fight with."

"You seem to be rather blunt about your intent on why you are here. I will give you that much. But what the hell do you plan on doing here to prove to me that you truly are ready for the tests that you are going to be taking when and if I do allow you to be here as my apprentice?" The digimon said and they had a large scar on their right eye and they seemed to be wondering just what a random human was doing in this world at all.

"You should not be in this world. You are not of our kind. I have no idea what you are doing here. Unless if that is that this world is starting to already fall apart. Which would be really awful considering the fact that we had just restored this world for the first time in several years a few months ago. Please tell me why you are wanting to train with me to begin with?" The digimon said and Ken was trying really hard not to think and constantly look at the scar on that persons face. They had not wanted to give off the impression that this is the only thing that they cared about since they felt that if this was the case, they would be looked at as a utter asshole.

"I just decided to come here since I was told by the people here that I needed to come here. There is nothing else to it. I don't want to give off a fucking essay as to why I need to be here and I have no idea how or why I even got to this place in the first place. So if you want, you should just cut off the I wonder shit and just work with me here." Ken said and then when he had said that, the digimon looked at him and there was a moment they were starting to get really pissed. But then they thought that maybe them being pissed off could be something that they can use for the training of this guy after all and then Ken can be able to improve after all and then he can become a apprentice that could be of use to the world.

"Right now, you have a long way to go and I really highly doubt that you guys have a true way that you can before what the world needs right now. But that being said, I can see that if I work with you, you can be the man who can bring peace and prosperity to the world." The digimon said and then after the digimon said that, Ken was looking around as the digimon started to open the door for Ken to go inside of. When Ken was inside of the house, he started to look around it to see what exactly it was like and what he could do to work with the digimon and how he could so call improve and be a good hero. He highly doubted that he needed to be a hero or that he wanted to be a hero or that he could be a hero. There was so much to go with. Ken just thought that maybe he can just learn more of what was going on and then he could eventually figure out where to go now. And then he could start to avenge Sam and then find the guy in the purple jacket.

"Look, I really feel as if training you might be a genuine mistake and that you could not really go all that far in life. But I have a feeling that you could be the only one who can take care of the upcoming threat in the world. That is if there even is one that is coming up and all that. I am not really gong to take the risk here and I am going to let you train here under the condition that you do not reveal where I live to the others and that once you are done, then you go to the ultimate training hall of JewelBeemon. Only when you are done will I reveal to you where JewelBeemon lives. That is the only time that I truly will trust you to take care of this." The digimon said and then when they had said that, they told Ken to just follow him for a little while.

"You will not be able to learn how to be a sword master if you do not even have one. You are going to need one if you want to be able to become a sword master. I know that you will probably be thinking that this is a strange weapon to use and that a gun might be much better. But in your world, the roles of a sword and gun are reversed. Where while a gun is basically able to win a war in your world and that a sword is totally useless, in this world the gun is a very dated thing and just won't be able to really hold up, but a sword can slice through things very easily if you know just how to use it properly. Not to say that a gun does not have their own uses. Of course it does." The digimon was continuing their lecture and they opened a door that showed a bunch of sword types and one of them was a wooden one.

"I do not trust you to take on the major one quite yet. I know that you probably want to get into the real action. I do not blame you for feeling that way. However, you are not quite ready to take on that major responsibility yet. In a couple of days, if you are able to show me that you can work well with it, I will let you have one of the real ones. But I want you to learn more first." This digimon said and then pulled out the single wooden sword in their collection. "I only have one here since I only take one apprentice at a time. I go by the ideal of one master and just one apprentice so that way both of the people or digimon can learn how to work with each other as best as possible. I think that once you see it for yourself, you will be able to see why I feel this way."

"How many digimon or people have you gone on and trained here? I am curious to know how much you have been able to use your skills to pass on the line to other digimon." Ken said and then he grabbed the wooden sword, not really sure what to think about this too much. He did not really know if he liked the idea of having a sword or not, and since he had never used one before, this was going to be one of the more interesting things that he was probably going to do in this world and on this quest that Ken thinks he is sort of forced to take on now.

"I have had seven apprentices in my twenty two years of being a sword master. My teacher was a human just like you. He taught me for a year when he was a little bit older than you. Then when that was done, I was left to go on and see what I can do. Every three to four years,a new apprentice shows up and I teach them for about a year as well until I think they are ready to go on and go to the world once more. I do not know if I will be able to teach you for that long given how much you probably have to do. But I guess that maybe you and I should probably get ready on all of this if you want to be able to at the very least fight on your own. I will probably not be able to teach you all of the different moves on how to fight, but I will at the very least teach you the very basic moves on how you can be able to win the battles. So this is going to be like level one teaching." The digimon said and then when they had said that, Ken looked down at the sword and he was not really sure what to think about all of this now.

Ken and the digimon went inside a small training session and Ken was told to be able to try and dodge some attacks. He was not really expecting Ken to be able to fight fully, be he thought that dodging was going to be a good early exercise that he could be able to learn and all of that stuff. Ken held up the sword and each time that there were a couple of swings at Ken, the sword was dodging the attack and this had gone on for three or four sessions and it had seemed that after those amount of times, the teacher was starting to let go on that and think that at the very least, Ken knew how to block and all of that stuff. "I know that this was pretty easy for you to figure out, and I was going to be more shocked had you not been able to learn that, but I was wanting to make sure that this was the very least you could be able to pull off."

The next day during the lesson, the teacher decided that they would try to teach Ken simple moves such as how to get a jab in right under the arm of the opponent. "It seems like something that anybody can do without too much teaching, but in reality like any other move you have to put more effort into it if you want to make it so that it does not like you are just swinging around with no real clear goal in mind." The digimon then took a step back after they said that and then held out their right arm as they were doing the movement of the stab and then Ken tried to do the same and he hopped a little bit as he was about to bring in a jab but the digimon kicked him to the side and then Ken fell down to the ground. Ken then stood up and then he took a couple of steps back to make sure that he had some room but then when the digimon started to get closer to him, Ken made yet again another jab at the digimon and then this time he actually did manage to touch the armor a bit, which was what the digimon had wanted him to do at the first place.

"I wonder how many different types of moves that there are." Ken had said and then when he had said that, the digimon decided to remain silent as they were going to let Ken start to see that for his own throughout all of the training that he was going to have to deal with. On the second day, Ken was taught how to do a proper swing. He was told that a swing was not just a matter of moving your arms around in a way that makes it look like you are just doing stuff right on the spot. But then the digimon showed what they would consider a proper swing to look like and how it would require both arms and a slow swing. Ken put both his hands on the hilt and then when he was swinging, he was doing his best to make sure that it was slow and that the digimon would be able to approve of that whole thing. Ken had to take a couple of times, since he was not really sure if he was actually going to do this correctly and he knew that this was just something that he was not really going to be able to master on just the first couple of tries. When he took a couple of tries, the digimon thought that Ken was probably going to do this as best as he could. So he just called off the lesson and told Ken to just let it go now. "How many more things do you plan on having me learn if you just want me to learn the pure basics and nothing else at all? I don't know how many days or nights you want me to stay here."

"I have no idea how much longer I can be able to have you here. Soon enough, I doubt I will be able to have enough time and I will be forced to kick you out so that way you can go on and start to follow your destiny." The digimon that was trying to train Ken said and then when they had said that, Ken was thinking that this was starting to not really be what he had needed and that he needed something more than just a basic amount of training if he had wanted to have a chance to so call save the world that he was just possibly thrown into that might not even be the same as earth at the end.

In the next day, the teacher digimon handed Ken a shield. When they had handed Ken this shield, this was when Ken was wondering why he would ever need one in the first place. "I doubt that I will be able to really give you any good defenses. So I will try and come down at you and I just expect you to block it." The digimon said said and right when they had said that, the digimon swung down their sword right down at Ken and then Ken was forced to block it. This attack was so out of nowhere but at the same time he knew that he should have seen it coming. Then Ken took a couple of steps back and there was more and more when Ken was being swung towards and then Ken had to keep blocking. It had gotten to the point in which Ken was blocking so much he had a feeling he knew how to use a shield more than he had known how to use a sword.

On the next day of training, right before the session had started, the digimon turned around to Ken and looked at them as if they were trying to decide if they should do what they had been planning on doing or if they should wait a couple more days. "After we are done today, I want to speak with you on something else. I think that you need to prepare yourself for that." The digimon said and then when they had said that, the digimon had told Ken that this was going to be duel. The duel was pretty short lived since it had involved the digimon swinging their sword down a couple of times and then Ken moved his sword around a couple of times and as he was doing so, the digimon had been managed to be touched a couple of times with the wooden blade. This so called duel had been lasting for about three to four minutes before the digimon jumped back and said that it was over. "I just wanted to see if you were able to pull this off after all. Seems like you can do a relatively decent job holding yourself up."

"So what is going on now? What do you want me to do now?" Ken had asked and then when he had asked this, the digimon led Ken to the exact same room that he had been led to at the very start of this training stuff a few days ago. When he was there with his short term master, the group was all wondering what there was they even needed to do. The digimon was just shaking their head since they were not wanting to do this but they had felt like they needed to do this.

"I think you need to head out on your quest. All you need to do is to go to all of the gangs in the area and you need to take them all down. If you can take down the four gangs, you might actually be able to have a chance on being able to save the city and then I think that JewelBeemon will be more likely to go on and accept you as being one of the apprentices to this group. I just feel as if you are the one who is supposed to go on and do this job, and while you may not be ready for this job, I still feel as if perhaps you are going to be the one who can have it all figured out." The digimon had said and then they looked down at Ken and Ken was pretty not wanting to do this, but he had a terrible feeling deep down inside that this digimon had been telling the truth.

"I don't like it, and I really wish that I was not the one who was going to be forced into this, but I have a feeling that you are telling the truth. And that is going to be the only reason why I will be saying yes to this. And you are going to be the only reason that I have a feeling that I may have even a small percent chance on being able to save the city at all. Since you did give me a couple of days of being able to practice and learn from here." Ken said and he was still not really able to believe just how little he was going to be training and how much he was pretty much thrown into this whole thing.

"Here you go. This weapon is going to give you a little bit of a edge on how to be able to be ready to take on the four gangs. It might not be all that you need. But this will give you at the very least a start and you will be able to have at least a small chance of being able to win this war. Well, I guess not really a war as much as just a short term battle that you will have to deal with." This digimon had said and gave Ken this black sword that looked like it had been made out of some sort of moon stone. He decided not to ask since he had a feeling that really did not matter.

"You need to probably head out as soon as possible. You need to realize that you have a lot of stuff to do and that every hour you waste here you are going to be increasing the chances that you will probably fail this test." The digimon had said and then when that was said to him, Ken grabbed the sword and then afterwards, there was a shield that was given to Ken as well. "You need to head out as soon as possible. Once you are out of this house, your adventure is going to pick back up and we will probably never see each other again."

Then with that, Ken nodded and while he didn't like this, it was the truth and then Ken headed out of the house and it took him less than five minutes for it to feel as if he was never really there to begin with and like he was never really taught anything at all and that he had wasted like five days of his life. Five days that he was supposed to be saving the world he supposed but it was just too hard for him to really think that he was the one who was going to be saving the world or anything crazy like that. He was thinking that maybe he was just playing his part in history and that he truly did not matter all that much and that even if there was not him on there, he would be the one who was forgotten all in history. This was what would make sense to him to be totally honest.

He was walking along and as he was walking, the more that he was thinking about going to that town that he had been in earlier. He thought that maybe this was going to be a little bit hard for him to really figure out and he was thinking that he just needed to sort of figure more things out if he had any real chance of finding even a single one of these gangs. In fact, he was still thinking about the gangs and how there was even a chance that one of them would be able to take over an entire city or anything like that. He felt like there was no real chance something like that could happen, but he was telling himself that anything could happen and that he just needed to be more ready.

It took a few hours for him to go back to where he had been starting his adventure at. A difference of four to five days was barely even a difference on the calendar and even less of a difference in the city. The exact same digimon were there pretty much and it was as if Ken was there the entire time and that there was nothing that Ken could even be able to find that could even show that he was there in the first place besides the two things on his body that showed he was at the house.

Ken was checking everything out and when he was checking everything out, Ken had been sure that there was pretty much nothing that he could do at that moment that would really give him any clues. He just had some form of feeling that there was nothing in the town that could give him any real clues. He thought that maybe he could ask a couple of digimon around, but that this would be all that he really could be able to do. Then he saw that there was a building that looked a little bit like a casino about three quarters of a mile away. When he had seen this casino, he thought that perhaps there would be a digimon or two that would be there to give him some answers.

So he started to walk on towards the casino and as he was walking there, the more that he was coming up with stuff that he could perhaps say to the digimon there to make them think that they could be able to help him out. There was just so many things that he needed to do in order for them to really get what he was trying to do. Not that they would be able to truly help him out and give him all of these answers, but he thought that even just a couple of answers would be enough to sort of give him ahead start on what to fucking do now. As he was getting to the front entrance of the casino, well he should say one of like the five entrances to the casino considering how fucking many doors there were, Ken decided to just look at the bright scenery and flowers that were all over the place and then Ken thought that had he failed this quest, then everything would be totally fucked. All of the work that had been put down would be thrown away and then there were be nothing that he could really do about it to make himself feel better about what the hell was going on.

He opened the front door to the casino and then when he had opened the front door to the casino, he was looking around and then he was starting to think that he was a little bit wrong about this. All he had seen was just a bunch of digimon walking around and they were all in super fancy clothes. Which already made Ken pretty much have a totally off outfit in the setting. Not only that, but then there was a huge group of digimon that were just playing poker or the digital world equal to poker. Ken was wondering what their version of the game was even like, but he was forced to tell himself that this doesn't matter and that he needs to focus more on the bigger things in mind. He needed to just focus on the bigger picture and that was the idea of him figuring out what the hell he needed to do to hunt down these four gangs.

Ken decided to walk towards this poker game. He had not really thought that there was a gang there or anything, but he thought that maybe they would be able to give him at least a couple of ideas just to see what the hell is going on. "Hey, do you mind if I join the game? I promise that I won't cheat or anything." Ken had said and then the group looked up at Ken and then they had remained silent for a little bit and then after a couple of seconds of thought, they decided that there was no way, even with the sword, that he was not going to be too much of a trouble.

"You can sit down, just make sure you are paying attention and that you don't ask any stupid questions. You need to pay attention as that will be the only way you are going to be able to learn how to play this. We are not going to take any breaks just for you." The digimon that was handing out cards said. Ken sat down as he was thinking about how generic this digimon had looked and he thought that this digimon was just somebody that was needing to fully let themselves go since they were getting close to being that way anyways.

The digimon was wearing a bunch of white clothes, a giant white suit. There was blonde artificial hair that they had, almost as if Ken was looking at Fred Trump's son, wasn't his name like Donald or something? That guy was only a couple of years older than Ken. He was like twenty at the time while Ken was sixteen. Only a four year difference, which is basically only one presidential election. But then Ken was wondering why anybody had thought that the blonde fake hair was a sexy look. He didn't look down on people who looked that way, he just did not really agree with this at all.

After that sort of out of thought moment, Ken looked at the poker table and the whole time that the game was being played, he was not only paying attention to the rules, which he sort of knew what was going on as it was basically the exact same as the game of poker rules that there were on earth. But now he was paying attention to the words of plans and all of that stuff. "Once we get down to Vegas, the boss is going to be so happy that we managed to buy off this town. Every little town is a fair win for us. But this one is even more important than the others. After all, it is a good stopping spot for all the trade that our boss wants to do." The digimon said that was right next to them as they were chomping down on a cigar. The digimon did not even really think Ken hearing this was not too much of a problem due to the fact that they thought he was too dumb to get it and Ken was so good acting like he was focused on the game that it actually seemed like he was able to convince them he was only on that.

"We have a good reason to believe that there will be no real problem on taking this town over." The digimon who had allowed Ken to join the game was saying and then he placed down his card and it had seemed as if he was going to win this game fair and square. Ken was looking at the cards he had a little bit more and when he was doing this, he was thinking that there was actually a chance that he could be able to pull off a victory at this game and then with that, Ken started to lay down all the cards that he thought he would need and use to win the game and then everybody else saw the cards he put down and they were slowly starting to realize that he was going to win the game. Then he looked at the digimon and they were starting to think that he was a cheater and that he must have done something to fuck up the game.

"Well, now that I won the game, do I get anything besides the fame of winning a poker game against a bunch of Vegas workers?" Ken said and then he looked around as he was smiling and he was starting to think that there was a chance that they were actually going to give him the information that he had wanted. The digimon that looked a little bit like a Trump rip off sighed and they seemed to think that this was going to be really bad but that if he was able to win a poker game, that he could be a little bit useful.

"You and I are going to have a little bit of a talk. Meet me up in my hotel room on the third floor. Once we are there, then we can be able to talk more about the deal that I am starting to think up of a little bit. I think that you are really going to like my deal." The digimon said and the more that they were saying this, the more they were thinking that this plan could actually start to go on and work in their favor a lot more than they had thought that it would have been like. Ken stood up and then looked at the other digimon and then their boss said something to their digimon that made Ken think that maybe there was a different plan to all of this.

Ken and the digimon started to walk towards their hotel room. The more that Ken was getting to being there, the more that Ken was thinking that he could actually be able to start a good infiltration into that area and then when they find a good infiltration method, perhaps he could actually be able to move up on the rankings of this gang and then that can be how he takes at least one of the four of them down. He was really thinking that this whole thing was going to be one of the smartest ideas that he had and all he had to do was just get the digimon to work with him, if that was even totally possible at all.

When Ken and that digimon that looked like a Trump rip off reached their room, the digimon closed the door and then they looked at Ken a little bit more. "So how were you able to win the game when there was no real clear reason that you should have been able to pull that off? It just does not make any sense how you were able to pull it off." Ken then thought that maybe he could just tell the truth and maybe this could get the digimon a little bit more willing to go on and work with them.

"Well, my brother used to play poker a lot. He recently died about two to three weeks ago. I can't believe that it has been that long already. Anyways, after he died, I was thrown into this place and I was able to use the moves that he had taught me in order to win this poker game and I have nothing besides just pure good memory to be able to give me this victory." Ken said and then when he told that digimon this, the more that for just a split second the digimon started to feel a little bit bad for Ken.

"Well, I do have some sympathies for you. It is never easy to go on and lose a sibling. I do actually know how that feels like. Was in my early twenties. Sister died from a illness. But I guess that the sob stories are over since I need to make you an offer. I want to take you over to where my boss is at. I want to be able to talk with him on the idea of perhaps getting you to join us. I think that if you are able to learn this stuff so fast, that maybe you can actually be of some use after all. I know that you are probably going to say no, but I think that I can convince you." The digimon said and then they sat down and as they were sitting down, they had their left hand under their back and it was moving around. As if they were going to pull of something that looked like a gun and that Ken was going to have to use his weapon and start to fight off a little bit and save his life.

"Well, honestly, I do want to meet your boss. But I need to know that this is not a barter and that you are just going to throw me down in the dumpster when you are done with me. I have a terrible feeling that maybe you are going to just use me until you are done and then you are going to throw me away. I just know of a guy in the purple jacket that would do the exact same thing back in the time when I had known him." Ken said and then he put his hand closer to the hilt and then the digimon pulled out their gun and aimed at Ken.

"I got to admit, you seem to be smarter man than I gave you credit for. I was just going to lead you to the ally way and then kill you. But since you figured it out, I guess that I can cut off the suspense and give you the present of just getting it over with right here and right now." The digimon explained and then Ken took out his sword and then he aimed it right down to the front of that digimon. "Do you seriously expect me to be scared of you when I see a fucking sword? I have a gun, I can be able to take you out very easily." The digimon said and then they started to put their finger at the trigger and then Ken started to swing around.

Ken didn't even think about it and he was remembering the lesson that he had been taught by that one digimon earlier. He slashed right down and as he had done so, there was a huge slash on the chest of the digimon and after a fight that lasted less than three seconds, Ken had actually won the battle. Ken then put the sword away on his hilt and while he did have a short moment of guilt of killing a digimon, he was able to tell himself that it was just a artificial being and that there was nothing that he needed to feel bad for. Then he checked the pockets of this digimon and then he pulled it out of there.

He looked at the contents of the pocket and then he had seen that it was a large wallet. He saw that the wallet gave him the map that he needed to follow that would lead him right down to the business center of the boss. But then right as that was happening, there was a huge alarm. Ken knew that he should have been more careful about what he was doing and then within ten seconds, there was the doors being thrown open and then Ken was forced to take out his sword again. His right arm was his sword and then his left arm was his shield. "You should have been more smart about how you were going to take out our leader." The digimon said and then Ken looked around and he was taking a head count. There was like fifteen that he needed to fight and he saw that one of them had keys. Ken assumed that this would be the keys to a car. Ken thought that he just needed to take that digimon out and then get the keys and then he could drive down the map and then he could be done with this all.

Ken raised his sword up as if he was getting himself totally ready for striking down at least some of the enemies. The first digimon charged at him and Ken ducked underneath and then when he had ducked underneath he stood back up when he reached the other side and then stabbed that one in the chest, which was good enough to take that one out. When he had done that, he looked around and was trying to see what he could possibly do about the other digimon in the area. When the next one started to come towards him, Ken knew that this one was going to be harder than the last one with the fact that they were carrying two weapons.

This second digimon swung one of their weapons down at Ken and as a result, he was hit in the chest and then he almost fell down to the ground but the pain was so bad that he was forcing himself to stay upwards and not to fall down on the ground feeling as if he was going to die. With the pain that he was feeling, he was making himself stay up and as he was making himself stay up, he held onto the sword that was given to him by that one digimon teacher very tightly in order to make sure that it did not fall out of his hands as he was basically having his damn life depend on this very weapon, which to be fair, it kind of was the truth already even without the over blown tightness to it. As he was holding onto this sword as much as possible, he turned around and then he was ramming the blade as far into the digimon as he could, making sure that this would be what very clearly ended the entire battle and made it very clear that he was not going to be messed with at all on this world.

Then Ken turned around and he was now holding both hands on his blade since he had started to slowly learn his lesson on what he needed to do. He saw another digimon come at him and they made a very clear swipe by cutting off a couple one of his hairs but that was not really the huge problem. He just saw that that the digimon was trying to kill him by doing it in the quietest way possible as a possible way to make Ken not really think that he was going to be in too much trouble over what was going on. But when Ken was starting to see a little bit of the way that this digimon was starting to handle the situation, Ken jumped up and kicked the digimon's face which made the digimon very dazed at what was happening and then afterwards, Ken took the killing blow and despite already taking care of three of the digimon so far, he still had twelve more to go, which was starting to make him realize just how much work he really had to be doing.

Then afterwards, the fourth digimon that was coming towards Ken stabbed him right in the foot which made Ken give off a quick scream in pain but he realized that screaming in pain was not really going to make him win this battle but he was focused on that stabbing so much that for the next minute or so when Ken was fighting this digimon off, he was having one of his hands focus on trying to get that thing out. Eventually though, he just gave up and then slashed that digimon straight down like the one that he had dealt with probably about five minutes ago by this point in time. Then grabbed the sword and as he was holding the sword up that stabbed him, he threw it down to the ground well behind him in order to make it so that none of the digimon got tempted to take him out with it, but he was still having eleven more that he had to deal with and he was already getting visibly tired from all of this. Well, maybe not really tired since that made it sound like a small deal but he knew that if he dealt with this too much more, he was probably going to die really soon and that was what scared the shit out of him.

When Ken saw the fifth one come to him, he saw them just punch him right in the face and the punch was enough to make him fall to his knees and he was feeling like this was making his battle movements very limited and that his death was going to be very close to being here. But he was not going to go out without a try. He was going to make sure of that. He was not going to go out without at least some form of a try. Then he saw the digimon just kick him three times in the chest and then Ken was feeling like he was going to die. Ken was starting to cry a little bit out of all of the pain which was quite a shock for him to be totally honest. Then Ken just stabbed the digimon in the face when he saw that there was a short moment that he could do that and took that one down.

After he took that fifth one down, he still had a good ten to go. This was starting to really wear him down. As if he was really getting near his death and it was only his second day after he left the sword training spot. The sixth digimon was holding a club with spikes on it and the spikes hit Ken on the side of his chest and he was feeling like his bones had just broke or something but then Ken grabbed the digimon and as they were falling to the ground, he stabbed them really quickly not even wanting to give them a few seconds to break away from the movement Ken put them on.

The seventh enemy of Ken started to slowly approach him since by that point Ken had proven himself to be a true foe that should not really be messed around with. ken had proven himself to be a foe that should be taken seriously despite what people would start to think about him when they had first met him. They aimed their spear right up near his throat and the stab nearly worked, as they had gotten to his upper chest. But in the end, their stab was just too small to really get his throat and while Ken did produce a fair share of bleeding as a result of the stab, Ken did not feel too bad over it and then he punched that digimon right in the face to make that digimon start to feel a little bit more weak and then afterwards Ken stabbed down at that digimon to take them out.

Then Ken turned around to see what the other eight digimon were thinking since he still had a little more than half way to go before he had truly won the whole battle. But then the next one threw a ninja star at him and this one was a true surprise for Ken and it got his left arm and it made his left arm bleed so bad he wanted to die. Then he realized that it wasn't really that bad when he saw that he was able to pull it out of his arm and then after he had pulled it out of his arm, he threw the ninja star right at the digimon who had thrown it at him and then when he did that, he slashed at that digimon very quickly and then he took out his eighth foe, meaning that there was only seven more of them to go. So by now he was literally over half way there and it was just down hill from there on forward.

The ninth one started to come towards him and they they had been coming towards him, he saw what that one was going to do right away. He knew that he did not even really have to try all that hard to take that one out. He just put his hand on their face and them slammed them down on the ground but then as he had done that, he saw the digimon took out something that looked like a strange gas and then after they took out this strange gas looking thing, it started to make Ken gag and then he realized that this was meant to make him have a daze and not really be able to know what was going on. Ken stood up slowly and then he just stabbed down on that one, bringing his victory count up to nine now.

With about sixty percent of the battle all won by this point in time, he was looking around for the tenth opponent and then he saw that was one who had been taking out their gun. Ken was well aware of the thing that the five day or so master had told him that the guns were not really all that big of a deal in this area and that he was going to be able to very easily take care of this one. The gun shots started to get close to Ken and some of them even started to ruin a little bit of his pretty much already ruined clothes and then he easily took that one out when he sliced them in half. With that, ten of them were defeated and then there were only five of them more to go.

The eleventh one took out a boomerang. Ken thought that this was a strange weapon and thought that if for nothing else, he could be able to appreciate the creativity of that one. Then with that all done with, Ken then saw the boomerang just about to hit him and he was now more ready to take that one out knowing what was going to be coming for him. Then he fell down to the ground when out of nowhere, it swept him under from his feet. Ken then hit the ground and then the next digimon was getting ready to take him out but then he stabbed them from the ground very easily and when he was done with that, he looked up and around and saw that only four of them were left, just as he had expected it to be.

It was getting a little bit easy to take that one all done with, as there was the twelfth one that was coming towards him. When the next one had started to approach him, this one had brass knuckles and they got a couple of punches at Ken and Ken was feeling some of his guts on the verge of coming out and he was starting to think that maybe he was going to die very soon if this was not taken care of sooner. Then Ken was on the ground and then he was bleeding out of his nose. He started to slowly get himself up and as he was slowly getting himself up, he grabbed his sword again before any one of them had a chance to steal it from him and then he slashed that up a good two to three times and he was able to win the battle that way.

Afterwards, the next one came towards him and as the next came out towards him, they had something that looked like a taser. This one was going to be really easy for him to take care of. He just sliced off the arms of this digimon and then after he sliced their arms of, the cut them into three pieces and then afterwards, there was thirteen out of the fifteen done with now. Only two of them were left to go and Ken was getting to the point where once he won this battle, he probably was going to sleep for a few hours to slowly start to recover from the shit that he just dealt with.

When Ken had gotten to the last two digimon, he saw that one them pulled out a switch blade and Ken had to think for a second on how lame of a weapon that was as he started to go and fight with, but he had a horrible feeling that if he had started to think more like that, this digimon was going to somehow come in and then wreck him totally despite the fact that Ken was not expecting it to happen. For some reason, he was one of those people who always felt like something was going to go down and then be terrible when in reality, there was no real reason for him to feel that way. The switchblade stabbed a little bit into his chest and that hurt quite a bit, but then Ken grabbed the blade out of him and then he stabbed the switchblade into the digimon again and then he sliced that one down with the sword and now he only had one left to deal with.

On the final digimon, Ken saw that this one just happened to be the one who had the key. Ken rolled his eyes at his luck. Not that he really could do anything about it before that point either way, but this was still annoying that out of all of them, it just had to be the very last one of them all. But then with that, Ken looked around and found a urn for the flowers of this room and then that was when Ken saw that the thing was about to fall over. Ken grabbed that pot and then he slammed it down to that final digimon and there was blood on his hand as a result of all of this and then he took out the final digimon by stabbing them in the face. Then he slowly grabbed the key and afterwards put it in his pocket and then he laid down on the bed and then he started to close his eyes and start to go to sleep.

After Ken had woken up, he was feeling really stiff and he was not quite sure if this was what he was actually seeing. He started to look around and he had seen that it was about nine hours after he had gone to sleep. Nine hours of sleep was a decent amount, but he had felt like he needed way more to make up from the fight that he had to deal with and the fact that he had pretty much just basically died and had he not slept at all, he would have been dead for sure. He looked and saw that his key was still there and he was really happy that this was still there. He picked up his sword again and he was going to continue being a blade runner even if he had never wanted to admit that this was the fucking case.

Then after he had left the room and grabbed the map once more on his way out, he was getting ready to figure out where he was supposed to go and what the hell he was supposed to be doing. He walked down the stairs and he was starting to feel really brain dead the more that he was walking down there. The lights and burning sensation of this casino was starting to really mess with his brain and he was starting to doubt if he was actually at the place he slowly started to accept that he was actually at. It had taken him several days for him to even start to get used to, but he was forcing himself to get used to the place and honestly the place was not too bad, he just did not like all the constant fear of dying.

Then he had walked down the stairs fully and when he was in the normal room once more, he was seeing a bunch of digimon looking at Ken as if they were wondering if he was okay and if he needed even more rest than the amount that he had gotten to this point in time. He was not really sure if he could be able to let them know what had happened, considering the fact that he was pretty much always going to be near death probably even if he had not wanted to be this way, and he was getting outside as all of the rich digimon who wanted to rob Ken for the sword that he had, decided to just leave him alone as they had decided that it probably was not really even worth going out of their way and harassing him over this.

After he was outside, Ken started to look around the area for a car and he was walking backwards as he was slowly getting back to the stream of thought that was keeping him alive in the first place, and he was slowly starting to get over the fact that he pretty much had nearly died like six or seven times. The casino lights were not really as bright and annoying after he had gotten used to it for the first few minutes. Not that it really would matter considering the fact that he was going to leave this place soon anyways and when he leaves the place, he would probably be driving down a huge road that would probably be really bleak by comparison.

Soon enough, he found the white car of the area and then he put the key inside the lock and then he opened the door of the car. Then Ken slowly got inside the car and the only part that was still hurting all of this time was his back. He turned on the car and then he started to drive down on the way to the destination of the map. The more that he was driving, the more that he was seeing the setting change from a bleak and destroyed city, well more like village, and he was seeing that the forest was actually really nice and that this would be a good place for somebody to try to drive down on a normal day if they had been given more chances.

Chapter Text

Chapter 7: The Desolate Wastelands

When Ken was driving along, he had been thinking deeply on how he can be able to have a life that meant even more than the life that Sam had lived. Ken was not wanting to admit it, but up to that point in time, Sam truly did have a much bigger and more impressive life than Ken had. But then again, Ken thought that he was still enough young enough to go and change these things up and that eventually, he can have a bigger and better life than Sam had. He wanted to die knowing that in the end, he had not wasted it and that nothing too bad had come out of this whole thing. It was a far away hope, but he thought that maybe just maybe, he could actually try this whole thing out after all.

After about four or five hours of driving, Ken felt like he needed to go on and head to sleep. He parked at the end of one of the roads that looked worn down and like it had been nuked or something. Ken had realized that even with the former attempts to save this world and restore it all, it still had a lot of problems that needed to be fixed. It showed Ken that no matter what may happen or what efforts may be put forward, there might not really be any sort of true hero that can fix everything. Or maybe it was fixed up and the world had decided to fuck it up in the course of just a few months, in which it was actually the digimon's fault and not the people that came along to fix it up.

It was after Ken had taken a parking when he decided to get up for just a couple of minutes to stretch his legs before he went to sleep. He saw that there was a statue that was a giant head that was barely above the ground and the statue had looked like it was sinking in the sand slowly. Ken realized that he was starting to walk into some sort of like ancient ruins that had been going down anyways and that regardless of what had been rebuild and renewed, that probably this place would not really be restored. The statue face was so covered in sand that Ken could barely make out the fact that it was the face of a former samurai. He looked down and found something that looked a little bit interesting. It was a gas mask, probably just used for the sake of covering up their face in the desert and not being totally covered up in the desert and getting in their eyes. Ken picked it up and he slowly went back to the car in order to sleep there for the night. He then closed the car door and locked it and then closed his eyes and several hours later when it was sunny once again, he stood up and then started to drive on once again even though there was only a quarter of a tank left he wanted to get as far as he could before he needed to just start walking once again.

Ken had to admit that it was very nice for the car to only totally die when the car had reached a couple hundred yards within the building that the map showed he needed to go to. Ken started to park with the remaining gas on the street and then he got out of the car being a little bit tired after pretty much eight hours of driving with the only break being a few hours of sleep. He grabbed the gas mask and had a strange feeling that he needed it. Not only did he want to bring the gas mask just in case he had needed it, he actually put the damn thing on just to be ultra safe. Then with that, he took his sword and put the hilt on and that was when he was totally ready to go out and try to take on the first leader of these four gangs.

When he was walking towards the house that the first gang leader was in, digimon were looking over at Ken and were confused at a human being here, the sword as well as the gas mask. Ken had three things going on that all had a very valid point to be confusing the digimon in the area. It was as Ken was getting closer to reaching this building that the confusion was starting to go away and they were starting to worry more than anything else that he was leading himself into what was probably going to be his death. "Hey dude, if you go in there, you are probably going to die. There is no way in hell that you are going to be able to take down that entire gang." The digimon that was near the entrance of this building said and they were really giving off that great vibe of being homeless. Ken looked down at this digimon and was wondering what they were talking about.

"I may be weak now and I may not really have a chance, but I really need to go in there if I want to be able to let this area start to be free of all the gangs plaguing the land. Besides, I want to earn the approval of being able to train at JewelBeemon hall. I heard that I needed their approval to go in there to get the ultimate training to be the best swords master around, and I have a feeling that I might have to be just that if I want a true chance of being able to survive in this world without any digimon helping me out." Ken said and the digimon that Ken was talking to looked at him as if wondering why he could not just settle down and just live life normally and not worry about simple things like gangs.

"Honestly my friend, life is too short to be worrying about things like this. If you worry too hard over stuff like this, you are eventually going to find yourself dead before you even really started to have a true chance of living. I know that I may sound a little odd telling you this considering the fact that I am sitting here as a homeless digimon near the building of one of the richest digimon in a very large area. I just feel as if you need to worry about trying to enjoy your life and not to worry about saving the world or anything crazy like that." The digimon tried to make Ken calm down, but honestly Ken was not really sure if he should buy this or if he should focus more on stopping these four gangs after all.

"Look, I get that maybe you want me to not really worry all that much about things going on in the outside world, but I can't simply do that. i really need to focus more on the bigger things. I really need to focus on doing something that I feel like will actually matter. My late older brother would feel the same way and I think that maybe I need to start to follow down his path and not fall into a position where I feel as if I had been useless all my life. I am so tired of being useless and not doing anything with my life and just feeling like I am going to go down as a person who is a shadow of a man." Ken said and then the digimon shook their head as if thinking that Ken needed to take it easier.

"You are too young to think that you are wasting all your life and time away. Just think about where you may be when you are ten years older from now and trust me, you will not be feeling the same way that you are feeling right now. You need to take it easy and if you go in there, I can almost guarantee that you are going to die. Even if you don't die by some luck, I am pretty sure that once you leave that place, you will have entered a war that you will not be able to get yourself out of. And nobody will ever leave a war happy." The digimon told Ken and then that was when Ken was thinking that this digimon really did not get where Ken had been coming from.

"I have already gotten into this war. I was thrown into it when I had been forced to fight the king of the casino several hours away and their group of thug digimon. The moment I had won that battle was the moment that I had gotten into the war. No matter if I want to fight in it or not, I am going to have to. Thank you for your concern and making me think that I have a choice here, but I truly do not have a choice here and I need to fight for my own to make sure that at the very least I survive the war. I will suggest that you get away from here as soon as possible. Even if I die, I feel that as if you should be the one who gets to live. I think that you have a good chance of passing along the line of trying to warn others not to make the same mistake that I do. Because we can agree on that at the very least. Even if I can't have a choice, you guys should have a choice and you guys need to take advantage of the fact that you do have a choice." Ken said and then he walked into the building and that was when Ken was officially at the point of no return. Even if he could drop out before then, there was no way in hell that he could now.

Once inside the building, there was a digimon that seemed to be in what would be this buildings version of the front lobby. They seemed to be reading a book and minding their own business. Ken felt bad for the idea of probably having to kill them, but he felt like if he wanted to increase his chances of going through this at least for the first few feet without a problem, he felt like he had to. Ken really hated the idea of killing digimon. But the fact was that he pretty much had no choice but to kill some if he wanted to win the war and if he wanted to survive. That was the reason he had any sort of sword training in the first place and all that.

So with that, Ken took out his sword and then when he raised his sword the digimon looked up at Ken for a split second but then before they could say anything or even try to do anything, Ken swung the sword down and then the first digimon was taken care of. He then started to walk further down the hallway and the further that he had been walking down the hallway, he found a couple of digimon who were guarding something that looked like a door or elevator. Ken stabbed both of these digimon down and then he opened the door to head on to the next room.

As he had headed on to the next room, he saw that there were a bunch of digimon sitting down and having a meeting. They all looked up and as they were looking up, Ken was seeing that maybe he was going to have to them out. In fact, when the digimon started to get up and go towards them, Ken knew that there truly was no choice that he had but to take them out, even if he had not wanted to do that. But then maybe after killing all of these digimon, maybe he was going to get used to this even if it was terrible.

As the digimon had kept coming up to them, Ken had noticed that many of them were not even using any real weapons to attack Ken with. They were using physical strength. This made Ken think that maybe he should be doing the exact same thing. But then he had realized that if he had done that, then he would be for sure dead. He knew that the only reason he had any hint of a reason of winning this battle was if he had used this weapon and the gas mask was going to block anything from hitting his face, so if for nothing else, he could be able to use his gas mask in order to have some form of face protector.

"You should have thought a second time before you came here. If you have decided to turn back and listen to that one homeless digimon, then maybe you would be able to live out a life and not worry about the problems of existence." One of the digimon, one that looked and smelled like a hypo out in the wild, which was making Ken a little bit curious on what the hell was going on to make them able to be in a professional meeting, but then Ken had to remind himself that none of this really mattered at that moment. The hypo digimon was about to try and slam into Ken but then Ken jumped up and landed on the ground a few seconds later in order to avoid getting hit by the bulldozing weight of the hypo digimon. Then Ken stabbed that one down and each time he was about to take one out, the digimon that he would eventually take out next would slowly say something to him about life that would slowly more and more make him think and even more so when he had actually gotten older.

As the next digimon, one that moved like a cheetah was coming towards him and even managed to slash into his clothes to make them even more fucked up than they already were, which was a pretty impressive feat, Ken had listened to what they were saying to him. "With each thing that you kill, you are slowly increasing the chances of extinction. You are creating a small genocide when you do this. And yet here you are just mindlessly doing it as if you don't even care. It is like you don't even see just how precious even one life can be." The cheetah digimon said and then managed to get a second slice on his leg on and that made him bleed and despite that, Ken had to think for a second on if he had wanted to take this out due to what they had been telling him and he had actually thought that maybe there was a valid point to what was being told to him. Then he thought of the pain that they had caused him and then he decided to go with it and then swung his blade down and took them out that way.

Ken then jumped on the table and the next digimon which was a sloth that was way more active than how a sloth would normally be in real life got up onto the table and slammed their fists down and broke the table in half. Ken was too shocked to even wonder how a sloth was able to have that power and not want to move at one mile per hour. But then once again he was telling himself that this was just the digital world. "With every day that you live, you are slowly creating memories that you and only you truly understand. Nobody else will be able to come along and ruin them. But when you die, all of them go away. Do you really want to take that away from something just because you were told that you needed to do something and you thought that it was a great idea to do so at that very moment?" The sloth digimon asked and then Ken was slowly thinking about all of this as he impaled that digimon and while that digimon did not really do a good job driving it in home for Ken, it was this thing that gave him the first thinking of it and he was going to be presented with the problems of memories a lot more often later on.

The final digimon that he was going to be fighting was a digimon that was sort of like a dressed up and more fancy gorilla. That sort of reminded him of the thing from that one horrible comic Flash named Gorilla Grodd. They grabbed Ken and then slammed him into the wall and then the digimon said to Ken "one of these days you will be presented with the question on if you truly made all the right choices and you will be looking back to this day when you were forced to kill all of us and you will be wondering more and more if the deaths of us was really worth all of the stuff that you might have a chance of earning in the end of it all. And when you confront yourself with this, you begin to realize that it truly wasn't." Then with that, the gorilla digimon punched Ken so hard in the face that Ken started to feel it breaking the gas mask, but it still wasn't totally broken and Ken would remember this situation for quite a while to come afterwards. That was the fourth and for that moment and just for a few short minutes final seed of doubt that was implanted into his head about what he was doing and then Ken just stabbed that digimon right in the side of the chest to take them out that way. Then with that, Ken stood up and then he looked down and then ran out of the room to continue running up the building to reach the room of the boss and he saw like a hundred of these gang member digimon looking and and getting ready to kill Ken.

As Ken was getting attacked, he was knowing that he did not have a lot of time to think things out. He just needed to fight as soon as possible and hope that his fighting will be good enough for him to survive through the night. It was kind of scary to think that he was probably wrong about all of this and that the homeless digimon might be the one who was right and that if Ken was not really too careful, perhaps he was going to die and then if he had died, then what he had done to this point in time would have been wasted and like that one digimon said, all of his memories would have gone to waste and nobody would truly know what he had felt and thought throughout his whole life. He was only sixteen, but all of the stuff that he had done in his life had made him feel so much older despite that just not being the case at all.

Ken took down a couple of these digimon right when they ran to him and he just sliced them down. He was not really even thinking about what was possibly hitting him, although there were a couple of things such as rocks of all things that had been hitting him. he was just forcing himself not to really dwell on it or else he was going to die. When there was one digimon with a gun that came down towards him, Ken just sliced the gun in half and then stabbed them right in the chest since he truly was not going to be wasting any time there.

Then he started to walk up a little bit more and then there was a digimon that tried to take off his gas mask since they had wanted to see if the gas mask was just hiding the face of another digimon or if it actually was a human as they had been thinking that it was. They just thought it would have been interesting. But then Ken kicked them down and then stabbed them in the chest and he was so used to doing that movement that he was thinking that it was a little repetitive but he supposed that was just fighting in a small nutshell.

The more that he was going up the stairs of this place, the more that digimon started to come at him and Ken was just slicing them down left and right trying to get his way up to the top. He had been trying to get to the point where he did not have to worry too much about dying or anything, but he thought that if he did have to die, he could just try to take out as many of them as possible. It had seemed like he had taken out ten or fifteen before he had reached the top of the staircase and he was seeing more blood coming out of him. He was so tired of bleeding all the time and he had felt like his death was so close to happening that it was truly just more of a matter of time thing than anything else.

As he was at the top of the stairs, he was feeling the sword he was holding getting so close to falling out that he was wondering if there even was a small chance that he was going to be able to handle this final fight of this place. He had seen a digimon that was sitting down on a chair and he had smelled the smoke coming towards him that they were smoking and there was the sounds of sirens. Ken could feel that this was going to be a messy battle no matter how the turn out had bee. Ken rubbed the soft side of the blade down his hands to clean it up a little bit and then he held it down as if he was getting ready for the fight he knew would be coming up.

"I have to admit that I am surprised to see you here. I thought that the digimon here would have been able to put up a better fight on a guy who had only been swords training for just a matter of a couple of days. Just you are stronger than you make yourself out to me. I am a little bit impressed actually." The digimon that owned this area said. The digimon was wearing a red robe that covered most of the body and the face seemed to be a little bit human like but Ken could tell with the hair all over them as well as with the nose that was way too long for a human that this digimon was not a human at all.

"I don't really know what I am even doing. The more that I really think about it, the more that I come to see that this is the truth. I feel as if I am just becoming too much of a dictator on who gets to live and who does not get to live." Ken had said and then when he had admitted this, the digimon groaned and they were getting tired of all of the sentimental talk already. They had always hated that about the workers there and then the digimon stood up and then told Ken to go to the window.

"I want to have a conversation with you before the two of us have to go into a battle. I feel as if you really need to be given a good perspective on what this world is truly like before you decide if this is the way that it should be done. I want to really see if you are smarter than you let on or if you are truly the dense man who just tries to fight for good but in reality is just causing more evil than good." This digimon told Ken and Ken walked to the window since they wanted to see if this digimon actually had a valid point or not.

"If you really look out and actually take your time to look around, you begin to see how much of a shit hole this place it. Please for one minute just stop and look around. I feel as if you will be able to truly see what I am coming from when you see this." The digimon told Ken as Ken was taking the look around and as much as he had not wanted to admit it, that digimon was right. The more that Ken looked around, the more that he saw that this digimon was right. There was no proper holding of this city and that the more that he looked at this city, the more he realized just how much of a disaster it was.

The streets were covered with small holes that looked like they were blown open by a battle or something like that. There were a couple of homeless digimon sleeping inside of a couple of these holes as they had wanted at least something to sleep on and that was the only thing that they could be able to actually come up with. As Ken had seen there were a couple of fights that were being broken out. The digimon would come up and then pull out a gun and then when there was a gun that was being pulled on, there would be a short shooting match and then a digimon would fall down dead and that was when a digimon's body would just be picked up and dragged across the street and thrown away. The houses looked like they had come out of a warzone, and not just any war zone, one that had destroyed the entire city. Buildings all over the place destroyed and some even toppled down to the ground entirely. This was making Ken start to feel a little bit sick inside since he was not really able to handle the things that he was seeing without feeling like he should start to look at things once again. Then there was the fact that the water when Ken can see some was almost all black as if there were a bunch of things put into it and there was no thought put into what was going on. Ken then looked at the digimon that was supposed to be the gangs leader looked at Ken.

"There is a war that is going on. Four gangs, and if you take me out, there won't really be all that many things to do with this one. I feel as if taking us out is not really going to do anything for you in the long run. You are just acting like you are a true hero but in reality you are not. You are just some dude running around acting like you are the savior of the world when you are not. Besides, even if you win this battle you will still have to deal with more in this gang. You need to go to the basement if you truly want to defeat the boss of this gang. They have been waiting for you." This digimon kept explaining as Ken was wondering just how much longer this whole thing was going to be going on for and how many digimon he was going to have to kill just to take one of these things down.

"You may think that this is the answer to all of the problems, but you are wrong. If you really want to be able to change things, you are going to actually have to come in and talk to some of the digimon. Not only that, but you need to actually go out there and fight those battles. If you feel as if you actually are able to make any sort of a change here, then maybe you can be able to go down there and fight in that battle a bit. Honestly, there is more to this war than just the four gangs. The war that is going on is much closer to being world wide than you may think. You are pretty much here to fight for each day that you have in order to even somewhat increase your chances of surviving." Then after this was said, the digimon finally decided that they would introduce themselves by name. "My name is Ceasarmon. I have been here for months since the digital world rebuilt trying to stay alive. That is all we really can do, is try to stay alive. I have a feeling that the longer that you are here, the more that you come to see that this world is more of a test of survival than who is good and who is bad. Good and bad are very vague terms that you will never really be able to put at something and have it be the truth since in reality, the whole deal is that this place can be looked at as a hell hole."

"How has the world turned into such chaos and like a warzone in just a few months after the world was restored if it has truly only been a couple of months since then? It just does not make sense to me how something was able to be so fine and completely returned to normal, but then to go absolute hell and back in just the course of a short period of time. I guess that maybe it is not as crazy as me being thrown into this just a few minutes after I wake up in this fucking place for the first time." Ken was going on a side tangent and Ceasarmon was wondering what the hell Ken was talking about on just being there and while Ken was over thinking it by a lot, there was a good point that it was strange that everything just went to what he would describe as chaos in just the course of a couple of months. Maybe there was something that Ken could learn from this after all.

"I need to go down there. You do not realize what you are doing right now. I don't really expect you to know what you are doing. But I really need to go down there and by going down there, I am able to save this world. I want to bring this world to as close to being a peaceful democracy as I can be able to get it to be." Ken said and then he pointed at the door of the room and then he was hoping the digimon would finally start to work with him a little bit, or at the very least leave him alone to do what he thought was the right thing.

"Do you really believe in the idea of democracy? The idea of one man equaling one vote, one voice?" The digimon had asked Ken and then Ken nodded as if he was thinking there was a small chance he was starting to turn this digimon on over to thinking that his cause was the right one after all and that he can just do a little bit more for them to see that this was the best way to go through the world after all.

"If you believe in the idea that every voice matters and that everybody should be given the right to give out their opinions, then I guess that maybe I should get my opinion out there and it would not go against your grand idea of democracy." Ceasarmon decided and then lunged on over to Ken and then Ken took out his sword and then he swung the sword to slice off a arm of this digimon and then Ceasarmon held the broken stump of a hand a little bit. This was what they were thinking could be able to get Ken more into the idea of fighting and saving the world was that he was just going to use weapons in case there was something going against him.

"I will not let you go down to the basement and have you take on my boss until I die or until you have proven that you are no longer on your own side and that you are going to be working with us." This digimon said and then they pulled out a gun from a secret cabinet and then when they had pulled out that gun, there was little to no chance that Ken could have been able to stop the attack and the gun hit him right above the heart and while it didn't kill him, he knew that he probably needed medical attention pretty soon in order to actually survive this whole thing in the long run.

Ken looked around and he saw that there was a tube on the ground and that there was a gas container right there as well. He had a gas mask on, and he was thinking that this was going to be a good time that he could use it. Even with the cracks, it was still not enough to fully go in there and kill him or anything like that so Ken grabbed one of the tubes and put it to the nos of the gas container. Then he started to turn it up and then as a result the room started to fill up more with gas than what the digimon was probably wanting him to do.

Ceasarmon was starting to gag a little bit and they were thinking that they only maybe had a few seconds to try and get in another hit or two on Ken before he died or maybe break the gas mask so that way he would start to fall victim to his own plan as well. Then Ceasarmon started to lift up the gun as they were gagging and feeling like they were starting to lose their breathing skills and then fired a couple of bullets at Ken and both of them hit his lower legs and this was making Ken wonder just how many times he was going to get hit in the legs. Ken then stabbed the digimon with his sword as much as he could and the blade had fully gone to the other side of Ceasarmon and then he had pulled the blade out and then he saw the digimon starting to gargle and then he fell down and started to get one last thing to say.

"If you believed in the true idea of democracy, you would not have killed somebody over their own opinion and not agreeing with you." Ceasarmon said and then when they had said this, they died and then Ken placed the sword in the hilt and then he walked away from the room. When he was walking away from the room, he saw a medic box and then he started to open the box and as he was opening the box he was seeing that his left arm was busted to all fucking hell and back. He saw that there was a small cast. He grabbed the cast and then he closed the box. Then he sat down on the ground when he saw that there was a bandage as well. He put the bandage on his nose and then afterwards he put the cast on his shoulders and then started to move the whole thing down his arm and he was starting to sigh a little bit. This was making everything work out much better and he had covered up his entire arm and there was just enough to where he could do two layers on the arm all the way around and he was ready to fall asleep. He would try and deal with this digimon master when he had woken up. He was tired of all the sleep, but the sleep was the only thing that was keeping him alive and he knew very well that this was the truth and that he needed to take advantage of every chance that he had to use the moment of sleep even if it was only for an hour.

As Ken was sleeping, he was dreaming to himself about the stuff that he was going to have to deal with when he leaves this place. If this is the true, one of the four gangs would have been defeated and then there would be three more that he was going to have to deal with, even though in no way whatsoever was he going to be ready to take this guy all out. He was also dreaming of when he would hang around Sam and when he was hanging around Sam, he seemed to be getting alone much better with him in the dream than he had in the real world. The two of them had been talking about girls and both the girls that they had liked and it had seemed as if Ken was actually starting to see more and more of the positive side of Sam and none of the negative for once in his life. At the end of the dream conversation, Sam smiled at him and thanked him for having this conversation with him and for sticking through with him as a brother this whole way through. Ken wondered what the hell had to happen to make them get along so well. The closest that it had come to being like that was when the Wayside events were over with and Ken was starting to seem to get along with Sam at least a little bit.

When Ken had woken up, he looked at the time in the clock that was barely hanging above the wall and not breaking that he must have gotten about three hours of rest. The arm did not really feel like it was going to be too useful anytime soon but Ken thought that maybe it would be enough to feel slightly cured. But he was still going to use the arm cast for maybe a day or two just to be safe more than anything else.

Ken started to walk down the stairs and he was looking around to see if there was a entrance to this basement that he had been told about near by where he can go down and see if he was actually going to be able to take this thing on, if he had wanted to or not. But then again he had gone so far into this thing that he felt like he sort of had to do the job now and that this was something that was destined for him to figure out and work with. The more that he was looking around, the more that the hurting noise inside of his head was coming. As if it were starting to scream at him and then Ken was thinking that he truly was sort of flying too close to the sun at this point and that he was entirely wrong about doing any of this for his own sake or for the sake of the digital world which he was starting to get more and more invested in as time had gone on.

That was when Ken eventually found a sort of latch door and then ken bent down so his right arm would have easier time getting the latch to open and then when the latch was opened, he decided that he would go down there to see if this truly was the basement or just lead him to a lower normal floor that he was not really too aware of before and that this was just something that he needed to explore a bit more. Then with that, he started to climb down the staircase and he was slowly starting to feel like he was getting sucked into something that was too far beyond him, if this had made any sense at all.

As he was going down the staircase, the more that he was seeing some form of light at the bottom and Ken was just really wanting to see what this light was. So he decided that he was wanting to see what this light would lead to and if he was going to actually find the next thing that he needed to do there. Maybe the leader of this gang as he was really hoping it would be so that way he could be able to just easily take them down. Then when he was done, he was down at the bottom of the staircase and then he started to look around and there was something that he thought was actually pretty strange. It was like a large room sized computer.

Ken thought that this was going to contain some answers to the questions that he had sort of been asking in his head and walked towards the computer. As he was walking towards the computer, there was a face that was looking straight at him. As if this face was wondering what Ken was going to do. "You have tracked down the main archive room of this base. As much as you want to be able to destroy me, you must realize that the computer is not enough to take me out and that this is all that you will be able to see of me as until I have learned to start to trust you much more. If you are even able to start to prove that to me. Until then, I just want to discuss things with you this way and see if you are going to be working with me now." The computer voice said and the more that the digimon talked, the less like a human they had looked and the more like a actual digimon that they were starting to look like.

"I have been waiting many years for my chance to take over in the digital world. I have been waiting to see if there was anything that can help me get up there in the rankings of the world." The digimon said and then looked towards at Ken in a way that was so soul sucking for Ken that he was not really too sure what to think about this whole encounter. "My name is Udinamon, and I have been trying to fight for the best of the digital world, but my main base of operations was destroyed and when it was destroyed, I have been hiding around in different places of the digital world to make sure that I would not fall and that eventually I could be able to find myself out of here and one step closer to taking over the entire digital world. It is my passion to bring this place to the greatness it deserves to be once again."

"I do not share your look at the situation. I think that you are only in this for yourself and that you have bended the minds and wills of all the digimon around you to believe that you are one for them, but in reality you just want to see yourself at the top of the totem pole and then you will start to turn this into a absolute dictatorship and get rid of all of those who might not really agree with you just because they do not appreciate your values or think that you are correct in this whole thing." Ken said and then he started to walk towards the computer and looking at the keyboard to see if there is a button that can destroy this whole thing.

"I do not really think that you truly want to destroy this whole operation. You have been just forced to believe that this is what you want, but in reality you are just confused on what you think is the best for this world, so you are just going and winging it. Little do you know that you are slowly doing more damage than good when you do stuff like this. You ruin every bit of progress that is being made to this point in time because you are thinking that you are correct and that everybody else around you is wrong. You seem almost more willing to destroy everything than you may be wanting to admit that you are." Udinamon was telling Ken and Ken was tried of being told pretty much that he was the bad guy when he was trying to make himself see that he was really the good guy and that this digimon was just trying to make him unsure.

"I will not allow you to continue to make me feel as if I am the villain here. You are trying to throw me off guard and make me join your side. I am sure that this is all that you are doing. Now I am going to fucking shut you down and I will never look back at this and think that I was wrong because I know that I am right and that you are the one who is at the fault." Ken said and then he started to press a red button. As he was pressing this red button, the building started to shake and there was a bunch of stuff around him that was starting to break down.

"You may think that you are making the right choice, but you will come and look back at this years down the line and you may be trying to tell yourself that everything you are doing is for the better. But the more and more that you look back, the more that you truly come to see that you were not right. The more that you will start to see that you were just wrong about this whole thing in the long run. It is just a matter of how much damage you do before you start to realize that everything that I have been trying to tell you is the truth. But you are too mighty and self righteous most likely to ever really see that you will never truly make a change for the better here." Udinamon said and then before Ken was forced to leave the place to make himself feel better, the digimon had said one final thing to Ken.

"Before you go, I want to tell you where to go if you truly think that you have the will to make things better. Go to the graveyard twenty miles away from this town. Once you go there, you will be able to find some things that can be able to start to help you on your quest." Udinamon gave Ken a short piece of advice and Ken was not really sure what to think of this advice but he decided that he might have to go with it. So he nodded and then started to run out of the place to get out of there as soon as humanly possible and make sure that he would not end up being the next death in the high school list. Even though he had dropped out, so whatever.

Ken was running out of there so fast that if he was running in track he would have been able to put up a decent race to win the whole thing. He was thinking that this graveyard was a better place to start off with than absolutely nothing at all, and that therefore he was sort of forced to try it all out. He was just fucking hoping that this place was actually one that was going to help him out and not a place that was going to get him to fall and die once again because he just can't be able to contain himself at all. The more that he was thinking about it, the more he was thinking of what if Udinamon was right and that this whole thing he was doing was actually being more harmful than being good.

After Ken was outside of the building, he started to look around and the more that he was looking around, the more that he was seeing this whole thing was probably going to be too much for just one man to take care of. He sat down for a moment and decided to give his arm a rest while it was trying to fully restore itself back to the least painful place that it was. He was just wanting this whole thing to be over with, but he had no real idea how he himself could make any real differences when he was barely even alive in the first place. As he was looking around the area, there were a bunch of digimon that stopped to look straight at him for a moment to see what exactly he was up to before they started to walk away and go back to their normal business as if they had seen nothing.

"You seem like you have a lot of stuff in your past." A digimon that stopped to talk to Ken said and they they took something out of their pocket and gave it to Ken. "I have a feeling that you need this more than I do. After all, you seem to be doing a bunch of things that I have never been even tempted to think is possible." The digimon said and then sat down.

"Thanks." Ken said not really sure what to think and he took a look at what he was given. It was a small bag that was filled with money. He was really thinking that this money was probably going to be more useful than the covered in blood and sort of fucked up money that he had so far. Then he looked at that digimon and was wondering what the hell had made this digimon want to give that to him in the first place. "I am glad that you want to help me out and all that, but why are you doing this? Shouldn't you just use your own things for yourself?"

"Honestly, I have no real need to go out and do anything too crazy or adventurous. You seem to be going all around and it seems as if you will need any help that you can get. I really think that everything that you need should be given to you when you need it. I can just see from the look on your face that you have quite the life story to you so far. As if you have already lived out a full life and not really have had any chance to settle down and just enjoy things for yourself." After this digimon had said that, they stood up and then started to look at him a little bit more as if trying to find something else to say. "I guess that it is more of a matter of what you do with the money and your life that is more of a issue now. Are you just going to waste it and act like you have no real need to do anything, or are you actually going to do something to make this worth it?"

"I have been facing a lot of these types of questions the last few days. I honestly do not really know what I can say would be worth it or if I am just following what I think is worth it and then it turns out one day that I am just wasting all of my time and doing stuff that I do not really enjoy. That is the thing that is really starting to scare me." Ken had said and then when he had said this, the digimon that Ken was talking to was remaining silent as if to decide what they had truly thought about the situation that Ken was in, even if there was a real situation that he was in at all.

"I think that you shouldn't be here for too much longer. The police will most likely be coming to try and arrest you for killing a bunch of the digimon at the casino. We all heard exactly what was going on in there. Here is some advice, you should not be so loud about this whole thing. But if there is one thing that you need to know right now, is that no matter where you go in your life, you are going to be a hero. You are going to be one person that will be talked about in this town for quite a while for the fact that you took down that gang." This digimon had told Ken, and then they started to walk on away, and then Ken was thinking that maybe it was true that he should just get out of here since he did not want to get arrested or anything.

Ken stood up slowly and as he was going around, he was starting to hurt a lot and he knew that no matter what he was doing, he was going to be in a lot of pain and that he was going to literally be on the verge of death the entire time that he was going around. He was probably going to die before he even reached twenty years old at the rate that he was going and all that. But he decided that he was going to make every single day count as much as he could to make this the best life that he could.

As Ken was walking towards the graveyard, he was just going off of the fact that it was something like seventeen miles away. He already couldn't remember how far away it was, and honestly he did not care all that much. He was just trying to get to there and he thought that once he was at the graveyard, he was going to see why they had wanted him to go there first and why he should be seeing if this place was truly any big deal. But in reality, it was probably mis hype.

This was the more that Ken was feeling as if his life was just going to fall apart before it could ever come back up. Sam would be so ashamed of him for just giving up on everything so far, and Ken would not really even be able to blame him anymore. He hated the way that he was now, and he wanted to be a much better hero for these digimon than just running around blowing shit up and then pretend as if this was actually what the digimon had truly wanted. But then again, Ken truly had no idea what they had wanted, if they even wanted anything from him. Maybe they just wanted him gone and away from this place. In which case, he could not really blame them honestly.

The more that Ken was walking around, the more that he was starting to feel as if there was no other way that he was going to be returning back home. This was something that was probably going to be out of his life until the night he died. Which is something he had never wanted to admit, but it was something that he was truly getting more and more used to as time has gone forward. He was just tired of feeling like everything that he had ever tried to finish and everything he had ever tried to do was just being thrown away as if it had truly never really mattered. It was like he was going to start dying away and that his existence was more of a fucking joke than anything else. His arm was aching so damn badly that he was feeling as if he was never going to be able to take the cast off and that he was probably going to just have to accept the fact that his arm was just going to be destroyed forever.

It was several hours of walking before Ken was starting to feel even a little bit of his motivation being restored. He was feeling as if this whole thing was just testing his patience and that he just needed to play along and sort of see how things go from here. This was something that he was going to win, no matter what was going down and no matter how much he had felt like things were against his favor, he was going to work as hard as he can to not only survive, but prove to be a true hero to the digimon of this world. Each hour that was passing the more that he was telling himself they needed him more than he needed them and that he was the one who was going to truly rise up and save the day and become a hero at the end of it all.

As all of this was going down, the more that he was starting to see something in the distance that he thought could give him a clue on where the graveyard was. This was when Ken was thinking that maybe he was walking about four miles per hour or so, and that he had been walking for about that many hours. Since he felt like he had not been walking that long and that the sun was just down and that he was already starting to reach what he had thought was gong to be the end of this whole thing. He thought that this journey was going to take a couple of days or something like that. But he thought that if he had just pushed through a little bit more, he could be able to reach the end after another hour or so of walking. That was what Ken decided to do. He was just going to power through the rest of the journey even if he had not wanted to do this. But he felt like he was so close that he needed to do this.

It truly was strange how different areas in the digital world had different looks of being put together or just being fucked up to all hell and back. Like honestly, the first part of the world that he was walking was pretty much just a gross forest that looked like it needed to be toned back a little bit. Then there was the second part which was starting off as a nice road and then turned into a desert. Now this was sort of like a wasteland. Just buildings destroyed everywhere and there was barely anything showing that there was life in this world. Ken was starting to become more and more convinced that the more that he walked in this world, the more destroyed that he was going to see it be. And that was what was still giving him a little bit more of a hope for the future. That there was still a chance that he was going to be proven wrong, and he was thinking that in just a couple of days, it was bound to start to get better and that this was just sort of a bad section of this all.

It was nearly pitch black in the night when he saw the place that he thought was the entrance of the grave yard. He walked up to it and the more that he looked at it, the more that he was starting to feel the darkness of this area coming over him. This was what was able to show him that this truly was the graveyard and that he was not really sort of over thinking this whole thing. So then Ken walked through the entrance and he saw a building there. As he seen the building, Ken walked to it and his arm was starting to feel less numb mainly due to the fact that he felt he was going to take some break. He knocked at the door of the building and he was waiting for the answer to come and show if there was anything there at all for him.

After a moment or so of waiting, there was a answer and then the digimon that had answered the door looked up and down at Ken as if to ponder what they were seeing. They were thinking that Ken was a interesting bloke, but that he needed to sort of clean up a little bit. "You know what, maybe I should let you in for the night. You seem to be somebody who can use a good night sleep right now." The digimon who was very gross looking had said. Their face was nearly broken and was all tilted over the place. They had a nose that looked as if it was barely keeping in tact and then they also had a bunch of dirt all over their clothes as if they were working at the grave yard every day. Which Ken thought that this was a good possibility considering the fact that they were working at a grave yard and all of that stuff. The door was very open for Ken to walk in, and then Ken walked inside of the house and then Ken had noticed that there were two beds in the house.

"Is the second bed for a guest in case there is somebody who comes by?" Ken asked and he was looking at the lesser used bed, which he was pretty sure that this was the one that was for him if he was actually going to stay there for the night. Ken had waited for a moment to see if there was any sort of good answer to this or if he was just sort of thinking that this was not really for Ken. But then Ken was starting to feel so faint that he did not really care all that much at that moment.

"Yeah, I get guests here about once a month or so. I usually let the digimon, or I guess in this case, a human, here stay at the house for a night or two since I am scared that if they go out in the grave yard, they will be attacked by all of the monsters there." The digimon was saying and then they said that they had just been called the "Gravemon" and then Ken was thinking that this was a terrible name for a digimon but then the digimon looked at Ken as if to think that there was nobody that had cared and that they were just going to have to deal with the terrible name.

"What is the monsters that you are finding here in the grave yard that makes even you want to stay here and everybody else that comes here?" Ken was asking the digimon and then he was getting on the bed. He knew that he just had a couple of a minutes for him to talk before he was going to fully go to sleep. He was already feeling like his arm was starting to feel a lot better with the rest and this was when Ken knew that this was the thing that he had needed more than anything else.

"They come out here every night. They are black beings that seem to be hard to see the face of. As if they were apparitions in the area. I am too scared to go out there and they are only around in the night. When the days are around and evenings actually, then there is no real problem and anybody who wanted to come by could be able to do so. Most digimon here are usually able to realize that they should just stay out of here, but then like I said about once a month or so, I would have a guest that show up without knowing about any of this and then I guess I have to let them stay here for the night because I do not want anybody to come here and be forced to go and travel during the night." This digimon had explained and then as this was being explained more, Ken was thinking that there was a chance that maybe this was what Udinamon had been telling Ken about if he had wanted to actually do something good for the place and not act like he was doing something good. This was when Ken was thinking that maybe this was what he had to do. This was when Ken was thinking that maybe he was going to have to destroy these monsters for the sake of not only the town but the sake of the digimon who could possibly come along and try to visit the place for a few minutes or something like that.

"What if I came along and tried to take out these monsters?" Ken was asking and then when Ken had asked this question, Gravemon was thinking about this and they were actually thinking that Ken was stupid and that Ken was not able to do something like this and that if Ken did this, he was going to go on and die. Ken then decided that maybe he was going to have to do this in order to prove to the world that he was actually going to be a good hero and that everything Udinamon had said was just false and to throw away his confidence.

"If you think that you have a real chance to do this job, I will let you have a chance on taking them out. But I highly doubt that you will be able to take this thing out. I have had a couple of digimon try to do this. But they had failed and either died or just left the place to never come by at all." Gravemon was saying and then after they had said this, Ken thought that maybe this was something that Ken truly had to do. Ken then laid down on the ground and told the digimon good night. As he had fell asleep, the digimon remained silent and just decided to let them sleep and do what they had thought they could be able to do. Ken was asleep and he had slept for a good eighteen hours, which was more than he had ever done before in that point, aside from the coma.

When Ken was asleep, he was thinking and dreaming about all of these things that he was possibly going to be able to see on his own time. He was thinking of a way that he was going to be able to defeat these things. He had no idea if he was really going to be able to defeat these things, or if these digimon that Ken was being told about were even true or not. He was just trying to accept the fact that there were too many things that he could do in order to get himself out of this situation. The pain of his legs and his left arm were just so bad that even when he was loving the sleep and he was having a mostly good night and no nightmares, he would not really get the best sleep that he could since he knew how much this whole thing was fucking hurting. He had also hated the way that his arms had felt and he had wanted to have his arms be open once again. But his left arm was still recovering and Ken was smart enough for him to realize that and he had just decided that he needed to just relax and that when he wakes up, he would be able to see the progress of the arm and if he would be able to take the arm cast off or not or if he was just going to have to use it for another night or two. He knew that he was at the very least going to be able to take the bandage on his nose off for good.

Chapter Text

Chapter 8: Figuring Out The Enemy

After Ken had woken up, he saw the digimon was working around in the graveyard. Ken was moving around in the house a little bit to sort of get some exercise on his leg. He was not really sure what he was doing and why he was pretty much just breaking and entering. He decided that he was not going to steal anything and that he was just going to have to just take things easy. He thought that maybe he just would not take anything and that he was just going to see if there was anything that he could look at. He doubted that Gravemon would really be upset if he was just looking around for a couple of minutes.

There was this one thing that he had found. It was sort of like a tape. A tape that would let him listen to a conversation for just a couple of minutes. He decided that while Gravemon was working around, he would listen to the news for a moment and see what the news would be. So he turned on the tape and it was only a couple of paragraphs long, which was strange for him since he was expecting something that would last several hours long. "When that group of legendary warriors were going around and saving the world, they had come to that haunted mansion and they had saved the city. I was the first digimon that was brought back to life in this area. They had given me motivation to help keep the dead happy and make sure that nothing can truly disturb the peace. But with those monsters that I am seeing, I thinking that maybe I am starting to make the wrong choices. I am starting to think that I should leave this place as I can hear the monsters talking to me.

That is the scariest part. I can't even pretend that these monsters do not even exist. I am walking around trying to help tend to the graves and then I can feel them touching me. I am starting to shiver and when I shiver, I turn around and I see the sad faces of the dead digimon. As if I had let them down. Even though I had nothing to do with them. But due to the fact that I am the first man to see them dead and the first one to be seen by them after they had been buried, I realized that they had thought that maybe this was all my fault and that I needed to try and explain how this is not my fault. But then I can look further into the grave yard and soon enough I can find a manor. When I am in the manor, I can see that there is a digimon deep into work there. They had given me the story that they have been hiding from the law there for a long time while trying to create the ultimate way to save the world and the greatest weapon of them all to prevent any conflicts from every starting. They pulled out the weapon and were planning to use it on me until I ran away and when I ran away, I have been hiding in here for the last three days. I need to get the hell out of here soon, and I hope that nothing can kill me soon." Gravemon said at the end of the tape and then Ken placed it away and then he sat down on the bed. He was thinking about the tape for a minute or so before Gravemon came back to the room.

"You were out for a long time. What do you plan on doing right now? Do you plan on leaving the house soon and going away for good? Or do you actually have a plan to try and defeat these monsters? I honestly do not really have anything to tell you either way. This is your choice, and that either way I am not going to stop you. It is your destiny." Gravemon said and then Ken thought that maybe he needed to go to that house, grab the weapon and then leave and take out the other three gangs and then he could fix the one thing that Udinamon had going for them. That is if this was even a part of the plan at all.

Ken got up and as he was getting up, there was the feeling that Gravemon was starting to get that Ken truly was going to do this. "Well, I don't really think that it will be too smart for you to do this, but I guess that if you think that you have to do this, then I will not try and stop you. After all, it is your life and you should be the one making the choices now." Gravemon decided and then after they had said this, Ken started to walk off and he was not going to hold back anymore.

By the time that Ken was leaving the house, it was well and dark into the knight. He saw a few of these things that looked like black ghosts turn around and then Ken took out his sword and he was getting ready to fight these things off. The ghosts started to fly towards him and then when that was going on, Gravemon was staring at Ken through the window to perhaps see if this was something that Ken could actually be able to do or if this was just something that they were getting their hopes up and all that stuff.

As the first ghost flew towards Ken, this was when Ken just moved around and swung his sword down and took the monster out that way. Then when he had done this, he saw that the ghost was just turning into dust. This was a little bit strange and Ken was not really so understanding of the whole dust thing. Ken then turned around and then he held his hand out and then the next ghosts were starting to go on and fly towards Ken. Gravemon was surprised that Ken was even able to survive the first one at all since none of them had been able to survive this first one.

Then afterwards, the ghost began to come to Ken and this was the second one. The second one held their hand out and was starting to try and grab Ken but then Ken had jumped back and he was holding his sword on both hands and it was strange how he was so used to using this thing by now and that it was not even feeling all that strange for him to do this anymore. Ken held his hand out and when he held his hand out, the slashed down the second ghost right before they had their chance to slice them down. Ken saw that there were still four more that he had to defeat.

The third ghost started to fly towards Ken and then they hit Ken right in the chest by floating through him and then Ken had been totally and utterly hurt for a moment and the ghost flying through him did not only make him confused, it genuinely hurt him to have that happen. Then Ken turned around to this third ghost and he was ready to take this fucker out. He sliced that thing right in half and then after he had sliced that right in half, he was now ironically half way through the whole thing and that he still had half of these things that he had to defeat.

Ken took his sword hand and then he held it right out towards the ghost. He was totally ready for these next three since with a sword, they were not really all that hard. The fourth ghost was making their move towards Ken and when they were moving on their way towards Ken, the ghost slapped Ken right in the face and there was a small red stain on Ken as a result but then Ken stabbed that thing down and then he had taken the fourth ghost down pretty easily and now there were still two that he had to deal with before he had won the war.

Ken felt a silly calling this whole thing a war, but he honestly did not really care at the moment and he was too focused on taking all the ghosts out to really even care. The fifth ghost was coming towards him and then Ken jumped on top of a grave and when he had done so, he was keeping his blade really still and he saw the ghost come towards him. When they were within a couple of inches from him, Ken sliced the ghost down and with that, he had defeated the fifth one of these ghosts and he was ready to take on the sixth and the seventh ones.

The sixth ghost managed to grab a hold of Ken really badly and as he wad doing this, Ken was trying to move away and when he was doing this, the ghost was starting to actually get to leeching away at Ken but then Ken had kicked them away and then Ken stabbed the sixth one down. He was getting a little bit tired of this battle, and he was really glad that it was at that point in which there was only one that he had to deal with then. This was when he turned his whole body around to face the final digimon and then he was ready to try and just get this whole fucking thing over with.

The ghost started to fly towards Ken and then when they were flying towards Ken, he was keeping himself really careful. This was his way to not get into some deep shit and that he was not going to run the risk of dying anytime soon. The ghost was holding both their hands out and as they were getting ready to smash Ken into one small piece, Ken was totally ready to take this thing out. Then right when the ghost was holding both their hands out, Ken sliced down as fast as he could and then when he had done so, the ghost was defeated and then Ken turned around and then all the ghosts were defeated. That was when Gravemon left the house.

"Well, I guess that you were able to prove yourself. You should go up to the shack and present yourself to the keeper of that house. Maybe they will give you some help that I was just not able to do myself." Gravemon was saying and then they had thought that this was actually going to be a good starting point. Ken then nodded and he was being silent to show that there was at least some form of a understanding between each of them and then he started to head towards the grave site. If ken died here, then he guessed that maybe this was just it and that there was nothing really left to all the work that he had put forward this whole time.

Soon enough, Ken reached the front of the house and then he opened it. As he was opening this place, he was starting to be a little bit more careful since he was well aware of what was going to probably be happening. he was pretty much most easily likely going to be getting himself into a battle and he was just trying to get himself ready for when that was going to be happening. "So you have been able to find where I lived? I guess that maybe you are smarter than I had been giving you credit for after all. I guess that you truly have won this battle after all. I guess that there really is no point in even trying to change that fact now." The digimon that was in this house was saying, and then Ken realized that this was the real version of Udinamon.

"What do I do now? Why are you bringing me to this house?" Ken was confused and then as he was asking all of this, Ken was watching as Udinamon was standing up and they were walking towards Ken as if to tell him some things and they were hoping that this digimon had a damn good reason to bring all of this pain towards him and pretty much had single handed almost killed him.

"You may not realize this, but you are already a huge part of the way of defeating your enemy. Now that you have destroyed everything that I have worked for, there is still the Republic which is trying to take that city over and they were starting this whole thing. I was trying to defeat the republic and I thought that maybe I was truly the one who can be able to do this whole plan. Turns out that I was wrong about this after all. It seems as if you are the one who is going to defeat the republic. That is going to be the big grand prize. The other gang is going to be very easy. They are just a tribe trying to be a gang. Only about a hundred members in all. You will have no problem defeating them. Take out the leader and then when you take the leader out, then you just need to survive on defeating the blood savage minions. That is going to be something you can do in the next couple of days. Just walk a day or two and then you will find their site and then you can pretend that you are a member of this gang and then when you see them, maybe learn a little bit of their plan and then take them all out one at a time. Once this tribe and the republic has been defeated and out of this city, then you can let this city be free for the citizens and then you can be the hero that this city deserves. Once that is done, you can finally head on your way to JewelBeemon Hall. I have given them access to let you in once you have taken care of the job." Udinamon was saying and then Ken was really confused since with the way that they were saying this, it had seemed like it was that Udinamon was actually one of the good guys and that Ken was trying to kill something that was not really even the enemy this whole time in the first place.

"I need to head out if I want a chance to do this whole thing. Guess that I will be leaving right now." Ken said and then when he had said this, he was walking out and he took just a couple of seconds to really examine the house and all of the stuff that was used and then thrown away since there was no real reason to ever use it anymore. Ken was thinking that maybe there was no real reason for them to actually grab any of these if there was no real purpose to them at all.

After Ken was out of the house, he had gotten about ten to twenty yards away and then there was a large explosion. The entire house that been blown up and Ken was wondering if this whole thing was planned to happen after the visit was done. Ken was looking and he was seeing the rain barely contain the rain and be in that one spot. This was when Ken realized that Udinamon had done this on purpose to try and frame Ken as one of the bad guys and then with that, Ken started to run away and he was trying to get out of there as soon as possible before anything else could happen to him and before he could get arrested or something stupid like that for something that he truly did not do. Then as he was running away, he was starting to get slowly more and more soaked in rain and he was not even really giving a shit anymore.

Ken was trying to get the hell away from this place as soon as possible though just to be safe since he knew for a fact that if he had been in that area for too long, then Gravemon would start to come up with the wrong idea and then there would be a chance that he would be gotten in trouble. He did not want to get arrested on his quest to save the digital world, and he had thought that he had needed to be alive as long as possible and he thought that he could take out that random tribe and while the republic seems like it would be totally impossible to take that thing out, he had hoped that he could actually be able to take that one out as well.

But then after he had been running for about two or three minutes away from the grave site, he decided that this was good enough and that he would just stop running and that he was far enough away he probably be able to actually start to walk normally. He was sort of starting to run out of breath after all of that running but he was really glad that he was able to get himself away from there since he knew for a fact that if Gravemon saw any of that, they would bring him under the bus and then he would be thrown away and acted like he was the enemy of the whole thing. Although to be fair, he was probably the enemy of the gangs.

As he was walking, his arm was starting to feel like it did not really need the cast anymore. Ken thought that in his head, he might give it one more day and then he would take the thing off and throw it away pretty much for the rest of his life. Or maybe keep it still as a back up in order to make sure that he did not lose anything. He felt like he pretty much needed every single thing that he could get in order to make sure that he was in good health throughout this whole thing. Or at the very least living health. Which is why he still was using this damn sword since he knew that if he had gotten rid of that, he would have to fight by hand and he was in no way trained in the skills of fighting by hand. He had a better chance of being able to fight with a gun, and since he never even used a gun that would actually be saying quite a bit.

Eventually, he was reaching a sort of shack that looked like he could rest there for the night. Not wanting to take any risks, he walked right towards that shack and then he looked around just to be safe and saw that nobody was there. Well, to be fair it was not really a shack as much as a abandoned school bus that looked like it had not been used in several months. He just walked to the first seat and then laid his body down and closed his eyes with his hand over his eyes to block light and he was instantly asleep.

The sleep was actually pretty decent considering the fact that he was probably going to have to start being a wanted criminal and for the fact that he was sleeping in a school and on top of that he was only his hand to cover his eyes. Once he had gotten up, he was starting to get ready for the next stage of his journey. But as he was doing this, he decided to look around the bus a little bit to see if there was anything in there that could give him a little bit of an idea what the hell was going on here.

As he was looking around, he was seeing broken back packs and a bunch of skeletons. As he was doing this, Ken was starting to realize that this bus was the very last place a bunch of children digimon had been placed into before they had been killed. Ken shook his head, feeling so bad over this whole thing. He felt like even though he was not there, that he could have been able to do at least something here to help out. Then when he was starting to feel that way, he was telling himself that it was silly to feel this way over a bus that he had never seen before nor really could do anything about. Ken grabbed one of the back packs and saw a picture of a baby digimon with their parents and as he had seen this, he was starting to get teary eyed and then he punched the window next to him in extreme anger. He did not even care if it had made his hand bleed a little bit, he was just trying to vent his frustration out and by doing so, he went to the first thing that he could go to and then he looked out the window. After this, Ken started to walk away.

The more that he was walking away from this bus and that he was going towards this next tent, the more that he was feeling pure anger and that he was just wanting to stop all of this as best as he could. He did not even know these digimon and yet he was wanting to save them so damn badly that he would have given anything to help them survive. This was how Ken was able to start to try and justify himself on all of the things that he was going to eventually do, even if he had not wanted to be told that he was wrong. But the more that time would pass on, the more that Ken would start to see that maybe he was truly wrong on all of this after all.

Ken was just slowly becoming a sort of lone wanderer. He knew that he was pretty much going to have to do everything on his own, no matter if he had felt he was ready for this or not. This was a fact that he hated to accept, even though it was pretty much a main part of his life now. He was wishing a digimon was there to help him out through all of this shit that he was going through. Soon enough, there would be one.

The more time that he was walking, the more that he was starting to try and piece all of this together in his head. There must really be more to all of this stuff about his journey here that he just did not really get to this point in time and he was hoping that if he was really thinking about it more, he could have been able to find something that could have been able to connect all of this together and why he of all people was forced to do this job, aside from the idea that he was just having really shitty luck on all thus. But there must have been a reason that it was him who had to deal with all of this and nobody else on the earth.

Ken was starting to just get tired of all of this stuff going on. He was tired of all the walking, tired of all the fighting, tired of all the death, the list could have honestly gone on for a really long time on all the stuff that he was just really fucking sick and tired of. He was just wanting to have a good night sleep for once on this trip and not be forced to sleep on some hard service that was like a fucking school bus seat. Ken was not even to pretend that this stuff was actually any good for him to sleep on and all that stuff.

Then he was seeing something that looked like it was related to what he had needed to figure out. He saw something that looked like a tent or something like that. For some reason, Ken thought that he should be heading towards this tent although his legs felt like the could not really be able to take them anymore. He felt like he was getting near his death and that he just needed to rest in peace. He hated how he felt like he was going to die all this time now.

This whole fucking this was just pissing Ken the fuck off. He was so tired of feeling like nothing he could do would be able to really keep him safe at all. He was sick and tired of feeling like he was going to be dying at any moment. Honestly he was sick and tired of sounding whiny like how he was doing right now. This whole thing was just something that he hated and he was feeling sick to his stomach knowing how much time he was wasting all the time by just roaming around a dead world. But he had felt like maybe there was just a small amount of hope in this whole thing after all and that he just needed to hold up a bit longer.

When he was walking towards the tent, he started to over come his annoyed thoughts and he was starting to get more of a thought on just how he was going to be able to present himself to the digimon that were in there. He was not really sure what he was going to be doing on all of that stuff. He was just thinking that he was going to tell the guy or digimon, he guessed, that he was just looking for a place to stay and that he was doing this for his quest to find himself a nice place to just live. That part of it would have been true, as he had felt like he was just trying to find a place to settle down and that part of this was due to the fact that he was a man who was forced to kill a bunch of gangs.

Soon enough, Ken was at the front entrance of the tent and he was thinking about what he was going to be doing a lot. He had been thinking about the way that he was going to take out that gang, if there was even a chance that he was still going to be able to do that. Then he was thinking that he just needed to take things one thing at a time and that he did not need to try and figure out a million things at once. When Ken was slowly telling himself this, he sighed and then walked to the front guard of the tent to try and talk with them. "Will you be fine with me going inside that tent to meet your master?" Ken asked and then the digimon looked at Ken before they were going to give him any sort of answer.

"This tent is not leading exactly where you may think it will lead you. However, it will lead you through to the pathway that you can take the boat to meet our gang leader. Once you are there, then you may be able to speak with them about your wishes to help them take over the land." The digimon responded and then Ken nodded as if pretending like that was totally what was going to do, thinking that maybe all he had to do was just pretend for a little bit longer and then eventually, everybody would be able to start to believe him that he was on 'their side.'

"Well then, can I please go through and speak with your leader? We do not have that much time to waste. We need to talk with him as soon as possible. I have a lot of information about the republic. If I tell him this, he will be able to have a good start to take out the digimon who rule that gang." Ken said and then when he had been saying this, he was hoping that this whole thing would not really be as bad as he was sort of fearing that it would be. Then the digimon decided that maybe Ken was telling the truth and that they would let him through for the time being to give him a chance to prove himself.

"Go on through. Once you go through, just know that you will not be able to come back unless if you are fulfilling the will of our great leader and he directly lets you leave the area." This digimon said and then moved to the side of the tent. Ken was thinking that perhaps this was going to be the place of no return. Despite not wanting to do this, Ken walked inside of the tent and then he saw the pathway that would lead him down to the canel that would let him meet the boss of this gang. Then he could take out the next leader that way. This was all part of the plan Ken was telling himself, even if he was not wanting this to be a part of the plan, he was also aware that he would not always get what he wanted.

Ken was walking down the giant amounts of stairs, like what felt like a good couple of hundred. As he was walking down the staircase, he was just sort of thinking of how he was going to be able to survive this whole thing if he was going to be stuck here according to the digimon who was talking with him earlier no matter what he was wanting to do. As he wad walking down the stairs, he had been thinking more and more of the progress he had made in the course of just like two weeks or so. There was a lot of work that he was doing in these two weeks or so, even if Ken might have been a tiny bit off about the exact time, it was mainly due to the fact that he was just tired and not really caring all that much anymore. Ken was thinking about how his arm being in that cast was just sort of second nature to him now and that it wasn't really all that bad. In fact, he was actually pretty used to it by this point in time. He did not like wearing it all that much, but he did not really dislike it at the same time.

Soon enough, Ken reached the bottom of the stairs and he saw that there was a digimon guarding the boat. "You are allowed to come here to meet our master. We will remind you though that once you go through there, you have no chance of being able to come back unless if you are out to do a mission for the master of our group. This is to prevent people from defecting for as long as possible. You are allowed to turn back though, as you have not gotten on the boat yet. This is your only chance to turn back." The digimon explained to Ken and then that was when Ken thought about it for a moment. Was any of this truly worth it and was it worth him being forced to stay here forever just because of the idea that he might be a hero even though all pieces of evidence was trying to show that he was in no way a hero at all?

"I will go in there. I have a lot of important things to discuss with your master. I am well aware of the rules and I do not really care for those as much as letting your boss know what is coming up in this great war." Ken said and then when he had said this, he was getting himself ready for the big battle that was going to be coming up. He was going to be forced to go through a lot coming up soon and despite how much he was sure that he was not really ready for this, he was also telling himself that he was the only one who can do this. That was pretty much his main way of trying to justify to himself why he was doing any of this at all.

Ken then got inside of the boat and before he even had a chance to really think about it, the boat started to go off. As it was going off, Ken thought that this would be a good time to sleep. But then he told himself to take a couple of minutes at the very least to look around. But when he was looking around, all he was seeing was just a bunch of dirty water. That was really gross and there was no real reason for him to look down there as it was all brown and looked like some fucking cat fish just took a million year long shit inside of there. Then Ken looked up ahead of him and he was just seeing a bunch of mountains.

The mountains were actually pretty impressive to look at. It looked like it would go up for a good two to three miles, which would be nearly sixteen thousand feet if Ken was correct on his math. Then again, he had not taken math class in literally eons so it was not like it really mattered all that much if ken was actually right about the math or not. Ken thought that one day, he should try and go up that mountain. When he would go up that mountain, if he ever did, and if he ever returned to earth, he was hoping that he could be able to tell all the humans about this place. But then he was telling himself that he was doing all of this for the sake of Jewelbeemon.

There was so much that he was going to have to do when he met Jewelbeemon. He was certain that he had a ton of stuff that he needed to explain. Not only was there a lot of stuff to explain, he had hoped that the explanation would be able to let the digimon start to train him. Ken was starting to mess around with his hands a little bit for no real reason besides that he was just trying to find something for his hands to do. This whole thing was just a mess from start to finish.

Before Ken could be able to get himself to really rest too well, there was when the boat was starting to pull up to the front of the giant base for a small tribe that Ken was going to have to do his next order of operations. This was when he was totally ready for what was going to be coming up. Ken popped his knuckles and he was getting himself ready to take on all of these digimon and then he could be two of the main ones down and then he would only have the republic left to go through if what Udinamon was saying had been true this whole time.

Ken was walking up some more stairs and this time that he was doing so, he was looking around at the digimon of the area. Many of them looked as if they were warriors that had been forced to start to fight at a young age. Ken was hoping that he could help them out away from here and that this could be able to be his big grand helping of this world. He knew that it was a long shot, bit it was still something that he was shooting for since he was still having that side of good in him throughout all of this.

Other digimon looked like young children, digimon who were forced to be doing this and had no real idea what was going on. Ken was telling himself that he was going to try and not kill any of them since it was not really their fault that they had been forced to do all of this. It was truly the fault of the digimon that had been running the gangs that had been making them do this. This was what Ken was telling himself at the very least.

Eventually Ken was at the end of the stairs and then he walked on towards the front entrance of the final tent that he was going to have to go inside of. As he was going towards this tent, the digimon that were guarding the area were showing Ken that they indeed were not really able to believe what he was planning on doing, but at the same time they were going to give him a chance to show that he was truly one who was trying to just be a new member of this great gang. Ken was not really paying attention to them as he walked inside of the tent and then as he was inside of this tent, he started to realized just how bad the whole place smelled.

Like it seriously smelled worse than his bedroom on a summer day. Like there were a bunch of digimon that had been killed off and then thrown to the side as if they had not really mattered at all. Ken was also hearing a bunch of noises around him like babies crying and then screaming in agony. At first Ken thought that the digimon here were just normal digimon that really had nothing going on. But then this was when he realized that he was starting to walk into some form of slave union. As Ken was walking to the leader of this gang, Ken started to take out his sword and then the guards around him were starting to see what he was planning to do. Ken felt like this was the only way he could be able to do something good here and while he was willing to somewhat give them a chance at first, any idea of them having a chance was gone now and Ken felt no remorse for what he was going to do now.

Before anything could have stopped him, Ken took out his sword fully and slice the leader of the gang right through the chest. He did not even let them utter a single word before he struck the blow to end their life. It was only then when Ken was starting to think of what he had done, but at that point he was so deep into the mess that it did not really matter all that much. He turned around to see the hundreds of tribe members who were able to fight him starting to flow to him.

Ken then turned around and he held his left hand out in a posture that was sort of using a pushing technique despite the fact that he could really only move his hand and not really the entire arm or anything like that, and on his right hand he was holding his sword straight out as if he was getting ready for what was going to be coming next. As several digimon had started to come towards Ken, he was just starting to strike them down one by one and then he was not even thinking at all about what was going on around him. He was just fighting them all off one after another and he was getting some bruises and cuts all over him and he was thinking that he should have maybe thought things out a little bit better, but honestly he had not really cared all that much anymore. He was just doing his job and he was going to keep doing his job no matter what may happen.

It took several minutes for him to be able to jump out of the tent and when he had finally done so, he saw a digimon that looked like they were only ten years old stare at Ken. This was when Ken was thinking that maybe they were calling out to him to let him know that they were wanting to do something with him. Thinking that he had a better chance to survive with this fucking baby, he decided that he would go that way, and therefore he jumped down the cliff and he was holding his right hand out and his left arm was still in the cast and the cast piece was starting to rip up a bit as Ken landed on the ground on his feet with a amazing moment for Ken.

Then with that, Ken started to book it as fast as he possibly could, just slicing down a bunch of digimon that were coming to him in order to make them stop from coming straight at him. This was going to be a work in progress, and it was something that he was going to have to be very careful with since if he was not really careful, he might be the one who was going to die. The sword felt like it was starting to maybe break a little bit, but he was going to use it as much as he could before it would break, if it even was going to break at all.

The more that he was doing this, the more that the small digimon was starting to slow down and then Ken saw them open up a latch and then go down the latch. Ken thought about doing the same and he forced himself down the latch so that way he would be safe in there at least for a couple of minutes. This was something that Ken was starting to really think he had messed up on. He was thinking that maybe he should not have gone in so badass just taking out the leader with no plan at all. Hell, he was not even sure if he was following a digimon that was actually trying to help him or if he was fucking up on that count as well. He was hoping that none of this would really be too much of a problem.

After Ken was down there for a moment and there was nothing coming in to try and attack them, Ken thought that maybe he was actually safe for a little while and then he started to walk down the pathway to where this digimonw as leading them. This digimon had been pretty quiet. Ken was wondering why that was the case, but he was thinking that maybe they did not want to be exposed as a traitor or something like that. He was just hoping that this digimon, whoever or whatever they were, was on his side and that they were not really leading Ken to some form of a death trap or something like that.

Eventually, Ken found a large room that had been looking like it had not been used in several years. "The tribe has not used this place in a long time. You will be able to hide in here for a little while. Just long enough for you to talk with me and for me to talk with you about what your plan is and why you even did what you had done. I am not going to kill you, I just feel as if I need to know more about this and what your goals are. That is, if you even have goals in the first place." The digimon said to Ken and then Ken was thinking that maybe he really did not have any goals and that he was just being totally crazy with no real rhyme or reason. As much as he had hated to admit it, this did sound kind of valid.

"Look, I know this may be hard for you to fully comprehend, but I think that it is better for you to hear at least some of this stuff, so that way even if you do not agree with me, you can at the very least be able to see where I am coming from and then if you want to see how this fits into your views, then you can do that." Ken was saying and then when he had said that, he stood up in front of the digimon that looked like they were very interested in the story that Ken had to tell them. They had a sort of air flight suit. He thought that maybe this digimon was trying to maybe become a pilot or something like that now.

"Well, I was brought here under terms that I did not really accept. I had zero interest or idea on what this world was or anything. I just was woken up here and I was pretty much told that it was my turn to go on a crazy adventure. No real clues on what I was supposed to do. Just that there were a bunch of evil gangs that I had to kill in order to make things safe again here or something like that and that once I do this, there will be some form or master or something like that who will be able to start to train me. It made no sense to me then, and it still does not really make any fucking sense to me now." Ken said and then he looked at the digimon who was still sitting there excited to hear more of his story. "I was told one of the leaders and gangs I had to take out was this tribe and that your tribal leader was one of these gangs. I was not so sure until I saw the way that the digimon here were being treated, but when I had seen that, I decided that it was better to be a hero than to think that maybe I had a chance of being wrong. So I went at it and took this digimon out and when the attack is over with here, I will be heading out once again to leave to take on the republic." Then when Ken was done with all of this, he sighed and then he was hoping that the digimon would just let it go and if anything, maybe even join his side of this whole thing.

"I don't really know what to think and I am not too sure if you are lying to me or not. But if you are telling the truth, I guess that maybe I should be willing to tell you my truth. So here we go. I guess that maybe you should be the one who sits down now." The digimon said and then with that, Ken decided not to really argue and then he sat down to give this digimon a chance to sound like they were really important and stuff.

"I had no idea what this place was either until I was forced to come on here. When I had come here, I was sort of forced into the main tent of this digimon who was leading the tribe. When they were all asleep, I snuck out of the tent and started to run away but I could not leave the island no matter how hard I tried. So I went down after I found this latch way and have been hiding in here ever since. I am very much amazed that nobody ever has come down here to see if there was any signs of me here. But I guess that if they do not suspect, I should not feel too bad over this whole thing. So as I have been down here, I have found the old library of the tribe members here when they had first settled in this place. After I found the tribe, I decided to go along and read these books and the more that I read the books, the more that I understood that the tribe members were victims of war and that they had no real intention of causing any real harm, but their wish to save themselves and not have any digimon die off in the tribe was what made them work together here and create several weapons in case somebody tried to attack them." This digimon was saying and then they continued to talk about the old history of this town for the sake of letting Ken understand some of this on his own.

"Then there was an attack on here one time. After the attack was planted onto this village, many of the tribe members did not really survive and as a result the digimon here were forced to step up the way that they had looked at themselves and that they were going to have to not only create weapons, but not be afraid to use them. Since they had not used many of the weapons here. Decades were spent on trying to rebuild this village as if to pretend as if this attack had not really ever happened. The digimon here slowly started to come along and over time, the village had started to build up once more as if the attack had never really happened before. It was starting to look as if the rebuild was complete and the population of this tribe was getting close to being over a thousand." The digimon was explaining to Ken and then when they had said this, Ken was thinking that these digimon were all a bunch of digimon who had been taken down before but with a lot of effort started to become a true force to be reckoned with. That was where he was getting with all of this, and he was thinking that there was a ninety percent chance that he was right about that idea.

"When the digimon had started to think that they had a true chance of expanding beyond this point, they started to come up with the idea for utter conquest. Only after this idea of utter conquest was created did the digimon here start to try their absolute best to take out the tribe and make it so that their influence did not really spread any further. It is due to this that the digimon had started to think that everybody else around them are a real threat and then that was when the digimon here thought that maybe they just need to try their best to fight for the world and save it. Or what they at the very least thought was going to be saving the world. So that was what was really going on here this whole time. Not that I can really do anything about it." The digimon was telling Ken and Ken was seriously trying to figure out if this digimon was on his side or if they were not on his side at all. It was just something very interesting to figure out.

"So what happened after the digimon here decided that they thought that their idea was super noble and that they were the only ones who can truly save the world?" Ken asked a little annoyed, not really at the digimon here, but more at the fact that he was tired of there not being at the point and he just wanted to figure out what the hell was going on here. He just wanted to see what was so evil about them and why they needed to die in the first place.

"Well after the digimon in the tribe started to expand themselves out more, it started to turn into what would seem to be quiet the hazard. It was like all of the work that had ever been done in the digital world to that point in time never really mattered and that everything that had been worked on was just going to be tossed away to the wayside just for what the digimon in this tribe thought was going to be what would save the world. It had become more and more obvious that they cared for nobody but themselves and that nothing ever worked out for anything else and that everything that would get in their way was just a security alert that just needed to be thrown away and it was like you were just a side detour." The digimon that was a kid explained and Ken was staring at them since the wording of this was so confusing that almost none it really helped him out and that he pretty much just had to pretend that he had understood this to make it not feel and sound like he was a idiot of any sort of kind.

"'Well, I am sorry that I am taking so much of your time and that I can't be here for a really long time, but I need to get the hell out of here. If I stay here for any period of time longer, I have a feeling that I will be found down here and that I am going to die. Besides, I still need to worry about taking on the republic. If I don't take the republic out, then I am going to have failed in my job of trying to be one for the digimon and one who can help the digimon out." Ken said and then he had stood up and then he started to walk away and then the digimon called out to him to make him stay there for just a little bit longer.

"You do not get it. I am getting to the part with the republic and why the fight between the two is even happening. For you to really get what is going on, you need to see the motivation of the two sides and why the republic was in the end the bigger of two evils despite how it had looked when you had come here first." The digimon was telling Ken and then Ken was trying to decide if it was even worth listening to or if he could just figure this all out on his own. But he was thinking that maybe he should just take the risk that this was something that he could figure out all on his own.

"The war that had started was all about two different views. On one end the tribe you just fought a huge portion of actually did care for the saving the world and they did actually think that they would be the ones who can make a true change. But they had turned out to be the ones who had not really helped make a change and that in fact, they had made the entire situation even worse. But then the other group had realized and known this whole time that they didn't really care and that they had been doing nothing of value. Well, that was how it had seemed at first. It had later turned out that they were actually the ones who were making at least some change for the better. It had turned out that it was actually them who seemed to be any sort of hero. The original intentions for both seemed to turn out to be the opposite of what would really happen despite it not really being the goal at all." The digimon that was the kid said and then Ken was realizing that the republic were the good guys if what they were saying was actually true.

"So the republic are actually the heroes and it turns out that if I ruin the republic, then all of the good work that has been done will be lost. Is that what you are telling me right now or am I starting to really not understand this whole thing. Please just tell me right now. I am sick and tired of your answers that are not really the point of what I am trying to do. So please just tell me what is going on and don't fucking mess with me anymore." Ken was saying and then when Ken was saying this, the digimon stopped and thought on what Ken had asked and while his tone was making them annoyed, he was trying to see their point of view.

"Well, neither one of them are really any sort of heroes. They just thought that one of them was being good and it turned out to the other that they were not. Neither side of any of this are any real sort of good or bad. Both of them are terrible and filled with monsters that don't really care for anything besides their personal gain. Everybody else who is not in the world and their group can be able to see what they have been doing has just caused nothing but pain and suffering here. I thought that these books were enough for me to get at least one of the sides, and it turns out that this is not the case. It turns out that both sides are even worse than either one or even both of them are trying to make it out to be. You need to destroy them both if you want to have peace here. There is no idea of maybe leaving some behind, and honestly this would not really matter all that much as no matter what you do, nothing will change what is going on." The digimon was telling Ken and then Ken rolled his eyes since he was well more than aware of this and he was tired of this long winded bullshit that Ken would have been able to figure out himself. Sure it was maybe a little bit interesting to learn of the tribes history, but honestly it had not really mattered all that much.

"Look, thanks for trying to act like you were really important here. But you have been a giant waste of my time. I am heading out and I am going to do stuff that actually matters and you are not going to stop me right now. I have a job to do and I am going to do my fucking job. If I ever see you again, maybe you can give me another long and pointless history lesson." Ken said and then when he had said this, he was fully out of the room and he was not going to be coming back. Well, he was not really ever planning on coming back and he was just trying to change everything for the better and he was getting near the end of this all and despite what it may seem, this is the true final stretch.

Chapter Text

Chapter 9: Finding JewelBeemon Hall

Soon after Ken had walked out of this house, he was slowly starting to go on his way and he was starting to go on his way to try and take on the republic. Once he takes that thing out, if this was all said and true, then he would finally be done with this whole thing and then he could finally start to train with Jewelbeemon. That was what he had really wanted to do. He just wanted this whole thing to be done with so he could see if JewelBeemon was even worth the hype that had been built up all this time or maybe if he should just go along and train for himself. He was feeling like his head was hurting when he was touching his gas mask and then he was wondering if it was even worth keeping up this thing on his face at all or not.

But he decided that maybe he would keep this gas mask on for the time being due to the fact that it was just on his face for such a long time that he was going to keep it on until it was either totally destroyed or maybe he would have to nearly die for him to just decide to totally give up on that whole mask. But until then, he was going to just keep it on and everything. As this was going on, Ken was just walking around and he was slowly getting himself ready for the battle against the republic. He did not ever once in his life think that he was literally going to be going against the establishment, so that whole thing was just totally insane for him to even comprehend. It was something that he would joke about or maybe want to do when he was a little kid, but actually doing it now was something that just seemed to be totally off and something that he truly was not really even sure if he would want to do this at all.

So with Ken walking on his way back to the main land, he was thinking that he would come back to the island, and then go up this mountain one day when this whole thing was totally over with and that he would never have to worry about any stupid shit about the establishment and all that stuff. He was thinking that at least some of the digimon that were working for the so called republic would be near the place where Ken was starting his adventure probably two weeks ago or so by now. Ken was so tired and it was strange to think that he was only at this for only two weeks, but that stuff was just too much for him to fully think about and comprehend. He was thinking that he would have to level up, or in the terms of something related to that, in order to make sure he is ready to destroy the republic and all that stuff.

As Ken had been going into the area, he was trying to figure out how the hell he was even going to be able to survive this whole thing. It just seemed like something that he would never be able to pull off. And yet if he wanted to have extra training from the digimon, he was going to work hard to pull off the idea of saving the area from this republic. And then that was when he was thinking that maybe he was just in the low level stuff that he was dealing with due to the fact he was going to have to do this training right away, then he would be forced to do some things afterwards and Ken was worried that these things would be even harder than what he was having to deal with at the moment. It seemed impossible to think at that moment, but he was starting to try to be realistic when he was thinking this out.

Then when Ken had started to think that things were starting to get even harder than they already had been to this point in time, Ken was starting to think that maybe he was going to have to train himself maybe a little bit so that way he would be at least a little bit more ready for whatever was coming up and stuff. The more that he was walking by, the more that he was wishing that this whole thing would go by much easier. Ken was just walking by through the days and the nights and every day that was passing by, the more that Ken was just fighting off small digimon that would come by him in order to fight him and stuff. This was his way to train up a little bit, and the more that he was doing this, sun rises and sets would just sort of be a second nature to him.

With each passing day, the more that Ken was starting to feel that he was starting to get a little bit stronger and the more that he was starting to think that maybe he was actually going to be able to win this whole battle. The more that he was thinking he truly was going to be the one who was going to save the digital world. But then he was still tired of all the loose wandering, and that would never change no matter how much he was walking. But then again, this was something he was probably going to have to get used to when he was walking up that mountain on his way to take JewelBeemon and be able to start to be trained with them and stuff. But after a whole week of all of this walking, he was finally starting to get to a point in time when he was actually thinking he was going to be at that city again.

Once Ken was done with all of the travels, he had reached that town he had started at after about eight or nine days of just constant walking. Once he was there, he was seeing that there was a bunch of rain going down onto the ground. He took a deep breath and he was honestly just getting sick and tired of the rain. He was hating the very thought and idea of rain after seeing it a million times. He started to look around and he was seeing a bunch of digimon putting papers over their heads just to make sure that they could get at least a little bit less wet than they were going to be if there was no paper. Not that a news paper could really keep them too much 'drier' but a matter of even thirty seconds was better than absolutely nothing.

Ken was thinking and as he was thinking, he was trying to decide a good place to look and get some advice on how to defeat the so called republic. He was thinking and he was trying to decide what he was going to do. There was so many things going on that he was not really even sure if he could make this whole thing work. But then he decided that maybe if he would go back to that bar once again, he could get some advice and maybe a pointer at the very least on where the hell they were going to be.

When Ken had made the choice that he was going to try and get some help at the bar once again, he started to head on in that direction. He was trying to really figure out how the hell he was even going to get the digimon in there to really want to help him out. There was a terrible feeling that he had that he was going to be told off and that nobody was really going to help him out due to them probably being scared or something like that. It was a good point, but he was really wanting to have a digimon to give him at least a tiny bit of advice on how to handle this whole thing. As this was going on, Ken reached the front door of the house and then he opened the door to the bar to see if he was going to get any advice there for his own sake.

After Ken was inside of the bar, he started to look around and there were barely any digimon there at all. Ken walked right to the chair that he had been usually at for the sake of having at least some consistency in what he was doing. Once he had sat down, he was looking at the bar tender who took a moment to stop drying their cup and then they turned on over to Ken and they were ready to talk with him, even though they had not wanted to talk with this human ever again due to how terrible of a man Ken was, or at the very least how terrible of a man they had thought that Ken was. "Why are you coming back here? I thought that you were going to be away from here forever. After I served you, there have been digimon coming to me on a daily basis trying and get where you are and they have made threats that they would try and shut down my business even though I never even know where the hell you are or who you are. I am scared that my place is going to shut down just because of you." After the digimon had told Ken that, this was when Ken did feel a little bit bad hearing that and he wished that he could have helped out better, but that was just something that was not really the case anymore.

"I am sorry that a lot of digimon have been trying to bring your business down because of me. But I really need to know something. Once I get what I need to know, I will head out once again and then I will leave you alone as long as I can. I may have to run back into here again, but I am going to try and put that off as long as possible for your sake, and because I do want to try and make things at least a little bit right for you." Ken said and then as he had said that, the digimon turned over at Ken and they were wondering what Ken was even wanting and they were hoping that Ken was telling the truth when he had said that.

"Please be telling the truth when you are telling me that you do not plan on coming back here after I help you out. I really wish that this is the truth." The digimon had said and then when they had said that, Ken sighed and he was hoping that this was the truth as well for both his sake and the sake of this digimon. But then he decided to take the huge risk and then he decided to just go with it. He thought that if nothing else, he could keep his promise to not come back for a while.

"Well, I need to find a way to fight the republic. I was told that the republic was the biggest gang out of all of the ones in the digital world. I have a strange feeling that they are going to be coming towards me pretty soon, and that when they do, I am going to be going into the giant fight of my life. I don't really know if I am ready for this. Do you have any ideas how I can be able to get into this fight and not get myself killed? Where is the base of the republic even located?" Ken was trying to get this whole mess figured out. The digimon that was working in the bar looked over at him in order to try and comprehend why the hell this guy was trying so damn hard to kill him this way. But then they shook their head and decided that maybe one more piece of advice won't really be all that awful.

"I will tell you where the base of the republic is located at. Aside from that, you are going to be on your own. That will be the final piece of advice I am going to be giving you." The digimon decided and hoped that this would be good enough for Ken to be totally satisfied. "They are located at a dam about three or so days away from here. The base is a power plant. Once you go in there, you will be all on your own. I have no real clue what is going on in your mind, and honestly it is none of my business. That dam is going to be heavily guarded. If you go in there, do not really expect anything from me in return at all." The digimon that gave Ken this location turned his back to Ken and gave Ken one last shot. Ken paid two dollars and looked at this digimon after the shot one final time for what he had assumed to be that way.

"I hope that this is the last time I even remotely put you in danger. I do feel bad for this, even though I may not really seem that way. I am going to do my best to destroy the republic base to make this town safe again just for you and the rest of your town. I better be heading out now, just to get a true start on this plan." Ken said and then he started to walk out and he was still having his gas mask on and his arm cast, deciding that he would go all out and just fight with his right hand for his sword to see if he could pull this off.

"I hope he lives." The digimon that was working at the bar said and then when he had said that, he placed a cup onto the racks after he washed and dried it. Then he started to walk around and he was working to clean up all the tables since the bar was going to be closing in just twenty minutes. He thought that maybe it was time for the place to start to move up in the chain with how much stuff was going on lately and how many things were happening around them. They needed to be ready for the competition coming up.

Ken was just walking along and he was just walking, he was getting ready for the battle that he was going to be forcing himself to take place in. He was not really ready for this battle. In fact he was really starting to think that he was in over his head and that if he was going to do this, nothing about his life would come back to the way that it was. But then he decided that he had come way too far for him to start to second think himself and start to think that he is not ready for any of this.

The more that Ken was walking, the more he realized just how much the cast that he was wearing was starting to get really dirty and the fact that it was probably starting to compile like twenty times as much dirt as it had been if Ken was on earth normally. The cast would probably be just all white if this was a normal thing on earth. All of this was just totally crazy and the just few days that he had been on this world he had felt like he had grown up so much than he had been totally feeling like a much different person than he would have been had he been on earth trying to be all angsty and dealing with Sam's death in a totally hating life type of fashion.

Ken was able to really appreciate the world that was around him when he was travelling around the other side of the town. When he was heading around that way, everything seemed to be going on so much easier than it had been had he been going on the side he had been used to for the last several days. This walking on the path that he was doing right now was actually much more deep and personal to him. This side of the outside town seemed to have a lot more care put into it in a way.

This side of the place that he was walking around, he was seeing a bunch of trees around him and when he was seeing all of these trees, he was trying to really comprehend the fact that a bunch of these trees were pink and stuff. He was wondering what these trees were created from and how they had turned out to be pink and all that stuff. Ken was walking up to the tree and when he had looked at this tree, he was trying and figure out the whole setting he was in and all that stuff.

As Ken had examined the trees for about a minute or so, Ken touched the tree and he was having a strange feeling that there was something that was calling out to him. He had wondered what the thing that was calling out to him even was, and he knew that this was a little silly to even think that way, but it was really hard for him to not feel this way. The voice that was calling out to him seemed to be telling him that when he goes up to JewelBeemon, he should be expecting something to ruin the training and that the training was going to the only thing that could keep him safe.

Then when he had heard this voice call out to him and the thing was done with, Ken placed his hand away. Then with that, he started to walk slowly further and further away from what he was doing there at the tree. He thought that this tree was going to be the thing that could maybe keep him warned on what he needed to do in the future. Ken thought that maybe this whole thing was just too much for him. After a little while of just slowly walking, he then started to seem a little bit more scared about what was going on and then with that, Ken started to run as fast as humanly possible.

The more that Ken was running and the faster that he was starting to get, the more that he was feeling like he could run a fucking marathon. The more that he was feeling like he could take on the world and that he could just take on the republic. For some reason, his straight up running was making him really feel like this republic, or whatever it was, would be going down and that Ken was going to be the hero of the story. This was what was really keeping him going. He thought that maybe he could try and become the hero of his own story and all that stuff. As silly as that whole thing sounded.

Ken was thinking that he could save the world, Ken was thinking that Sam was going to be proud of him. It sounded crazy for him to even think something that would have never come to his mind earlier. The idea that maybe Sam could actually be proud of him. That was something that Ken had really wanted to do the more and more that he had thought about it. He wanted Sam to be proud of him, but he was thinking that maybe his spirit could be watching from up above and therefore be proud of him then in that way. It just seemed like this could actually be what really changes the whole dynamic of Sam and Ken, even though he had been dead for about a month or so.

On the end of the first night, Ken laid down on the bed. He was starting to look around and he was move his pocket around. He was wondering if maybe he could find something that could keep him entertained and then make it so that way he would have something to help him sleep. He really wanted to sleep and the more that he was looking for something, the more that he realized there was something he totally forgot about but maybe he could use that for a couple of hours.

So he started the tapes up and he was just listening to them for a little while. As he was listening to the tape, he was truly beginning to think more about what was going on in the world. "The warrior of fire was able to bring hope to the digital world when he came along and restored every single town in the entire digital world. Everybody had started to have some hope that things could be changed. Only when Cherubimon was defeated and then the warrior of fire and his friends returned to earth that made everything start to go down hill once again, due to the fact that the beacon of hope was gone once again. I know for a fact that I had hope when I saw that young boy walking down the street with his young fat friend. Their digimon, a smart wizard, a vanilla ice cream looking digimon and then a digimon with floppy and big ears, seemed to be so perfect with them. I was really hoping that they would talk with me and while they did not, I am not really caring. They were true heroes, and they must have forgotten about us since they are not perfect." The first recording of the tape had said and then the tape was going on even further and Ken was wondering just how great these heroes were truly.

"I feel like this world has been played around like a damn fiddle. Really think about it. This world was fucked up by a digimon named Cherubimon who ruined everything in the world. Then a bunch of digimon came along and restored the world. Once their job was done, then the digimon left the world and afterwards we all were left to suffer by a bunch of digimon going around and destroying the world by trying to form the coolest gang in town and then the digimon that want to just live out their lives are being forced to suffer for this." Ken was listening to this more and the annoyed voice that this digimon had the whole time.

"I am leaving town tonight. I really want to see what I can do to change the problems going on in this world. I hate the way that this world is. If I don't do something, then I will just have to shut up and not get to bitch at all. So the fact is that I am going to have to try and get at least something done, and maybe I can look at myself as a hero after all. I am probably looking too highly of this, but I feel as if I need to try and do this after all." This digimon was trying to get themselves more excited on what they were doing, but then Ken was thinking that maybe this digimon and by extension maybe even Ken was just trying too hard to make something that can't happen actually happen.

"One of these days, the digimon in this world are going to have to the damage that has been done in the world and they need to come and gather up once again to bring the world out of the problems that it is in at the very moment. The world is going to eventually go so far down the shit hole that eventually, the digimon need to come along once again and throw everything to the wayside and then once we do that, we can finally be able to make some more progress and maybe even make it better than it was when Cherubimon was defeated." Ken was seriously wondering what the hell had made this world so much better after Cheribumon had been defeated and then he was wondering what the world had looked like when it had been saved.

"I have been out and wandering the digital world for a couple of days, and the more that I have been travelling around, I was able to eventually find the front entrance to that one hundred floor building that the frontier group had gone up at the end of their journey. This building does not have open access for random digimon to go up since the guardians of this world are scared that if digimon come in here, they will find a way to ruin the progress that has been made in that place. I hated the fact that I could not find the legendary castle that truly had saved the world, but I was able to see the logic behind it all." Ken had wondered if maybe he could go in there since it would have been a little while since the world had been saved and then he could go up there and see if he could actually go up it to see what was so great about the place. Even though he was supposed to be more focused on the base of the republic.

"I tried to go inside that one building that had been controlled by the republic for a little while. I was trying to go inside of there but when I had done so, there was a few digimon that started to try and shot me to go away. I got the message and just left the place before I would get killed off for just being curious and wandering around the world. I walking around and I found something that looked like a grave yard. I am going in there and I am going to maybe spend the night there and then head out and continue travelling tomorrow. I feel like I really failed in my goal to help out the digital world and make it a much better place than it is. Here I am and I am probably going to die soon." The recording had ended there and then Ken decided that there was no point in keeping it anymore, so he just placed the tape down on the ground while he started to go to sleep and then he would continue on his journey later.

Soon enough, after Ken was asleep for a little bit, he had woken up and he was totally ready to take on the republic and save the day. Or what he was thinking at the very least would be saving the world. So he started to walk on in that direction. He was not running as he was just thinking that simple little walking and taking things as easy as possible would just be fine enough compared to everything else that was going on. He thought that no matter what he was planning to do, he just needed to accept the fact that sooner or later, this day, the battle was going to be over. Then if he won, he could head to JewelBeemon hall.

The more that Ken was walking there, the more that he was starting to really think through his plans and what exactly he was going to do once he actually got there. He thought that maybe he should just walk in and say that he was wanting to help out their cause. Then once he had said that, if they believed him, then they could let him inside of that place and then he could go inside and then as a result can stay in there just long enough for them to earn his trust. After a couple of hours or so, then he would start to take them all out.

It had been several hours that he was walking and the sun was starting to set when he had reached the front entrance. He was thinking that his legs were in pain once again and he was tired of all of this leg pain. He had no real clue why he was having his leg be in so much pain in the first place. There was no real explanation to why his legs were always in so much pain. He was just thinking that maybe it was from all the walking, but even that made no real sense to him. He thought that maybe he was just not really having enough will power to truly last as long as he had wanted.

Eventually Ken reached the front entrance of this house that was going to give him the final battle that he had been getting ready for. He was looking around just trying to see what he was going to have to do. The digimon that was guarding the door was looking at Ken to wonder what was going on. "Do you have any real purpose of being here at all or are you just wandering around for no particular reason? If you do not have any business to do here, then please just leave this place and don't ever come back." The guard said and then Ken was thinking of how much he was going to have to lie to make this digimon believe what he was trying to tell them and then maybe he would be safe after all.

"I was wanting to join the republic. I was wondering if maybe I can help you guys are ready to get some help for the battle that is coming up soon enough. You know that there is a battle that is coming soon, and I think that maybe I can be able to be of good use in this battle." Ken said to the digimon that was guarding the entrance and then when they had said that, that was when the digimon looked at Ken as if to figure out how Ken knew about this battle that was coming up. But the fact that he did know about the battle made him think that maybe he should actually let the young man in the building.

"Yes, there is a battle coming up soon. We need as much help as possible. If you think that you will truly be able to help out in any way, then maybe you should come inside." The digimon said and then they walked to the side. After they had walked to the side, the digimon waited for Ken to just go inside so that way they would not be exposing the front entrance for like twenty minutes. Ken slowly walked to the front door and right before he got inside of the building, the slowly stabbed his blade inside of the digimon to get the first of the several digimon the republic done with.

As that had gone on, Ken was inside of the building and he was totally ready to go in and start to wreck house with every digimon in there. He was ready to go on and save the digital world. Once he was inside of the building, there were a couple of digimon that looked over at Ken to try and figure out what the hell he was actually doing in there. "Hey, are you even supposed to be here?" The digimon asked and then Ken nodded to try and get them to believe that he was supposed to be there. Ken waited for the digimon to respond to what he had said and if they would actually believe in him or not.

"Alright, there is going to be a giant battle coming up in a few hours. it is best that maybe you try and help make yourself useful in the next few hours. That way when the battle starts, you can perhaps be able to actually be a decent asset to our team." The digimon said to him and then when he had said that, Ken nodded and started to walk further down the room to maybe try and have this be a little bit more realistic that he was wanting to help out. As he was walking around, there were some digimon looking at him to try and see if there were any ulterior motives to the whole thing or not.

Ken then was inside of a room that only one other digimon was in. Once he was in there with only that digimon, he thought that maybe this was a good time for him to try and get at least one more digimon out. He stabbed that digimon right in the chest like how he had done earlier and then when he had done that, there was one digimon less that he had to deal with and the battle was now a small fraction closer to being over with for good.

The more that Ken was going around the place, every time he would go to a room with only one digimon of the republic in there, he would just stab that one digimon down and then he would start to go around to see if there was another digimon that maybe he could take on. He thought that this whole thing was a pretty good way of looking at it due to the fact that one at a time would not really be all that bad.

This whole situation just felt a little bit unreal. He had no idea how he was even going through this whole thing. Maybe he was just sort of be the hero of the story. Even though he had thought that this would have been a pretty fucked up story due to the fact that he of all people would have been the hero. There was no real reason for him to be the hero. He was not a good man by any means of the world, and there was no real reason he could pretend that he was a good person, and now he was forced to pretty much change all of that in order to be helpful for the digimon that were there for him and the digimon that had been starting to give him and that they had for him.

It took like six or seven rooms, for him to have a few of the republic digimon to be taken care of. He had thought that this was not too terrible of a progress amount. But then he was sitting down on a table where there were a few digimon there. Ken then looked around to see if maybe he was going to take these things out. He found that there was a match a couple of feet away. "Oh look you're the new dude." A digimon that smelled like they were a homeless man who had a bunch of bad boogers going down their face. They reminded Ken of every single homeless man he had seen on earth, and he was trying to keep his disgust at the smell contained. Ken nodded as best as he could to make the guy not think he was a massive dick or anything and then once he subtlely grabbed the match he sat down on the table.

"I just heard that there was possibly a giant battle coming up, and I thought that maybe I could be a good ally here. I thought that maybe I could make a good case to being a soldier worth the recruitment." Ken was saying and then as he was doing this, he was striking the match on the table, doing it as quietly as possible to make sure nothing heard him. The digimon thought that Ken was a terrible choice here and that he would not help out at all. Ken then stood up and then he walked out of the room to take care of those six or seven digimon.

He had already started to feel bad for killing these digimon since while he only had like a fucking sentence of interaction with the digimon, he already had known of them as more than just that faceless digimon that Ken was getting way too carelessly getting to know the others as at this point in time. He had been able to have some dialogue with him and every time he fought another digimon usually, he had like no talk with them and he just took them out. Just the fact that he heard this voices alone already made that different, made him already start to think things out a little bit more than he probably ever thought he would have.

The building was starting to get set on fire but before there could be any more to his plan to go there, there was something that made Ken stop right then and there. Something that ruined everything about his plan. Or at the very least start to think things out a little bit more than he would have. It was the man in the purple jacket. Ken was starting to sweat a little bit as the guy was holding his hands up and he was trying to show that he had no plans of fighting with them at all. Ken then slowly was putting his sword down figuring he might as well give them a short chance to explain what was going on.

"I am surprised that you managed to make it this far. However I am going to rain on your parade a little bit, and I am going to tell you a little bit of the truth. That it is none of your main doing that got you this far. Or maybe not all of it. That the main reason you have even gotten this far has been entirely because I have been letting you get this far because my great plan needs you to do this job for me. That I am letting you get as far as this so that way I don't risk my own life being ruined. You may think that you have been a independent agent, but your entire scheme here has been my own doing and that I am just putting on a very well done and well scripted show to make you think you are truly something." The man in the purple jacket had told Ken, and then when he had said that, Ken was starting to get pissed out but he was thinking that maybe as much as he liked to admit it, that he was telling the truth. He thought that maybe this was all one big scheme, but he never thought it would have been staged by his biggest enemy.

"I think that you have a lot of stuff that is going on in your mind. I do not really blame you for feeling lost, for feeling the way that you are most likely feeling like right now. But that is all a human emotion. When you have come here, I thought that you were going to be a much better candidate to help me take over the digital world than your brother has. Your brother was worthless and weak, and I proudly removed him as a result. I am not even going to pretend that I did not do it. But you my young helper, for a sixteen year old, have proven himself to be most vital for my success. I must thank you for that reason." The man with the purple jacket was starting to have his face mold and change a little bit. Ken would have normally cared if it weren't for the fact that the burning smell of the house was just getting to him much more.

"It is just politics my friend. I need to use you to help advance the humans through the digital world. I have been trying to get humans in the council for the digital world for decades, and I have not had any luck. But if I can twist the young minds of a man, turn him into a war machine, then I think that I can get him to do enough good things to change the opinions of the council to let the humans be a representative. I know that you guys want a fair representation, which shows me that maybe we are not all that different." The man in the purple jacket was saying, and then as he had said that Ken gulped.

"I have a lot of use left of you. I do not want to let you die. So maybe you should get out of here as soon as possible. Just know that truly you are not the one who is behind all of the work here. You may think that you are, but I am the one that is pulling the strings the entire way through here." The man with the purple jacket finished and then he started to walk away out of the building and then Ken yelled at his direction to try and make a point there.

"I will make my own destiny! I am not going to let some asshole run my path. I will do things that I see them to be fit!" Ken yelled and then despite how much he had hated to admit it, the guy in the purple jacket was right. So with that, he started to run out of the building. He needed to leave this place and then when he was doing this, he was trying to find a way to kill this guy later on and maybe he could start to head out to find the hall of Jewelbeemon and then he could start to get the training that he had very much needed.

Soon enough, Ken was out of the building and he was watching the stronghold of the republic start to go down. Ken was breathing heavily knowing that the battle was over and that he could just head to Jewelbeemon. Although he truly was going to do his best to make sure he would not have to deal with any other ideas of something controlling his destiny, which he had felt like was actually extremely fucked up to even ponder. He had hated the thought that somebody was doing it for him. He wanted to do it all on his own regardless of what he was doing, he was wanting it to be his own work.

But before he could think too much on the bare idea of a victory, he saw something coming out of the building. As he was seeing this thing come out of the building, Ken realized that there was still one more battle that he had to do before he was going to have to be able to go on to Jewelbeemon hall. But he was thinking about the reward and that was still making him keep going through the entire thing.

The monster that was coming out of the building looked a little bit like a dragon or something like that. Ken was not ready to take something like that on, and he was hoping that this was something that he was just sort of imagining that he was seeing and not really something that he was actually seeing. But then when he was getting ready, Ken took out his sword and he was going to try and fight this thing off at his best due to the fact that he had not wanted to die. But he was just not sure how he was going to take this thing out, but he was really going to just have to try.

Ken then started to walk backwards and as he was walking backwards, he saw that the dragon was starting to get ready to breath fire at him. Ken looked around for a moment and he was trying to get a slight heads up on this whole thing. Ken started to run towards the dragon and as he was running towards the dragon, he was holding his sword as stiffly as possible not wanting to take even the smallest risk of making this weapon drop. As he was running up, he saw that there was a small hill that he could run up.

The dragon was looking around and then when they were turning around, they flapped their wing around. Ken flew down to the ground after this and then as this was happening, the dragon started to raise their wing up to hit him again. Right when the wing got a couple of inches away from Ken, he swung his sword and left a little bit of a gash on there and then the dragon was breathing fire on Ken and then when they were starting to breath fire on Ken, he started to feel the gas mask break and this was when Ken realizing that he was going to have to get rid of this thing. But then he realized he had a arm cast on still and there was also the sword that he had. He was thinking that maybe he was going to have to get rid of this arm cast. That was when he was thinking that he needed to figure some things out on his own.

The dragon was not breathing anymore after a few seconds and then Ken started to walk backwards and then he did that for a little while until he reached the side of the dragon. Then he ran towards the dragon with his sword raised and then when he got with a few inches of this thing, he slashed the sword down and then the dragon started to scream and then Ken thought that maybe he did some real damage to this thing despite only having one arm open for him to use. Ken saw the dragon fly up even with this going up and then Ken gulped as he was scared that this was going to kill him at the end of this all.

He had given it a decent fight, no matter what the turn out may be at the end of this whole thing. Ken then closed his eyes and then when he was closing his eyes, he was feeling like he was going to just give it his all and then he was going to start to not worry about anything else in the world and he was just going to worry about taking this thing down. So with that, Ken started find a giant spear like item that was near the fire in which he could fire at the dragon and then he could be able to take down the dragon that way.

As he aimed for a little bit and then when he was aiming this, he threw this spear right at the digimon and then the dragon started to do a dive attack at Ken but then when they were getting close to Ken, he threw the spear as fast as he could and then the dragon actually did get hit on the chest with the spear and it had looked like Ken was actually damaging this thing a decent amount. Ken was hoping that this thing would just go down and that when he was done with this whole thing, the dragon would stop attacking Ken now.

But then the dragon landed on the ground and the landing on the ground was having such a loud landing impact and then Ken flew back really far as a result of this and due to that the broken pieces of the gas mask have been getting even worse. The arm cast wrap around Ken's neck had fully snapped and then when the snap had happened, Ken screamed with the pain as the arm fell down on the ground and then he stood up and used his hurt arm to take off the gas mask and it landed on the ground with blood all over his face.

Ken placed his sword onto both hands and he was ready to take on the dragon with his full focus, something that he was realizing he had actually really needed to do. So he started to walk towards the dragon he saw as the dragon was getting ready to breath some fire once again at Ken and then possibly try to fry the fuck out of him that way. But then when that was coming up, Ken started to run really fast and then as he was getting close to the digimon, he stabbed his sword through the mouth of the dragon and the sword was starting to get really bloody as a result of this.

After Ken had done this, he was slowly watching as the dragon was getting a little bit limp. Ken then sighed in relief as he was watching the dragon start to fade away and then Ken had felt like he was finally able to start to take things a little bit more calmly and not feel like his very life was on the verge of ending. But then he took the sword out and after he took the sword out of the mouth, he fell down on the ground as he felt like he needed to get some good rest.

As he was resting on the ground, he was closing his eyes and then as he was closing his eyes, the sword was on the ground and then the gas mask was several feet away from Ken and he was honestly not wanting to ever see that again. It was probably time for him to get rid of the arm cast, although it was kind of a interesting thing to have on him for that time being. But then after a little while, there was nothing that he was thinking about as he was totally out by that point in time.

Soon enough, as if it had felt like no time had passed at all, Ken had woken up and when he was waking up, he was seeing the room around him and this was not the room that he woke up in at the start of this dumb ass journey. In fact, it was a totally different room actually. Ken started to get up and when he was taking in the 50's style setting, the music that was being played, and the general smell of the place, the more that Ken had realized that this was actually the bar that Ken had been in a couple of times. Then when he had come to realize that, Ken walked closer and closer to the digimon that was the owner of the bar and he was wondering if there was anything going on.

He sat down on the exact same chair that he had been sitting on the first couple of times. He was smiling when he saw them. Probably because he had known that this was all over and he was finally able to go on and meet with JewelBeemon to start to train with them. He was honestly tired of not having anybody be at his side and he had honestly wanted to have some allies work with him or at the very least give him some pointers of how he can handle himself in the great outside world.

"You were out for two days. It seems as if you have a good knack of being out for several days in a row. I guess that maybe you are used to this by now. I guess that it is time for you to head out and meet with JewelBeemon once again." The digimon was saying and then when they were saying this, Ken nodded. And then he started to look out the window. He was ready to get out of here. "Before you head out though, I did some things for you with the stuff that you had with you. I think that maybe you should look at what I did to see if you like this." Ken then nodded and he was getting ready to see what was going to be offered to him.

"I am surprised that your sword did not get destroyed while you were out doing that. But here is the sword, I did sharpen it up a little bit last night. Hopefully it will be able to help you fight better and stuff. Also I saw that you were using a gas mask, and then when I saw that, I decided that maybe I could try and fix that for you. Well here you go, just sort of there for your sake." This digimon had said and then the digimon gave Ken the sword and then with a red holster and Ken held the sword for a moment. Afterwards he was handed the gas mask and then Ken grabbed it for a moment and thought about it. He decided to put it on and then he felt a little bit better than he had thought he would feel when he put it on. Ken then looked down at his left arm and he saw that the arm cast was still on there but cleaned up and stuff. Ken thought that maybe it was just left on there due to the fact that the digimon liked the way it looked on there and then they wanted to just let Ken keep it for himself.

"Well, I guess that I need to be heading out right now. Thanks for letting me stay in your place for a couple of days. I thought that after all of the trouble that I have caused here that you would never want me to be here ever again. I guess that I was wrong here after all." Ken said and then when he was telling the digimon that, they thought a little bit about what Ken had said and then shook their head.

"I was originally wanting to do that. But then when I saw that you were nearly dead and I thought that maybe you needed some help when I was crossing by, I decided to come and get you and I let you stay in one of the spare rooms for the next couple of days while you were starting to recover. I just hope that I don't end up regretting the choice that I made here tonight and that you actually make this choice worth it." The digimon had told Ken and then Ken nodded not really sure what else he was going to say and then he just saluted the digimon that owned the inn as he left. There was nothing that he felt like he could really say to make the situation any different.

After Ken had left that inn, he was going to head right up that mountain and he was ready to just work out that section of his life that he had worked much too hard in the last couple of weeks to work out. So Ken was walking in the direction of the mountain and as he was going in the direction of the mountain, he was just thinking about everything that he was going to have to do coming up. This whole thing was just a big head full for what was going on. Ken was really glad that the sword was given to him and he was totally ready to go up that fucking mountain and the gas mask was probably going to help him out here. The more that he was going to be going up this mountain, the more that he was thinking that maybe he had not really made the best of choices when he thought that he could go up this mountain and that he could take on a really large gang or something silly like that.

It took a couple of days for Ken to go up that mountain and thee snow of the mountain was really bad and Ken was actually glad that he had a arm cast cover thing for his left arm by this point in time as that did give one of his arms a little bit of warmth that he did not have to worry about when he was going up the mountain. This was a good idea that the digimon had for Ken in hindsight when he was putting that whole thing in consideration. And this mountain was going to be a little bit rough with him but he was not giving up before he reached the top of it.

Soon enough, after a couple of days of walking, Ken reached the front entrance to the JewelBeemon hall. When he was standing there, Ken took a deep breath and then he knocked on the door. After he knocked on the door, there was only a couple of seconds of a wait before the door had opened and then after the door had opened Ken decided that it was the cue to allow him to come in there. After this, Ken just walked inside of the training hall and as he was doing so, he was taking the sights a little bit in and he was just not really worried about the digimon staring at him then and there.

Eventually, when he was through the hallway, he saw that there was the leader of the hall JewelBeemon. They honestly were not as impressive looking as Ken had thought that they would have been. And despite the fact that Ken came in with no permission, they were not really judging Ken and in fact, they thought that maybe they could use him for their own purposes. "What are you doing here? What is your desire?" The JewelBeemon asked and then Ken had answered that he was just trying to get something to teach him the ways of fighting and then that way he could be able to survive and not worry about dying every ten seconds. JewelBeemon stood up and then when they were walking up to him, they eventually placed their hand on Ken's face and when they had done so, for seemingly no reason Ken had a strange flashback to his prom night of that last year.

Chapter Text

Chapter 10: Preparing for Prom (1966)

It all started at the month of May 1966. During that month of that year, there was this one guy who was sitting around in his lunch room at school. This was during the early morning, before the first period class had actually started. There was nothing really about that school day that would be of a good deal. However, there was something about the end of school that day which would be something to be worth taking note about.

The guy was named Ken. He was sort of wondering what the hell he was going to do that day. It was going to be the biggest day of the school year. Well, at least after the school day was over with. The stuff that was going on after school that day was prom of that year. Prom was the biggest deal. The prom dance was going to be the best things that most people would have. Every student had wanted to go to prom that year.

After all of this, Ken was thinking about how he was going to ask out a girl in order to get a date for the dance. He knew that she would probably not really say yes to him or anything, but he knew that he had to at least try to do so. If he had tried to do this, then he would feel good about the fact that he didn't just feel like he was going to bitch about things that he didn't even try to fix. So that is the fact that Ken was going to ask a girl out was going to be one of his best and biggest achievements in a while. He had did some great things in seventh grade, but that was a different story for a different time.

That was when he found this one girl. She had brown hair and she was walking along near the wall. There was something to it that gave Ken the feeling that she was feeling a little bit isolated and as if she had wanted to talk with somebody. That was when Ken had thought that this girl would be the perfect person to ask out for the date to prom. He knew that he was going to fail on this as he started to walk on closer and he was starting to not want to do this anymore as he was getting closer to her.

"Hey how are you?" Ken asked when he was right next to the girl. She looked over at him as if him being right there was one of the most unexpected things that she had ever seen in her life. But then she nodded and decided that she would talk with him a little bit. "Hey, I know that this is a little bit out of nowhere and I can see why you would say no to me, but I don't have any prom dates and I was wondering if you had any as well."

"Well, I don't have any dates either. I don't really know if I even want to go on the dance at all anyways. I think that I will just be sitting this one out." The girl had said and then Ken started to consider this a little bit. Maybe he could try and convince her that this would be a good idea. Or maybe he couldn't. Either way, he was going to try at least a little bit harder.

"I had a feeling that you and I will be able to make to help us have a better time. I know that if I go to prom right now, I probably would not be able to enjoy it all that much. But I can be able to have a good time, you know, if this night had somebody at my side." Ken said and then he started to think more on her and the idea of them dancing. It did make him a little bit excited. She seemed to consider it for a brief moment. But then she decided that she still wanted to stay home alone without him.

"I think I will stay home still. I appreciate you thinking that I would be a great date, but I still need to stay alone. Thanks for asking me. You seem to be able to have a good dance. I think I have seen you dance a few times before at previous school dances. I think that you don't need a date for you to have a good time. Most people probably need a date, but I think you are different." The girl had said and then when the girl had said that, the more that Ken was a little bit disappointed that she didn't say yes to his offer.

"Thanks for at least being nice about it." Ken had said and then when Ken had said that he started to walk off. Soon enough, he reached the table and sat down at it. As he was sitting, there was about a minute or two of silence. He was not really sure what to do about this. He was probably to go to the dance, but he was not really sure if he would want to do it since nobody would be with him.

"Hey sorry for being a little bit rude, but can you please move out of the way? I am trying to talk with some of my friends and I don't want to stand up talking with them. You seem to be alone right now and not hanging out with anybody." There was a guy that had said that and then when he had said that, he saw that Ken wanted to leave this place. He was pissed off that people would just not be able to leave him alone. Maybe the guy just didn't get it.

"Yeah, I will move out of the way. I don't really have any real reason to stay here after all." Ken said and then when Ken had said that, the guy nodded and Ken started to stand up and walk away. As he was walking away, the guy called out towards him in a way to show that there was nothing that he had meant to give off a terrible impression.

"Hey I'm sorry if I upset you in any way. That was not what I was trying to do. I don't really even know you, so it would be sort of a dick move just to try and ruin your mood without even knowing your name." The guy said and Ken seemed to consider that to be a good point for a moment. Even if he did not want to exactly admit it. "Anyways, now that we are on the subject, what even is your name actually?" The guy said and Ken decided that he would bite and see where this would go if he played along.

"My name is Ken. I only have been here for a couple of years. Nobody really likes to hang out with me. Well, not anymore at least I should say. Back in the day, a lot of people would like to talk with me and stuff. But those days are over." Ken sighed and he was actually thinking back to his so called glory days, when he could actually say that he was at the very least kind of popular. But any chance of him being popular was crushed two months ago when he was caught doing what people considered to be one of the most dishonest and gross things any normal human being could do.

"Well, my name is Brad. Nice to meet you. Don't know if we will ever see each other again, but it was nice to talk with you while it lasted." Brad said and then once Brad had said that, he started to sit down where Ken had sat before and Ken nodded. Now he wasn't angry any more. He actually seemed to be glad that at least one person had actually gone out of his way to talk with him even if it was for all of two minutes. It was still more than what any other person gave him since March.

As Ken started to head on his way to his first class period, he was sort of wondering what there was to Brad. He was sort of wondering if Brad would be asking anybody out to prom or not. If brad already had a date or not. Or if Brad was even going at all. Ken had no idea why he cared so much, but maybe there was just that bit of interest that he had.

Soon enough, Ken sat down at the table in the classroom. When he was in this classroom, he was thinking about what exactly to do. There was nothing that he could do that would make him feel like he would be able to do anything justice. There was nothing that he had felt like would actually get people to start to like him again. He didn't even know if people had ever liked him to begin with. Maybe it was a lie.

Ken was sort of thinking that he truly had no idea what to do. But then this was when he opened his back pack and when he had opened his back pack he was looking at a composition notebook. He was supposed to use this for school work, but then he thought that with only one month left in the school year, he would not need to use it anymore. So he took out a pen and made sure it had at least some ink and once he had made sure that nobody was watching, and most importantly the teacher was not watching him, he started to write down on the paper.

"Hello here, my name is Kevin. Well, actually my nickname is Ken. My biological name is Kevin. I have not been using that name ever since I was just in the seventh grade. That was when I had come to the next school of my life time, and this is the school that I have been in ever since I have been in eighth grade. I am going to be writing this as a way to try and get the trust of people again. If somebody writes this, they can see the good intentions I have and the way that I wish to help people out and even if they don't like the method that I am going at it, they can respect the fact that I have been trying my very best to save my city and do something that actually matters ever since I was in the eighth grade.

Well, something happened in March that made people start to lose hope in me. That is a different story for a different time. It is a story that I will explain when I am done with this story, the one that I feel like I really need to talk about. And that is indeed going to be the story of how I had lost the trust of all of the people that I had ever gone to school with and everything. Alas, I am stalling out a lot here.

So the story starts in eighth grade when I was going by the idea of my friend that I had in my previous school, which was named Wayside. My friend had what I would consider to be one of the best ideas on the planet. The idea could have been so good if it had worked out more and better. The worst part is that the idea did not actually work out too well for me and my friend. He took something that he thought would work out and then turned out to sort of drag things down to the ground. But then to be fair, I would end up doing the exact same thing. In fact, I would probably end up fucking things up even more than my friend had, which is something that I did not even think would be possible until it had happened.

So the idea is that he thought he could sort of become a superhero and sort of save the city and stuff. He thought that if he had saved the city, he could be able to go down as one of the greatest people who had ever lived in that city as well as something that he would be proud of. I thought that it was a good idea, but one that could be really dangerous on top of that.

I still remember when he had taught me his idea and how he thought it could be able to work out. I actually thought he could be able to pull it off. And when I thought that he could pull it off, I decided that I would work with him on stuff like that. But then as it would turn out he would almost die and the school that we had went to at the time was pretty fucked up and Todd, the name of my friend thought that the best way to be a hero was to repair the school and he has been spending the last three years repairing the school and from the letters that we have sent to each other, the school was still being repaired and as the school was still being repaired, there is about three fourths of the repair done and Todd would predict that there would be one more year left before the repair was all done.

I knew about the bad risks of all of this stuff and despite all of the bad risks about all of these things, I decided that I didn't care and that I could still do the work. I could still be able to pull it off. And for a while it had seemed as if I could be able to pull it off. I actually spent a lot of time out lining all of this stuff and I would say for a at the time fourteen year old it was actually quite possibly the most well thought out thing that a person of that age could have been able to do.

I spent most of my eighth grade year sort of improving my plans and doing a lot of drawing and creating a lot of ideas for suits and how the suits could work. Once I got done with school in eighth grade and ninth grade had started, I spent August of so actually getting lessons of sewing from my mother. I had lied to her, as she would later find out that when the whole hero gig was over. I thought that I would be able convince her that I was more interested in sewing and making some great pieces of clothes and stuff and while she was a little bit interested over the fact that I was doing something like this, she decided that she was kind glad I was kind of getting into stuff like that.

So I would use the facts that I learned from her and started to sew together things and when I was doing stuff like that, I had began to make a bunch of outlines at the very least for my suits and stuff like that. I thought that this could work out after all by the time that december rolled around and had made the first full on suit.

It was at this point that I thought I could actually become a hero at this point. By this point I was fifteen, two years higher than the thirteen years of age that Todd was when he had started to do his hero gig. I thought that the two years would actually have been able to make a ton of difference. How little I knew how wrong I was when I had made that assessment. I thought that a extra two years of development and growth could be able to make me so much more ready to take on the world and all that. While two years did indeed enhance my physical ability at the very least, it was still nowhere near enough for me to actually be able to do anything of real difference.

On January 10th of 1965, I had made my first attempt at being a hero. There were people being robbed and I had hated the fact that they were being robbed, so I jumped down as I was watching this stuff and as I had jumped down, I started to beat up the robbers and the robbers left the scene and the family was going to thank me when I jumped up and started to go away. I looked down at the family and their confused faces and them starting to walk away and stuff like that. I was watching them and I was glad that I had finally been able to make some real progress and do some things that had actually mattered. I had saved the day once and by this point I was being a hero in some way. I had thought that this could work out.

When this was happening, and I had returned home I returned home and as I returned home, my brother was coming home from hanging out with his girlfriend and he had looked like he was not that shocked at what I was doing. Just a bit disappointed I was into this.

I told him that he would not be able to convince me out of it and he had said that this was what he was scared of me saying. He had thought that I could be able to actually be taught some fucking sense, but in the reality I convinced him that there was no way that I could be changed to do something like this ever. He hated this fact but then decided not to argue with me and that as long as I would not die or anything like that, but could not really argue with me at all.

So with this, the two of us decided to drop the subject and over the next four months of so, I would ditch class a bunch when I heard of a robbery or a murder and while I was a vigilante by definition, I considered myself a hero as I had stopped nearly twelve cases during those three months. I had thought that this was something I could be proud of and everything like that.

I still managed to pass all my classes. Although I only got a D in my Math class and a D in my English class. On Science, Physical Education and Community Service I got a C, a B, and a A on respectively. The Community Service class was something I passed since I went to a couple of town events and counted up the hours really quickly after just the first couple of weeks of doing this. This was something that would be pretty good for my own sake at the end of this whole thing.

During the summer I did something pretty bold. I had found out about illegal drugs that were being made and I broke into that place where the drugs were being made, stole the drug and then brought the dug over to the police and gave them the information. This bust had taken a couple of weeks to really figure out and fully execute and everything. But once it was done, I was actually thanked and said that I needed to stop while I was still considered at my peak and when I did something that they could actually respect me doing.

The tenth grade school year was something I had a lot of hard time doing. The classes were hard to do and the classes were not only hard, but I was trying to get a date for home coming as well as find a couple of crimes I could actually bust. But there was nothing so it had seemed that due to the activity that the idea could just die off. But then due to me calming down and not working at it too much anymore, I ended up creating more crime since there was the impression that there was nothing left anymore. I decided that this would be something I would have to do all the time if I wanted to actually keep crime gone for the rest of my life in the city.

Once Thanksgiving was coming around, after a couple of months of peace and freedom to the city, I had to start fighting crime again. There was a bombing that hit during the Thanksgiving day celebration and caused the deaths of sixteen people. I was heart broken over this and took a hour or two to mourn over their deaths. Then after I was done having this moment, I decided that I would try and figure out the cause of this bombing and who exactly had done it.

So with that, as my family was going to actually try and have their Thanksgiving meal, I snuck out of the house and when I returned that night with thankfully enough time to get out of my suit before they came in, they were very pissed at me and was wondering what the hell I was doing. I didn't tell them the truth and I don't really know if they realized that or not. What I did that day was look around the town for certain buildings. I found one that only had one car parked and saw that there were no lights or anything inside. I decided to go and check it out and see if that house was the one that I would need to find. Thankfully it was the house that I needed to find after all.

I went inside the house after finding a small hole and when I went inside the house, I saw a bunch of bottles filled with stuff like pee as well as plants and other experimential things. I was over all grossed out by this as you would expect, but I decided not to really pay attention to those gross ass things as I went up the stair case and as I was now further inside the house, I heard that there was some sort of deal being made. I stayed away to the side to hear this deal and not get caught.

The deal was talking about a second bomb that was going to be dropped on the town mayor hall and the bomb would destroy the mayor as well as all of the workers in that building. I thought that this would be a big mistake so I headed on my way down to the town hall and I thought that if for nothing else, I could try and convince them otherwise to do something good as my time as a hero. This would be a really long shot, but I needed to try at least.

Once I had reached the mayors house and at the time I got to their town hall, I was wondering what I could say to the mayor to get them to believe in the fact that I was telling the truth. Well, once I had gotten there I was able to explain that the attack that day was not the first one and that there would probably be more that would be rapidly coming after this point in time. Given the attack that day and the fact that people were sort of upset over this and in mourning, I think I was able to convince them relatively easy just due to that stuff. This was one of the thing that I thought would go down as a heroic moment in my time as a hero. They asked me what the next attack was probably going to be. I told them that the next attack was most likely going to be in that town hall and I was able to convince the mayor as well as all the people there to get the hell out of there in time. This had actually worked and they followed me outside of the town hall and once we were two or three blocks away, I saw the town hall blow up and the mayor thanked me for saving their life and they thanked me for being safe and stuff. They did ask me how I knew about this stuff and I told them that I had saved the day because I had been paying attention to all of the conversations for the people in the town. I then said that I needed to continue my search and look around more.

Things started to go by easier for the next couple of hours and nothing really to work out all that much until it had started to get towards the nighttime. By that point it was starting to rain and I found a sort of area under the bridge that cars would drive by to the next town over. When I was there I found a gun and grabbed it. For some reason I had thought that I would need that gun. So then after I had grabbed the gun, I started to look around a little bit until I found somebody who looked to be kind of older. Well at least kind of older in comparison to my age as you can guess. But then again who isn't old compared to my age at this point in time.

As I had gotten there, I started to talk with him about what he was doing and what I was going to do in order to prevent him from blowing more places up. He said that this would be great until he pressed another button and blew up another building. This was the clock tower and this killed everybody in there since I had no time to stop that from happening. So when this happened I looked at the guy and asked him what he was doing. Why he was doing this and he seemed to think that I was stupid and decided to give me a few minutes to hear his story and his side of things.

He had explained how he was doing this as way to show the world that there will never be any peace. That peace is a lie and that there is no reason to try and ever even shot for peace since there will always be people that destroy places and kill people. I thought that this guy was wrong at the time and that there obviously could be world peace and all that you needed to do was just try really hard for it. That was what had made sense in my eyes to my sort of innocent self at the time. But with each passing day, I am starting to believe more and more that this guy was telling the truth and that there really is no world peace.

I had even tried to tell him that he was dead wrong about this idea and that there was the possibility of world peace and that all you would have to try hard to make the peace happen. I said that I could be a peace walker and that I could walk in a way for world peace. He said that I was wrong and that my younger age is just sort of making me feel like I could do something like this. I said that this may be true and I held my gun up to the guys face. I would not ever want to kill a person myself or anything like that, but I did not want to have this guy try and kill anybody else anymore so I decided that doing this would be the lesser of two evils. I kicked him in the face and he fell down to the ground. After he was at the ground but before he could try and do anything else, I aimed the gun right at his head a second time. I waited a couple of seconds as if to decide if I wanted to do this or not or if I was better than this. The guy then was wondering what I was going to do as he just yelled at me to do it. I fired the gun at his face and as I did so, I sort of had the feeling that everything around me went black and I did not really have any thoughts as I did so. Everything just felt cold at that moment, despite how fucked up that may sound.

I threw the gun into the water and when I threw the gun into the water, I started to walk home and made it back to the house at around ten in the evening. I have described this story in pretty good detail and that was the second biggest thing that had happened during my time in this whole hero act.

Later, the new year started and we were now in the year of 1966 and the 10th of that month came by once again and it was year since I started the whole hero gig. I don't really know what else to say to this whole thing. It was just sort of me looking and taking a moment for the fact that it has been this long already. But it was just a simple as that. There was one more mission that I did before the whole death of the hero gig had happened and the end of this would need to come along.

I would stay out until like midnight or two a clock in the morning every day due to how many things I was trying to do. I would do a bunch of one day things and I would do a bunch of random stuff. Sort of one day hero things like stopping robberies and other things. Deals that I felt I could be able to pull off and not risk dying at.

It was in later February to early March of that year that I finally figured out the one final mission that just changed everything and ruined the whole reputation that I had been able to gather up here. I thought that this would work out but in reality it just did not. I decided that this was taking it too far. There was a guy who was making weapons and shipping them to other countries in the world and I thought that I needed to stop this to prevent more shipments from being made and I could be able to end this whole thing off. I thought that I actually had a real chance to do something of value.

As I had made that one last big attempt to do something of actual use, I ended up messing things up even more than I had by that point. It was quite the hell. I had found a truck and when I had gotten into that truck, I saw a bunch of explosives and I had almost set them off and when I jumped out of there the truck had blown up. This was just the saddest thing ever when I realized that I was causing more destruction than I had actually done to help things out in.

There was a guy who was watching this and he seemed to be working with the group. He shot me in the arm and I screamed out loud and during my time of screaming, I fell down on the ground and as I fell down on the ground I saw the guy rip off my mask and the police saw this guy do so and everybody seemed to stop when they had seen that it was me. Somebody of my age and somebody of my ability and low level popularity.

When the person was considering if they should even try and go after me anymore, I kicked them right in the balls and then grabbed their gun and then shot them dead and by doing so ended off the whole weapon creation business. But as I had done so, the police had stopped me and when they had stopped me, they put me in the police station and asked me a few questions.

When I was in the police station I told them the truth and everything I had done and was thinking that I was going to be spending the rest of my life in prison. They were going to put me in jail when the police chief came in and said that I could not legally be allowed to be put in jail when I was just somebody of that age. However, despite me not being put in jail, the information of what I did would now be leaked out to the public so by that point everybody would know the truth of what I had done.

And that is where I am right now. As a result of me not going to prison, everybody now knows of what I had done and many people had thought that I was doing a terrible thing and that I was a massive traitor who had pretty much gone against everything that would be considered correct at least in the moral sense. If there was anything of the moral sense to even consider in this whole thing. Not that it mattered anymore.

So this pretty much just how things had ended for me. Ever since then I have been looked at as a terrible person. I really want to go on and redeem myself. If I redeem myself, then people will probably be able to forgive me. That is all that I want to do right now. If there is one thing that I want more than anything else, it is just to be able to return at least a little bit of a competent life by this point now. I will see how it goes now."

By this point, Ken was finally done with his writing. He stood up and then when he was done with all of this writing, he heard the class bell ring and he had to head on his way to the second period class. Second period was just math class and Ken just did a few problems from the text book that he was supposed to do and by doing so was able to finish two of the topics from the book. He still had to do like fifteen or twenty left before the end of the year.

The third period was much more interesting. It was global studies and the class had talked all about Vietnam war and how the war was going to work out. The class was talking about their thoughts on the war as well as how they think that the war could have ended and all that stuff. The teacher had thought that this would be a good conversation point, but at the same time, Ken was feeling a little bit terrible for all of this stuff. He felt like he could do something about this war but just did not. This made him feel bad deep down.

When the third period class was over with, Ken started to head to his lunch period. In that lunch period, Ken was wondering what the hell he was going to be doing then. There was not all that many things that he could do during that lunch period. Well, maybe he could talk with Brad and see how the guy was. If Brad would ever want to talk with the guy again, and if he didn't feel like that talk during the start of the school day was just going to be a one time thing or some bullshit like that.

When this was going on, Ken sat down and he was just looking around the classroom. He didn't really know what else to think at the time. He was just sort of wondering if he was going to try and ask another girl out. Ken thought that perhaps something like this would be a good attempt for his own part. He had been thinking about asking a girl out really badly. Well he did ask a girl out before, but that was just one girl and it had failed. There was no real reason think that he couldn't be able to ask at least one other girl before the start of the dance and everything.

But that was sort of put to the start when he sees something that Brad is doing. He sees that Brad was trying and ask a girl out on a date. He thought that this was such a interesting idea that he wondered what the hell he was going to be doing. He was wondering if the girl would actually accept what Brad was asking her or if she was going to turn him down. Ken hoped that she would accept his offer.

"Hey I was meaning to ask you something." Brad had said and then when Brad had said that, the girl seemed to be thinking about what Brad was saying. As if she had not wanted to talk with him or anything like that. She had wanted to go to her normal school life, and it wasn't even like she needed a prom date. She already had one date of her own and all that, so Brad can't even help her on that. But Brad didn't really know that then.

"I was thinking if maybe you and I should go out and go on a date with each other. I think that you are quite beautiful and I like the way that you always do good on your tests. And yeah I am doing terrible on this." Brad said and then he blushed. The girl liked the terrible way that he was doing this, but she decided that this should be cut off before then. "Well, here is the thing. I had a girlfriend and we broke up a month or so ago and I wanted to have a date with me so that way I could have a person to be with and I was hoping that you would say yes to this and everything."

"Well, if I didn't have a date, I might consider saying yes. But I already do have a date. So I won't be saying yes. I don't want my date to feel like I am betraying him or something like that. I don't really want to deal with that right now. I just want to have a good time same as you. Maybe you can find a different girl who will say yes to you. You will find somebody most likely." The girl said and then Brad nodded. He took it pretty well for somebody with his expectations. Then he started to walk away. He was wondering when Ken would try and talk to him. He didn't mind the idea of Ken talking with him, but he just sort of wanted this to be over with already and not be putting this off at all or anything.

"Hey Brad, I heard some of that. Seems like we both got the short end of the stick. I feel sorry for you. I will leave you alone for now. Just wanted to let you know that it sucks to have that happen to you." Ken was saying and then when Ken had said that, Brad remained silent and he didn't really know what else to say to that. He felt glad that Ken was being as nice as he was but at the same time he was not really sure if he wanted to continue talking with him or anything.

"Yeah, I don't think I will want to ask another girl out yet. I feel as if you and I should sort of go stag. I don't really want to go stag at prom, but I don't think I want to ask people around all the time for something that they will most likely just end up saying no to anyways." Brad had said and then when Brad said that, Ken decided to just leave it off as a nod to him.

"I wish that people would want to go on dates with us more often. I really wished that the girl that I had asked earlier had said yes to me." Ken had said and then when Ken had said that Brad seemed to think about it. Brad wondered what else he could say that seemed to be either enough to drag on the conversation related to prom or just go on and start a new conversation.

"I really think you need to maybe just do some things of community service. If you do some things of community service, then perhaps people will see that you are better than you were at one point and that you are willing to put your time and effort into making the town a better place and everything." Brad said and Ken thought that this was a tone deaf but probably a good idea. Even if he didn't want to do community service, that would probably be the only thing that he could do in order to get the respect of the people once more and to show them that he is a good man. Then maybe he could actually be able to get a date on to a dance afterwards from this point forward.

"I just don't want to deal with the commitment of spending several hours, maybe even days of my life doing service for things that I thought would actually be a good service." Ken said and then when Ken said that Brad decided that Ken probably still don't want to do this anymore. He decided that he didn't want to argue with Ken at all since Ken had already decided that he was in the right and that nobody else was really in the wrong at all.

"Brad, I know this may be a little bit out of nowhere, but why are you talking with me right now? Aren't you going to be hanging out with your friends more? They are probably much more interesting to talk and hang out with than me. I mean I am just being realistic here." Ken had said and then when Ken had said that Brad decided that there was a good point there. But then Brad had thought that maybe Ken was actually kind of a interesting figure to go on and hang out with and everything.

"I don't really know. I just feel like there is something that I could get out of you. I feel like maybe there is something that can make both of us understand each other a little bit more." Brad had said and then when Brad had said that he did stand up and he realized that he was actually supposed to hang out with his friends. He arranged something with them earlier.

"Speaking of my friends, I just remembered that I needed to hang out with them. Nice to talk with you and maybe we can talk with each other a little bit earlier." Brad said and then when he told Ken that he stood up and then began heading on his way over to the group of friends that he had. This was when Ken decided to just think about the conversations that he had been having with Brad.

Like he wasn't even all that much of a friend with the guy, and yet he was getting more along with the guy than anybody else in the school at the time. He did not really know just how sad that truly was. It was really sad in the end. How some guy he had met that day earlier was more of a friend than anybody else in the school had ever been ever since March. He had wished that people would just give him some attention. He really needed that right now. He needed somebody there to let him know that he wasn't entire alone. But he just knew that it wasn't going to be the case. Ken looked at the two people fifty feet away from him kissing, and Ken was thinking about what a couple they make.

When Ken was just trying to get all of this over with before he would return to class, there was a girl that sat down next to him. Ken had no idea why a girl would be trying to get caught dead talking with a loser like Ken, but he decided to count his blessings. 'It's seems like you are pretty lonely right now." The girl said and Ken nodded, she was right about that at least. Nobody seemed to really want to talk to him. "Who was that guy that you were talking to earlier?" For a very short second, Ken had actually forgotten that Brad had even existed. He could not believe that this had actually happened. He thought about it and then he thought that maybe there really was no harm talking with this nice lady.

"Just a junior named Brad. He was just talking with me. I only met him today. probably trying to be nice to me after a incident that had happened earlier today. Still more than I can say about most people in this school. If I just vanished away, nobody really would care." Ken said and he looked at the girl for the first time and said "What is your name?" The worst part was that there was actually a tiny sense of truth to what Ken had said about the nobody caring thing if he had left. But he didn't get to see the truth come out yet.

"My name is Ally. I'm a senior at the school. I have seen you once or twice in the school, but you never really seem to talk to anybody. Are you just one of those people who do not like making friends or something?" Ally said and Ken remained quiet for just a couple of seconds. "I get that friends are hard to make. I really do get it. I don't blame you if you don't want to go out there and be everybody's best bud or something like that. But you should at least try and get to know people a little bit. After all, they might start to really respect you in the end" Ally said and Ken shook his head.

"I tried to do that. I thought that it was working for a while. But it seems that I am just not normal enough here. Back in my old school, that wasn't really a problem. Nobody cared if you were normal or not. It was really easy to get by there, just had to basically show up to class every single day and you were good. But here it is different. There are quite a bit of standards that I have to meet up to." Ken was basically facing the exact same problem Todd had but in a reverse school environment. Todd had to deal with going from normal to crazy while Ken had to deal from crazy to normal.

"Now that I think about it a little bit more, you look like somebody who was on the news once. What did you do to get on there?" Ally asked and Ken was glad she didn't know the exact context. If she did, then there was no way in hell they were going to talk with him any more since he killed a few people even if it was indirectly.

"I just got involved in some things that in hindsight I should not have started to try and deal with." Ken said and he decided that leaving it as simple as that was effective enough and that it would still be able to get the point across. Ally considered that and she was wondering if it was really all that bad or if he was just saying it to get her off the subject. Besides, she knew that classes were going to start soon anyways.

"If you had a second chance, would you have gotten involved in these things that you say you shouldn't have or would you have stayed away from it knowing what would happen?" Ally asked and Ken thought about that for a moment. As they were having this conversation, the people foot ball and how annoyingly loud they were being was distracting Ken a little bit, but not enough to make it so that he couldn't process what he was trying to say. All had to end up waiting about seven seconds or so before she ended up getting the answer that she was wanting.

"I would still do it. Despite how crazy that may sound, I think I would still do it. Maybe I would do it differently with the hindsight factor kicked in and knowing what I would need to do to stay out of trouble. But I would still do it regardless. I think there would still be a merit to doing it after all regardless of how the final turn out would be. Besides, for all we know, things might end up being worse if I did nothing at all." Ken said and he could not believe that this was the answer that he had given Ally.

"Well Ken, I would really like to hear what your perspective is later. Right now we should be heading to class." Ally said and got up to start heading off. Ken sat back a little bit longer thinking about the class thing. He was honestly just thinking about not going at all. It would be easier if if did that after all. Besides, it wasn't like he was going to pass the classes. He was going to drop out anyways after the prom night after all.

There was nothing really else that Ken had to do really do for the rest of the school day. He walked around the high school track a little bit to sort of see what the hell was going on there. Well, that along with actually getting a little bit of exercise which he felt was a good idea. Only when he was there for like ten minutes or something and he did about two tracks of walking the bell had rung and Ken had to go onto his fourth period class, which was his science class.

Science class was one that he was not really all that interested in going to. All he did there was just write a bunch of Biology notes and all of that stuff. This was sort of a boring thing for him to do. He was not really all that interested in stuff such as Biology. Like he wasn't really going to blame the people who had liked the class, but he personally just did not like it all that much. It was a personal preference that he had in the long run.

During fifth period, it was his English class. While he was in his English class, he was getting ready for a essay that the entire class would be forced to write. He was not a fan of essays at all and he hated doing them. Then again, who would really want to take them at all. But he decided that he would just do them for the sake of passing his classes. He cared more about passing his classes than doing something that he had actually liked. Not that he had really cared if he had passed the classes or not at the long run of it all.

Once the school day was finally over, Ken decided that he would just try and head right on home. There was no real reason for him to stay there any longer. Besides, he needed to go and get his suit on for the dance. He knew that he needed to do this if he wanted to get people to be impressed with his performance at the dance. He thought that if he saw Brad once again, then maybe he would talk with him once again.

By the time that Ken reached the school track a second time, he would actually find Brad was standing there. Well, it started off with him just standing there but eventually he would walk on his way towards the exit of the track. Brad was most likely just starting to head on his way back home, and Ken thought that maybe he could get a chance to talk with him once again. Ken started to walk there a little bit faster. It was totally off in the way of where he had lived, but he thought that maybe he could thank Brad being so nice to him earlier that day and everything.

"Hey Brad, just wanted to thank you for hanging out with me. It was a really nice thing for you to do. I barely have talked with anybody in recent times, so I thought that you could know that you really gave me a good time. The fact that you talked and hung out with me at all makes things so much for me than they were earlier." Ken was saying and then when Ken was saying that, he started to walk on his way home. Since his house was on the other side of town as compared to where Brad had lived. But before he had fully gotten away, Brad had called out to him once again.

"Hey Ken, I know that you probably don't live in this direction, but maybe you and I can hang out for a little bit. I mean there are still like five hours before the dance starts. Maybe you and I can talk for a little bit more before the dance starts." Brad said and then when Brad said that Ken stopped. He thought that Brad was being even more nice than he was originally just for this moment of reaching out and everything.

"I think that we can perhaps have another final good conversation before prom. I was thinking that prom might be my last big thing before I leave high school in general." Ken said and then when Ken had said that, Brad decided to ask him where the hell he was going from there. Was he planning to drop out pretty soon, which would have been one of the worst ideas on the planet for him to do.

"When I am done with prom, I do plan on just dropping out of school. I don't want to do this anymore. I want to leave this place and just never have to worry about coming back or anything like that. I want to leave this place on a high note. So that way I don't end up hating this place even more than I already do." Ken said and then as he was walking as fast as he could, he was trying hard to not go so fast that Brad would be several feet away. Brad was trying to find a way to argue with Ken to make him understand that this was a terrible idea in the first place.

"You know that if you do this, you will not be able to get a bunch of opportunities to show up in your life again. You will just be shut off and you will never be able to get a good job. Obviously this will not be all that big of a deal if you just hang around your house and live off of insurance money. I don't know if that is something that you plan on. But whatever, it is your choice at the end of the day." Brad said and then Ken was nodding. He knew exactly about all of this. But he still wanted to make this choice all for himself and not deal with people telling him this was a terrible idea.

"You know I get that. But I just don't want to be in this school anymore. I just want to be able yo do my own thing. I want to not be forced to do a bunch of hellish things that I will not even be able to enjoy anymore." Ken said and then after Ken had said that he shook his head. "I can get a gas station job or something like that. Just something that I might be able to work at for the time being and all of that stuff."

"I guess that you could be able to get this job, even if you won't be able to make a full living off of it. I doubt that you will be make a full on living off of a job such as this. But then again, you are at least coming up with something that could be considered a good alternative. I doubt that anything too bad will happen if you actually do this." Brad had said and then when Brad said that Ken was looking at the statue near his house. He had never known about why the statues were there, so he decided to never really pay too much attention to it. But he decided that he could talk about it that once.

"Seriously why the hell was this thing even made in the first place. It never really makes any sense that this is just here. I mean out of all the things that they could build, they could have built a doughboy statue or something like that. But then again, there is that forced attempt to have so called equality even if it makes zero sense in the context that it is being used in. To be totally honest, I feel like liberalism is just a bunch of bullshit and just one of the most annoying things that somebody could make and try and work out with." Ken said and then when Ken said that, the two of them looked over and Ken pointed to that staircase nearby.

"My house is up these stairs. I don't need to do anything here besides just grab my suit for prom. Unless if there is something else that I need to grab that I don't remember. Such as you know, money or something like that. I think that I might use some money for the sake of buying a ticket and get some other things for the dance. But aside from that, I probably won't really get anything else." Ken said and after he had said that, Brad and Ken were going up that staircase.

"I am surprised at how big your house is. I was not really expecting it to be all that big. No offense at that to be honest. I don't really think that you give off that impression of having a big house at all. If you get what I am saying here." Brad had said and then after afterwards Ken reached the front door of the house. He opened the door and the two of them waited outside for a couple of seconds before Ken went inside and then Brad went inside a second later. They started a really strange conversation after this.

"I'm really bored right now, and I don't really know what to do right now. I guess that aside from getting ready for the dance, there is nothing to do. I really hate trying to make new friends, and then having them all leave me when they are done with me. Like their purpose with me has been served and then they never want to talk with me again after a while." Ken said and then after he had said that, Brad considered that and he was trying to really ponder what it would have been like to be in Ken's shoes. Talking with somebody who they only would get to know for a couple of days, or even hours in this case, and then they were just getting thrown away. Brad thought that maybe they can just talk at his house for about ten minutes or so.

"How bad was it really... being at your previous school and having to deal with different friends once you started to move on to this school? Did it really change your life all that much?" Brad said and Ken looked down on the ground and he knew that Brad just would never be able to understand.

"Yes it was truly awful. I had spent a whole school year helping some of my friends try to form a good life, a life that they would actually be a little bit proud of, dealing with some terrible monsters, and then I was forced to move away since I was the one that was indirectly responsible for what had happened. Trust me Brad, if you had been there with it, seeing what had happened, you would see what had made that whole thing so hard, and that group so special." Ken said and Brad was wondering what that whole thing was really like.

"Maybe it really is because I wasn't there that I can't really understand where you are coming from, not from lack of trying, but maybe I just need to be in your spot a little bit more to fully understand." Brad said and Ken stood up as he was rubbing his head. The more that he was talking with Brad, the more that this was really annoying him and the more that he was wishing that he had just kept his mouth shut and not tell Brad what he had been thinking and everything.

"You know Brad, I know what you are trying to do and I really appreciate that, but this is too much. I don't really think that you will get it. I don't blame you for that, but that is just how it is." Ken said as Brad stood up and then Brad thought that he could really make Ken see that he did care and he was really trying to understand Ken and that maybe Ken really could start to see his point of view before Ken just would shot him down here. But Brad did not really know what he could really tell Ken before it would start to get too far into his own back story.

"Ken, did somebody die when you were working with your friends at Wayside? I feel like I would only really understand if that is what happened..." Brad said and he was just going to leave it at that. He was hoping that Ken would figure out what he had meant and that he was just going to be allowed to only leave it at that and not go super in depth over any of the guilt that he was going to feel.

"Yes Brad, that did happen. Some of the people that I was friends with at Wayside when I went to school with them died on the final few days that I was at their school. I tried really hard to protect them. My friend Todd did as well. Todd was a good man, and he did his best to work with me. But in the end, the two of us did have some different ways of looking at things. That led to a little bit of conflict. While we were never rivals or something like that as you may imagine, but still, I wish that if we had come up with a more clear vision of what we both had wanted, the two of us could have eventually saved the city even more than we did. I think that maybe one day, I can see Todd again and we could truly understand each other once more." Ken told Brad as he was hoping what Brad would think.

"To be honest Ken, there is a point in time when you have to take your past, and just move past it. There is a point where no matter what you did, if you continue to look further and further back on it, the more that the event will really start to eat at you. Do you want to have a huge amount of survivors guilt?" Brad said and as he had told Ken that he was trying really hard to not talk about his past, since if he did, that was going to do a great job being the exact opposite of what he was telling Ken about.

"I don't want any of that, but I feel like I need all of it. I feel like the only way to truly remember what had happened and what I did that was wrong, I need to remember the stuff that had happened and continue the survivors guilt as much as possible." Ken said and he was wondering what about that was really making Brad thinking this way. It didn't really make sense for him, and it made even less sense for Brad. "One of these days I suppose, I can get over it. But that was only three years ago..."

"If something happens to my younger brother Tuck, then that will be on me. I at least feel like that will be the case. I know that he is sort of his own thing, and that he is ten now and when you are ten, you can do your own thing, but still, I feel like I am still at least a little bit responsible." Brad told Ken as Ken looked around to ask about the brother.

"What was your brother like? What makes you feel like everything that happens to him if directly your responsibility? Sam was never really that way with me." Ken said and then when he had said that, Brad thought about Sam and the more he had thought about it, the more those repressed memories were starting to come up.

"Well, I think I am just worried that they will start to do some things as me. I mean there were a few things in this last year or so that I should have never gotten into, and if I had a second round to do so and change everything, I would have changed it and not done any of that stuff at all." Brad told Ken as Ken was starting to think that there was a good way of looking at it and then when Ken was starting to think that if he had a sibling, he would have tried really hard to protect them.

"I am really glad that you are looking at it that way. This is better than the way that my brother ever looked at it. I don't know though, I don't really think I want to talk about rough stuff anymore. it is starting to really get to me. I will go on and change into my prom clothes." Ken said and then when he had said that, Brad was starting to wonder what the fuck was going on and what they had done and if somebody had heard this whole thing.

Brad was thinking that if somebody knew what they had said that this would really turn everything to the shit hole. "That is probably the best thing to do. I don't mind staying here, but this is something that I want to kind of get to the point of since I do want to go to the dance soon. Even though that is like four hours from now." Brad said and then Ken agreed to that. He needed to just enjoy at least one night of the time that they were outside and he was just hoping that prom was going to be even half as good as people had hyped it up to be.

So with that, Ken was starting to get ready to go on and get the suit ready when Brad was wanting to ask who was there. And he was sort of letting the fact that he exposed all of these details to a guy he barely knew really sink in but then soon enough he called out to Ken and then he was getting ready to ask the question that was in his mind.

"Is there anybody in the house right now besides you and me?" Brad asked and there was no real reason for him to ask that question, but he just felt the interest and need to ask him how that is. "I mean everything is pretty quiet here right now. I know that there are not all that many things that would be too affected by your answer, but whatever."

"I don't know. I bet my parents may be in their bedroom. But if they don't come out of the bedroom, then there won't really be anything to worry about here. I don't really think that I will need to talk to them about anything of you coming here if they don't ever see you. After all, there are only a few minutes that we are going to be here." Ken said and then he went into his bedroom.

"What is even going on here in your bedroom? You have a lot of things here that it looks like you have never used. Or at the very least not used in a very long time or something like that." Brad said as Ken placed the back pack on his bed and then Ken nodded. There was a level of truth that there was to this. He just didn't want to admit it. Not that he could use a lot of the items that he had gotten, aside from gifts from Todd and his notebooks.

"Yeah to be totally honest, I don't use things that people give to me all that much. It is a little bit of a self weakness. Then again, if I have no real reason to use it, then I should not even bother. I guess it really doesn't matter all that much. Unless if you count the money used to get it as wasted as a result." Ken replied and he didn't ever really think about the wasted money aspect as much as the fact he never really needed a lot of this stuff.

"Well, I guess whatever suits you in the long run. I mean, I would have tried to use a lot of the stuff that I have been given from my friends and family. I guess that is just one of the many aspects that makes the two of us different. But anyways, so where is your suit and what does it look like on you?" Brad concluded that little debate and then he would go onto the main thing that made the two of them go to the house in the first place. Ken then snapped his finger when he remembered that prospect.

"Yeah I will need to get that now. Thanks for reminding me. I would have totally forgotten had you not brought it up. I was more focused on the little conversation that we were having." Ken said and then after he had said that he went to his drawers. Then he pulled out what the clothes were and flashed them for a brief second to Brad. "I will change the bathroom over there. I will be back in about a minute or so." Ken said and Brad couldn't really say anything at all before Ken went right inside that bathroom. He just sat down at Ken's bed while he had waited for Ken to come out again.

Brad was wondering if he should check out more of the room or not. He was just really curious to know more about this dudes personal life, but he knew at the same time this would be extremely disrespectful to just sort of go through the dudes belongings. So despite the fact that he would admit he was very tempted to do so, he decided not to do it. But he did lay down on Ken's bed and pretend to be sleeping there for the minute or two that he would wait for Ken to be done in there.

As Ken was in the bathroom, he took a short second to look at himself. He usually did that when he was in the bathroom. No real reason besides the fact that he had a chance to. Once he was done taking a second to evaluate himself, he took his shirt off. After he had taken his shirt off, he placed it down on the ground and looked at the black button down shirt he was going to be using for prom. He grabbed it and then slowly put it on as if he were going through a personal transformation or something silly like that. After that he took his shoes and socks off and placed them next to his now useless shirt. He then grabbed the black slacks and brushed them off for a couple of seconds to get rid of that annoying dust that would get on there and then once he was done cleaning it up on a low level, he placed the clothes over his body slowly and then zipped them up when he was done. That was when he grabbed his black socks and slowly covered his feet in them and then put his dress shoes over that. The dress shoes he barely ever wore but did do when there was a major event coming up. Once he was done with that he took another look at himself and was kind of surprised at how good he had looked despite the fact he put virtually no effort into it at all. Then he left the bathroom to head back to Brad and talk with him further there.

"So that is what you look like when you are wearing nice clothes. I guess that you don't look that bad. Although I can see why you don't o out of your way to do it every day. You don't really look like that type of person who would be able to pull it off all the time." Brad said once he had seen Ken and he felt as if he were able to make a better assessment on the matter. Not that it really mattered all that much. It was just interesting to kind of compare and contrast a little bit to what he thought in his head to how it actually turned out in real life.

"Well I don't really think we need to be in here for any longer. So I think that we can actually head on our way out now." Ken decided and then when he decided that he then remembered one tiny thing that he could not believe he had almost forgotten about. He needed some money to go on and get read for the dance. If he didn't have any money, he couldn't get the ticket and all of this would have been for nothing. So he decided to go to his personal desk and see if perhaps he could get something from there.

He pulled out one of the drawers in his personal desk and when he had done so, he grabbed the money that he would need to go to prom and maybe get something to eat at the same time. Then when he was done doing that he then said that they really could leave this time. So with that, Ken and Brad began heading their way out of the house and on their way to prom. As this was happening, Sam saw what they had done and felt glad that Ken was actually taking action for once and was going to try and have a good time at this dance or anything in his high school life for that matter.

"Honestly, high school is just a heaping load of bullshit in my opinion. I don't understand the purpose of it and I doubt that I ever will. I know some people will find that to be some terrible thing to say and that I should respect the education system more. But why should I value a system that has so little value for the students in the first place? It honestly is just bullshit if you ask me and I am not even going to pretend that it isn't. We need to be more honest about the system." Ken said and then he looked at Brad wondering what he had thought on it.

"The school education system does have a noble goal on the end of itself. I will give it that. But it is really hard to see how it can exactly live up to that when the teachers seem to only be there just to get their pay check. It is sort of a cynical thought I have to admit, but I suppose that in the end there is a level of truth to the whole thing. I wouldn't slam the entire school system because of teachers that don't really seem to care though." Brad gave his thoughts on it and Ken was not too sure if he had felt the same way. He sort of got Brad's defense, but it still seemed very shallow in his mind.

"I sort of see where you are coming from, but I still don't really feel totally sold on the whole thing. I know that maybe I just need to relax a little bit and accept the fact that not everything is perfect, but I don't really know yet either. I feel like there should be at least some attempt at a perfect education system. That is how I feel on it at least." Ken stated and Brad was wondering what even would be a perfect school system in his eyes, or if he was just sort of thinking truly outside of the box.

"Where do you exactly plan on this if you don't mind me asking?" Brad questioned and Ken was thinking about it. Even though he had not wanted to say it, there was a good reason that many of these things had been the way that they were. Perhaps school was just a broken system. Perhaps he should just accept that fact for what it is.

"I can see if I can try and fix things later. I don't think there is anything wrong in trying in my opinion." Ken said and he was just too far out there and unrealistic on these type of things to really have a good grasp of things. He knew that, but he wished that things just actually would go well in the world that he didn't even care how far out there and unreal the whole thing was. He just wanted justice. Was there anything wrong with that wish in mind?

When Brad and Ken were sort of on their way over to Brad's house, Ken was sort of thinking of things he could say that could have any way to continue this conversation. He knew that he and Brad could have a lot to talk about he was just sort of having a hard time figuring out where to go. Maybe this was a sign that the things they had a common. The views that they had shared, were slowly started to come to an end. Which would have been a bloody shame to be totally honest.

"I just sort of thought of something. I know that this be out of nowhere. But is there something that you ever saw in your life that just scared the shit out of you and you had no real clue what the hell it was? I think I have seen some things like that in my life time. Stuff I don't know the answer to, or I guess I should say don't want to know the answer to. But have been sort of forced to see the answer to it in the hardest ways possible." Ken was saying and he was thinking about one man. This one man had ruined everything in his life and he wanted to get revenge but didn't know how he could at all.

"Yeah when you mention it I guess I do have one thing that sort of is in my life. Something that I wish was never in my life. Something that I would deny being in my life if I could. A man I had met when I was younger. A man in a purple jacket. I have no idea why he liked that jacket so much, but I guess that maybe it is his certain type of style. I just have a feeling that this guy wants something to do with me. I don't even know what it is though. Why would he want anything to do with me when I haven't done anything yet?" Brad was saying and as he was saying this Ken could tell that he had sort of triggered Brad into a topic he didn't really want to get into. Not that he could really blame Brad at all.

"What made you see the guy in the purple jacket? He was one of the things I was talking about in terms of people who have sort of ruined my entire adulthood life. I guess I should say teenage life. I just don't really know what is going on with him or what his problem is and I don't even know if I want to know. If you get what I mean when I say that." Ken said and then he shivered at the idea of this guy showing up again and trying to do anything with him once more. Ken really fucking hated that guy.

"This guy has tried to ruin my life so many times I truly have lost count by now. I don't even know if I want to keep count anymore at this point. I just wish that he would go away and never be in my life anymore." Ken said and then when he had said that, he waited to hear what Brad would have to say on the matter. He was curious to hear what Brad would say about this after all. Since he did ask for his thoughts on the whole thing.

"Well I think I was in school one day. I think it was the end of my previous school year. Which for me was my tenth grade year. I was super excited about finally being done with it all as you may be expecting. I threw the school supplies into the trash can with my friends and after I did so, I saw the guy for a moment. He was standing there across the highway of the school. He was just looking at me as if he wanted to attack me or try and get my lunch money or something silly. Of course I did not know any better at the time. Scared the shit out of me a couple of hours later though when I had time to reflect on what I had just saw. But then I decided not to worry too much about it when I went home and decided that I would head my way off to sleep. That would only be the first time out of several that I would see him." Brad answered as he shook his head. He could not quite believe that there was that guy to begin with. Seemed like something you would hear about in a fictional story made for just selling copies.

"What were the other times that you had seen him if you don't mind me asking. I can see why you would not want to answer that question though due to how much of a touchy subject this kind of is." Ken was saying and by this point, the two of them had passed by the park that was near the school and was getting near the curved high ways that would eventually lead to the large ass hills that would just be able to soon lead to where Brad had lived. Brad thought about what Ken had asked and if he did want to answer the question at all or if he had wanted to end the topic right there.

"I don't remember the next time I him was. The time time that I remember though was when I was hanging around near the movies with some of my buddies. We were talking about the movie that we had just seen and what we had thought about it. It was just a general play around for the group of us. But then something happened that put a sort of stop to my blood. I saw him again. Sitting in a car staring at us. There was a point in which I did get the courage to talk to him. Not during this encounter. I think it was the next encounter. I saw him a ton during that one summer of off time I had that year." Brad had responded and he had shook his head when he realized when that this guy was actually still a real life thing. He had thought that maybe this was just a thing that only really affected him and stuff.

"What were some of the things that you had seen that year? What were some other encounters that had happened during that time?" Ken said and then Brad shook his head. He had no idea what the hell was going on here. But he knew that if he wanted to help Brad defeat this asshole, he would need more information on what they had done during that time period. Ken didn't really have to deal with the guy too much in the last couple of years. After the whole Wayside incident, he has only seen him like once. And since he wasn't really sure if he was making this up, he decided that he would just talk with Brad and then things would be better.

"I don't really get what I did when I saw him next. I think I was hanging around in that sort of town lake near by. I was trying to build a fort or something like that with my friends. We were just trying to have a nice and fun time. Nothing more, nothing less." Brad said and then he shook his head when he truly did remember what this all was. "As I had built the fort and all that stuff, I saw him looking at us and then after seeing him for at least three times, I decided to see what was going on. So I began to walk my way over there and then as I began walking my way over there, he smiled at me since he was excited to see me coming over there."

"What the hell did he do next after that?" Ken asked and then Brad nodded as if he felt like this was going to be easier for him to deal with now. Living these memories once again were easy for Brad to do now given the fact that Ken was there, and there was at least one person who had been able to discuss what had happened then. So he decided that he would continue on this conversation and give a answer to what Ken said.

"Well when I had seen him, I told him that I had seen a few times and I had no idea who he was or what he was doing." Brad said and then he tried to remember what he had said as a response to this whole thing. "I don't remember what he said, but it was something related to taking something over."

"Oh my god, that asshole is still obsessed with taking that fucking place over? I thought he would have gotten the point by now and that nobody wants to help him do this evil shit. I just thought that he would have gotten the fucking message by this point in time." Ken said and then when he was saying this, this was making him actually really pissed. But nothing really makes sense to this. The two of them were now at the hill nearby the house. This was when Brad was asking him what he was talking about by this point in time.

"I have no idea what you are talking about right now. He didn't really talk all that much about what exactly he had wanted to take over. He was just being really vague and said he wanted me to take some place over and he had just left it at that. I didn't really know what else to say besides the fact that I just didn't know what to say or if I wanted to do this at all." Brad was saying and then when Brad had said that, Ken decided that he would explain what the world this guy was talking about was. He didn't ever go there, but there was some things that he had heard about it from his friend Todd and all of that stuff.

"I don't know anything about this world at all. I hope that I will never have to learn about that world at all. It is kind of scary for me to think about even the idea of me learning about the world or anything like that. However, I heard something from my friend who I had talked with and was really close with at the time. He had told me all about what this world was like and all of the things that he had to do in this world." Ken said and then he decided to go into what he felt was the best description possible to it.

"There was something digital about it as he had described. He said that there was something odd about it. As if he had gotten out of time or something like that. Like he went back in time to a different century or something like that. I was confused when I first heard about this and I don't think that most people would actually get what the hell had happened when they saw it on their own. But there was something to the way he described it that made me believe in him." Ken said and then he and Brad were starting to get close to the entrance of Brad's house. They would talk on detail to detail once in Brad's house.

"This whole world thing just seemed to be one of the dumbest things that I have ever had to hear about in my whole life. I don't really know what the hell else to say about it besides that right now. Although I do wonder what the hell he was talking about when he said he was in a different time. He did say that he had gone into the third crusade for a little while. After he had been in there, he had been forced to go on a bunch of contracts that would actually be going around and killing tons of people for the sake of keeping things closer to a good and up to date timeline. I don't really know if he was telling the truth or not here. But I don't really know or care if he was telling the truth or not." Ken had said and then when he had said that, when they were inside the house the two of them had no idea what else to talk about there.

"I don't really know what this world is all about. I don't even know if this world exists. I really feel as if the person who had said this and made these offers to us might be on a lot of drugs. That really would not surprise me all that much." Brad had said and then when Brad had said that he decided he had no real clue where he was going to go from there.

"I don't really know if I would want to talk about that disaster of a guy anymore or not. I feel like he is just out there to secretly kill us. I doubt that he actually wants to do anything for our own personal gain. I just feel like he is trying to lure us into something so that way he could be able to kill us this way." Ken told Brad and he felt like this was going to be one of the worst things that he would ever have to deal with. "If I ever see this guy again, I am going to try hard and defeat him once in for all so that way I will never have to deal with the guy ever again."

"But are you sure when you see him again, that he is not going to try and kill you first and probably be able to succeed at this. I feel like if you are trying to defeat him, he will find some strange things like a gun or maybe some force powers to defeat you. If this other world he was talking about what was true, then maybe he has some force powers." Brad was almost seeming like he was a Star Wars fan, which surprised Ken a little bit despite the fact that everybody at the time was a Star Wars fan.

"Well, it could be worse I suppose." Ken said and had no idea where he was even going with that. "I mean, I guess that we could be dead right now. I mean I had honestly thought that I was going to die several times during the time that I had known that asshole. In fact, I would say that there were several times that we should have died." Ken was saying and then when Ken had said that stuff, Brad decided that maybe there was a little bit of truth of this to what he had said.

"I guess that maybe there is something that you can be glad for. For all of the times that you even admit that you should have died, you have not died. I feel as if you could always be looking at the ways that it could be worse. But to be honest, that is not what really matters. What matters is the stuff that you have been forced to deal with for all of this time."

When Brad had said that the two of them had sat down at the couches and they were ready to talk with each other a bit more and stuff like that. "You know, I do wonder what it would have been like if I had said yes to his offer. Do you think that I should have said yes to his offer. I know that this really does go against everything that we had said earlier, but I feel like we could always talk about a nice alternate history universe or something like that while we are on it."

"I feel like if I said yes to his offer, we would be in a much different spot in life. I would not be trying to be a fucking hero and a great person when I would have no real need to do so at all. I admit to that. I would have probably been in that world and doing things there that I will admit that I would not be able to imagine at all." Ken said and then after Ken said that he looked around and thought about what he would have done. "If what my friend had said was true, I do wonder what that world would have been like or what different time period I would have been forced to go out and check in."

"I feel like if I had to go to a different time period from the one that we are in, I feel like maybe we should have been in the future. The future is something that we could have really changed and done something that matters. But the past is so locked in that I do not really think it matters anymore and besides if I mess with the former timeline too much, I will probably change things and I would never exist. You know, like in the whole idea of the butterfly effect." Brad had said and then that was when Ken thought about the point that Brad had raised and thought that this actually was a pretty good point to bring up.

"When do you think that we should go on and head down to prom? I do not want to be late to the dance or anything. I mean, I guess if I was like ten minutes late or something like that I wouldn't mind, but anything beyond that I feel like will sort of take away from the experience and fun of being there." Brad said to Ken when he sort of remembered that prom was still a thing and not just that asshole in the purple jacket who had ruined everything in their life.

"Maybe in like twenty to thirty minutes. I don't really see any problem in staying here for a little while. I mean we came here for a reason and there is no reason just to leave due to the fact that there is a dance in several hours from now. Although you should probably change into your outfit sometime soon so that way maybe you don't forget about it or anything." Ken had responded and then when Ken had responded to that question, Brad decided that maybe Ken was right to that on a certain extent.

"I should probably get my suit on right now. If I don't do that, then I will probably forget that I am supposed to do that and then I will be going in stag and you should never go in stag when you go to prom. Like Winter Ball and Homecoming is one thing, but prom is something else entirely. Like I know I sound strange when I say this but prom is sort of like a creature of its own if you get what I mean." Brad said and then when Brad had said that he stood up and then looked at Ken. "I will probably be back in a few minutes. See you when I am done getting ready."

With that Brad had gotten out of the room and Ken was just sitting there and he was wondering what the hell he was going to be doing while he was waiting for Brad to get dressed up and Ken was almost certain that he would be much better dressed up than Ken would be for the dance. It was a little bit pathetic that he was so bad at this stuff but he really could not help himself.

So with that Ken started to think about what Sam was going to say when he saw Ken come back home. Ken always hated the way that Sam would react to when he would actually do some things that would be considered fun in the eyes of most people. Sam was honestly probably the most annoying brother that had ever been created in the history of brothers. Well, at least in the eyes of Ken or something like that.

Once in the bathroom, Brad took a moment to look at himself in the mirror to see what he had looked like. He was just taking a moment to see the expression on his face and if he really felt good about what he was doing at all. This whole thing was just something else to him. Not just because of the fact that he was hanging out with Ken, a person who he didn't even know existed back twelve hours ago but the fact that they were talking about this really evil guy in the purple jacket. Well to be honest, was this guy even all that evil at all. Or were Ken and Brad just sort of over thinking it and this was just some random guy who really had no ill intentions and Ken was just over doing it. Well not really Ken ad much as Ken and Brad. Not that it really mattered all that much.

After he took a moment to think about this, he took the suit from the hanger that was in the bathroom and then afterwards he quickly took off his clothes and then once he took off his clothes he realized that this was something that was not what he wanted to do. He was worried that somebody would be watching in the window up above and try and take a moment to examine his nudity or something fucking stupid like that. Then he grabbed the white shirt and then looked at the white shirt for a moment for relatively no reason. He then put the shirt on and then he took a second to look at the black vest. He really like the black vest and then put it on over his shirt and then brushed his hair to be a little bit spiky and all that. He liked the idea of spiky hair for some reason. He then put on his black sports underwear and then his brown pants and then he put on his black socks and then his black dress shoes and then tied them up and then he smiled after he looked at himself in the mirror. Then he headed on his way over to Ken and talk with him more.

"Hey Ken, how are you? Were you just sitting there the whole time? That must have been pretty boring. Sorry if I gave you the impression that you weren't allowed to do anything while I was up there." Brad had told Ken and then when Brad told Ken that Ken shook his head. He really didn't care all that much that he was not doing anything for like five minutes. He was just a little bit bored, but he didn't care too much since he knew he would talk with Brad again soon afterwards anyways.

"Well, I was just thinking a little bit more on the subject of that guy in the purple jacket. I know that it feels like I should probably just let this subject go and leave good enough as it is. That would be what I would normally do if I had any trace of sanity left in me. But I don't really think that I am fully sane anymore. So that is why I am still on this subject." Ken was saying and then when Ken had admitted that he should have dropped the subject, Brad felt a little bit glad that that even Ken admitted that this subject needed to be over with.

"The last time I had seen him was at the end of the summer last year. I was walking around town and when I got near the hospital, I saw him right next to the bus stop right there. He seemed to be smiling when he had seen me because I saw him actually turn over at me. He told me to follow him and there was that part of me that felt like I needed to check out what the hell was happening. So I followed him for a little while just to see what he would do or what he was going to say. I thought that if for nothing else, it would have been at least a little bit interesting to see what he would have said to me." Brad started the final meeting story and he was wondering just what the deal was with the fact he was near a hospital was, but he decided to let the subject go.

"After a while, the guy was at a gas station and since he was so much faster than me, he decided to just wait for me while I was walking on my way there. When I reached him at the gas station, he had said that he would wait for us until we had reached him since he was so unlimited with time he didn't really care about how long it would take for his targets to meet him again. I have no idea what context that would fit in, but whatever. Anyways, so when I saw him again he told me to keep following him and that he needed to show me something else." Brad had said and then when Brad had said that, he shook his head as if he didn't want to remember the thing that he had seen.

"When I had reached him once again I was in a empty part in town that was crossed off by a off limits trespassing sign. I felt like if I wasn't smart enough, I would get in a lot of trouble but I decided that it really didn't matter, so I just walked on my way over there and didn't really care what the sign said and if I got in trouble, I could just explain what happened and get myself out of trouble that way. So when I saw him, I saw something that looked like a ritual and two people that were sleeping there that he put in a hypnosis." Brad continued his story and Ken gasped as if he remembered something in his earlier past.

"I think I saw something like a ritual when I was only like 9 years old. I don't really recall all that much of it or what was behind it. I doubt that anything was really behind it. Well, I guess I should say doubted. But if this guy was behind them after all, then I guess it will put context to the fact I remember it so clearly." Ken was saying and then he shook his head because he refused to believe that even the guy in the purple jacket had been related to that insane ritual.

"What did you even see in that ritual? I saw a bunch of people hanging around a circle and they were singing some form of oath to join a cult. The cult was something about a man named Blackwood. And something called the Blackwood company. I have no idea what the hell this is all about and I don't really know if I ever want to find out all about that. Not that there is anything that I could do to stop this cult, if it even is a thing." Brad told Ken and then when Brad told Ken that, Ken started to think really hard about what he had actually seen when he was there.

"I think when I had seen the ritual, the ritual was just talking about something called the Monster Hunters. I think that sounds even more insane and unlike anything from real life than what you are talking about. At least you have heard of something that sounded like it could have been like a real person or something like that." Ken said and then shook his head. He wondered what had happened with Brad after he had seen that ritual and what he had done. If he had ever even done anything after that ritual. "What did you do when you saw the ritual?"

"When I had seen the ritual, I jumped in the area and kicked down one of the candles which started a fire. The guy in the purple jacket looked over at me and he was extremely pissed off over the fact that I got in the way of his ritual. He pulled out his hand and seemed like he was ready to try and kill me. He had said that he was wrong about me and that I needed to be eliminated in order to not get the word. That was when I knew that I needed to get out of the area as soon as possible." Brad seemed like he was reliving the memories of having to escape like his life depended on it.

"Then when I heard him say that he lunged at me and I looked over and saw a giant window. I thought that maybe this window could be something that I could use to save my life. So I ran on my way over to it and then I broke the window open and jumped out. I fell down and got inside a hole. Which I feel like is the only reason I am even still alive to this day. I stayed inside and waited in that hole for a while." Brad said and then he ended off by saying that he had never seen the guy ever again afterwards, and he was saying that he was glad this was the case since he had never wanted see him again.

"I have no idea what to think of that. I mean you do have a pretty bad experience with the guy. But compared to what Todd would have to deal with when he knew that guy, what you had to do was pretty easy. He actually had to drive a car and almost drive it into a staircase and kill himself as crazy as it sounds in order to defeat the guy. Or what I thought would have been enough to defeat him, but since you knew him afterwards, obviously he was not defeated at all." Ken pounded his fist onto the couch and he couldn't believe that he was so angry about all of this. He was way too invested in this whole thing.

"Wait a second, I think I see something outside. I don't really understand if what I am seeing is true or not." Ken said and then he pointed out in the direction of Brad's window. The two of them stood up and opened the curtain and they had seen that Ken's fear was totally true. They had seen the guy in the purple jacket. But what he was doing wasn't really all that scary. It was just a little bit strange.

"Is he here due to the fact that he had heard us talking with each other?" Ken said and then he shook his head since he knew that is this was the case, they would have to be a lot more quiet about the way that they were talking since he didn't want to get in any trouble over what he was doing here. He thought that they could be able to have a casual conversation and not get caught for what they were doing.

"I really hope that he doesn't know what we are talking about and I also hope he doesn't get in the way of us having a good prom night. I don't want to get into a giant fight during prom." Brad told Ken this and he shivered over the thought of him being forced to fight this guy. This was the worst thing that he would ever have to do during a school event. Ken would have to agree, but again, Wayside and Todd.

"Maybe we should be heading out soon and going on to the prom event. Maybe in a few minutes so that way he would be able to gone by the time we head out. You should get your money. I think that this would take long enough." Ken decided and then he closed the curtains. After he closed the curtains, Brad nodded thinking that this would be something that he could do that would take long enough for the guy to go away.

"See you in a couple of minutes. I didn't even notice that I never got my money yet. That would be something that could ruin everything. I don't want to be forced to be turned back at the front door of the dance. That would be almost even worse than having to deal with the guy in the purple again." Brad headed off to his bedroom and he was in there for a much shorter amount of time than he was in the bathroom.

When Brad walked into his bedroom, he grabbed his wallet and made sure there was at least twenty dollars in there or so. He thought that he might need another ten. So by that standards, there would now be thirty dollars that he would have for the dance. Then when he was done, he walked into the living room again and Ken took another moment or so to check out if there was the guy out there or not.

"He is gone. Thankfully he is gone. I thought that he would have been out there for as long as it would have taken us to start heading out to prom and everything. I mean, considering how crazy this guy was, I would not be surprised if that was what he was doing." Ken got up and began to head on his way over to the front door of the house. Brad thought that Ken and him should head out there before the guy would show up again and try and kill them or try and make them join some cult or something like that.

"We should head out of here pretty soon, but I still feel like this one of the better things for us to do right now. If we leave the house, then he might know what we are talking about of him since it is in the public, but at the same time I don't want to drag this thing out too much. Give it another ten to fifteen minutes, and then I think we should head out." Brad said and then Ken was thinking that this was a good plan. Ken and Brad were thinking about other things to discuss now.

"How is Tuck? You mentioned him a little bit earlier, but it seemed like you were not wanting to really expose any details of him outside. Are you will to tell me some things now that you have gotten to know me a little bit more?" Ken asked and then when he had asked that question, Brad considered it and while the answer that he was actually having was no, at the same time, he was knowing that Ken was a relatively reliable guy, and he was thinking that maybe he was going to play along with this for the time being. He felt like a couple of details for the guy wouldn't really be all that big of a deal.

"My parents had Tuck as a way to try and make my life more exciting since I was starting to complain about how life was boring with no siblings and being the only child. So my parents decided that maybe if they did this for me, then maybe my life would start to get more exciting and I would not feel like things were so boring anymore. I feel like for the most part, that this was what had happened." Brad said and Ken wondered why Brad felt like that.

"If I was the only kid, I felt like things would have been so much easier and better for me. I wished that this was the case honestly." Ken said and then Brad felt like he and Ken were very different on that aspect, and then Ken just added in a "I feel like Sam just makes my life so much harder than it ever needs to be and he mainly does it for no real reason at all. Just kind of pisses me off."

"I wonder if Sam will be at prom. He seems to be kind of vague about it. He talks with Susan, his girlfriend, all the time and I am pretty sure that they are going to go on some form of a date since they do that every friday since they started to date. But at the same time, I am sure that even if they don't go to prom, they are going to do something like have sex. I just hope that if they do go to prom, they leave me out of it." Ken said and he was not even trying to shit talk Sam, he was just wanting to be sort of independent.

"I bet they will be going to prom. I really see no reason why they would not be going to prom. After all, prom is one of the biggest nights of the year and it will be odd for a already established couple to not go there. At least in my opinion." Brad said and then Ken nodded at that, Brad did have a good point. It would actually be a little odd if they didn't go to prom. Ken was just trying to think best for himself really at that.

"I guess you're right. I mean, my parents would probably be more shocked over me going to prom over Sam doing it. There is no reason for them to be shocked over Sam going to prom. In fact, he has probably been going on with it for the last several weeks, and my thing was sort of last minute. Besides, my suit isn't really all that impressive compared to say the suit that Sam would most likely be wearing to prom..." Ken said and then he figured that he was going to drop the Sam thing there.

"So Ken, what do you really think the purpose of life is? No I am not talking about what brings everything together, I am talking about what is sort of driving the world forward? What do you really think we are supposed to do in our life?" Brad asked and Ken was wondering why Brad was asking him this, but at the same time, Ken thought that maybe there was a valid point to this question, so he decided that he was going to answer it and not really talk down on Brad for the fact that the question was being asked.

"I think that we are put here to sort of create a story of our own. We are given a chance to really see what life is like on our own. I don't know where we are when we start off our life or anything like that, and I don't really any one of us will ever know, but I feel like whatever it is we are brought forward from there to try and give our life a chance and see if perhaps we can really change things one way or another." Ken said and then he felt like he said all he could handle on that subject.

"It is strange to think that way, but I do see where you are coming from in a certain point of view though as odd as your idea may be. I am wondering though if that were the case, then why the hell would there not have been some form of a sign about it early in our life? I feel like since there is no real sign about anything like that, maybe there really is nothing for us to accomplish and that maybe there is no divine being at all." Brad said and then Ken nodded to that question.

"Yeah I mean I don't think that maybe there is one single divine being that defines everything, but I do feel like there could be something. I don't fully believe in the idea, but at the same time, I never want to debunk the idea and I am willing to admit that the idea could be there." Ken said to Brad and then he was starting to think that maybe they did need to head out soon, as the fact that they were here was starting to make him feel a little bit at an unease.

"I don't really know, and the fact that we will never know is one of the things that really scares me. The fact that there is no answer so the fact is that basically anybodys idea could actually be the right one. I don't really know if I want to consider that, since it would mean that the ideas that the mormons have could be as right as the other ideas, and if you get to know me a bit better, you would know that mormons are not really people that I respect all that much." Brad said and Ken was seriously pondering asking Brad about his huge problem with Mormons.

"I feel like if we stay here now that the guy is going to be coming back. I feel like it is time for us to head out again." Ken said and then he stood up as Brad was staring at him. For a few seconds, he had totally forgotten about the whole problem that they were forced to be dealing with in the first place. Brad slowly stood himself up and he was taking a slow and deep breath and then he started to rub his pants a little bit.

"Yeah, perhaps you are right. I don't want to end this conversation off. Considering the fact that I was thinking you were really getting to know the whole thing behind Tuck a little bit, but I figure that maybe that was something that we were never really supposed to be taking about to begin with. Maybe one day, we can meet up again and tell each other all of the details about our life that we had not talked about earlier, and that we might want to know of a little bit more." Brad said and then right when they were getting ready to head out, there was a strange calling that made both of them stop what they were doing.

There was something that a shaking in the house and then there was the lights flickering off and then Ken took a deep breath and he was starting to think about the worst part himself. This was what the man in the purple jacket did before he started to attack them at their school, and he was starting to fear that this was what was going to be happening, and that they needed to get now. Ken looked at Brad and they looked like they agreed and they were ready to leave.

Brad and Ken got out of the house as soon as possible and there was still two hours left before the dance would start. "Do you know of the best way to enjoy myself at the dance? I don't really know if I could actually be able to enjoy myself since I am sort of a social reject and while I get why I am a social reject, nobody will ever want to dance with me at all and this pisses me off honestly." Ken said and then Brad felt like he would actually be able to help Ken out here. He thought that Ken could actually get some good use off of Brad's advice.

"I think that you should dance your heart out. If you are not going to get a date, you can always be able to just dance as much as you can to show that you are still enjoying yourself. And besides, it could be a good workout. As much as that sounds silly, but I am sure that you will get it once you try it out a little bit." Brad said and then Ken had nodded. He knew exactly what Brad was talking about here.

"I do that every once in a while. I did that for Winter Ball. I really hurt my ankle while I was doing so. My ankle has never been able to recover from it ever since. If I move my foot around a little bit, you can hear a few pops here and there. It feels like it is wearing down. I really hate that and I can't really walk around without feeling like I was aging a ton in the course of just a couple of seconds." Ken was saying and then when Ken said that he really wanted to feel his ankle, but he didn't want to stop walking or anything.

"That must really suck. I didn't know that you had something like that happen to you. How are you able to handle it at the rate you are going?" Brad had said and then as Brad had said that, Ken nodded. He knew that Brad was just saying that and that Ken didn't want to argue with Brad there or call the fake sympathy card but he thought that there was a lot of things that were more important than the comments that Brad would make here and there.

All of a sudden Brad and Ken saw something that interrupted their conversation that they were having. They were seeing a guy that looked like he was going to prom riding a bike or walking his bike.

Ken was wondering why the guy who was going to prom is just bringing his bike along with him. Like he knew that he probably wanted something that he could use for transportation, but why not just ride the bike instead of just walk it down the hill. That was why it didn't really make any sense to him and probably not really to Brad either. Well to be fair, Ken didn't really know what made sense to Brad or what didn't make sense to Brad. So he was just sort of guessing on that. But he thought it was a pretty safe guess.

"Hey what are you doing over there?" Ken had asked and then the guy who was walking his bike actually stopped and looked over at the two of them to see if they were were really talking with him or not. He smiled when he see Ken nod at him since he felt like he was finally getting at least some form of attention for once.

"Yeah, what are you wanting to talk to me about? I want to get to prom as soon as possible so I don't get to miss out on any of it." The student had said and then when the student had said that, Ken started to think about what he was going to say to this guy. Maybe he would just ask about the bike as well as his date for prom and then leave it off at that.

"Why are you going to prom with a bike? I would assume that if you wanted to go to prom with a bike, you would just ride down there and not just be walking it down. And besides there are like two hours left before prom. Do you seriously need to be heading down there so soon and right now." Ken said and then the guy decided to think about the point that Ken had made there.

"I was hoping that it would have gotten me to prom a lot faster, but it seems as if that is not the case. I am guessing that you guys are going to be going there as well. I think I might have a little bit of time to spare after all to have a little bit of a chit chat." The dude said and then sat down on the seat of the bike. Neither Brad nor Ken decided to tell the kid that this was a bad idea and that he could fall on over.

"Do you have a date for prom?" Brad decided to ask and that was when the other guy blushed in a moment of not wanting to day anything. Truth was that he just wasn't into that type of stuff. He liked the idea of dating and would like to date. Just not in the way that people would think of when they are talking in the general sense. He was strange in that way to say at the very least. It would make sense the more that you were able to know that guy.

"No I don't have a date. Not really interested in any of that stuff to be honest. Don't really want to go into a lot more detail than that. I just sort of keep it to myself what my thoughts are." The guy said and both Ken and Brad were thinking that this guy was acting more than just a little bit strange. But neither one of them wanted to comment on it, so they remained silent for the most part. But Ken was starting to make theories a little bit.

"What is your name?' Brad decided to at least get to know the guy a little bit since he was there was he didn't want to be a dick. After all that was what he had done with Ken. And Ken had turned out to be a pretty decent guy, so he had thought that maybe he could give this dude a chance and see exactly what he was made of after all. And if he wasn't all that good of a person, they could just leave him alone and go on their own way and act like the event never happened.

"My name is Eddie. I just moved here this year. Trying to fit in. Got sent here after some sort of embarrassing stories that I don't want to talk about. Lived with my mother formerly but I live with my father now. He is more tolerant of the stuff that I do, although not by too much. Even then, he would never threaten to kick me out or anything. That is why I moved here. But I will stop talking about me and let that be for a different story for a different day when I get to know you two more. If I ever do get to know you two more that is." Eddie said and he felt a little bit stupid inside for going off on that long tangent that neither Ken or Brad probably really gave a shit about at the end of the day.

"Well, I feel sorry that you had to go through that." Brad said in a way that was sort of half meant it half didn't really mean it. He was just too confused to really say anything beyond that point. Was still better than what Ken was doing, who was just sort if trying to add in the pieces together. "Well, my name is Brad. I will probably see you more around school now that I have met you and sort of have a visual of you in my head."

"Well I guess that makes me feel better. I don't know if I will ever really talk with either of you again though. Not that it really matters though. You two seem nice enough to at least talk to for a couple of minutes." Eddie said and then that was when Ken decided to bring the guy into the topic that he and Brad had been talking about for the last hour or two. He might eventually regret it, but he felt the need to know what Eddie would say on it.

"Did you see some guy near this house a few minutes ago? He looks a little bit strange. Has a purple jacket. Probably a middle aged man. He also looks like he doesn't really care about anything in the world at all. Kind of makes me think he is a little bit of a creep to be totally honest." Ken said and then that was when he thought that he should say his name, so he sort of randomly brought it up kind of out of nowhere. "Oh yeah by the way, forgot to say earlier, but my name is Ken."

"Well that is one way you can change topics really easily. Talk about some strange dude who you think is sort of a creep and then introduce your name afterwards. Although now that you do mention it, I think I do know who you are talking about with the guy in the purple jacket. Saw him once a few weeks ago. Didn't really know what to think aside from the fact that he looked really fucking strange with that outfit. Probably got it from a thrift store." Eddie said and then Brad and Ken both stopped what they were doing when they heard what Eddie had just said.

"I thought that this guy was a bit strange. I didn't really know what to think of him due to the whole purple jacket. But I don't really think that it mattered all that much. Although when I did see him, I could have sworn that he was staring at me and he was wanting to talk with me or something like that." Eddie had told the two of them and he put his hand on his pocket as if he was wanting to make sure that there was some pills there or something like that.

"I wonder what he did or if he was doing anything. Was he trying to get you to pay attention to him or do you think he was just looking around to see what you were going to do at that moment?" Ken was saying and then he was trying to figure out if the recent sighting was actually real or if Ken was just imagining the whole thing. If he had seen the guy, then he would know that he truly wasn't dead but if this was fake, then Ken would now be going insane right now with these fake seeings.

"I just saw him staring at me. This wasn't really all that big of a problem to me. I just saw him do that and I walked away. The biggest problem was the news that came up soon afterwards. I saw the news and in the news, the report was talking about a high school student who had recently died. I think you guys heard about that. Their body was found in the sewers and the death was reported to be about forty minutes after the time I had seen that guy. Which means that had I shown up a little bit later, I would have been the one who was killed. So I am starting to be glad that I was never the one who was killed since I was less than hour away from being the one who was killed then. I am convinced that this guy was responsible for the death of this student. I seriously just can't look at any other way and any other person would could have been responsible for the whole thing." Eddie had said and then as he had said that Ken and Brad looked at each other. They heard about their death and there was a second one who had died a couple of months prior. Nobody talked about it in fear of being looked at as a heartless asshole, but it did happen.

The three of them were waiting to see who was going to ask first. "Do you think that he actually is the one who had killed this person or do you think that it is just a really bad coincidence. I mean I am hoping that it is the latter, but I highly doubt that it is that nice. I have a strong feeling that this is the truth." Ken had said and then he rubbed his hair because he was not too sure if this was just the truth or if he was just over thinking it along with the other two in the area.

"I bet that he is the one that did it. I don't really know how he did it exactly. I am not even going to pretend to know how the hell this guy is able to do something like that, and I don't really care to know." Brad had said and then when Brad had make that decision, the three of them remain silent for a moment. Eddie said something that made the other two think more about what was going on.

"I think that we should try and ask other people about the death. Maybe we can ask some of his friends about it and see what they think about it. Or some of her friends. I don't even really remember what the gender of the kid was. Although I don't really think that the gender is all that important at the end." Eddie said and then he thought into it a little bit more. "I also think that maybe we could ask the principal of the school and see what the principal has to say about this. See if I can get their house address and I can ask their parents what happens by visiting them. After I earn their trust a little bit. If I am able to even talk to them at all." Eddie thought that he might have been going a little bit too far with this whole thing. And that maybe he needed to get the hell out of there. If he had stayed there a bit longer, then he would be taking this whole thing way too far.

"Well I might be seeing you a bit later. Prom better be good. I don't want this to be a waste of four hours of my life. You don't know what I can be able to do with four hours of my life." Eddie said and then took Brad and Ken's advice and got on the bike so he would actually ride it to the prom place.

"He does have a good point. If we want to be able to get a little bit more, maybe we should ask the school around and see what they say. After all, the principal would probably give us the kids address if we really press for it." Brad popped his knuckles since he usually liked to do stuff like that to prove his point. He and Ken really needed to get the hell out of this place, and head to prom. So they decided they would head there now like Eddie.

"I think that if we stay here for too much longer, then we will not be able to make it to the dance in time. Not that it would really matter if we end up being a few minutes late for a dance like prom. But I don't want to do anything like that." Ken had said and then the two of them started to walk around. The school was about twenty to thirty minutes away from where they currently were at the moment.

"I think that the sooner we drop this subject, the more that we will be able to enjoy this dance for what it is. I think that once we get inside of the school, we should just drop the subject and leave it off at there. I don't think that you will really blame me for that in the future." Brad told Ken and then when that was done, Ken decided to agree that they would drop the subject during the duration of the prom. But he did feel like he needed to say one more thing before they would drop the subject.

"While I would agree that we need to let this go during the dance, I think that one more agreement we should make is one that I think we should agree on. That if we ever see the man again in the near future, then we should try and and fight him off. If we fight him off, then we can be able to move on finally. I feel as if this is one thing that we can agree on. That we will leave him alone until he shows up again." Ken decided and Brad decided that he would go by this promise and agreement even if he had not wanted to at all.

"I wonder what will be at the prom. The school dances usually are a lot more things to school dances than just the general dance and songs. They usually have stuff like snacks or maybe a couple of games to be able to entertain the people who are in the school." Ken had said and then he wondered what type of snacks there even would be at the school if there would be any at all. "Probably just a bunch of chips and salsa and most likely some form of punch since there always is punch at the school dances."

"I don't really know or care all that much. I just sort of go there for the dances and dance with the people who are in the school and see what I can be able to pull off." Brad answered and he just really wished that there would be at least one person he could be able to dance with even if he didn't know who that person would have been and to be honest he didn't even care who that person would have been at all. Not that it really mattered all that much.

"I like dancing a lot. But I just really want to make my day even better than just dancing. So I will go around and try and ask a girl every few songs or something like that. I don't really know what to say about that. Maybe once I get a couple of dances done with, then I will a girl out and use my dancing as a way for them to say yes to my offers." Ken said and then Brad had shook his head. Brad thought that Ken was being totally unrealistic about this whole thing.

"I think that if you really want to get a girl to dance with you, you should probably get to know them a little bit you. You know, see how you guys get along and see what you guys have in common if you guys have anything in common. I mean you guys need to give them a chance on that type of level. If you don't really know them personally, will the dance really mean anything." Brad told Ken and he thought that there was actually a level of validness to all of this stuff. But he just wasn't all that great of a talker at all.

"I don't really have all that many things that I would be able to talk with a person on. I don't really think that I will be able to talk to somebody with them shooting me down for the fact that I have been considered to be the biggest piece of scum in the entire graduating class. I just don't really think that I will ever get any respect ever again. And that just makes me sad." Ken said and then after Ken had said that, he shook his head and just did not know how else to put it.

"Look just because nobody likes you now doesn't mean that you should just not try at all. You may have to try if you want to have somebody like you at all. Don't dismiss something just because it doesn't seem to go too well at the moment. Trust me, I feel as if once you really open up a little bit more, then things will start to go better for you. If it doesn't, then I will eat dirt and admit that I am wrong." Brad said and Ken laughed at the image of Brad eating dirt over things related to Ken. He knew that he didn't actually mean it, but it was just a broad term.

"I just am too scared to even try and do this. I will maybe try a little bit later. Like when I am done with high school and I am far out of the school side of my life then I think that I will be ready to do things related to dating." Ken told Brad and Brad thought that Ken shouldn't even wait the two years for that and that he should try and do something sooner. But maybe that was just a personal bias that Brad had been facing.

"How much does the dance actually cost?" Ken decided to ask a little bit out of nowhere. He didn't even think about how much it would cost until that had been a thing he had felt inside of his pocket. He took about thirty dollars from his pocket, and he felt that hopefully that would have been enough and that in reality it probably would have been enough. The most expensive dances in the school were usually thirty dollars or so.

"I would not really worry about the money that you would need for prom. I would be more worried about the songs that are being played and if the songs are going to be any good or not. If the songs are not any good, it would be really hard to actually enjoy dancing around. So I hope that for your sake, that the songs are good and that you don't get turned off just from the songs alone." Brad laughed as he said that and Ken was wondering what the hell was so funny about that stuff. He thought that it might have been interesting if that was the case, but he was not really all that worried about the dance or songs. But Brad might not be right that the songs are the only important part but it could turn him off from having a good time at the same time.

"Honestly, just as long as I get one dance, I will be happy. That is all that I want honestly. I just want to get one nice dance. I think that this is something that people can be able to understand that I just really want to be shown that I am not totally forgotten here. I know that I sound a little bit silly and paranoid when I say that, but I just sort of can't help but feel this way." Ken told Brad and then after Ken had told Brad this, the two of them were now on the final hill before they would actually reach the school.

"Either way, this is going to be fucking awesome. I am still really excited even if I talk about how annoying it is to be like this. I just think that this will be the best part of my school year. It will probably the only part of the school year that I will actually be able to enjoy here." Ken had said and he did a couple of air wave punches that seemed to make no sense to anybody else even to Brad but Brad decided not to talk at all since he could tell that Ken was enjoying the moment a lot, despite him shit talking earlier.

"You know, this will be the best dance I have ever had. It seems for me that each dance gets a little bit better than the last one. So that way if this trend keeps going up, the dance next time will be even better than the last one and then afterwards, the one at the end of my high school years will be the best dance I have ever had in my entire life." Brad said and then when he had said that, the two of them reached the entrance of the school and were ready to pay for their ticket.

Chapter Text

Chapter 11: Fuck Prom

"Let's just get our ticket right away and just go inside the dance room so that way we don't have to be forced to be kicked out for not paying or we don't miss the first few minutes of the dance." Ken decided and he went to the front entrance of the ticket sales and he gave the people the thirty dollars he had with him and didn't even wait to be told if he had enough money or not he just walked inside of the dance floor. The person who had been watching the money prices and ticket sales was about to call out to him but they had decided to let it drop when he was so far away that he could not be able to hear her at all.

Afterwards, Brad had paid his price for the dance and then he did something similar to Ken. When Brad had done that the girl decided that it didn't really even matter at all what the people were doing. At the very least they had paid for their ticket. Well they had paid more than anything else should have been the correct statement. Besides, there would be those assholes that paid extra and then that can make up for it all.

When the ticket buying was done, the two of them were starting to dance as much as they had wanted. Brad started to look for girls that he could dance with since they all started to look at him with his great suit and they had thought that he had looked pretty sexy to be perfectly honest. Afterwards, the girls would not be able to have enough of him and they wanted to all have a turn with him. It is like the girls had loved him, which was something that Brad had not really experienced in a long time.

Ken was just going as good with his dancing as possible. He had not even cared that there were just a bunch of Beatles songs, a band that while he didn't hate them, he just didn't really care all that much on them and would only listen to them when they were all over the famous stations and stuff like that. He was not caring though since he had went to the table of the dance floor and wanted to go as much as possible since he wanted to be totally lit.

While this was going down, Eddie had his own fair share of awesome entertainment at the dance. Not what other people would be considered correct to do at a dance, well at least later on in the four hour spree of events but he had honestly just not cared all that much what people had thought of it. He was enjoying what he was doing a lot and there was no real reason to make him stop, even if it was not really considered to be correct in the eyes of many people.

At least at first it had seemed he was just doing the exact same stuff that Ken had been doing. Just dancing around and was going crazy and not really giving a shit what people would be thinking of his dancing moves and all of that stuff. Eddie started to do a bunch of random dances as if he had was trying to go down as the craziest person in the history of the dance floor. Or at the very least the history of the school. It wasn't like it had really mattered all that much. Nobody had stopped him or told him that he needed to stop at all. He had thought that he was just too good to be stopped for his good and fun to watch dancing.

That was the main thing over the course of the whole thing. The fact that people had been able to enjoy watching him do all of this. Even if it was just as a meme but that doesn't mean that it wasn't all that enjoyable at all. A meme is something that is always able to be enjoyed no matter what people would think of it and he was just wanting to show people that he could go all out. One of these days, people will be talking about everything that Eddie had done during the dance and it will go down as the best thing that would have happened in the dance. It is hard not to be the best thing about the dance though when you look at the future of the dance and all of the stuff going on.

"Hey Eddie, what exactly are you doing right now?" There was a random guy that finally stopped Eddie on what he was doing when they thought that Eddie had needed to stop and finally take a break. Eddie turned around and saw the guy who had made Eddie stop what he was doing. He had no idea what to really think of the fact that this guy was doing this to him at all. The guy was kind of nice and he wasn't being a dick about the whole thing. And besides, the guy looked pretty decent to Eddie and he felt so bad over the fact that he was thinking that a guy was pretty decent looking and all that.

"I'm just dancing around right now. I don't really think that there is anything else to do right now besides just enjoying the idea of dancing. So if you don't mind, I am going to be going back to be enjoying what I am already doing right now." Eddie said and in hindsight he sort of felt bad for how rudely he had put it, but at the same time he honestly had not cared at all. He just wanted to get back to his dancing even if it had meant that he was going to be a little bit of a dick about it.

"I was just asking a general question. Sorry if that bothered you so much. I didn't know that you couldn't spare a couple of minutes to chat up with somebody over your dance moves." The guy said and he was starting to wander away when Eddie seemed to think about it a little bit more. Maybe he could give this guy a little bit of a chance. See what he was really like. After all, it could not be worse than not being talked to at all. At least with this, he could say he talked with somebody during his time at prom and maybe even get a dance or something. Even if it was with somebody of his own same gender. Which despite him not wanting to admit it in person, he had actually preferred it that way. But that was something he tried to keep to himself so that way people wouldn't go around making fun of him all the time.

"Look sorry. I just was not expecting somebody to talk with me. How about we start over. I was just having some fun dancing. How are you doing?" Eddie decided to try and interact with this guy normally and see how it would go from there. "What type of dances do you usually like to do? Are you even a dancing guy or are you just somebody who stayed behind to observe the dances?

"I dance to songs I like. So about three or four songs per dance. But everything else I just sit and watch. No real reason to jam out if you just simply do not enjoy the dance I feel like." The other guy had said and Eddie had thought there might have been a level of truth to what he just said. But Eddie just liked dancing so much he never really cared what the song was usually.

"I only sit out one or two songs per dance usually. I only really do that to take a break. I feel like if I just dance the whole time, then I would probably be just dead by the end of the night in a mental state. So for my own sake I have to take a couple of quick breaks here and there so that way I don't like totally over do it or anything. Or at the very least that is just how I do it." Eddie said as he laughed over how much of a daredevil he was. He didn't like taking the breaks and when he did it was only for one song before he would go full throttle again.

"Well, I don't know if I got your name. If I did then I already forgot. So can you tell me what your name?" The other guy said and Eddie supposed that he could talk for a little bit longer. He wanted to go back dancing but a couple of topic points would not hurt. And if one of them was as simple as his name, then things would probably be over with in a couple of seconds anyway. So playing along for just a little bit would not be all that big of a deal for his dancing streak.

"My name is Eddie. How about you? What is your name?" Eddie responded and the other guy smiled when he realized that Eddie had seemed to warm up to the idea of conversation. Showing that maybe he wasn't a total asshole after all. Or not as much as he had been in that introduction moment and that he just needed to warm up to the idea of a conversation first. That is what the other guy assumed of it all.

"My name is Richard. Nobody really talks with me that much. Probably because I swear all the time and has a really bad probability of having a STD. Please don't ever tell anybody that since I don't want people to make fun of me even more than they already do. If they find out then I will be looked at as the dumbest guy on the planet and I will be made fun of until the day that I die." Richard told Eddie as he scratched his balls and Eddie pretended as if he had never seen that.

"I never really like to talk with other people that I never meet. I am always scared of how people are going to react when they see me the first time. However. usually once I start to get to know them a little bit more, the better that they seem and the less I worry about the way that they would react to my own personal feelings and ideas." Eddie told Richard and he had no idea why he was getting so personal all of a sudden with this Richard guy when just a moment ago, he had no idea this person even existed.

"Well that is the thing. You got to be open to talk with people even if you are scared about. Everybody is scared of something. Talking with people about what you are thinking and what you are feeling is a very large fear that many people have and it is hard to fix unless if you tackle it head on. You need to be more open. you need to talk with people and then you will start to feel at peace more." Richard had told Eddie and there was a way about how Richard said this that really kind of moved Eddie. The longer he talked with Richard, the more guilty he had felt about it.

It had even gotten to the point in which Eddie was not really minding the whole ball scratching thing. It had bothered him and annoyed him at first but then over the course of a couple of seconds, he stopped really caring all that much. He was just wondering why he would do it publicly and not at the very least be a little clever about hiding it. That was when Eddie decided that he just needed a moment to be alone and that he wanted to just get the hell out of the area before this started to get so bad, he could not be able to rebound from it.

"I need to go to the restroom. I need to be alone right now." Eddie had said and then he ran out of the room. As he ran out of the room, he was heading on his way to the restroom. He was going to stay there for a few minutes. Just to really sort of comprehend what is going on in his small head. Yes, he called it a small head. He didn't even care how silly it had sounded. But once he was in the bathroom, he put himself against the wall and started to pant really badly.

"Why am I feeling this way. It just is not right. I should not be having these thoughts. I wonder if maybe I can just calm down a bit and everything will be able to go back to normal. He just seems to kind of be a really nice guy. I just don't really know what else to say about it other than that." Eddie shook his head and then he realized after he had said that he actually did really need to use the restroom. So he went inside the first stall, was glad nobody else was in the bathroom to hear him and then he did his business and washed his hands as if this never happened. Washed hands, indication of a new clean slate in his eyes.

Once he was out of the bathroom, Eddie thought that he could be able to go back to the dance floor and be able to be fine as if this truly never did happen. But right when he was just a couple of feet away from the dance floor and giving things another round, he saw Richard also standing there. He saw that Richard was just minding his own business. Or what Eddie thought and Richard was pretending to be minding his own business.

"What are you doing?" Eddie asked when he had reached Richard again in his very best attempt to pretend as if he had not noticed the fact that Richard was standing right there and being a quiet and patient man. This was making Eddie even more concerned for his own sake and being able to actually present himself in a way that seemed to be even with the smallest amount of dignity. Maybe he should have done a better job washing his hands and taken another minute or two in the bathroom to make sure that everything truly was all washed up and everything.

"I was just waiting for you to get out of the bathroom. I wanted to make sure that our conversation would actually be able to be finished and not forced to be cut off at any one random moment due to the fact that you needed to do something. After all there are still about three and a half hours left of this dance to go." Richard was telling Eddie and Eddie had the bad feeling that he was just not going to be able to get rid of this guy and this was what was worrying him so much.

"I don't really know what else I can talk about. I feel like I have sort of hit enough points to say that we had a full conversation. I think that we can just leave things off here and just go our own ways. What would you say? I feel as if that would be a good idea." Eddie said and then when Eddie had said that Richard put is hand at the wall and was looking at him as if Eddie really had not said all that there was to be said.

"I know that you are hiding stuff. There is no real reason to be so worried. Just open up a little bit and just have a normal conversation. Just tell me what is worrying you so much right now. I am here to talk. Unless if you want to go back to dancing. In which case I will actually respect your wishes and leave you alone." Richard had said and then Eddie was trying to decide if he should take this leap of faith or not. Eventually, he decided that he would give it at least a try.

"I was really not wanting to say anything, but I feel as if you sort of have pushed me to the point. I thought that I could at the very least have the decency to hide it from you. But since you are so insistent of me letting you know, I guess that I will go on and tell you." Eddie said and then he decided to say it fast enough and with no interruptions to make sure that Richard did not stop him from what he was going to try and say. "Well the thing is that the longer that we have been talking, the more I have been impressed with the way that you have been speaking to me and the way that you seem to be open minded. So I went to the bathroom to get my thoughts together and act like I was keeping it all calm when I have not been at all in reality."

After Eddie had told Richard that, he watched as Richard was sort of thinking of what Eddie had told him. He had not really known what to say. It was just odd to hear Eddie basically just say that he was sort of into dudes. But then Richard decided that Eddie was at least smart about what he was doing in the idea of being mostly quiet about the whole thing. He decided that Eddie needed to have some sort of response to what he had said so that way there was at least some form of pay off to what he had said.

"Honestly, I don't really know what to think of it. I don't really know what to think of you liking me here. Maybe I just need to take some time to think about what you have told me right now." Richard said and then Eddie was so surprised at the assumption that Richard had said but he thought that maybe Richard had sort of exposed to Eddie what he was just too scared to admit in reality.

"Maybe you should go on and give this a try. You never really know if you like something until you go on and give the thing a chance. If you give this a chance then maybe you will actually like it more than you had assumed. You know, trying something with me." Eddie said and now he was feeling terrible for sort of trying to seduce Richard into doing something for his personal gain. Maybe he just needed to go away and leave the dance entirely. He knew that he was supposed to be having it with girls, not somebody with the same lower body part of his own.

"I guess one try could not be all that bad. What are the possible side effects that could really come out of it in the long run? I think that we should go into the bathroom and then that way we can be able to be hidden for a little bit. Maybe people will just think that we were having a really bad shitting." Richard said and Eddie shook his head over the dumb ass ness of this idea but he was glad to be given a chance so he didn't care.

Eddie had agreed with the idea and they headed on their way to the bathroom. Then when he had walked into the bathroom, the two of them look at the first stall of the bathroom. Eddie opened the door and then when Eddie had opened the door, Richard had walked inside of the stall. Then Eddie came in afterwards and once he was done, Eddie closed the door and then afterwards Richard looked over at Eddie.

"Are you sure that you want to do this? Do you think we should stop this before it starts to get any worse? I have a feeling that if we get caught while doing this, then we will be made fun of for the rest of our lives and I don't really know how else I can be able to live the rest of the high school life to make it so that I am able to actually not be ruined. I don't want to be ruined." Eddie was saying and he shook his head and then afterwards Richard told Eddie that he needed to shut the fuck up.

"You were the one that had brought up this idea to begin with. Not just keep going on and give me a blowing. I will go around with you once you are done with me." Richard had said and then afterwards Richard had unzipped his pants. Then when he took off the pants, he put his balls and dick outside of the hole in the boxers and it was erect. Eddie decided that he needed to give this a try before he was told to stop doing it.

Eddie put his mouth to Richard's dick and then he started to suck him off as fast as possible. He was really excited to be sucking this guy off as this was the first time he had ever had sex in a way that he was able to enjoy it and fulfill what his personal desires had been. He had sex once back in freshmen year and he had it with a woman. He had thought that it was decently pleasurable but in the end he did not really like it that much. He felt like it was a little bit boring for lack of a better term. This on the other hand was something that he had liked and he had wanted to do more often.

It seemed that Richard had agreed when he had told Eddie to keep going on with the sucking. This made Eddie go as fast as possible and soon enough he had decided that he needed to pull out in a figurative term for a couple of seconds. When this was done, Richard started to cum all over Eddie's face and Eddie felt excited when he had that on his face. He wiped the white semen off of his face since he did not want to get caught doing this in the future and facing even more ridicule.

"I think I should switch. It needs to be my turn to get sucked." Eddie said and then before he was able to get his much desired turn of getting blown, there was something that scared the shit out of him. Something that was able to ruin every form of enjoyment that he had ever been able to have in this dance. This was when he had saw somebody that he talked about with Brad and Ken. Nothing he had imagined he would see again.

"What the hell are you doing? Why are you just standing there like a fucking idiot? I mean you are not doing anything right now." Richard had said and then when Richard had said that Eddie said that he needed to check something out to make sure that he was going crazy at that current moment. So Eddie looked at Richard and thanked him for the moment and said he would come back when he was done and they can finish up. As this was going on, Eddie walked out of the bathroom and he saw the man in the purple jacket standing there.

"What are you fucking doing here?" Eddie had asked and then when he had asked that question, the guy shook his head. Afterwards, when he was done, the guy started to walk away and he was showing Eddie that he needed to follow him there. Eddie started to follow him into the dance hall and with each step that he had taken, he was getting more and more glad that he had wiped out the cum off of his face.

As this was going on, there were two other things going at the same time. There were two side stories going on in prom. There was the stuff going on with Ken and Brad afterwards, and the stories that both of them were far less embarrassing than what Eddie had been doing. Far less of an embarrassing than what was just going on at that moment. He had really not liked how any of this was going on. By he meaning Ken, since he was just doing a bunch of dancing around. The dancing was the best thing that he had been doing. He had been wondering what the hell he was going to be able to do in terms of having a possibility of a date and all of that stuff.

Ken had actually taken his shirt off and then when he had taken his shirt off, he felt like he was bringing down the house a whole ton. He actually did a couple of acting sexy dances with his shirt by rubbing it on his balls. As somebody would later on describe it, the way that Ken dances would have been considered spastic at best, borderline pornography at worst. It was a funny way of looking at it, but he really did not care all that much. That was when Ken had actually walked up to a girl and he was going to actually try and ask her out and see if she would like to dance with him. Maybe after him being shirtless and him having a few good dances, then maybe the girls would actually be able to like it (T.K.'s note: I actually did an entire school dance without my shirt off. It was Winterball in Sophomore year. Nobody remembers it since it was just over shadowed by junior year Winterball.)

After he started to try and ask another girl out for him dancing with her, Ken thought that there was a lot of stuff that he could do in order for her to say yes to his offer. He got his courage up and decided that he would just her if she would say yes to his offer to dance with her. "Hey, I noticed that you seem to be a little bit alone. Do you want to dance with me for a song or two?" Ken was saying and then the girl looked over at him.

Despite being appalled by the fact that he didn't actually have a shirt on at all, she seemed to think that maybe Ken could actually be good enough for one song. "I don't think that I want to do anything beyond that at all. But maybe a couple of songs would not be all that awful. So I might as well just go along with this. Let's see what you are made of when you try to be intimate with me."

"I don't really know if I can pull it off too well. I can at the very least try to do a good job at it though." Ken gulped as he had said that since he felt like he really could not fail this at all. He needed to show her that he was a good dancer for the sake of showing that he could pull it off. But at the same time, he needed to not be reckless about the whole thing, so he decided that he needed to just go as slowly as humanly possible to make sure that he would put his hands on her shoulder as well as just have him talk with her for a little bit.

"So how are you right now? How have you been enjoying the dance up to this point in time? What do you think that you would do in order to make the whole dance better?" Ken decided to pull a small talk type of conversation. He had known that this was a bad choice since he knew that she didn't really care about the dance. But he thought that there was at least something that he could talk with her about.

"I don't really know if I would change anything honestly. I was forced into this terrible dance. I don't really think that I want to be here that much longer. I think that I might tap out in another hour or two. Sorry if I make it sound like I am not grateful for being here. But I don't want to be here for four fucking hours." The girl had told Ken and while Ken would want to be here the whole time, there was no real way that he could argue with her. It might be kind of boring to be thrown into this dance and just not have anything happen. "Why are you not wearing any shirt at all?"

"Because while I was dancing, I went a little bit crazy. I usually do some silly stuff when I am doing a bunch of wild dancing. This is nothing all that strange. I would not really think about this too much." Ken told her and she had thought that this was fair enough, even if she did not like to see him on the verge of nudity or anything like that.

"Well I guess you don't want a bunch of sweaty clothes or anything like that when you are done with the done. So I will leave you alone on it now. Just be prepared for other people to get onto your business for this. Or maybe I am the only one who will call you out and I will feel like a giant asshole for speaking like this to you." The girl decided that it was time to talk about something else before Ken would get annoyed and end off this somewhat decent slow dancing he was giving her.

"You know, I think that maybe you should just talk slowly with some people. If you did so and talked with them and got used to them and got to know them for a week or two, then you will be able to get them to go on a date with you soon enough." The girl said and Ken was getting tired of everybody telling him he could on dates soon when he knew that he just could not. He was just tired of being told he was good enough even though he was not good enough for this.

After this, Ken and the girl were silent for a few seconds. Ken put his arm around the girl's neck and she was kind of shocked that he was jumping to that conclusion. Not that she minded it or anything, but she just was not expecting him to do anything. Maye there was more to this guy than she had originally thought and she just needed to give give him an honest chance here. As he was just not that bad or a guy at all with the dating scene. Or at the very least the seduction scene.

"How about you show me more of what you are made of after the dance is over? I think I would not mind giving you a chance to prove your worth." The girl said and Ken was starting to wonder if she was wanting to have sex with him. He had never had sex with anybody and he was not really sure if he could be able to handle this with no experience.

Then again, everybody who has sex the first time goes into it with no experience. So when he sort of came to that fact for himself, he decided to stop making such a big deal out of it and just embrace the fact that there was even a girl at all who was offering to try and do something with him. This was making him feel like there was some good that could come out of him.

"I think that we need to take things a little easy right now." Ken was saying really quiet and thankfully he had said it so quietly that the girl did not hear him. So she decided not to freak out over this whole thing or anything like that. He decided that he would just keep more of these thoughts inside of his head so that way there would be no real chance of something coming out of his mouth that he would be caught on for.

This was when there was something that forced him to stop what he was doing. Well maybe not forced him to stop doing what he was doing as much as very much willed him to stop doing what he was doing. He saw a girl running out into the school hallway and was escaping the dance as much as possible. He was wondering what the hell was going on with her and felt that she might need some help in order for her to want to get back to the dance. "Hey, I will be back in five minutes. I need to go on and find my shirt." Ken had said and then the girl was going to try and say that she didn't mind him without a shirt anymore, but he ran away before she could go on and say that.

So Ken ran off and he went inside the section of the hallway that was no longer inside of the dance room but was still close enough to the dance room that the person who would leave into this hallway could just take a quick break and still make it back into the dance after a song or two. Once Ken was inside of the hallway, he saw everything all dim and dark. This was making him feel like he needed to start treading this thing really quietly. He had no real idea why he was taking this so slowly and why the hallway was so dark to begin with. But he had not really cared as he was getting closer to the end of the hallway and onto the staircase. After he got onto the staircase he reached the second step of the staircase and then sat down next to the girl while he had a quick flashback to the staircase of Wayside.

"Hey, what was going on?" Ken asked the girl and was wondering what this major problem was. "I know that this may not be my business at all. Sorry if I am getting into something that I should stay out of. I just can't really help but ask you." Ken was saying and then when Ken had said this, there was a silence that she had for a few seconds. She was trying to decide if maybe she should tell him what was going on or if it was just something that he should stay the fuck out of.

"You know, normally I would be really angry and try to tell you to leave me alone, but I can't really help but not do that. I feel like you are nice enough to know what the truth is. So I guess I will let you know what I am going through." The girl had responded as she was starting to cry a little bit. Ken really was starting to think that he should have left her alone when she started to speak everything out to him. Ken was thinking this was going to just take a minute or two but then she gave him like a ten minute story.

"I just found out that I am pregnant. Do you know fucking realize how much of a disaster this was. I have no idea why the person who had sex with me had not been using protection. I just don't understand why a person could just not give a shit about anybody else. How could he decide that sex was so great and not realize that he could have at the very least been smart about the way that he was doing it." The girl had said and then when she had said that Ken didn't know what to think. A high schooler having a kid. This sounded like a bad idea for anybody with sense, even him.

"Why not just give up the child for adoption so that way you don't have to worry about being forced to raise a kid that you might never have ever even wanted?" Ken asked and when he asked that he actually did feel a little bit bad for saying that, but at the same time he was just trying to be realistic and reasonable with this whole thing. The girl was a little appalled by the whole thing but she knew that he certainly did have at least some form sense to it despite her not wanting to admit it at all.

"You know what, I think that while there is a level of truth to what you say, I don't think that I would want or should do just that. I have the kid and the kid is inside of me, I feel like it is my job to raise the kid even if I don't really want to." The girl had told Ken and she was looking like she was on the verge of crying. And Ken could be able to understand why she was so close to crying over this whole thing. He would if he was in her shoes.

"I just thought that it would have been a decent idea. I thought that maybe you would have considered it for a couple of seconds." Ken had told the girl and she shook her head. She had told him that she did consider the whole thing for a moment. "I think that you need to talk with the dad a little bit for a moment. Maybe if you talk with the guy a little bit you two could be able to come up with more of a compromise."

"I doubt that you would be able to understand what he is thinking. I had considered it for a little bit, but at the same time I think that he would just shot me down the entire idea of the whole thing. I think he would just tell me that he doesn't care about the kid at all. And that he would just want me to fuck off and that I need to take care of myself without him be next to me and that it is my fault that I am pregnant to begin with since I am the mother and I am the one with the baby in my stomach." The girl had told Ken and Ken was wondering how he was going to be able to tell her that she would not know any better until she had given it a try first.

"Maybe you should just ask him first. You probably never know any better until you actually go on and give it a try first." Ken had said and she was shaking her head as if he just was not able to get it at all. There is a level of truth to it that Ken would have to admit. That was something that he was just never able to understand since he was not the one who was having a child inside of him. He was glad that he would never have to be the one who would have to carry the child inside of him.

"Look I appreciate your trying and you acting like there is a little bit of a heart inside of this asshole. But at the same time, you just do not seem to get it. So please just stop asking me about the guy and the idea of him being able to help me. He would not give a shit and there is never be able to have the guy do this. He would just say that it is all my fault and that I need to just be smart in the future." The girl had told Ken and then Ken nodded. This was showing him indicate to her that he did indeed give up the entire argument and that maybe she is the one that knew what to say. But maybe he just needed to come up with a different topic about the child, such as her getting funding for it.

"What about money to raise the child?" Ken had asked and then the girl considered the question. She seemed to think that Ken really did have a good point with the idea of raising money for the child. If she didn't get at least some form of job or something like that, then she might actually be forced to give the child up for adoption and she did not want to admit that this is the case. But maybe she will have to get her parents to help her get some money at least for the first couple of years of their life.

"The thing is that after the first couple of years of the kids life, everything will start to calm down a little bit more. We will be able to actually go on and get a job during hours they are at school and then that way I can be able to start to get funds on my own. But until the point they are at least five or six years old, it will be really hard to handle." The girl was saying and Ken was thinking that there was a very valid point in what she was saying here right now.

"I really hope that everything goes well with this kid. I really have no idea how I can be able to help you out here. If I can be able to help you out here at all. Maybe I just have to wish you good luck and everything." Ken was saying and then he came up with an idea. He went inside his pocket and realized he had six dollars in there. "I know that these six dollars are nowhere near close enough to giving you the money you need to raise the kid, but maybe it can it can help you out here. It can be able to help you get something at the store or something like that." Ken said and then he stood up and shook his head. He really had no idea what else he was going to be able to do to help out this poor girl.

"Are you ever going to see me again?" The girl asked and Ken turned around to look at her. He had no real idea what he could say to that question. There was a chance that they might see each other at school again, but then again he did not even know if he was going to continue down the school path. He was actually thinking about dropping out before he would get any deeper into the whole program. He was just so sick of being used by everybody and he had just wanted to get the hell out of this place. But if this girl needed to have somebody help him out here, then maybe he could just stick it through the next couple of years to make sure that she still had at least one person who would have to help her out with this stuff when nobody else would be there for her.

"I don't know if I ever ever come back here. But if you need me more, then maybe I could just come along and help you out if you need me to. I guess that I will see how things go. But I sort of think that maybe I should not drop out after all." Ken shook his head and then as he was shaking his head, the girl could not believe that he was doing this or was even considering this at all.

"Were you seriously planning on dropping out of the school?" The girl had asked and then Ken had sort of thought about that and he was thinking more and more on this. Then Ken had started to consider this more and he decided that he would not drop out at least for the rest of the term. Even if he had not wanted to stick in the school. But there was only three weeks left in the term. So sticking it out there more weeks was not going to be all that bad.

"I think that I might stay here for the rest of the school year." Ken had said and then after he had said that, he started to walk off on his own but then afterwards, the girl yelled over at him to say one final thing to him. It was a sort of relatively small thing, but she felt like she needed to say something in order for him to get the fact that he had done a good job.

"Hey Ken, thank you. I am really glad that somebody was there to help me out and talk to me about all of the problems that I am having right now. You are already better than the real father of my eventual kid." The girl had said and then after Ken was thanked, he was wondering how the hell she had known his name considering the fact that he had never once gave it to her. Well maybe he was more popular at this school than he had ever thought that he was. Or maybe at least popular enough to where everybody knew what his fucking name was and all of that stuff. Which wasn't all that strange when he had considered it in the long run. Even if he had not wanted to admit it.

Soon enough, Ken was out of the hallway and as he was out of the hall he was inside of the dance room. He had been missing out on three different songs on the dance. Which had been about twelve minutes out of the four hour duration and all of that stuff. This was what he had thought was going to be a small amount to where he can still go in and go all out and dance.

As he was dancing as hard as he could, he started to forget about the entire conversation that he had with that girl as well as the fact that he was going to go back to that last girl. Ken was totally not really giving a shit about that girl and the date that they were going to have. But he was just thinking that maybe she would forget all about all of that talk. After all, Ken had sort of forgot about it as well. But maybe he just needed to give up and then just let things happen naturally and not be forced to check out a different event going on. Not that he was forced to check out pregnant girl in the first place.

After he was done with this, he started to just want to dance around as much as he could here. He thought that the songs that were being played here were so much better than the previous songs that were being played and all of that stuff. He didn't really care all that much to pay attention to the songs, but he liked it more than he had liked the beatles songs and all of that stuff.

"I want to give you some of my best movements." Brad was saying as this was going on. He was having much more of an interesting thing going on than Ken just dancing out. The whole pregnancy thing was so much more interesting than him dancing around and it was interesting at first but that was the only real interesting thing going on in this entire part he had in his dance. Brad had thought that he could be able to lose his virginity to this girl at the end of the dance.

Brad hated it when he admitted that he was still a virgin. He tried to keep this fact away from people as much as possible. All he had to do was just have sex once and he would be able to lose the v card. The card of him being a virgin. He just doesn't really think that it mattered all that much to him but the fact that he was going to be able to have sex with other people they would probably want t o know the truth of his sex life and all that stuff.

"Hey want to dance with each other for a little bit? You are really beautiful and I think you should have another person dance with you since I feel like you should not be left alone." Brad had said and then when Brad had said that the girl had looked over at him as if to think about what he had said. She thought that it would be pretty nice for them to dance with each other, so she had decided that she would accept the offer of the dance and all of that stuff.

"How good are you at dancing?" The girl had asked him and Brad said that he practiced dancing for a little while. He didn't really know if he was any good at it though. He had thought that he was good enough with this for a little bit longer. He thought that he would be good enough of a dancer that he could be able to satisfy her dating needs for a couple of minutes and make her feel like she was there for a purpose.

"I'm not all that great at dancing. I bet that I am good enough for you to be happy for a little bit I suppose." Brad was saying and he was a little bit embarrassed over what he was doing. He put his arms around her chest and he smiled and the girl laughed a little bit when she saw what exactly he was doing. So this was going good and so far Brad did not feel like he was doing too bad here. Which he was glad that for now at least he was doing decent.

"You are better than you are giving yourself credit for." The girl had said and Brad shook his head. He felt like she was just saying that for his own sake. He was glad that she was being nice to him though, so he was going to remain silent on this whole thing. Brad put his head on her shoulder and she didn't really seem to mind. They were dancing around, so they were going to be a little bit touchy feely and everything.

"So have you ever dated a girl before? I think that she would have been very lucky to have you. Why did you guys leave each other or did it just end off on a mutual feeling?" The girl was saying and then brad remembered the one girlfriend that he did have back in the day. They dated for about eight months or so and then they broke up about two months ago. Which was around the same time that Ken was exposed for trying to be a crime fighter and all of that stuff.

"Yeah I had a girlfriend at one point. Her name was Misty. I really liked her. She always liked to wear blue and she always liked listening to music. She told me that if she was a boy, she would try and do some crime fighting and show people that she had a lot of stuff going for her. She would work out every once in a while which is funny for me to imagine. I am just glad that she is out having a great time where ever she is." Brad had said and he was fine with lying about the personal stuff with Misty for as long as possible. If she asked him where she had gone, he would just come up with a fake story to make her not worry about the sanity of Brad.

"Can you tell me what happened with her? It seems like she was a great person. Seems like she was having a lot of potential ahead of her." The girl said and Brad felt like he needed to end this conversation as soon as humanly possible so that way he didn't feel like he was going to tell her off or anything like that. He didn't want to be an ass to her or anything like that, but she didn't know what Misty had to do for the sake of everybody in this school. She was an even bigger hero than Ken was and from what Ken had said to him earlier, it seemed like Ken had also given it a decent effort back in the day.

"She doesn't go to this school anymore. She is off taking a vacation. She will probably be back at the end of the school year. She said she needed to be off and do things of her own. I am sorry if I am not describing this good enough to you. But I don't really know if I want to go on and relive all of that over again. The last moment that we had together." Brad said and he wiped his eyes once to prevent himself from crying and then the two of them were able to start enjoying their dance again for the most part.

"What is your favorite class subject?" The girl had asked Brad and then after Brad had been asked that question, Brad had thought about it a little bit. He thought that he could say something like science and that would be considered a good enough answer for the sake of her question. But he didn't want to say something like math and then have her laugh at him or be telling him that he was crazy for liking the hardest subject in the entire school. At least he wasn't saying like Trig.

"I really think that I would have to go with Chemistry. It is the only class I can think of that actually seem like I get any sort of material out of it. It is the only class that I think actually gets me anything of worth. The teacher is also kind of interesting to be listening to. But I guess that at least it isn't something like pottery. I mean I can see why some people would like pottery, but it honestly is just not my cup of tea as strange as it sounds." Brad said as his answer and he didn't think it was a great answer, but he thought that it was good enough for the moment.

"I like Design and Draw. I am able to allow my creative mindset roam loose and everything. I think that when I go to that class, I am really allowed to show everybody what I really think of different subjects and all of that stuff. I guess drawing for me is like writing for other people." The girl had told Brad and they were still going along just smooth and not being worried about what they were talking about or what he was doing at all. He was just wanted to have a good time talking with this lady and not worry about anything else.

"You know, I think that we should go to my bedroom once the dance is over. I think that we would have a good time at this dance. You know, I think that Misty would be proud if you show me your moves." The girl had told Brad and Brad was just trying to be quiet since he was not wanting to admit that he was still a virgin and everything. But she thought that he would be good at bed, so he needed to pretend that he knew everything that he was doing and all of that stuff.

"I have no real idea what the hell to do right now. There are still over three hours left of the dance to go. I don't really know what else I can do in this time period. Maybe I should start and head home soon after all. But then again I don't want the thirty dollars to go to waste." Brad had said and then the girl had looked at Brad as if she was going to laugh at the fact that he had only paid thirty dollars for the dance and everything. But she thought that she didn't want to ruin the moment, so she remained quiet.

"How about we just bounce out to the bathroom or something? Maybe we can come back in like twenty minutes or something. Nobody will really notice that we are gone. So I don't think that it will really matter all that much." The girl had said and she was starting to move the button on his shirt. Brad then realized that he didn't have a condom or anything. He needed to get his condom as soon as possible. But maybe she didn't really care. But then again he didn't want to get this random girl pregnant or anything like that before they were really in a real relationship and all of that stuff.

"I think that we should leave and get some condoms soon. The condoms would be pretty important to have." Brad said and the girl thought that he had a really good point. "I will be going on and buying a condom soon. I will come right back when I am done getting it. So I will be seeing you in half an hour or so. How about that?" Brad had said and then the girl nodded. As of this, Brad let go and then the girl said that they would see each other soon.

As Brad was heading off, he was wondering if this was going to go well. He was glad that he was going to get laid that night, but at the same time he was scared that she was going to think that he was taking so long. But as Brad was going to be heading to the store near the school to buy a condom, he had seen somebody that scared him shitless.

He saw the guy in the purple jacket and he was standing right at the entrance of the school. He was looking over at Brad and he seemed to be waiting to waiting for Brad to go on and make a choice on what he was going to do. Pretend like he wasn't really there at all or was he actually going to try and fight and defeat this guy. What would Misty want him to do? She would want him to be safe and to stay there and not do anything while she did the job. But Brad knew how well that turned out. He knew that he needed to go on and try and do things on his own. There was nothing that he could do that would make him feel too proud, but this was about making Misty proud.

"Brad, what the fuck are you doing?" Ken asked in the direction of Brad and then Brad turned out and saw what Ken was doing. Ken walked on over to Brad and before Brad was going to be able to go on and try and comment on the fact that Ken has no shirt on at all, Ken started to talk about what the hell was going on. "Did you see the guy right there? I think you know what this means."

"I think that we need to go and get Eddie. I think that he will need to know this so that way he can help us out fight this guy. I really hope that he is not busy and is willing to help us out with this guy." Ken had said and then when Ken had said that, Brad nodded. He had not wanted to do this, but he didn't care. He needed to fight this guy off as soon as possible and as much as possible so that way things can be easy for them in the longer run. So with that Brad nodded and they started to walk down the hallway and they were on their way to look for Eddie and see what Eddie would say to this whole thing.

"Hey Eddie, can you help us out?" Ken had asked and then when Ken asked Eddie that Eddie looked over at Ken's direction and he zipped his pants up. Brad and Ken decided that they would pretend not to notice what he had done during that quick couple of seconds. So with that, Eddie started to think for a moment. They had seen him half way down the hallway and they would learn that Eddie already knew of this asshole before they even saw him there.

"I don't really know if I can help out or if I would want to really help you guys out. This guy is crazy and I think that we need to be more careful before we start to go out and be crazy over this plan." Eddie said as he pointed towards the door and he was proving the point. "Look I know that you want to do something about that guy, but we can not. We will probably die before we even land a hit on him."

"You are saying the worst. You need to calm down a little bit. We need to give this a chance. Please, just let me have a chance against this guy." Brad said and then he shook his head. Ken was shocked at the sudden change in attitude over how he had taken this guy. Earlier in the day, he was just not really wanting to do this at all, and now all he wants to do is take this guy on. Ken then put his hands up and he was going to try and be the compromise dude.

"Okay, I agree that we should take this guy on and everything. However, maybe we do need to plan things out here more. If we don't plan things out a little bit, then we will be screwed. Please, how about we just stop and take a moment to plan things out just a little bit?" Ken was saying and then after he had said that, the two seemed to calm down a little bit. Maybe Ken was right, that they needed to fight this guy but they just needed to be more calm about this whole thing before they actually did anything.

"Wait a second, look over at what he is doing!" Ken screamed really fucking loudly. For the first time in the entire evening, people were actually able to hear the conversation and they all looked over at what Ken was doing. He was pointing towards the guy in the purple jacket and they saw him grabbing a girl. This was the girl that Brad had danced with earlier. This was the moment that Brad had switched his attitude fully.

Before any one of them had been able to take the guy on or be able to try and save this girl, he had run out of the school and she was screaming the entire time. "Come on, we need to get her right now. Before we go on and lose our chances of finding her." Eddie said and Ken looked over at Brad and Eddie.

"I guess that we need to get the hell out of here as soon as possible." Brad had said and then they seemed to consider what to do. The three of them walked out of the school and then they were walking to this one car. The car was just going to be their transportation device. But then they needed to give the car back. But this was the matter of saving a girls life. Brad had not cared at all at this point in time anymore. Brad punched the window and broke it and then they all went inside the car as Eddie was about to call Brad out for what he was doing. But Eddie could tell that Brad was just not in the mood.

The three of them got in the car and as they are in the car, Brad started the car and then they started to drive off when Brad found the car keys. All of this had reminded Ken a lot of the time when he and Todd had gone on and tried to do this fight during his last few days at Wayside and all of that stuff. Ken thought that it was one of the strangest things that Ken had ever seen Todd do during his entire time that he was in Wayside.

It had all started in June 2nd of 1963, the last Friday of the school year and the group was all hanging out and having some fun. They were just not really caring at all what was going on at that moment. "Hey Todd, so now that everything is all taken care of, do you think that you will want to stay in this school full time." Marcia had asked and then Todd nodded.

"I think this might be the first school that I have ever gone to two years of one school district. I needed to find the right school. But now I think that I have found the perfect school district to be at for now." Todd had said and then that was when the guy in the purple jacket come along and then Ken looked over at Todd.

"Kevin, sorry for forcing you into this, but I think that we have one final mission that we need to finish here." Todd had said and then Kevin nodded. So they headed out of the school and the other members of the group were giving them good luck statements and telling them that they hoped that they would take care of this once in for all.

So then once they were outside of the school, Kevin went inside the driver seat of the school and Todd decided he would drive this red car that was right next to the entrance of the school. Todd stole the keys and then after he had stolen the keys the two of them started to drive after the guy in the purple jacket. As they were driving after him they eventually reached the forest that had given Todd nightmares for the last several months.

As they were in the forest, they drove right into the worst part of it. They drove into the part of the forest in which there was a staircase. The man in the purple jacket held his hand up and this made Todd lose all control of the car and the car hit right into the staircase and that set it on fire. Kevin and Todd barely got out of the car in time. Once they were in the car, the two of them looked on over at the man in the purple jacket and he was just remaining quiet and they were wanting to have Todd and Kevin ask him what was going on at that moment.

"You guys have turned down my offers over and over again. I do not get what is wrong with you guys. I do not get why you guys keep turning down all of my offers right now. I need to understand how you are able to keep turning down my offers. I have given you everything that you could possibly be able to want!" The guy in the purple jacket yelled out loud as loud as he was possibly able to.

"Because your offers are totally terrible. None of it makes any sense. You are totally insane and you need to leave me alone now." Kevin said and then he got in the car again and started to drive it himself. He then drove the car right into the man in the purple jacket and when he had left the area, the car blew up and the staircase was totally destroyed, so they couldn't ever go back there even if they had wanted to. So this had given them the impression that maybe he truly was done for this time for real.

It was after this that Kevin dropped out of Wayside. He was really angry at the fact that he needed to leave Wayside. He was doing this because he wanted to give Todd a safe time when he had mentally figured out that the main reason the guy in the purple jacket kept coming back was due to the fact that he was there. When Kevin had gone to this new school district, he changed his name to Ken to hide from everybody and act like everything was a restart and something that would never happen again.

Todd and his friends had remembered Kevin for the rest of their lives. They had remembered all of the great adventures that the Wayside group had together and all of the things that they had done. All the good, the bad, and even just sort of the stuff that never really mattered. Before they could continue thinking about all of his Wayside adventures, Brad had called out to him to get him back to the present.

"Ken, we need to find a plan like you said. You said that we needed a plan. Now come on and give us your great plans." Brad was telling Ken and then after Brad had said that Ken seemed to start to think about all of this since he was now the one who had to figure things out. Ken suggested that they all go their individual houses to get some supplies in order for this battle to happen. It was a silly idea, but better than no idea at all.

"I guess that it would be what some would suggest we do. We have nothing to fight this guy off. If we have at least one thing to fight them off, then we could be able to actually have a chance after all. We have no chance as it is. So I think that your idea is probably a good idea now." Brad had said and Ken had clearly been able to tell that Brad was clearly out of this. Maybe once he knew Brad more, the more that he could open up about this. But as of right now, the guy was seeming really distant and it was starting to scare Ken a little bit.

"How about we go to my house first since it is only a few feet away." Ken said and then he pointed in the direction that he and Brad had walked in earlier that day. Brad nodded and he had started to drive right in the direction Ken had pointed at and they were going to only be there for a quick moment just for him to get some weapons and then they would be done.

Ken got out of the car right away and started to run up the staircase and he went inside of his house. As he got inside of his house, he broke right into his fathers bedroom. He knew that his father would probably be angry if he knew what he was doing, but he didn't really care all that much at that moment. He just grabbed his fathers gun and as he grabbed his fathers gun he nodded. This was something that he felt was going to be his best bet on being able to defeat this guy.

After he grabbed his fathers gun he put the gun in his pocket. Then he started to walk out of the room and as he had done so he heard his father call out to him. "Hey Ken, I thought that the dance would go on for another two and a half hours. What are you doing here?" Ken turned around and he looked at his father as if he was trying to find the nicest way to tell this man off. He knew that there was nothing he can do to justify stealing his fathers police gun, but he knew that he could just give a short response and then be able to leave the house and pretend as if he had never done so.

"I will be heading back to the dance when I am done with all of my stuff I need to take care of. I will tell you how the dance was when I come back. I know that it will be a pretty great event. But I needed to get something for my own sake." Ken was saying and then he didn't know how to continue this anymore and his father continued before Ken could even try.

"Look here Ken, I don't mind what you are doing. I have my own share of stupid stuff when I was younger. Just please be safe about what you are doing. That is all that I want you to do. If you can do this, then I will leave you alone here." His father had said and then he shook his head. He was too old and tired and worn down to try and fight Ken off at this moment. He just wanted his child to be safe more than anything else.

"I will try to be safe." Ken had said and then his father nodded. He knew that this was probably the best that he he could have wished for his son. Not that Ken could always be super safe and like not getting in trouble as can be proved with the fact that he almost got arrested and cue every Wayside event ever. But the fact that Ken is promising to at least try is something that he liked to hear.

"I just hope that you guys don't get yourself in even more trouble." Ken's father had told him and Ken was wondering how he knew about the other two. He knew that it wasn't all that big of a deal but he could not help but wonder. Ken left off and then Ken left the area and then the he went right to the car to have Brad's turn to get his stuff.

"Please don't get too risky. I can't imagine what it would be like to lose one of my kids after finally getting it after so long of trying to get one." Ken's father, his name being Nigel, had said under his breath and he already knew that Ken had stolen his gun. He had no idea what Ken was going to be doing with that gun and he didn't want to be a jack ass over this whole thing, so he had decided to just let it go for the time being.

Ken was in the car and he told Brad to get right on the drive. He didn't really know that his dad was well aware of the fact that Ken had already stolen his gun. So he had thought that he was being sneaky and that he was being all smart about the whole thing but not that it really mattered in the long run.

"Why are you being so insistent on this whole thing?" Brad asked when he was about a block away from the house. Ken pulled out the gun and then Brad was kind of surprised that he took his police gun but he didn't really care all that much. Ken had said that he just didn't know any better and he had wanted to be safe.

Brad had thought that it was a decent point, but he wanted to go to his house next. "I guess if you are getting a gun, then maybe I should get a weapon of my own so that way I can be able to defend myself in case he attacks me. I know the perfect weapon that I can be able to use in order to defend myself."

"What is that weapon going to be?" Eddie asked and he had thought that Brad needed to come up with a really good answer or else he would really have no hope in what they were going to be able to fully accomplish and all of that stuff. Or else maybe Brad would be able to come up with a good detailed explanation on how he could be able to pull this whole thing off. Brad started to think of the way that he would word this whole thing.

"I have a baseball bat. Hopefully that will be good enough to be able to fight him off decently enough. I just don't really know though, so I will just see how it goes before anything else goes on that would ruin what I am planning. I doubt he has anything that can destroy this baseball bat or anything like that." Brad was saying and then when Brad had said that there was a moment of silence in the car before Eddie decided that he would try and fight a point.

"I have some dynamite. I think that this dynamite will be a good enough weapon of attack that I could use in order to defeat this guy. Just set the fucking thing off and then when I set the fucking thing off, I will be able to destroy him this way. Since I have a feeling that the main thing that we really want to do is destroy this asshole." Eddie had said and then as Eddie had said that, the three of them had seemed to think that this was a good point for them to bring up. Maybe some explosives would be the best bet after all.

"I just hope that you have something that could actually set off this dynamite. If you don't have anything that can set off this dynamite, there is no real reason to bring it at all." Ken was saying and then Eddie raised his hand as if to calm Ken down since he had more than enough matches to be able to set off all of this dynamite. Not just some dynamite, but all of it he has something to set off.

"I just need to be in my room for a minute or two and I can find all of the matches and when I find all the matches, then I will be able to actually have something that could make this dynamite worth it." Eddie was saying and then Brad and Ken seemed to calm down. If Eddie was so certain on all of this, then they should start to believe him and not think that he was just being a whole load of bullshit and all of that stuff.

Soon enough Brad had pulled up at his parking lot. As he had pulled up at his parking lot, it was Eddie and Ken's turn to be in the car while Brad was getting his stuff. They were sort of wondering what they were even going to be talking about while they were waiting for Brad to get his stuff. "What do you think Brad is dealing with on that whole girlfriend thing? He is really angry over that whole ordeal and I just do not really get it at all." Ken was saying and he felt terrible for not getting it, but he just could not really help it.

"I have a feeling that maybe he and his girlfriend had a really bad breakup and he does not really want to think about it or look back at it at all. I can't really blame him to be honest. I just think that he needs to calm the fuck down before he starts to snap at us when we don't really deserve the snapping at all." Eddie responded and then when Eddie responded that way, Ken thought that while there might have been a good point on it, there was just something that was false about the whole thing and that they did not get it. And Ken was not afraid to admit that neither of them really got it at all since it is just the truth.

"I think that once this battle is over, he will be more willing to talk with us about it. That is what I am sort of guessing at this moment. I just do not really think that it matters all that much honestly. I just think that we need to let this whole thing go for now and not just look back at it and say something or assume something that we really regret. If we end up doing that, then we will lose any possible chance of being able to be friends with Brad at all. And I don't really want to lose the chance of them being friends with me and all of that stuff." Ken said and then he shook his head. But while Eddie agreed, he thought that he did have one last thing that he could say on the matter.

"While you are right, I do think that we should just plain ask him once the battle is over. I think that by this point, we will have earned it. I think that it is now a matter of just earning it by this point in time." Eddie said and he was very sure that he would have earned it by that point in time and he felt like there was no real reason to think that they needed to try and earn it more. But then as they were saying that Brad came back in the car. This was what happened when Brad was in the house.

The moment Brad went in the house, he looked in the house and hoped nobody noticed him there at the moment. As he was inside the house, he was looking around and was trying to find his baseball. He was just wanting to get this baseball bat and then he would just be done with this fucking disaster and he would be able to show Misty that he had truly learned of what she had wanted him to be able to do. He was going to pass down what she had wanted.

Brad went inside his bedroom and he grabbed his baseball bat. After he had grabbed his baseball bat, he looked down at the picture that was next to his bed. It was a picture of Misty when she was at his house and she was holding her hand up and she was smiling. Brad was standing over her and he had both his hands on to sides and he was laughing at what she was saying. Brad grabbed the picture and then he was on the verge of crying when he had read that and then he put the picture inside of his pocket and he was ready to go on and return to the car once more.

As he was at his front door there was his mom who had called out in his direction. "Brad what are you doing with your baseball bat? Shouldn't you be at prom?" She had asked him and then Brad tried to come up with a good lie and a lie that nobody would be able to pick up on right away. Brad just was thinking that he would tell her that he was just trying to show some dates at the dance what he was capable of.

"I just feel like I need this. I have a bad feeling that something is going to happen if I don't then I will be beat up at the dance. I just have a feeling that I am going to have to defend myself on this whole thing." Brad was saying and then he was thinking about what Misty would have said had she seen him doing this. His mother looked at his face and she could tell that he was thinking about Misty then.

"I can see that you are thinking about her. I think that you need to let this thing go. I know that you are still mourning, but you need to let it go. If you don't then she will haunt your thoughts for the rest of your life." Brad's mother had said and Brad shook his head. He knew that she was telling the truth, but he just could not do this. He could not get over her no matter how hard he had tried and there was something she must have been able to understand about this. After all, her first husband did leave her alone.

"I need to get going." Brad told his mother and shook his head when he was outside of the house and he went on over to the car. As he had went on over to the car, he saw that Kevin and Eddie were talking and that they had shut the fuck up the moment that they saw him get inside of the car. They realized that if Brad had heard anything that they were saying, then they were going to lose all of his respect and they did not want to do any of that. So for that reason they had remained quiet.

"I guess it is is Eddie's turn. I really hope that you manage to be able to get yourself enough dynamite to actually be able to fend for yourself here. I really hope that you don't end up not having enough dynamite to actually do something, anything of worth." Brad said and he was too angry and sad to think about the quantity anymore. He had wanted to show that he truly was worthy of being with Misty. Or worthy of having her have hope in what he was doing.

"Oh trust me, I have more than enough dynamite to be able to go on and fight this guy and do more than a good enough of a job on this battle. I am more worried that the gun doesn't have enough bullets to be able to attack him and defeat him." Eddie responded and while Ken had wanted to debate with him and tell him that he was wrong for thinking this way, there actually was a good point to what he was saying and he didn't want to admit it though. But he just had no idea how much more he would be able to contribute at this point.

"I am sorry that I am not really wanting to talk all that much right now. I want to just get this battle over with and I just want to go back to prom and go back to the girl that I was having a decent date and dance with. So please me if I look and sound like I just simply do not give a shit." Brad said and he seemed like he was actually starting to light up on the idea of talking with her for a little bit. Ken had thought that there was something he had wanted to tell them, but he just did not know how to open up about it before they would just start to make fun of him or tell him that he was going way too far with this.

"I will be in my house for a few minutes. I will need to grab all of my dynamite and make sure that neither of my parents are around and seeing what I am doing. If they see me they will do everything in their power to make sure that I won't get out of that house." Eddie said as he was leading and pointing and saying to Brad which directions he needed to go and when they pulled up at his house, he quickly got out to get the fucking dynamite.

As he was inside of the house, he bolted right into his bedroom. He did not want to meet either one of his parents at that current moment, and he was just trying to get the stuff so he would be able to leave the place. As he was in his bedroom, he went to his drawer to see if it was there. He found three pieces in there and he put all three of them in his pocket.

He knew he had at least six or seven more that he could be able to find before he would leave the house and then he could go on and leave the house. He then went to his dresser and each of the three shelves in the dresser had two pieces and he put all six of those pieces in there. Then he had one last drawer that he could find. Once he was in the final drawer, he found four more and he put all four in there. Then afterwards, he looked over and saw that there was a bunch of matches that he could get and he grabbed them all. Then he put the matches in his other pocket and he was wanting to get the hell out of there as soon as possible.

As he was all done, he opened his bedroom window. He heard a bunch of people walking around in the house and he knew that he had to get the hell out of there as soon as possible. He was waiting for a few seconds and the longer that he waited the more that he heard that the people were walking in his direction. Then he put his body inside of the window and he was leaving the house. He knew that once he was outside, he needed to close the window. So he closed the window as fast as possible and then he started to walk on the roof for a little bit. Then when he was several feet away from the house, he jumped down the house roof and then once he was done, he looked around the front yard and he was wondering if his parents had known what he was doing. He then walked off and went on over to the car.

When he had finally gotten to the car, he saw that his parents looked outside the house and opened the door to yell at the people to never intrude the house again or else they would call the police again. But since Eddie was in the back of the car, neither one of them had seen that he was actually there, so nobody really knew what he was doing. He was glad that neither one of them knew what he was doing and that he was able to get away with this entire thing which was the best thing that he could have hoped for.

When he was telling them to start the car, Brad listened and decided that he was not going to argue with what Eddie was requesting of him to do. He realized that if out of there as soon as possible, and defeat the man in the purple jacket, they needed to start driving off as soon as possible. But then as they were doing this, they were talking about where the man in the purple jacket might have been. Brad seemed to think about it a little bit and then he realized where exactly he was.

"I think I have a good idea on where this guy is. I feel as if this guy is waiting where I had met him the last time during my summer earlier of this school year." Brad had said and then when Brad had said that, he heard Ken stop what he was doing and he was wondering if Brad was actually thinking that this was the truth. So he was going to ask Brad if this was the case but then before he could even ask the question, Brad already said that he knew that this was the case.

"It is just a feeling that I have. Please understand what I am thinking. I just know this is where he is at. I am almost one hundred percent certain that this is the place. Please just don't argue with me and we need to defeat this guy right now. We can not take any risks right now. We need to defeat this guy right now." Brad was saying and then he was saying this with such certainty that Ken knew if he tried and argue what Brad was saying, then he was going to be kicked out of the entire operation and they would be forced to try and find them on their own with no car.

"Thank god. If you are so certain where he is at, we need to just grab our weapons and we can get the hell out of this place. We can just defeat this guy and then we can go back to prom and enjoy the last stretch of time here." Eddie had said and then as Ken had heard this, he nodded and he looked over at Brad. He knew that Brad was right, he just was not really sure at first, but he was now sure of it.

"I do believe you are right. I was just shocked at first. But now I am absolutely certain that you are right. So let's just get the hell out of here. Let's just fucking kill this asshole so that way that we can be able to be done for good and Misty can be made proud." Brad said and then he turned the car really badly and as he turned the car badly, he turned on over to where he had met the guy in the purple jacket once more and he was ready to fight him once more and save the day and prove Misty that he had true honor.

"Thank you for deciding not to argue with me and acting like you know better than what I do. I really need that right now. I don't really desire having any arguments with people right now, and I don't really think you would be able to have a leg to stand on." Brad was saying and then he was pulling up when he had gotten near where he last seen the man in the purple jacket and he stopped the car after he was done.

As he pulled up, Ken and Eddie realized what was going on so they both got out of the car as soon as he had done so. They looked around for a minute or two and it got to the point in which even Brad was starting to doubt that he was right about his guess on where this guy was. But before this doubt could really be able to settle in at all, the guy laughed and all three of them knew that he was there after all and was just waiting for them.

"Don't give up so easily. That is a good sign of just how weak minded you three really are." The guy in the purple jacket had said and then Ken was on the verge of wanting to start the fight already. A few seconds later, the guy had shown up to view and they were all able to see him standing there as if he was sort of showing off his glory or something to that extent. Ken was already playing around with his gun to start and use it for the battle he knew was coming up.

"I have a feeling that you three want to talk a little bit before we have our great duel. I know that you guys are wanting to save the girl and take me on. All in due time. The girl is safe for now. Long enough for us to talk a little bit. See what you are all thinking and see just how similar it really is to what I am thinking about and wanting you guys to do for me. I have a feeling that once you guys hear my offer, you will have a hard time refusing my wish." The guy in the purple jacket said as he held up his arms and he looked over at Ken to see what he was thinking, since he was the one he wanted to use most of all.

"What is there to even talk about? The fact that your goals make no sense and the fact that you literally seem to be taking away everybody's sanity just by being around? Yeah because there is real reason to justify hearing what you have to say about that." Brad said and he seemed to be more angry than either of the other two by now. Which was sort of a shock at that moment and the man in the purple jacket seemed to think about that for a moment himself.

"You need to give me a chance. You need to just listen to me a little bit more. If you listen to me a little bit, then you will be more enlightened on what I am saying or what I am proposing." The guy in the purple jacket said and then he put one hand inside of his right pocket and pulled out a orb. He was going to show the group this orb and he thought that they would actually be more convinced to say yes to his offer.

"Inside this orb gives away all of the information about this digital world that I am wanting to have you guys take over for me. If you look inside of here, you will see exactly what I mean here." The guy pressed a really small button on this orb and then as he pressed the button there was a bunch of images being shown up. "This is a world with a bunch of monsters inside of it. This world is one that is ever expanding and it will never stop growing as long as I am here. If you guys work with me, you are able to help give me the piece I need to bring peace and prosperity to the world. You can be heroes. You can be kings."

"Why would I want to be king of this place? I don't even know what I would do in this place. I don't even know what this place is. So I do not even think that I would ever want to take it over if I don't even know what the fuck it is. You can't even find a way to make the offer tempting. Or maybe you need to talk a little bit longer." Eddie had said and then he had raised his hands up when he had said that as if he was getting ready to concede a battle and admit that he was wrong. But then the guy in the purple jacket had snapped his fingers.

As he had snapped his fingers, there was the girl that Brad was dancing with earlier. Brad had screamed his fucking head off when he had seen her. This made Ken shocked that Brad was reacting this fucking badly over it. "Oh man you still have not gotten over what happened with Misty. What a fucking shame. You really need to let it the fuck go." The guy in the purple jacket had said and then when he had said that, Ken was looking over at Brad and then he was going to try and say something to him to get his attention going and to remind him that he and Eddie also existed as well.

"Brad, please get back to the current moment and tell me what the hell is going right now." Ken was saying and then Brad had turned around and he was thinking really hard about what the new friend to a way had been saying to him. This was when Brad had decided that he needed to get back in the present moment. He would tell the truth about Misty later when they have learned the truth a little bit more.

"Look, we need to focus on the main objective right now. If we don't focus on that then we will have had no point in coming here to fight this guy off at all." Ken had said and then when he had said that Brad nodded and he grabbed his baseball bat and then he pointed over at the guy in the purple jacket. He was wondering if this was guy was going to speak out at this.

"What even is your main objective right now? What do you really need to defeat me? Is there any real reason for you guys to defeat me? I don't think that you need to focus on this so much." The guy in the purple jacket had said and then as he had said that, Eddie grabbed one of the pieces of dynamite and he was getting ready to set it off and start this fight off on a good level.

"Our main objective is to make sure that you never return and that we can be able to live the rest of our life normally. We also want to make sure that you never come around and try and make other people join your side anymore. We need you to see that your ways are wrong. We will either do that or make sure that you are going to die." Eddie said and then he lit a single match and then he threw it over at the guy in the purple jacket.

Right after he had thrown it in the direction of that guy, he actually had the decency to throw the girl off to the side. As he had thrown her off to the side, he was looking on over at Brad and the others to see what they were going to do say about what he had done. He was wondering if they were going to try and argue his methods and say that he had done something stupid by throwing them off to the side and they should have just placed her down at the ground or something really small and stupid like that.

"Are you even going to try and fight us back?" Ken said and then he started to point the gun in the direction of the guy in the purple jacket. The guy was going to try and say that he would fight them off again but the dynamite exploded. They had thought that he had won for maybe a second or two but then all of a sudden he started to move around and then he raised his hands up. He was getting ready to kill the members of the group.

He shot a giant beam off in the direction of the three of them. He was really annoyed when he had seen that he had missed all three of them. He had thought that he had actually had a real chance on hitting all three of them. But then when he was done trying that out, he grabbed a giant knife and he was getting ready to stab Brad when Brad had hit him with the baseball bat on the side. The guy in the purple jacket sliced his knife and it made a pretty big cut in the chest of Brad. Brad felt really bad over it for a moment but then he decided he would give up and instead of using a knife against him, he grabbed a gun. Then when he had grabbed the gun, he shot Brad right in the foot and this made Brad scream and made him start to move off to the side.

The girl was wondering if maybe she could be able to help the three of them out or if maybe she should just see how the rest of the battle should turn out before she would actually try and see how things turn out. Eddie grabbed his dynamite and then threw another two pieces over at this guy. This started to blow some stuff up, such as his shoes and a little spot on his legs.

"If I wasn't as old as I am right now, then maybe you guys would not have a real chance on being able to defeat me. I am just too worn down to give you guys any real fight. Maybe you guys should have tried to fight me ten years ago. Then you guys wouldn't be able to say anything about my performance right now." The guy in the purple jacket had said and then he aimed his gun right at Eddie and then he aimed for a second before he shot the gun and then it hit Eddie's right arm.

Eddie screamed and then made one more piece of dynamite at the guy and he thought that maybe he should just end this battle right at this moment. Eddie sat down on the ground and then he held his right arm with his left one and then as he was doing this the guy in the purple jacket walked up to Eddie and Brad hit him once more as he was doing so. He grabbed Brad and head butted him and that made Brad pass out and then after he had done so, he came on over to Eddie and then he kicked Eddie right at the ground and then stepped on his right arm twice. After the second time Eddie screamed that his arm was broken and then the guy in the purple jacket had laughed but then Ken knew that the battle was now on his own and now he needed to defeat them.

"You still have me to take care of." Ken had said and then the guy turned over at him and Ken regretted saying anything right away. The guy seemed to be excited to see Ken rise up to the challenge and he was wanting to see what Ken was even made of. If Ken had even any idea what he was getting himself into. The guy in the purple jacket raised his gun up and before he fired the gun, he had dropped it as if he was going to want to fight Ken hand to hand.

But Ken had not wanted to do that. He pointed the gun at the guy in the purple jacket and he started to run around and he shot the guy in the chest. The guy in the purple jacket flew on his way over to Ken and then he attacked Ken by punching him right in the face, which had helped give him a black eye. When he got the black eye, Ken barely was able to see from his other eye and then he grabbed his baseball bat that was next to Brad.

He then hit the guy in the purple four or five times in the neck and even once in the ball sack. It was something that Ken had felt proud of being able to do, and then he started to go off to the dynamite. The guy in the purple jacket returned the favor to Ken by kicking him in the ball sack and then he pushed Ken in the ground and then Ken saw a bunch of scratches on his bare chest.

Ken walked himself to the dynamite and grabbed all the remaining matches. Then he set all of the dynamite off and then threw them one at a time. It took a few seconds for them to all be thrown but with each one added up it was a giant explosion. Then the guy in the purple jacket started to run on his way towards Ken and he screamed at the top of his lungs. "KEVIN!" But before he could do anything else to Ken, Ken pulled up his gun and then shot him in the face three times and then at the chest twice and then the gun had run out of all his bullets. He then placed the gun on the ground and held his hands up into the air.

"You win for now. I need to tend to my wounds." The guy in the purple jacket held his hand to his chest and he groaned really loudly. He snapped his fingers and then after he had snapped his fingers he faded away. Ken stared there for about ten seconds or so before he started to feel like he was safe in order to talk to the others. He ran up to Brad and picked him up and Brad ran his way to the girl and then Ken helped Eddie up while Eddie was still screaming about his arm.

"I think we are safe for now, but not once in for all." Ken said and then kicked his shoe top on the ground and he felt like he really wanted to smoke or something. After he was finally calmed down from the battle that he had just subjected himself into, he looked over at the three other people in the group.

"I think we should be heading out back to the school. There is no reason to stay here any longer." Eddie decided and then he headed on his way over to the car. As he headed inside of the car, Ken had sat down next to Eddie while they had waited for Brad and his girlfriend on over to the car. She went inside of the car passenger seat and then Brad went inside the car and then he turned on the car and was starting to head on his way over back to the school.

"I think it is time for you guys to hear the truth. I think I will tell you guys about the relationship that I had with Misty. I think that you guys have earned the right to hear it." Brad said and then shook his head and was really sad. He was speaking as much as possible on the way back and he was taking his time so that way the three of them could be able to see just why Misty was so special.

"Honestly, my girlfriend was a girl. I don't really have anything else to say about you. You know, the girl that you want to ask out for several months and then when you finally do ask her and she says yes, everything goes really well. She was the one person that made me really want to be open to the idea of a relationship." Brad had said and then as he had said that, he put his hand on the girl's hand and told her that it was nothing really against her, and that when they get to know each other more, he would probably view her the same way that he had been able to view Misty.

"I first met her when I was fifteen years old. Which was two years ago. It had all started when I walked up to her, she seemed to be writing inside of a diary or something like that. It seemed like she was really focused on that stuff. I asked her if she was a new student and she had said that she was not a new student, but just not all that popular and she gets made fun of by all the other girls in the school. I told her that I am not a girl so I would not treat her that way. She laughed about this and then she had decided that I should be allowed to sit next to her and I sat next to her without reading anything that she had written, even though it was tempting to." Brad kept saying and he laughed when he thought about the missed chance to read that diary that he was glad he would get to read later on.

"After I had asked her if she has any friends, she admits that she only has like three really strong friends that she hangs out with all the time. I said that I would try and be a good friend to her and she smiled at the thought of that. And over the course of the next year or so, we kept talking and got to know each other really well." Brad explained and he got into a detailed lecture on all of the stuff that she and him got along on with.

"The two of us would meet up every day during lunch at school and when we would meet up we would compare and contrast all the classes we had and see if maybe we could find ways to help each other out in all of our classes. We thought that we had thought that this would have been a good thing for both of us. We just wanted to make the two of us pass every single class that we could be able to possibly pass during our course of being in school." Brad laughed and he remembered one of their teaching sessions. "I remember when we would go to a dinner or a lunch every week to debate our stuff in the middle of our study sessions."

"I was starting to have the balls to ask her in around late July of last year. I was not really sure what I would be able to say to her in order for her to say yes to the date that I was going to try and get her to go with me on. I then eventually decided that I would just hang out with her the whole day and during the course of our hang out, I just decided to ask her if she had wanted to be my girlfriend and then she decided to say yes and then I smiled and we kissed during the course of the sun set. I was so glad that this was going on." Brad said and then he explained how they would talk about the different things they would do during the course of the relationship.

"Misty explained to me how she had wanted to be a hero. She found out about this one guy who had gone around the city for the last several months and how he had been a hero for the city but she felt as if he could need some help." Brad explained and he looked over at Ken to sort of let him know that their secret was safe with him. "I said to her that this was a terrible idea and that there was no real way that we could be able to help this guy out and that even if we knew who he was, he was on his own. She decided to take this into her own hands and decided that she would try and be a hero on her own."

"I had thought from the start that this was a terrible idea, but she did not really care and no matter how much I tried to tell her not to do this, she said that she needed to so this and that it was needed for the sake of our city. In case the other one died or something related to that effect." Brad explained the origin story to her trying to save the day and then he explained the exact details of what she did.

"She tried to make some sort of robotic suit, which had helped her out for a while. Her science teacher was naive and didn't really know what she was doing, so when she asked him all these questions about rockets and other things, he would answer them and let her know how they all worked out. She used all of this information to create rockets and some strange assortment of weapons of her own and she used them to also give her strange 'powers' like short term invisibility. All really small and simple stuff, but all of it together gave her a fighting chance." Brad then went on to explain some crimes she fought against.

"It all started off very simple. Save this old lady, save that cat, stop a robbery, all simple stuff anybody could have been able to do even without the stuff she had. She quickly was famous in town as the teenage super star. She had everything going for her. She really did. But then she started to get into the big stuff. Like try and stop drug cartels or getting in high speed car chases. It was insane. But one of the cartels found out she was, and then she had a case of meeting the man in the purple jacket. That was when it all went downhill for our great hero." Brad was at the stop light and he turned over to the other three and remained silent for a few seconds before he continued the tragic story.

"After the man in the purple jacket had caught her, she really was now in a mission to save the city. He brought her to the power plant in the city and when she told me that she was going to do the big mission to save the entire city, and described purple jacket, I knew what was going on. I tried really hard to tell her not to go and we argued over it. She broke up with me as a result of our argument in anger and she went right to there." Brad seemed like he was going to cry as he continued the storyline.

"She went to the power plant and on there, she found the man in the purple talked for a minute or two like what we had just done before we took him on but after this conversation, they started to fight each other. She managed to last about six minutes or so but he zapped her really bad and this almost single handedly made her unable to fight anymore. This whole time I was driving in that direction with the hopes of being able to catch her." The whole car fell silent when they had realized where this was going and what was going to happen next.

"I grabbed her and held her in my arms and the guy vanished right before I was able to see him, so what I said about the last time seeing him being last summer was true. I took her to the hospital and we made amends and we were now dating again and she apologized for not listening to me. At the hospital she was placed at the bed and was there for two days. At the second day she told me I was allowed to keep her diary and she told me to write the final entry of what happened and what she did to save the city. We had one final kiss and then she died. I grabbed her diary and wrote in four pages explaining the final mission and what happened and once more for a single page about the funeral and never touched it again after I read through it once. It was the worst day of my life. She died on March 12th, the same day the original hero was caught and almost arrested. I have a feeling March 12 has more to it than we think. As if it was a city wide fuck up day." Brad said and then said one final thing before he talked about the funeral. "She did save the city and keep it safe for the last two months after her sacrifice, and defeating this guy was hopefully finishing what she had started."

"The funeral was a nice and quiet one. About forty people showed up. Some people in my family, her family, her friends, two teachers including the science one, and about six or seven random students who didn't know her but decided to pay respects. People seemed to be easy on me for about a week or so due to the death and for that week all homework and tests were excused, and all bullying stopped for me since even the bullies knew that I didn't want to deal with it. My few friends stuck with me and as a result I made a couple more. I hope that you guys are going to be some of them." Brad said and he finished up his story there and pulled up at the school.

"Well I think it is time for us to part ways for the night. Maybe we'll see each other during school." Eddie said and then hand shaked all three of the other people there and then he went to the school first. Ken nodded and then he put his hand on Brad's soldier as if to show his sympathy for the death of Misty.

"If you need me, just come to my house. Right next to the school." Ken said and then he went inside the school. By this point all that was left was Brad and his new possible girlfriend. She looked over at him and she was trying to decide what to think at the current moment.

"How about we dance another song or two and head to your house? I think you need a little present." The girl said and Brad smiled and nodded. "By the way, my name is Meryl. You would want to know the name of your new girlfriend would you?" Brad hugged her and thought that maybe there was something to get out of this after all. He agreed and they headed back to the school to. What will now be described below is a description of all three of our heroes and the rest of the night they had.

For Eddie, he was finding Richard again. The two of them had some unfinished business to attend to. After all, Richard needed to give Eddie a little lick or two and maybe they can do something else once the dance was over at one of their houses. But all he needed to do was find where mister get up in his business was.

"Oh there you are? You kind of just left a little out of nowhere. What even was the point of you doing that?" Richard said when he finally caught Eddie walking around. Eddie had turned around and he looked back down at the area of Richard's pants in which his balls would be. Eddie wondered if maybe he could go on and suck it off a second time. But then he remembered that it was still Richard's turn to go on and suck Eddie off.

"Hey how about we go home and then we finish off the job?" Eddie said and then when Eddie had said that Richard smiled really badly. That was when Eddie decided he would start to head out of the school and Richard had followed him. He held Eddie's hand when they got to the front of the school. Eddie was on the verge of laughing and Richard had smiled really badly. Neither one of them really cared anymore if they knew they were faggots since they would be out of the school soon anyways as well as the fact that they would be not caught with everybody dancing anyways.

After this was done, the two of them left the school and then they started to walk along on their way to Richard's house. They had agreed that maybe it was better for them to go there instead of being forced to deal with the risk of them being caught by Eddie's parents and all of that stuff. But then they were wondering what they would be doing if Richard's parents had caught them doing this. They decided that maybe it didn't really matter.

"You know, I don't really think that us trying things out is really all that big of a deal. We can just tell them they things went a little too crazy and risky and maybe they would be able to believe us if we had told them that stuff. After all, they usually believe me on most of the things that I say." Richard said and then afterwards the two of them were happy that this was all going well.

"I do not really care who gets to know anymore. I feel like people should not really be allowed to give off opinions on what they feel like for the things that I do on the sexual field." Eddie was saying and when he had made this choice, Richard had thought that Eddie had been getting a lot more courage just in the last couple of hours that he had known of Eddie and of his existence.

But things ended off when Richard and Eddie had reached the front entrance of the house. As they reached the front entrance of the house, the two of them started to go right up to Richard's bedroom. This was something that they were both really happy and excited over. Eddie closed the bedroom door when they were in the room. Then Richard landed on the bed and took off his shoe. Eddie took off his shoe and then he went on Richard's bed. The two were not going to wait at all to start this moment.

Eddie started to take off all of his clothes as he was getting ready to bang Richard a little bit. Richard took off his clothes and then when he took his clothes, the two of them started to pound each other and as they were having sex, both of them were trying really hard to be quiet since they were not wanting to get caught doing stuff that many parents would get annoyed by. They went at it for about twenty five minutes before they were done and then Richard turned off his bedroom lights so that way they could be able to sleep really nicely. Eddie wrapped his arm around Richard's body as they were now asleep. This was going to be the best one night stand in the history of their entire lives.

All as this was going on, Brad was dancing with his new girlfriend at the end of prom. The two of them were just not really paying attention to what the hell was going on around them. Neither one of them were going to talk about the event that had happened with the guy in the purple jacket. They were just taking this as casual as humanly possibly giving what the hell was going on. Once the dance was over, Brad thought that maybe it was his turn to have sex with his new partner.

"Sorry that I went on such a large rant about Misty and the life that I had about her. I just really felt like I needed to talk about it." Brad had said and he felt the great grasp of his girlfriend on him and she put her head on his shoulder and Brad was able to smell her flower scent perfume. He wondered how she had really even felt about what she had heard with his back story. Or maybe he was just pushing a subject that just needed to be let go.

"Honestly Brad, I see what the problem was. I am sorry that this terrible thing happened to it. This really seemed like it was the worst thing that you ever went through in your entire life. But I will try my hardest to make this whole period of your life not be a terrible thing anymore. I really want to make sure that you have a good rest of your high school career." His new girlfriend told Brad and she really liked the way that his shirt had a bunch of sweat on it due to all the dancing and hard work he had done. Under any other moment, the sweat would have been fucking disgusting, but this was a true exception.

The rest of the dance was really nice and great and it felt like Brad was able to take the nice long break that he had needed from all of the stress of losing a loved one two months ago. It was something that he really liked to talk about several years in the future. The songs at the end of the dance were just a bunch of background noise and not only that, but the entire surrounding stuff around him was just nothing he cared all that much about. When the dance was over, the principal got up and did some announcements for the school to explain that they needed to leave the area.

"Okay students, it is time to go on home. This was the best four hours of the school year and I feel like this is a general agreement. I hope that you will be talking about this for months to come and that you guys will never be able to forget about all of this." The principal had said and then after he said that he looked over at Brad and winked and there was something to it that indicated to Brad that he knew everything that happened.

Afterwards, Brad and the girlfriend went on over to the girlfriends real car and then the two of them went inside the car. The girlfriend started up the car and then she had looked at Brad as she smiled. The car lights and sounds of them all starting up in the area right outside sort of distracted both of them of what was going on. This was just hard for them to handle and the girlfriend started up the car. She then started to drive on the way to Brad's house as he was giving her details and instructions on where she had lived.

"Do you know if your parents will be here or not or are they going to even care what you are going to be doing with me?" The girlfriend had said and then Brad thought that this was a really good point. He really had to consider hard on what was probably going to be the most realistic thing that would have happened. "Of before you ask me, I decide that it might be best for you to know. My name is Eve." Eve said and then Brad kind of wasn't really thinking about that and then he got out of the car and Eve did as well as they started to head to the house. Brad decide he would give her the answer then.

"My parents will probably not be too shocked over the fact that I am bringing a girl on over to my house. However, I do not really think they are expecting that I will be having sex with you. I just think that it doesn't really matter for that reason. They will probably recognize I will be having sex eventually and they will probably be annoyed at first but they will get used to it." Brad told her and then kissed Eve on the lips. Eve was shocked for a second when they were kissed.

"Let's go inside. The longer that we stay here, the more that they will probably just be thinking that there was something going on beyond the original point. If we go right in they probably won't really notice and even if they did, they might not care." Brad decided and opened the door and the two of them went right up the house stairs and went inside of Brad's bedroom as they went right on the bed and didn't even close the door fully. Thankfully as Brad would realize later the next morning, the parents were out for the night and they actually were at a hotel for the night having sex on their own. So brad was able to get away from this for at least this first time. Future times not so much.

"Oh Brad, I am glad that you decided to dance with me. I thought that you were just going to keep dancing and not really care about anybody else that is in the school. You need to relax. Just get in the moment." Eve started to calm Brad down and with each passing second, the two of them were getting less guilty over the fact that Misty had died and Brad was just happy that he had gotten to live long enough to see himself having sex with somebody. Such a nice girl who didn't really judge Brad at all for what he had gone through before.

When this was all done and said with, Ken was at his own at the last couple of minutes of the dance. As he was left alone, he realized that no matter what he had done, he was always going to be the one that he nobody really liked at all. He was always the person that people would just throw away once they were done with him and Ken was starting to sort of see that this was the case.

This was when Ken started to walk on home. The more that he was walking away from the school, the more that the sounds and music of the prom dance were sort of dying away. He had just seemed like he wanted to get anything related to the dance to be even better. The only that he did during the last few minutes of the dance was the fact that Ken was dancing around and just wanting to sort of forget about the fact that he had just faced the worst person that he had ever met in his entire life.

Ken was just walking further and further to his house and as he was getting closer, the outside was pitch black and after five minutes of walking, there was no sound or anything that would be able to indicate that there was anything else going on. For all intents and purposes, despite what may make sense, there was nothing going on besides Ken just walking home.

Ken walked on home and as he was inside, everything was quiet. He walked further and further inside of his house and when he had gotten to his bedroom, there was a door that opened and this was the bedroom door that connected his parents room and his own room that almost all of the time was never used before. The guy who had come in was the old and tired father of Ken. "Ken, so how was prom?"

"It was fine. Just a lot of strange stuff that happened in the dance. I don't really know what else to say. Maybe I will talk about it more when I am in the better mood in the future." Ken had responded and he flopped onto the bed really hard. Sam was somehow still asleep throughout this entire thing, Ken pulled the gun out of his pocket and then it flopped onto the ground. As he had done this, Nigel sighed and then decided he wanted to take a moment or two to talk with Ken about what he had done.

"Ken, you need to know that I have done a bunch of things in the past that I have really regretted. But I just want you to know that I really want you to do better than me. That was why I was so disappointed when I heard about you thinking about dropping out. Since I really wanted you to go on and finish your education. If you can choose what to do, please don't drop out." Nigel had said and then that was when Ken decided that he had enough of people telling him what to do.

"I'm sorry dad, I just don't want people to tell me what to do anymore. I just want you to leave me alone. I am my own person. I don't need people to try and change my destiny as a human being." Ken said and then he flipped around so his head was on his pillow. Nigel was hearing Ken groan super loudly and by this point Sam was barely even sleeping anymore. This was when Nigel only said one more thing before he left Ken alone to sleep.

"Maybe you just need some time to think about it. Just think about it this weekend and then you can come up with the right choice when you know what you want to do." Nigel finished the conversation and then Nigel headed on out of the room. Ken fell asleep instantly as he had wanted to do. As Ken was asleep, Sam got up and walked closer to the bed ken was on and he picked up the gun. He was shocked and then shook his head. Ken was even worse than he had thought he was.

Sam just shook his head and he thought that his brother was needed to be stopped before something could happen to him that would make the whole situation even worse. Sam could not be able to get himself to sleep when he had seen this and he was wanting to do something to sort of take his mind off of what had happened. Sam then walked to the table in the bedroom that he and Ken shared. As they sat down, he was thinking on what to do. That was when he found the notebook that Ken had written during his days of Wayside. He opened up and saw a couple of pages and then when he had seen these pages, he was thinking about the idea of maybe reading these. But then he thought that despite how much he had hated his brother and how much of a criminal his brother was, he felt like there was a piece of privacy that he should respect. But then he heard a little bit of what Ken was saying in his sleep and he was talking about the events that had happened that night as well as the events that Brad went through with his girlfriend as well as the events that Ken had to deal with when he was trying to be a hero.

Sam thought that despite how stupid Ken was, maybe that he could do something to the same vein that Ken had done. So Sam took out a small notebook from his back pack and then when he had taken out the note book, he grabbed a small night light and then when he took it out, he started to get ready to do some writing. He wrote well into the hours of the night and when he was doing this, he had eventually filled up the entire thing trying to tell the story that he felt like needed to be told. When Sam would eventually die, this would later turn out to be his legacy and the only thing that he worked on that would be passed off and then his parents would read this as future evidence and later even just to see what the thoughts of their child was like in the last few months of his own life time.

Chapter Text

Chapter 12: The Journal of Sam Ichilouji -Part 1-

-I am trying to do something right now. My brother has yet again disgusted me with his utter love for anything besides himself. I feel like I need to just do something to get my mind off of the disgust that I am having. I saw him come home tonight (May 13 1966) from prom and he had a gun with him, and I have a terrible feeling that maybe he had killed somebody with that gun. Knowing Ken, the name of my brother, this honestly is not all that shocking to really consider the idea of him being like that. I can hear what he is saying right now and I think that despite how much I despise him and his way of looking at life, I think that maybe I can learn something from him and maybe I can tell a story here. Here we go now, and from here until the end of this notebook, I am telling the story that I can hear him say, and absolutely nothing else.

So it started in 1963 when Ken, back in that day Kevin, was starting to get to the end of his seventh grade year at Wayside. He was starting to try and get some last hang outs with his friends. One of them was named Todd, and that was the one that Ken seemed to be the best friends with out of them all. I don't really get it, but I guess that it was not all that big of a deal.

"Hey Todd, I really respect the work that you have done here, and I think that this is giving me a lot of inspiration. Do you want me to do something like this. You know, try and be like a hero in my own way. You just seem to be so selfless and you seem to be the one who really wanted to help everybody else out, and I can really be able to respect this." Kevin said to Todd and then Todd was seeming to think of a way that he could help his friend out in the new ambition that he was starting to gather up.

"Well, I did it because I wanted to help others out. I had no real claim to fame and I was not trying to do this to make myself famous, it just happens that the man with the golden armor seems to be sort of the inspiration for some things going on now. For better or for worse, my golden armor persona is now a huge thing in this world. Or I guess in the town of Wayside." Todd said and then he looked at Kevin to continue what he was saying "Honestly when I first came to Wayside, I felt like things were actually right and I felt like I should have been doing something to try and help out as much as possible. I saw the way that outside of Wayside school, this town was sort of struggling to get along, I decided that I wanted to help out and do something of my own to truly save this place and increase the way of living here. Unless if you have the motivation that I have, there is no reason for you to even try to do something." Todd said and then Kevin thought that this was true and that he should just let Todd do the job on his own. He did not really have the motivation to help Wayside too much. Besides, Todd was doing this perfectly fine on his own. So he just let Todd do this on his own, and despite not wanting to help right now on his own, soon enough Ken would get the motivation to do so in his next place of living.

So when Kevin was finally done with Wayside, he was really scared of how he was going to transition and all that stuff. When the teacher was trying to get all the students to try and introduce each other and all that, Kevin gulped and then he said "My name is Ken." Afterwards, that basically started to be the nickname that he was going to be going with pretty much the rest of his life to this point in time. This was something that I didn't get at first but eventually embraced due to the fact that I thought that honestly he was going to start to change from there forward.

While Ken moving to this place was something that seemed to change his life for the worst, I was changing my life for the better. On my first day in high school tenth grade year, I was totally ready to just start hanging out with some new friends. I made a new friend pretty much in the first couple of days of the year. "Hey my name is Sam, this is my first day here. I don't really know what is going on around the school." I said and I seemed to be not really sure how to compose myself. I used to be really out there and open to other people talking with me, but something about being at a new school was honestly a little bit scary for me to handle.

"My name is Steve. This is my third year here. I think you will really like this school." Steve said and then he decided that he would give me a tour of the school. After he decided that he would give me a tour of the school, things started to get a little bit better for me. I love hanging out with some new friends when I first meet them to be honest, and with each friend that I made at that school, every thing was getting better.

It was on my school day there at the school when I met the girl who I would eventually start to date and sooner rather than later begin to fall in love with. I walked into my Chemistry class and when I was in Chemistry class, I started to try and get to make some new friends. I sat next to five people on one of the tables and I started to talk with them right away. The teacher made us all introduce each other to the people that we were all sitting with at our desk. I introduced myself to them and then Susan looked at me and shook my hand and then she said she was glad to see me at this school. I shook her hand and then when I shook her hand, things started to go better from there for me.

It took a week of having class with her to have the courage to ask her out on a date. I remember the day when it was happening for the first time. I only knew her for a week so I thought that maybe it was a little too soon for something like this to happen, and that was something that was starting to worry me a little bit and all that. But I felt like I needed to do this before it would slip by and I would not do something. "Hey Susan, do you want to go out to dinner sometime this weekend? Like Sunday maybe?" I was saying and then when I was saying this, that was when Susan looked at me and then she thought for a moment before she decided to nod.

"I guess that I will do it. How about we go to that one Italian place that is close to the school? I have been hear dank things about it, but I have not been there." Susan answered and then when she was saying this, I nodded and I thought that this was a fair plan and then we went our own ways and I had spent the next two days getting ready for this date to go down and I was really hoping that I was not going to fail this date. I was wondering how things were going with Ken since I was really hoping that leaving Wayside and going to this school was going to let him learn his lesson. Although I would later learn he was just getting even worse than before.

"How has your first week here been?" I asked Ken and I was hoping that he would be willing to talk with me here, but then he was just focused on reading that journal that he wrote during his time in Wayside I was starting to think that he was just not really caring about anything else in the world. I really wanted him to actually pay me some attention and not be looking at this book the whole time.

"I am just really missing that school. I had such great friends I did so many things that I really enjoyed here." Ken said and then when Ken was saying this, I sat down and then I thought that maybe the two of us could help each other out and that if I gave him some advice, then he can give me some advice here and then with that, the two of us could improve our friendships with each other. Guess that I was a little bit wrong with that.

"I think that it is time to put Wayside behind us for good. I think that we need to put this behind us Ken. I think that constantly thinking about this place is not going to do you any good. Just try and find something that you want to do, something that can get your passion up here, and then you can leave that place behind. But that won't happen if you don't at the very least try here." I was saying and then after I had said that, Ken just looked up at me and he decided not to really add anything. He placed the notebook down and it seemed like they we would work with each other. But little did I know this advice would bite me in the ass soon.

It had seemed like Ken was finally starting to improve, so I started to just focus more on the stuff going on around me and that was the date that I was having with Susan. When i was having my date with her, she seemed to be more focused on the fact that I was just seeming to be all calm and collected, something that she was not really expecting me to be like given my previous times in the class. "I thought that you were just going to be all uptight about everything that is going on. You seem to be much calmer than I would have expected you to be. That is a great thing actually." Susan said and then I placed both my hands under my chin, no matter how silly that fucking looked.

"I am just trying to be calm, I realized that my brother is finally growing the fuck up. This makes me happy knowing that he is no longer that dumb little kid that he used to be. I really wish that he can keep this up and that he will be a good man one day. But so far it seems as if he is not quite yet. But let's not talk about my brother. Let's talk about just things that I want to get to know you about over." Sam said and then when he had said that, Susan nodded mainly because she did not want to hear him constantly talking shit about his brother, which was honestly too much for her to handle.

"I think that you are really going to like it at this school. I have been trying to figure out why you asked me out of all people. I thought that maybe you would have asked some of the more attractive girls in the group. I really am not all that attractive and even I can see that for myself. I know that many people are not really thinking that I am being too nice with myself, but I am just telling the truth here." Susan was saying and then I was shaking my head. I had no reason to believe that there were better looking girls here, as I thought she was the truly best looking girl at our school.

"I truly do not see where you are coming from. I really think that you are the best looking girl in this school. But even beyond the looks, I think that there are other important things. You are smart, and you have worked really hard at school and you have been helping me improve on my Chemistry skills since I really do not know what I am supposed to be doing here." I was telling Susan and then when I said that to Susan, she smiled and she seemed to be excited that somebody had noticed and appreciated the effort that she had put into here.

"I never seen somebody take so much time to be thankful over the school work that I have done. I feel like people don't really care about the effort I have put forward into school over the last few years. But the fact that you seemed to like the work I have been doing already makes the two of us connect more than I ever thought that we would." Susan said and it was strange, but I felt that the two of us playing with each other and their uncomfortable ness was staring to make us more comfortable and feeling as if we actually could take on whatever was coming up in the world. As if the two of us were a perfect combination that had been made from the start of time.

"Well, I don't even really care all that much about school. But the fact that you are such a dedicated student here and the fact that you and I seem to actually know what is going on, and the fact that you helped me be calm and focused when talking with Ken, then I think that you are truly making things better for us both." I said and then when I had said this, Susan was seriously starting to wonder what the hell was even going with Ken that made me hate him so damn much.

"I mean don't get me wrong, I don't doubt that he has a long way to go before he's fully mature, but let him enjoy his youth. Maybe in a couple of years from now, he will be more ready to tackle real responsibility. Just let him enjoy life right now." Susan said to me and I was seriously wanting to change the subject and talk about something that I know she would not want to fight with me on. I figured that maybe we can talk about Chemistry class since there are a lot of things that we can discuss there.

"Let's talk about something else, a more calm and fun subject that I bet we will be able to both enjoy. Chemistry is a very hard class so far. I wonder what the teacher has in store for us at the end of the school year. I think that maybe once a week or something, we should meet up and just work on school work and when we are done, maybe try and do something else for a while." I said and I was slightly hinting at the sexual deed, but I didn't want to out right state it due to the fact that I didn't want to have Susan think I was a bit of an out there freak on our first date.

"I just think that he is wanting to get us active right away instead of just spend like a week or so on some boring class papers that none of us are going to be taking seriously and he probably knows that none of us will be taking seriously." Susan said and I considered that idea for a moment, but at the same time I thought that maybe this was just going to be one of the harder classes and that we were going to have to get used to these standards.

"Hey Sam, want to come home with me tonight?" Susan asked and that was when I got really excited. I had a feeling I knew where she was going to be heading with this. I nodded really excited when I heard her ask that and Susan smiled, thinking that this was going to work out wonders after all at when we actually do start to get a real relationship going. If it wasn't already at that level yet, which I am starting to think we are actually getting there.

After that, Susan and I started to head on over to her house and I was slowly getting myself mentally prepared for this. It would be my first time on this, and I am assuming that it would be Susan's first time on this as well. I was just hoping it was actually what I thought that it was, and that I wasn't just sort of having my deviant mind play these tricks on me after all. Looking back nearly three years later, I knew it was silly to think that but I was so over the top excited for the possible outcome.

Once we were at Susan's house, she waited until her parents were asleep and then she closed the door to make sure that it was at least relatively quiet once we started to get into the groove of things. "Hey so Susan... I know this is really fast and the fact you went on a date with me anyways is awesome, but I was wondering if maybe you want to... you know... start going out with me. As you know, boyfriend and girlfriend." I said and that the closest I went to choking on something with her related to our relationship.

Susan paused and was trying to really take in what had just happened, wondering herself if this was all too fast or not. But she decided that it was no real big deal and she nodded. "Yeah that would be awesome. I would love to be your girlfriend." Susan said and I took a deep breath while really taking in the fact that she did not turn me down. Then she sat down next to me on her bed and we stared at each other. I was already feeling the twitch inside my pants and I knew what it was for.

I do not really want to make you guys uncomfortable and wonder why I am making you all suffer, so I will not give you the long and detailed version of what had happened. Long story short, we had sex. It lasted for a little while and this was my first time, so I was god awful at it and I wish that I would have recorded it since it would have been hilarious to laugh at in the future. Once we were done, we went to bed and made sure we were quiet about it.

Once I returned home that day, I went on to my room and was doing my very best to make sure that my parents did not catch onto what I was doing. When Ken would get into trouble, he took a disturbing amount of pride in it and was very public about it. Unlike me who felt strange about it and didn't want people to know what I had done. That is another thing that still makes the two of us very different in a way that I would say makes me better.

"So how was the date with Susan?" Ken asked when I was in my room and I could tell that he had been waiting all morning to ask that question. I looked over at him and was wondering why he had absolutely no life and why he was even bothering with this in the first place. After all, it was none of his business and he should have just treated it like that. I sighed and told him that it went alright and that the two of us had a great time. I didn't tell him the girlfriend thing or the moment when we banged, since I thought that he would abuse that knowledge in a way.

"I know there is more to it than that. But it's very obvious that you don't want to tell me, so I will respect what you want I guess." Ken said and then he decided to leave me alone. I was thinking that this was rather mature for his standards, but then I started to think that maybe he was doing this to maybe pull a card on me later on with the fact that he didn't expose me for something so in return I should do the same for him or something totally retarded like that.

"Just remember I am only going to tell you something if I feel like it is your business, and none of this is your business, so I will tell you none of it." I told Ken and that was all that there was to the conversation. Ken raised up his two arms and he was showing that as a sign to declare defeat and he left the room. I had no idea what he was doing, and I reminded myself to be careful about that, but for now, I wanted to give him a chance to prove himself an ally.

Later that night, I was sort of thinking about the school year. I was thinking that perhaps it was not really going to be all that bad. I thought that with Susan at my side, that maybe I was really going to be able to enjoy this year after all. I thought that Ken and I would be able to start to become friends by relative standards and that none of the stuff I was worrying about was really going to happen or not in the way that I feared at least.

Sure, Wayside and leaving behind old friends was a tough bitch to deal with, but I can live with it. After all, Ken seems to be dealing with it just fine, and he is the one person I thought more than anything would suffer with it. Or he is at least looking like he is dealing with it fine. If he isn't then I have to give him props for doing a good job hiding it. That is honestly pretty impressive how he can pretend that things are going his way if they are not. Maybe he could be like a good actor or something like that if it was a performance.

That night, Ken was down in the basement of the house. I would later learn that he was using that as his operation base to do his own stuff related to his retarded idea of becoming a super hero. He was just drawing a bunch of outlines on it until he created one that he eventually ended up really liking. It was one with wings under the arms, a motorcycle helmet, black and white clothes, and combat boots. It seems really cool to him and it was kind of cool the first couple of times I saw it, but it was still a silly design. Now Ken was just thinking of a good name for it.

Things seem to go a little bit casual after that for a while. Susan and I would meet up every day after school for two hours before heading home. Most of the time we just did like hopeless romantic stuff. Every week end we would meet up at her house and we would have a weekly session of sex. My parents didn't know about it and they honestly didn't care. Ken did know all about it and he was just simply not saying a damn thing about it. I was wondering what he was doing, and if he was planning something behind my back. But I decided to ignore it for now since he was doing the same for me. Besides, he was thirteen, getting close to fourteen.

It had gone on like this for about six weeks or so, with little to no changes in the whole thing. This was basically a part of the daily routine, and with Susan at the week ends, weekly routine. This was until six weeks later as I just said, when Ken walked up to me while I was getting ready to go on my date with Susan. There was a look on his face that showed he really meant it when he was about to say that he wanted to talk with me for a moment. He was an annoying little shit, but he was my brother and I feel as if I should have placed him above Susan.

"Ken, I have a date with Susan coming up very soon. You are well aware of this. So I will give you ten minutes to tell me what you really want to tell me. Once those ten minutes are up, I am leaving and you will have to keep it in." I said and I knew that this would make him talk fast and I was hoping that he would actually take it seriously.

"I was really wanting to tell you something. But you were always gone doing something every time I come up to take a break and try and tell you. But I am thinking about going around and saving the city. I think I want to fight crime." Ken told me and I was thinking he was just talking about becoming a police office and I told him that it was a fair idea and that he should try and look into the police force. But looking at him again made me see he didn't think of that idea.

"I don't want to do it in the traditional sense. I don't really have any interest in fighting crime by being a police officer. I don't really have the patience to do something like that. I want to do something right here, right now, that I can easily take into my own hands." Ken said and I looked at him, and I was starting to get it. I knew where he was going, and I was wondering what made him insane enough to actually believe that he should actually be doing what he was thinking about. I shook my head and then Ken was placing both of his hands together as if he actually had the best idea in the world.

"Sam, I think that I have a good place to goo off of here. I think that my idea is so much better than just sitting down in the office every day and acting like a jack ass who pretends they care when they only get paid for the misery of others."' Ken said and it was really making me mad to hear him talking that type of level about our police station. I knew that he was talking about our parents and that our father was collectively in there.

"You better fucking take that back. If you think that you dressing up in a fucking cape will actually get any good done, then you are just as crazy as the people who commit the crimes. I will not continue this conversation with you and I want you to cut that shit of. I don't ever want to hear you talking that way about our dad again." I said and then I left the house and I didn't even say anything to my parents as I was heading out. I almost did, but I didn't want Ken to be in super deep shit. I was going to be taking care of that myself when I came home.

As I was getting in my date with Susan that night, I was trying really hard to get the moment with Ken outside of my head. God, my brother was a fucking ass. One of the biggest pieces of crap I have had ever had the displeasure of knowing. He only cares about what goes on gets him in the next step above. He may not act like it or pretend that he cares about everybody else, but trust me, he is going to use his 'fighting crime' life style to go on and pick up some ladies who would other wise never even dream of touching him. It was honestly just kind of retarded at this point in time.

"Is there something going on Sam?" Susan asked and then when she had asked me that, I looked over at her and I thought about it and if it was even worth bothering her with how my brother was. She already knew all of the horror stories of how Ken was. But I thought a short piece on it would not be all that bad.

"Just Ken acts like he can do a better job fighting the world of crime than my father. He doesn't know what it is like to go out there on a daily basis and throw your fucking life on the line and almost die every single day." I told her and then she looked at me in a way that was suggesting that since I didn't do that either, that I wasn't one really to fully speak on the subject. "I mean, he almost got himself killed on more than one case during his seventh grade year, and he acts like he can do so much better when he can almost die every fucking time." I was fucking livid with this asshole.

"Look Sam, he is an idealistic man. He had a lot of big ideas of how he wants the world to be. Can you blame him for that? He's fucking like fourteen or something. Just let him live in his idea that he is going to be the savior of the world." Susan suggested and that was a horrible idea, and I thought that maybe she needed to see where I was coming from.

"But Susan, our father is working at the police station and has been putting his entire life at something like that. Then Ken comes along and acts like he can do a job a thousand times better than our father just because he had a crazy battle with some crazy guy who wore a purple jacket. Trust me, I do not even want to go into that story at all. If you want to know, just have somebody like ken explain it to you. But seriously, he acts like he is better when he never even has done something like this on his own." I told Susan, wishing she would finally understand but I doubt that she would, which was awful.

"I don't know, I think you should just let him follow his own path. If he feels like he can do a good job, maybe just give him a chance to prove himself. That is what I would do. I wouldn't instantly throw something away because of what it may sound like to you." Susan said and I considered that for a short moment. Maybe she did have a point there. Maybe she actually was right on that, even if I hated to admit it.

The rest of the date was great, and I think that once we put aside what we were thinking about Ken, nothing really was bothering us too badly anymore. The next part that I want to talk to you about was this time after we came back from winter break in that school year. Honestly nothing before then was really worth all that much of a interest and I doubt that you will constantly want to hear about me banging Susan and all of that stuff. You got the point after the first time I wrote about it.

Anyways, so when I had returned to school after winter break, I started to make some new friends. Well, two major ones. Steve and the others in Chemistry class weren't really people I hung out with too much. Don't get me wrong, I didn't mind them and it wasn't like we didn't get along, but it was a very much in the class room thing. Also by this point in time, we were about a year away from when Ken started to act like he truly was the hot cause and start getting in the whole super hero role which honestly was just a horrible idea.

The first one of these people that I started to hang out with was named Sheldon. He was a little bit of a social nerd and basically did not have any good skills talking with people at all. In fact, getting him to talk to me at all seemed like something that was like a record breaking event for me to do. Not that it was a bad thing though, it was just the truth of how Sheldon really was like.

I was at school one day and he was at his locker just trying to get to next class really fast. He was one of those no time wasting students who wanted to just get ready and be out of the locker room in like fifteen seconds since he knew that if he did not he would have to deal with some people taking the liberty to make fun of him for various reasons. To be honest, he seemed to just sort of have that little bit of a pervert vibe to him. Not in the way that he was into super little kids or anything like that. In the way that he just sort of looked at people around him with a little bit of a sexual way. It was a little odd, but not really all that big of a deal.

"So dude, I was wondering if perhaps you would like to go hit the park after school today." I said and he thought about it. I could tell from his face that in reality, he didn't really want to but at the same time he didn't want to say no, so he was just going to sort of force himself into the whole idea. I raised my hand up and was trying to show that it was alright if he didn't want to do it. I could honestly understand why he would not. There were some assholes down there all the time and I was not too big of a fan of them myself. It made sense to me.

"I wouldn't mind going, but probably for not too long. I should probably be doing some school work honestly. Don't want to get behind on my work and make my parents angry at my getting behind." Sheldon decided and I considered that, it was a valid point but since he agreed to go hang out with me, it was sort of something that he could not really take back.

"Well, see you after school then." I said and Susan and I agreed earlier that day to not really meet up anyways, so this was not really going to get in the way too much. She said that she was doing some family related stuff and that it wasn't on top of the list for this day in particular to go and spend some time with me. I didn't mind, besides I felt like the two of us did need a little bit of space every once in a while to make us really appreciate each other even more.

I went and just did the normal day by day usual stuff and I didn't really even care about the work all that much honestly. I was just in the mood to go and hang out with some friends and take things easier. So when school was over, I went to see Sheldon and he was looking around and checking everybody out. I rolled my eyes. I didn't mind it as much as most people like at all, but at the same time it was a little bit strange and even I had to admit that.

"So are you ready to head out?" I asked and he looked over and saw me. He nodded, thinking that it was probably enough for that for one day. It did make me laugh a little bit on the inside, but a laugh in more of the I felt bad for him type of way. He was not going to get anybody to think that he was prince charming with the way that he acted every single day. But I doubt he was able to really understand that. I mean he didn't even have the looks to be somebody of a prince charming.

I would never consider myself anything else than a straight bloke, but I mean I can recognize and see when a guy is good looking. It is just common sense. I just wanted to say that before I see somebody read this and make any sort of assumptions. I don't feel that way towards dude and probably never will, but I can see a guy and see that he is handsome or well put together. Doesn't mean that I want to put my rod inside of his ass or something like that.

Anyways, now that I am done making you feel like you hate life for reading that, I am going to get back to the main actual point at hand. So Sheldon and I started to head on down to the park, which was about a mile and a half away from where the school was, which was like a twenty minute walk since we were taking it slowly and not going super fast or anything. We didn't really have too much of a time limit and my parents didn't really care if I stayed out that late with some friends or anything like that.

At the park, we were looking around and the two of us were wondering what exactly to do next. We didn't really talk that out and the fact that we were looking like total retards was making it really obvious. "Yeah, maybe we should have made some better plans before we went down there." I said and the two of us remained silent for a little bit, thinking about that. It wasn't bad that we had no plan so to say, but at the same time, it did leave us to sort of be looking around with no idea on what exactly to do next.

"Well, maybe we can just relax for a little while. I mean, there is nobody around that is going to mess us up or anything like that." Sheldon said and then we sat down on the swings. I felt a little bit stupid being a near young adult sitting down on some swings, but it could have been worse. We could have been trying to 'fight crime' as Ken would put it and act like he was some great and mighty hero when in reality he was just being some dumb fuck by even thinking for a second that this would work. Honestly I was still pissed the fuck off about that. He acted like he was going to be the one who can make all the changes when he can barely make any changes to his own personal life style. Like who the fuck did he think he was for acting like that.

But as this was going on, there was a guy with red hair coming inside of the park and he had a black shirt on over his white shirt and he just in general seemed to be a cool and relaxed guy who did not really worry about anything going on round him. He seemed like the type of guy you would want to hang out with and share a beer with is what I am telling you right now.

"What are you two doing here? You guys seem like you are really bored?" He asked and I was surprised that he was taking his time to talk with either one of us. After all, we never said anything to him so it would not really give off the impression that we were worthy of his calm and collected attitude and all that stuff. "I'm just waiting for some girl that I was going to go and hang out with." The guy said and then Sheldon and I looked at each other.

"Well, my name is Sam." I said and then Sheldon introduced himself. The guy placed his back pack down and he looked out at the town and he was thinking about what to say and he was thinking about the girl that he was going to be meeting up with really soon.

"My name is Brad. I have been here for a while. What are you guys planning on doing? I don't really know how long I plan on staying in the park to be honest. Might just head out when the girl I am waiting for shows up." Brad said and I was wondering if the three of us were going to be hanging out any time soon or if this was just a one time deal. "I arranged to meet up with her lately and she has been pretty busy. I don't really know with what know. None of my business I guess." Brad said and then I looked at Sheldon.

"Yeah, maybe she is just doing some school work. That is what I would be guessing she is doing." I said and I thought that there was a fair amount of realism to it. Brad considered it but at the same time I could tell he was not fully sold on it either. He seemed to be a little bit distracted. As if this girl was honestly not even all that he was thinking about. I was wondering what had been going on with him to make him so fucking distracted that he couldn't even handle looking at us in a conversation that we were having with him. I didn't find it offensive, but I was just not too sure.

"I don't really know. She might be doing school work. But she never has been a good student. I am just thinking that maybe she is sort of doing some of her own so called personal work. She seems to be working on a lot of stuff late at night and I don't really know what it is honestly. It is starting to worry me honestly." Brad said and I was starting to sort of get reminded of Ken when I would hear somebody say that. I was not really too sure if that was my fault or if Ken was not really the only one out here like this.

But before I could question him any more, he waved his hand up and he yelled out loud "MISTY! I'M OVER HERE!" Brad got her attention and the girl, who seemed to be wearing a lot of blue and white and had her hair pointed to two different for of lightning buns, which I didn't get, started to come on over to him. "Well I will be seeing you later." Brad said and then he headed off with the girl. Sheldon looked at the girl and he was sort of taken by her.

"That guy seems like a nice bloke. Maybe my brother can pick up a couple of pieces from him." I said and I was wondering if we would be friends and hang out more or if Brad was going to soon forget that I even existed at all. I feel as if both options were equally possible given how things were around here.

I just spent the next few days working on my own stuff at school, trying to keep on top of all the work that is given to me on a constant basis. I didn't really want to fall behind since if I did, I would have bad grades and I wanted to graduate on time with high marks, so that would not be a valid option if I just was lazy and did nothing. Besides, I knew that this was a good chance to yet again one up Ken by doing something that he was not good at, and it was really great inside to always be able to one up that guy under any chance I may have.

Something strange happened though. I was just going down to the basement since I saw Ken down there a lot lately and I guess you can say that curiosity killed the cat on that regard. So I went down there and I thought that I would see what I wanted to know after about two minutes and once I was done, I can come up the stairs and then just move on in my life. I didn't trust Ken, but I never thought that he could go down to the level that he had, no matter how much he had talked of it.

So when I was in the basement, I thought that things were a little bit normal at first. Nothing too incredibly terrible. I then saw a small desk in the center of the room. At first I thought nothing too much of it. Looked like a gaming table. I just assumed that perhaps it was something Ken put in there to put his stuff on since he liked to work all the time down here. I actually was being pretty supportive of what I was seeing for this first part. He was just a fourteen year old boy, well fourteen in like five weeks, and he was using the basement as a man cave. If I was his style of teenager back at that age, I would have probably been the exact same.

I sat down on the family couch and it felt a lot more broken in and beaten down than it was the last time I went sat on it, which was when we were at the last school the previous year. I knew that Ken was using this a lot and that he just was the one who did it.

I sat down there for about three to four minutes. I knew I needed to meet up with Susan soon, and that being down here was going to be a problem if I didn't get out of the room in like ten to fifteen minutes. Ken was out with our parents doing some errands and I think they were going to be going out to watch a movie or something. I thought that maybe I would be fine until like seven or eight on most normal nights.

Ken managed to get a 2.1 the last term that we had, which was too date his highest graded term and the only one which he actually did not get a single F in it. They felt that this was worth the cause of celebration, and to be honest while a 2.1 is not great by any means, it was a step up. I was just thinking about that a little bit when I saw that there was a piece of paper on the floor that my foot was on. I knew that if Ken saw my foot print on there, he would know I was down there. So I picked it up and I was thinking about dusting it off or something to make it look like nothing ever happened.

But when I picked it up, my curious mind decided to just look at it for a moment. I saw that it was a giant list of stuff. The list was called "Targets" and it was talking about all of these people, names of streets, and one sentence descriptions of it. It was three pieces of paper actually stapled together. I didn't quite get it at first, but when I thought about it I started to figure it all out. These were the names of places different crimes took place in, who owned the places, and the names of some of the perpetrators. On one hand, the guy clearly did his 'homework' and knew what he was doing, but on the other hand, I was starting to wonder what his plans were and if he was actually going to start doing what I thought he was going to start doing.

Finding out about all of this did actually make me really pissed off. This guy did not know when the fuck to stop. But then at the same time, there was a little bit of worry that was coming through me as well. Such as his safety and if he should even be doing what he had already been doing. I started to look at his table and started to see the several pieces of loose paper all around the place. Talking about what he will do when he begins his crime fighting, where his first goals are, picking the places with the most small level crime at them, and some times he would write small hand transcripts of radio conversations that he heard. Usually like two to three minute pieces.

I thought that despite how crazy this all was, Ken was actually starting to take this seriously. A little bit too seriously if I had to say. I spent so much time looking down here that I realized I needed to meet up with Susan like forty minutes later and that I was going to be half an hour late.

Annoyed at myself, I threw the papers on the table and started to head out of the room. Since the papers were all flying around as if they were air planes for a little bit, I knew Ken was going to catch me cold sooner or later. But right now, I really did not care all that much.

If Ken was mad over the fact that I was being sane, then he was even worse than I thought that he was. He needed to get his stuff together if something like this was going to anger him. But right now, I was telling myself that this did not really matter all that much and that I needed to just focus on getting to Susan since I had made a promise to her and I had no intention on breaking that promise under any cases.

I ran to Susan's house at the fastest speed I could possibly do it, not wanting to waste even a fucking second on this. I realized what I needed to do. Once I knocked on her door, I saw Susan walk down the hall way and open the door for me. "What happened that made you so late?" Susan asked and while I knew she would give me a really fucking pissed off reaction over the exact extent of the truth, I knew I should probably be a little bit honest about it.

"I was down in the basement, looking at some of Ken's stuff and seeing what I can learn about what he was doing. I thought that maybe I could get some of the facts straight." I said and then Susan rolled her eyes as if she didn't understand what my obsession with this whole thing even was to begin with. In a way, I wasn't really sure if I understood it either. Maybe I was starting to over think it. But at the same time, he was over doing it. Maybe we were both being over the top. I think that is the better way of looking at it.

"Sam, I get that you really think he shouldn't do something like this. I totally one hundred percent understand why you feel that way. But he must follow his path and you must follow your path. You need to let it go bro. Just hang out with me and not worry about anything going on with Ken." Susan said and I thought about it. I knew she was right and I knew that I needed to take a breather, but it was just hard for me to do so. But I did want to enjoy the night with her, which in the end was a better wish for me.

"Fine... I will do it." I said and walked inside of her house and for the next few hours, I turned off my mind to all of the Ken stuff. It was a little nice not to be forcing myself to think about my brother and all of the stupid shit going on. It was probably better for me to do that anyways. After all, Susan was right. It was his choice and he needed to follow his own path. I kept forcing myself to remember that fact.

On Monday of that next week, I was hanging out with Sheldon a little bit and we were just sort of taking it casually and not really caring too much about what was going on around us. "So how is Susan doing?" Sheldon asked and I could tell from the look on his face that he was a little it worried that perhaps this relationship was starting to face some problems. I didn't really think that was the case at all, but maybe he was a little bit right in the way that perhaps I should have been taking her word a little bit more seriously than I had been with Ken and all that stuff.

"I think it is doing fine. We might have some disagreements here and there. but when you get into a relationship, you will start to see that everybody is like that. There is no perfect match made in heaven, no matter what the media tries to show things as. I mean, relationships are truly a give and take thing. You need to find the way that everybody can be at least a little but happy at the end of the day, you just need to really hone in that problem." I told Sheldon and he was thinking about that, and he thought that I was probably right and that when he got into a relationship, he would have to start to look into that.

"Yeah, I think you are probably a better expert on that stuff than I am." Sheldon decided and that was the most that we could have with each other before Brad and that Misty girl he was talking about earlier came along to sit down with us. I was not really too sure what to think of it, but I thought it was kind of cool that they were willing to talk with us again even though we barely even knew them to begin with. Perhaps nobody else was talking with them or something like that.

"Hey you two." Brad said as Sheldon gave a look of confusion, to show that he had already forgotten about the whole last week thing. Brad pointed up his right index finger as if he felt stupid for not realizing his mistake sooner. "I'm very sorry. Totally forgot that we have only met once before. But I was the guy that you two met at the park earlier." Brad said and then that was when Sheldon got the look of remembering on his face and then he nodded to show that he got it.

"I thought that maybe you guys would like to hang out. Misty and I were heading on over to her house in a moment, and we were thinking that maybe you would want to come." Brad said and then I looked at Sheldon. The look on his face was passive although I could tell that he did want to hang out with Misty, and I thought that maybe we could get this to work out if I started to pick up better with Sheldon on his social skills.

"Yeah sure, I think it would be cool if we hung out." I said and then Brad got a very small smile on his face thinking that this was going to be one of the best days of the last few weeks or something. So the three of us got up from where we were and started to head on down to Misty's house. "So what made you guys want to talk to us again after only meeting us once?" I asked, thinking that while it was great he was asking us to do this, it did feel a little bit odd and I thought that there was nothing too wrong with getting to know that fact first.

"Well, we thought that you guys needed to make some new friends, and I thought that we got along decently well in the short time that we saw each other, so I thought what the hell, why not give it a shot?" Brad said and I guess that it seemed legitimate enough. After all, both Sheldon and I, even more Sheldon, did sort of have a dead social life. I at least had some friends and Susan, but Sheldon didn't really even have that at all.

"What have you guys been up to? Are you guys having any plans soon?" I asked, just trying to keep up the casualness of the conversation and not make it too strange or anything like that. I thought that if they wanted to be friends with me, they needed to have at least a little bit of a open mind set to us. That was what I thought at the very least, and I felt that there was a good motive to that. Maybe I was just afraid of what Ken was going to turn into and didn't want them to follow that same path he is already starting to head down.

"Misty has been working on a project for a while and I think that the project will be a great success once it gets going." Brad said and I was curious what exactly this project was, and I felt that maybe I could help out a little bit if she told me a little bit more about it, that maybe I could give her some pointers or something like that. It would be mostly harmless, but I felt no problem in that idea.

"Please don't tell them what it is. I don't want them to start thinking things behind our back." Misty said and then Brad stopped and nodded and he felt a little bit bad for making her feel that way. It was not in any way his intention, but he did see where she was coming from and he did understand why it could annoy her. So with that, Brad looked at Sheldon and wondered what he was thinking of. It seemed like he was sort of off in a different world with his mind right now due to the fact that he was looking down all the time and not really paying too much attention to what was going around him.

"Do you guys have any plans for the weekend?" Brad asked trying to bring the subject to a easier one that most people can mostly agree on. Misty sighed in relief when she had heard this, not wanting the truth to come out just yet. I had plans with Susan on the weekly basis and all that stuff, but nothing like over the weekend or something like that. I just was probably to maybe hang out with her on Saturday, but even that was not a totally for sure thing.

"No not really, do you have something going on?" Sheldon decided to break the mold a little bit when he made that response. Brad looked at Sheldon and thought that maybe he would do. Misty was really sort of eyeing us carefully, wondering if Brad was going to drop the other conversation point at all or if Brad was totally away from that subject finally. She was really hoping that it would be the latter.

"No not really, maybe we can hang out this weekend or something? Do you like that idea?" Brad suggested as Sheldon had to pause a think about it for a moment. "Dude it's okay if you don't want to. After all, Misty and I were already having plans. Maybe if you just maybe meet up for like an hour or two, then everything would be alight." Brad said and when he said everything would be alright, there was an edge to the sentence as if he was utmost positive that nothing could possibly go wrong. I was not really too sure what could make him believe it so badly, but I thought that if Brad can feel that way about things, then maybe I could as well.

"Yeah sure I would be fine with hanging out for a little while. I just don't want to get in the way of your plans or anything." Sheldon said and then Brad said that if he had a lot of plans, he would have never asked the question in the first place. Sheldon considered that and thought that it was fair point, and that was all that there was to that small little subject.

Once we were at Misty's house, she let us inside and I started to look around the place a little bit. Her house was huge. Not like that she was some rich mother fucker, since there was nothing of insane value in there. Just a bunch of mechanical stuff. It was very clear that she was a engineer or maybe that one of her parents was. But it was just really spacious. Like the front hall was already bigger than my entire living room, and I was not even too sure what her bedrooms would be like, and how giant they would be.

Once the fact that Misty had a house like seven times the size of my own had sort of worn down and I was used to that fact, I was able to go on and actually enjoy the tour that she was giving us. I thought that there was nothing wrong with how big her house was and that I just needed to get used to it a little bit more. "My mom has been trying to create some things that are like robots, although not like the androids that you guys hear about every once in a while, I am talking about just full on robots in which you don't even fake the idea of them being like humans at all." Misty explained and I was wondering what that would be like in the modern society, and how well that would be accepted.

"How long has she been working on this stuff?" I asked, thinking that if I knew just how dedicated she was to the project, I can get a true sense on how impressive it was or how insane it was. Or how it might be a little bit of both of them at the same time, which was also a pretty likely out come. "My brother has expressed some interest in the creation of robots, but not nearly enough to want to actually create some."

"My mom has been working on them since I was a young girl. I am sixteen right now, so that is like ten years or so. She has made this one of her main interests, seeing how robots can thrive in the real world once they are developed and have the emotions of a human, but not the body of one at the same time. It is a interesting concept, but she is starting to think that it will never really come on through." Misty explained and the two of us that were not named Brad were pretty interested in this. Brad had known about all of this and was not shocked at all when he heard this. In fact, he was more shocked to see the totally shocked looked on both of our faces.

"My mom has believed that robots will come to be an accepted part of our society soon enough and she really wants to push that day forward with a lot of gusto placed onto it. I am really hoping that the project turns out as good as she wants it to, as it is one of her great many passions." Misty said and showed up a show case piece behind some glass.

I read it a little bit and it said 'Wakeman' and I was wondering if that was the name of her mother and that was her signature on it. I would not doubt it if that was what it was. I looked over at Misty and I had like a million questions to ask her but I just had no fucking idea where I could even start with them.

I decided that I was going to keep the comments to myself and if she wanted us to know more about these plans, then she would tell us all of these plans. Misty and the three of us started to walk around the house a little bit and I was wondering what was going on. I was a little bit worried about what it would be like if Misty's parents found out that she was hanging out with three guys. I mean, they probably wouldn't really mind the whole Brad thing, but Sheldon and I were probably going to be a little bit too far and something that she was probably going to start asking us a trillion questions about.

Soon enough, Misty opened her bedroom door and the four of us walked into her bedroom. I wondered why her bedroom was just so... bland in comparison to the rest of the house so far and a house that seems like it is meant to basically create a shit ton of androids or something like that. "This is where I work on my operations of my own." Misty said and then she closed the bedroom door when all four of us were in the room. I knew that she was wanting to show us something and in order to respect her wishes, I decided to remain as quiet as possible.

"So I have been working around a little bit, and I have been looking into the corruption of the city." Misty said and when she had said that, I realized that she was talking in the exact same way as Ken and Todd had been talking when I had known them form earlier. I decided to keep it inside my mind and not say anything since not only did I want to lose the respect of her right away, and besides I was thinking that there was a chance that she was going to act about it in a way that was not related to the destructive ways that Ken and Todd had been looking at it.

"I learned about this crazy fight at a place called Wayside Minnesota back last year and how there was the leading guy who was doing this in a way of trying to bring freedom of the town. I was really proud of the man who had gone out of his way, risking his life, to do something like this. I thought that maybe I could do something like this. I thought that perhaps I could be a hero of my own." Misty said and then I looked down, thinking exactly about the stuff that Todd had done and Ken. At least Ken had not gone into it and I thought that there was a small chance that I could turn back the ideas of Ken. But Misty I had no real idea if I could really turn her choice around, but I thought that it was possible.

"I want to save the city, and I feel like if I work hard enough at it, then maybe I can make a difference. Do you guys know somebody who can do just that?" Misty said and then when she had said that, I shook my head and looked down at my hand and was thinking a way to get the hell out of there.

"Sorry guys, I am really busy right now. I need to do some school work." I said and then I ran out of the house and started to head on back to my house. I needed to talk to Ken, and I thought that maybe I could talk to him a little bit and that maybe Ken and I could talk things out and maybe I could make a deal with him that could get him to change his ways.

I made it back to our house and I ran on down to the basement and I knew right away when I was the only one in the basement and both mom and dad were there, that I had failed and that Ken was doing something. I fell down to my knees and I was going to fail this. I wanted Ken to be so safe that anything I was doing would have been better than doing nothing at all.

I went down to my bed and laid down on it. I just stared at the ceiling in my bedroom not really able to do something for quite a while. I was just thinking about the failure that I had created, the fact that Ken was not safe and that Misty was going to do something like this. There was no need to destroy corruption when the police officers could do it just as easily as they could have, if not twice as easily.

But soon enough, a few hours had passed by, and then that was when Ken walked into the bedroom and he was having a bit of a bloody nose and that there was something on his eyes that showed me that he knew what he did was sort of wrong. i sighed in relief when I knew that Ken was safe and I just said "I'm fucking sorry." And then Ken shook his head and then he went to the bath room to take care of his body and get ready to go to sleep himself. I knew that the conflict between us was just growing and growing and that soon enough, we were going to fail here.

As a few days pass, when Sheldon and I met up, that was when Sheldon was filling me up on everything that had happened in the last few days and the stuff that Misty and I were talking about and stuff like that. I was just not really sure what to think, but I thought that after a few days, and seeing Ken safe, that maybe I really should give him a chance to prove Misty and why she was not all that bad at this after all.

"Misty just really worried me when she was telling us about those plans. I thought that this was going to get her killed or something like that, and I was worried about her. I couldn't even get myself to tell her that, but it was what I was thinking." I explained to Sheldon and it looked like he did agree with me at least a small amount. It felt good to know that at least one other person was able to see where I was coming from with the whole Misty thing. I mean, with all the context I had, it only made sense.

"I bet it can be a dangerous thing I suppose. But if the one guy from Wayside was able to do it, there is no reason on earth to assume that nobody else can do it. I think the Wayside incident will start to get more and more people to follow along in this save the world bullshit and then after a while of all of these movements, there will come a point where it all did indeed work out in the end. I think that this will be the over all outcome of this whole thing." Sheldon said and then after he had said this, I thought about that and thought that maybe there actually was a slight chance that this would lead onto something bigger, and that I just needed to wait for a while for all of these changes to really happen.

"I guess that maybe this is the truth. Maybe I just need to give it some time. I don't really know. I just don't want something to happen to her and then things just go down the shitter. If you know what I mean by that." I told Sheldon as the two of us contemplated this whole thing wondering what the ultimate out come of this whole thing would actually be, if we would see any real outcome at all.

"Maybe once she does a couple of things, Misty will lose interest in it and then she will move onto doing general stuff. That is what I am hoping she does at least. I mean, sure it is her choice what she does at the end of it all, but I just don't want to see any huge problems hit her, if you are able to see where I am coming from." I said to Sheldon, as the guy thought through what I said and tried to decide if he had agreed with me or not. It seemed as if he was sort of on the fence about the whole thing.

"I guess that can be true. I'm just not sure. I think she truly has the right intentions, and that she will go through this idea if she is truly convinced that this is going to be a good idea in the end. She needs to make the choice for herself after all. I just hope that no matter what the choice is, it turns out to be the one that she will be proud of and that she didn't feel like she made any real mistakes doing this. I will support her in her goals though, since I believe that when you have a dream, a desire, you need a crew to truly help you out through it all." Sheldon told me and I thought that he was perhaps doing it because he liked her.

"I just hope that it is the right choice. I think we can agree on that. For you know, avoiding any conflict, let's go on to a different subject that I think we will be more inclined to discuss..." I said and then was thinking about my options. "Well, my brother is going to be leaving middle school in three months and going to high school." I said as Sheldon looked a little bit excited at that.

"That's awesome going to high school is a lot of fun. I hope he really enjoys his time here. Maybe you should let him hang out with us for a bit, so he can get in the grove of what things are like at our school." Sheldon said and I thought that as annoying as it would be, maybe it was not a truly terrible idea.

"I guess he could use it to help sort of get himself situated in the life of a high school student." I decided, thinking that nothing could be horribly wrong about being at Ken's side for a while while he was getting used to high school. Maybe like the first two weeks or something, I can help him out for him to get into it and then I would let him be his own free agent on the whole thing afterwards.

That was the main part of the conversation that I was having with Sheldon at the time, and nothing really all that interesting that had shown up after wards so I am not even going to try and bore you or bother you with this stuff honestly. As Sheldon and I talked about stuff a little bit more, it just eventually turned into stuff like school and the prom dance that was coming along very soon. I was excited to go to prom, even though I was needing to get Susan to agree with me. I felt as if this was the best chance I could have to show Susan just how much I liked her.

Since my prom night was relatively nice this year, I am not going to bother you too much about it, but I guess that I may write about it a little bit. Although this is going to be the last thing that I write about in the 1963-1964 school year, and I will move on to my next school year, which is the junior year and I will be able to help not bore you as much by doing just that. Besides, I have already used like a sixth of my limit on this thing, and I want to fill in the last three years here before losing it.

So three days or so before prom that year, I walked up to Susan and I was getting ready to ask her. I knew what her answer was going to be when I asked her, but I wanted to sort of give her a sort of heads up so it had not really seemed like I had thrown this whole thing at her and stuff when she was not really ready for it. I doubted that she would totally in love with the idea if I just threw it onto her and give her no warning.

"Hey Susan, so since prom is going to be pretty soon, I was wondering if you would want to do that or not as our sort of date for the weekend?" I asked her, and then Susan gave me a shocked look on her face as if she could not believe that I actually had to ask her this question. I gave her a face that just showed that I was doing this for the sake of not making it feel like I was forcing her to do something that perhaps she would not enjoy.

"Of course I want to go to prom with you dummy. There is no reason why I would not want to go to prom with you. We're dating and we have been dating for like seven months now." Susan said and I took a moment to think of it. We were already in April 1964, sorry for all of the condensing and skipping, but I have a story to tell, and we have been dating since like September or October. So yeah, that is like six or seven months now, which was crazy.

"This weekend is going to be awesome." I said and I genuinely meant it. I was really going to enjoy prom night, and I was going to do my best to make Susan enjoy it just as much as I am, if not even more. I have a feeling that if this night goes well, then maybe Susan will let me stay over the whole week end and not even just a couple of hours or just that night. Just the thought of being there all weekend with her was making me feel a lot more excited than before.

After school that day, I was ready to tell my parents the great news. I think that even Ken would be able to be a little bit excited over the news that I was going to tell them. It seemed like Ken was starting to take the whole super hero thing a little bit less seriously. Probably that one night where he tried to do it and I was seeing him walk in the room really somber after wards. From what I guess, that was starting to really change his view on the whole thing.

"Mom, I am going to be going to prom this week end. I need to get a suit going for the dance and everything." I said and when I had said that, my mom seemed very excited. She may have been a little bit old for mom standards, but she was still very much on top of everything and she made it a part of her job to know everything that was going on. I was seeing the look on her face going from a little bit of shock to just pure joy over the fact that I was going to be going on a date with somebody and all of that stuff.

"That is great Sam. We can go to the store tomorrow and get you a new set of clothes for the prom night. I have been wondering when something like this would come along." My mother said and then after she said that, I thought about the suit that I was going to get and everything else that there was even a small chance that I would need. I wondered if she was going to do all of this stuff, or just the suit. I would not blame her at the very least if it was just a suit and nothing else.

"I will tell Susan that you are going to be helping me out here. I think that she will be very happy to know that I am going to be fully prepared this year." I said and then I walked into my bedroom. After I walked inside of my room, I saw Ken looking at me and there was a look on his face that seemed to give off a proud of me impression. As he and I looked at each other for a moment, it seemed like there was a understanding between us.

That net day, my parents decided to do as they had promised me they would do. Like I said, they were getting old, but they still had a little bit of activity in the real world, and they seemed to be knowing exactly what was up to date in the modern sense. I guess they were doing this that way they didn't get me and Ken like a bunch of archaic shit and all of that stuff for school but I don't really know what exactly to say about that stuff. But once we were at the store to get my suit, everything felt so different and I was not really sure if I was actually ready to go on and get the suit for prom after all.

"Just get the one that you think will be best for you." My father said and I thought about him saying that. I was telling myself that he supported me for anything that I would decide to get and that he was not really going to hold me down for this stuff that I could make. So I started to look around the suit isle and I was thinking about the one that I would probably end up liking the most. This was until I found a suit that I felt would not only be what I would like, but a suit that I feel like would be totally perfect for prom.

The suit was a full black one. Black shirt, black over shirt, and then a black pair of pants. I then grabbed the suit in all three pieces and then went to the shoe section and pulled up a pair of black Steve Maddens. The pair of shoes were created in theory by like a ten year old and their father pitched it to a company under his sons name or something like that. Then afterwards, I grabbed a pair of black shoes to totally complete the whole black suit.

Once I had grabbed all the pieces that I would need for my prom suit, I handed them to my father. He considered it for a moment and was wondering the context of all black stuff and then he nodded, thinking that it did make a decent amount of sense. So with that, we bought the suit and brought it home where I was going to get it ready for prom that year, my first of three proms that I would go to.

Prom night was probably a little bit of a under whelm. Susan needed to do a little bit extra getting ready and everything, due to the fact that she was a girl and everything and wanted to put on all the nice make up and stuff. But when she was ready and we were ready to head on out, we were already starting to be like ten to fifteen minutes late. So we didn't even get the full experience of prom or anything, which while I didn't really fully mind, it was still a little bit jarring to get used to the fact that she just gave up on about five to ten percent of the prom night.

I was wondering what Ken was going to be a into when he was in high school, if he was going to go to prom at all or not. I was not really too sure if it was going to be his thing in the first place and I was even less sure of who was actually going to have the balls to accept him to their dance. Like no real offense to the guy or anything, but I am just being real. Even if he and I had the best relationship out of any sibling on planet earth, I would still probably have a little bit of realism put into the whole thing.

Susan and I had a few slow dances and each one of the dances made me feel like I was really understanding what Susan was like as a human being even more than I had already felt like before. She and I really started to get a whole new respect of a bonding by doing this with her, and I felt like this whole dance was just worth it for that.

At the end of the dance, the two of us kissed and we both seemed to really enjoy the kiss even though this was like tenth millionth time that we had done it, so we knew exactly how we both were in kissing styles and all of that stuff. But it still felt like I was in love with her each time that I had done this. Like the two of us really were actually meant to be together, which sounded totally crazy and like I was jumping the gun, but I seriously could not help but feel that way.

The rest of the school year was not really something that I feel the total desire to talk to you about. I mean, it was fun and everything, and Sheldon and I and Brad and I and Misty and I started to have a good friendship forming and everything, but if I explained everything I would run out of space on this journal. So that is not going to be the main thing I will be talking about.

During summer of this year, Ken graduated middle school and he was sent right into high school. For a brief period of time, for the duration of this one summer, it had seemed like he was starting to sort of become a player. It started to look like there was small chance that he could get a girlfriend in early high school, but after a while it seemed like Ken was falling back to his normal every day self when he was in the third week of high school. Ken told me a year or so later that this was because he didn't jerk off a single time that summer and the whole time, he was trying to get work done on his project. I knew what the project was totally, but I didn't tell him in worry of a compensation of any bond that we were getting. But seeing how everybody was going and dating people and this ruining any confidence he had built up, he went back to the way that he was before.

I had no idea that Ken was into that, and finding out that he was sort of was a gross fact, and kind of pisses me off even more when I think about it, but this was sort of his way of showing that he was starting to trust me a little bit more and that he thought that perhaps there was a chance that maybe we could actually be friends after all.

At the end of the summer, I was back in my third year of high school, trying to get things together and I was starting to sort of focus on the greater good of my education, and Susan and I were starting to get near onto a year. It was this year when Misty and Ken started to take the hero thing more seriously. This is the bulk of the story I wanted to tell you all.

So it had all started when Ken was getting ready to transition into high school and Ken looked at me one day about three weeks before the school year started. "Sam, I know that you don't like a lot of my plans to try and be a good guy, and try to take on the super hero roll. I understand that you don't want me to do this. That is fine, that is how you feel on the matter. But in reality, I need to do this. Even if you don't like it, I can't stop what I plan on doing just because you seem like I can't take care of it. But since I am planning on doing this, will you be willing to actually try and help me?" Ken said and I could not believe that this was still on his mind. I thought that he had let it all go now.

"But what if you get hurt? Is there anything that you can actually do about it? I have a feeling that there is nothing that can be done about this if you get yourself hurt, and that you will have nobody to blame besides yourself." I told Ken and he nodded as if he knew that this was the case. I just wondered why he was so focused on this, and why couldn't just understand that this was a terrible idea.

"Sam, you don't have to approve of this. I know that you don't approve at all. But please stop trying to fight this, and just let me to do this. I know that we have our opinions on the matter, but can you just give me some ideas?" Ken said and then I thought this out and I knew that no matter how much I wanted to, there was nothing that I can do that would get him to think that this was a retarded idea.

"Fine, I don't like this, but if you think that this is the only way, I will not fight it. I will give you a couple of ideas, and it is your choice on what you want to do with these ideas. But maybe you can go on and pick up running. I think that if you get yourself into better shape, then perhaps you can maybe keep up in a chase with some of these so called bad guys. Hell for all we know, you might actually be able to pull off a crime victory once or twice. Just do what you want though." I said and then when I said this to Kevin, he seemed to get a look on his face that looked like he thought that this was a good idea.

"Thanks for this suggestion Sam, I will put it to good use." Ken said and then he walked up to his shoes and then put some socks on before he put the shoes over the socks and tied the shoes. "I will be heading down to the high school track and take a jog there. Probably be back in like an hour or something." Ken said and then he headed off.

As Ken was outside of the house, he walked down the pair of stairs just taking those slowly since he was well aware of how bad the stairs actually were. Then when he was totally away from those, he started to pick up his speed and he was heading on down to the track like he had promised he would. He was telling the truth, but he was scared that this was going to turn out in a way that he wasn't planning. He was worried that somebody he knew from middle school was going to find him or something and then try to make fun of him or something like that for not really be in all that great of shape.

Soon enough, he reached the high school track and then he placed his knee on the ground and then his hands on the ground. He was staring out into the distance and he was starting to think that now with his suit made, his studies on the subject done further, and this all on top of it, that he was going to actually pull this off and that he was going to do a good job being the hero that the town had needed him to be.

Ken then started to run and he was going as fast as he was able to get himself to go, and as he was running very fast, he started to lose track of time and he was having to stop after every lap to sort of catch his breath because he was sort of really out of shape. Which each lap, he would take a fifteen second break or something like that to really calm down and he was feeling the sweat coming onto his close and how they were starting to stick onto him. He was really not too sure how people can enjoy something like this when he was barely able to go more than three laps without feeling like his clothes were getting drenched, especially his underwear.

His ball sack area felt very itchy and he was going to scratch it up if he was in a sort of secluded place that nobody was looking around at to see, and he would have probably had a field day with it. But he couldn't think about it too much before he had to start running again and he did that for five laps before he decided that this was just too much. He remembered when he was a young kid and his record was seven laps. he had no idea how the hell he had done that, but it was awesome when he had done so.

After he was done with those five laps, he started to walk on home but as he was walking home, he saw a guy who was playing a guitar and he had a box open and he was playing some really great songs. Ken listened to him for a moment and the guy had so much talent that Ken was honestly a little bit jealous, despite not even wanting to play guitar. But if he wanted to play guitar, then he would have failed miserably and would not have held even a remote candle to this guy.

"How long have you been playing that stuff to be so good?" Ken asked the guy and then he looked up and didn't know what to think. "Just wanted to ask since you were so good at it. Do you have any songs that you like?" Ken waited for a couple of seconds and he was about to head on home before the guy called out to Ken to get his attention again.

"I have been playing ever since I was eleven. That was a year ago." The guy said and Ken looked at this guy. For a twelve year old guy, this dude was very impressive. "Are you wanting to play guitar?"

"No, not really my thing. I was just wondering considering how impressive you are." Ken said and then after Ken said that, the guy placed the guitar in his box and then he was thinking that Ken was a nice guy and hearing him say how good he was really gave him more motivation to keep going. "You should never give up. Who knows, maybe one day, you will become famous over this performance. I would tell them how great you were if you do." Ken said and then the guy didn't know what to say, and now it was sounding a little strange having a guy two years older than him talking this way, as if he was trying to suggest something, which Ken wasn't but this guy didn't know any better.

"My name is Taylor. Nice to meet you." Taylor said and then Ken introduced himself as Ken and they talked for about ten minutes about music and their different tastes in it, and Ken said that if they saw each other again, that he should try and hang out with him and while Taylor was not really sure what to think about this at first, he thought that there was nothing too wrong about it and then he decided to agree with what Ken suggested. With that, Ken started to head on home.

It was three weeks since then and Ken went down to go to the track every four days or so and then when school started, he eventually saw Taylor again on his way from middle school and they decided that they would hang out a little bit as Ken had suggested. Ken had actually forgotten about it until Taylor mentioned it and then when he was told about it, Ken decided that this was a idea that he still wanted to go through with so he walked home with Taylor since that was what he had wanted to do.

"Well, what are you planning on doing after school today? I was just going to be heading on over to my house." Taylor said and then when he had said that, Ken was not too sure what to say. He barely knew what to say, and he barely knew this guy at all. He was thinking that this guy was probably just wanting some attention. "You said that we should hang out again, or is this just not the right time for you to do so?" Taylor said and then Ken thought that there was something that can benefit him from this situation, even if it was going to sort of be at the expense of Taylor.

"Want to go to my house for a little bit? I think that I can show you something, since my house is like two blocks away and maybe you would be interested in what I am working on." Ken said and he was talking about the material in his bedroom and then Taylor thought about that idea a little bit. He knew it probably would not be something his parents would want him to do, but he didn't really think that it was a huge deal.

"How long do you think that it will take me to see your thing that you are wanting to me?" Taylor asked and then when he had asked that, Ken thought about how long it would actually take. In reality, he was not really all that sure. He needed to just give a answer and hope that it was a good enough one for him. Ken said that it would take a half hour or so for all of the stuff to be shown and then once he was done, then Taylor can head home so with that, they began to head on over to Ken's house.

Once Ken and Taylor were inside of the house, Ken and Taylor just went down the stairs because they knew that it was not even worth talking to Ken's parents at all. As they were down the stairs, Ken looked around and he was trying to make sure that nobody was around to see what was going on. He didn't want to get in trouble, but at the same time, he also knew that he was sort of over thinking it. Ken and Taylor sat down on the couch and then Ken was thinking on what he was going to do to start this off, to try and make Taylor not really think that he was insane or something like that.

"Well, have you ever had that feeling that you can go around and do something that you felt like was just so much better than the way that everybody else has done it and seeing nobody do it the way that you want to do it just sort of really pisses you off?" Ken asked Taylor as Taylor had to think about that for a moment, and he was wondering what was going to happen here. He had to really make sure that the answer was the true one since he did want to be honest with himself.

"I guess every once in a while. Mainly in terms of music though, and nothing else really." Taylor said and then Ken nodded. That seemed to be expected, given how Taylor was in the short time that he knew the guy or something like that. Ken was just worried that when he did tell Taylor this plan that Taylor would try and report Ken to the police or something like that. He knew it seemed a little out there, but there was that fear going on at the same time.

"I am wanting to do something like that with the crime rates of this city. I think that maybe I can do a better job than the police. My older brother does not believe in me, but I have some hope. I want to try and become some form of a super hero, and save the city and be the person that the city needs. I know that many people will try and call me insane for wanting this, but I think that this is what I really need to sort of help place me down in history." Ken said and then he opened up the box that he had placed his suit on and then he placed the suit on the table.

"Wow, how long have you been spending making this costume? I think that it can be made better, but at the same time, I do see where the merit of this could lead up if you really take a good care of your path way." Taylor said and he was seeing the white suit with the wings and the bike helmet. The bike helmet was the only part that really did not sell it to him, but he figured that it was done to sort of prevent his face from being seen.

"I spent a few months making the suit. The original suit that I had made, which had the same idea in theory, was destroyed after only one mission. I have been running and training myself to be able to hold my own on a small scale fight ever since then and making this suit so that way I can go out and get ready for any battle coming up." Ken explained to Taylor and then he placed the suit back in the box when Taylor was done looking at it, wondering what Taylor had been thinking.

"I guess that for a fourteen year old, the thing is decently well put together. Better than my stuff, I will give you that." Taylor said and then he thought about that for a moment, thinking about the stuff that he had been shown and what Ken was telling him. "What really is your plan to defeat the crime of this city? Or have you not really thought that out at all? You know, that might be important." Ken was not really wanting to have a twelve year old act like he was knowing better than him on this whole thing, but there was a point to what Taylor was saying, despite him not liking it.

"I have been studying the way that crime works a little bit in the city, and I am thinking that I have been studying enough to know where it is at its highest as well as its lowest at the same time throughout the entire year. I figure that soon enough, with all of the studying that I have done, I can be able to find the places that are at their worst and go for it. In terms of actual fighting, if it gets to that level though, I am not really too sure." Ken had said as Taylor was not really sure what else to say.

"I suppose that if push comes to shove, I will support you. But I just have a bad feeling that this is going to end up pretty badly, and that there is nothing that can be done about it. I hope that you succeed, and I will give you some pieces of advice if I can, but I won't be on the battle field with you." Taylor said and then when he had said that, Ken was remembering the way that he was at Wayside when Todd was doing the same.

"Well, what you are saying is still better support than what I was given from my brother, so I guess that I will just have to go with it." Ken said and then when he had said that, Taylor was able to see why his brother would find this to be a terrible idea, but at the same time, he could sort of see the merit of this idea. Ken was having a crazy idea, but if he really tried on it, then maybe this would be able to actually work.

"I will try my fucking hardest no matter what happens and I will do my best to make sure that whatever I do, it will be for the best sake of the city. That if what everybody should be doing." Ken said and then when he had said that, Taylor did nod and he was sort of going along with the idea for the time being. He didn't fully agree with it, but he did hope that it would actually succeed.

"Well either way, at least you are taking some action and I think we can agree that it is good to try and take action if you feel like there is a mistake in the world." Taylor finished the piece of the conversation as Ken and Taylor thought about it for a bit and what else to say. But the rest of the conversation really did not matter all that much. One of the next pieces that I want to tell of the story is the part when Ken actually tried fighting crime for the first time, at the tenth of January of 1965. By then, him and Taylor were friends for a while and Taylor had learned to trust Ken now.

"I think that I am going to take a chance now. I know that you really don't want me to do this, but I feel as if I had trained enough to actually be ready to take one some of the crimes in the city now." Ken said as he and Taylor were sitting down on a bench about two blocks away from a store. Ken knew that there was a bunch of crime there in the way that people would steal from there a lot and Ken thought that maybe this was a good starting point. "I feel like this is something small enough to work with."

Taylor thought about it. "I guess maybe you have trained enough to maybe try and take it on now. I doubt that you are really going to have a tough time on that." Taylor said and then when he had said that, Ken nodded and then he felt like he was ready to give this a chance. So he opened his box where the suit was and there was barely anybody looking so he went behind the bench and ducked down and then slowly placed his suit on and now he was ready to try and take on the thief that was walking out of the store at that moment. "I will be home soon. If you want to see me again, just come by and take off your stuff there." Then Taylor stood up and started to walk off. Ken started to run down the street and he felt a little silly wearing this and he knew that it was indeed silly, but he couldn't really help it.

After a little while, Ken had run down the street enough with the cars being forced to stop for him and he reached the store and the thief that was at the store and had stolen something that looked like a few energy drink cans. "You were not supposed to take those without paying." Ken said and he was rolling his eyes over how dumb this thing was. He was thinking that he was seriously going to have to revise his starting up line when he was alone again.

"What are you going to do about it? I have a gun." The thief said and then when they had said that, the guy pulled out his gun and then Ken kicked the guys hand and then the gun fell down to the ground and then Ken kicked it down into the sewer and then Ken punched him right in the chest and then the guy fell down to the ground. Wondering if maybe he should take this a step further, Ken decided that there was something that he could probably get away with if he just explained himself out of it.

He sat down on his knees and he grabbed the hand of the robber. "Maybe this will convince you not to go around doing this again. If you feel like you need to do something like this, just work to earn it and pay for it next time." Ken said and then he pushed the guys arm back enough to make the arm snap and then Ken stood up after he had broken the guys arm and then he grabbed the cans and walked into the store.

The guy that Ken had just basically beaten up with no real effort got up and he was holding his right hand with his left arm and then he started to run back on to his house and he was just trying to get himself away from the scene to make sure that nobody knew what he had done as well as the fact that he needed to just give his arm a moment under some cold water before he would bring himself to the hospital.

With that, Ken placed the cans down onto the ground and then Ken said "I saw that this guy was stealing your cans and not paying for them. I took care of that for you." Ken said and then the store owner looked at Ken and was confused at the retarded outfit that he had made but at the same time, he thought that Ken was still sort of the hero of the day and then he grabbed the cans.

"Thank you for doing that. I thought that those were gone forever. What do you call yourself?" The guy asked and Ken was thinking about this and he had never really considered what he was wanting his super hero name to be. "You know, in case you come by again, and I can give you credit for helping me out just now? I don't plan to tell anybody else?" Ken put two random words together and he thought that maybe the words were cool enough that it could work in terms of short term use, although he did plan to give himself a better name in the future.

"I am the Concador." Ken said and then he headed off and then when he headed off, the owner of the store was just staring at the guy who was now gone and he was wondering what the fuck that type of name was. When Ken was out of sight, he started to climb up the fire escape of the building and then after he had done so, he stared out at the ground and he was looking at the city in the first time of his life, in a way of him wanting to go on and protect the city as their hero.

So with that, Ken stared for about twenty to thirty seconds before he started to head off and he was going to meet Taylor up at his house to place himself out of the suit. The path way to his house was only like three blocks or so, which in hindsight was probably not a great idea, but Ken was a teenager making things up as he was going, so it was obvious that a genius plan was not really what he was capable of making. He flew right into Taylor's bedroom and then he took off his suit.

"So you took care of that job?" Taylor asked and then Ken nodded. Ken felt way more proud of this than he knew he probably should have, but he felt like he had over come a great obstacle taking this thing out for the first time and doing his first crime that he stopped. This was proof that Sam might have been wrong and that in reality Ken probably might of had a small chance of handling this whole thing after all.

"I feel awesome now. I just took that guy out right away, and I didn't even need to try all that hard. Just gave him a good punch, and broke his arm." Ken said and then Taylor stared at him as if Ken was insane at that part, but then he nodded thinking that maybe Ken was having a better idea on what he felt like he needed to do, and maybe there was a small hint of merit to this idea after all. "Give it a few more busts, and I think that eventually, I will be the hero of the city."

"I don't know, maybe you do have this in you after all. I guess that I should not have doubted you." Taylor said as he and Ken were staring out of the window of Taylor's room and Ken was wondering what Taylor would do if this turned out to be a terrible idea and if this was going to fuck him up. Ken was hoping that nothing would happen to Taylor regardless of what would happen to him and all of that stuff.

"Thanks for giving some form of support to me this whole way. I promise that sooner or later, I will give you credit for all of the motivational help that you have given me. I will not leave you out." Ken said and then as they were watching the city more and more, Ken was wondering if perhaps he could pull off a second operation that night of if he should try and take it a little bit slowly, and not just jumping from one battle to the next one. Ken decided that no matter how much he had wanted to go out and do some more helping, that he was going to leave it off here.

"I guess that if Sam finds out about what I am doing, I can tell him about the operations that did work out." Ken said and then as he had said that, Taylor was wondering why everything really had to go to Sam eventually. Sam was not really all that big of a deal even. He was just sort of a person that happened to be related to Ken and nothing else really. As Ken and Taylor were getting ready to just hang out for the rest of the day, there was more stuff going on with Misty, Sam, Brad and Sheldon.

"I think that Ken is just hanging out with one of his friends tonight. He seemed to have a actual sense of telling the truth on his face when he was saying that he had no plans to really do anything too crazy. A part of me wants to believe that he is telling the truth, but at the same time, knowing what he has been wanting to do this whole time, I think that he might still be lying to me about the whole thing." I was saying to Misty as she was looking in my direction and she was thinking about what I was saying. She seemed to be considering how she can use Ken to her advantage.

"I think that Ken can actually prove to be really useful. You should tell him about me. Maybe if he learns about my plans, then the two of us can help each other out." Misty said and then I looked at her. I was thinking that this was a terrible idea and that if Misty got to start to know Ken, then they would be starting to make a bunch of plots with each other that seem like they would get one of them, if not both of them killed by the end of the school year. I knew that I was either looking at a dead lady or a dead dude, either way I was hating this.

"Yeah I will think about it." I said and then I started to head on out and I was going home. I knew that Ken was probably going to want me to tell him about Misty and all of that stuff and everything, but I don't really think that anything could would come out of it if I tell him and if Misty doesn't know that I didn't tell him then maybe soon enough she would drop the subject.

Soon enough, I walked into our house and I saw that Ken was just sort of lying down on his bed. I wondered if he did even hang out with Taylor at all or if something happened and these plans were thrown away. I had a feeling that maybe he had done something and then he decided to come home at a certain time to make sure that maybe nobody would really start to wonder what he was doing in his side time. It was smart of a move, but it was still a little bit annoying.

"Did you have a good time hanging out with Taylor?" I asked and then Ken looked up at me. He just slowly nodded twice and then when he had said that, I just went to my bed and then I started to get ready to go to bed. Ken and I were sort of just agreeing not to say anything since we both knew that if we told each other anything, then the entire situation that the two of us were in would just go down to the shitter and neither one of us wanted that.

Chapter Text

Chapter 13: The Journal Part 2

Later on though, when Ken was just in school and he had done a couple of operations to save the town and everything, people were now starting to talk about him a little bit. Well, not really Ken in particular as much as the person that Ken was playing as, the Concador. "Do you guys know who he is? People are saying that he is on the younger side of the spectrum." One student would say and everybody was wondering if he was indeed a person who was actually going to school with them or if it was just a person who was in college and as a result was still considered young.

"I wonder if they are even a dude at all. I wonder if they are actually a woman." Another student would say and Ken was trying really hard to not say anything since it was really tempting him to say what he was, and he knew that even if he did say it, nobody would believe him. But at the same time, he was worried that if he did say something, then Sam would pick up on it and then there would be the rift between them grow even larger than it already was by that point in time, and Ken was not really sure if he was willing to deal with that.

One day, there was so much attention to it, that the teacher had to try and get them to calm down. This was when Ken had actually shown up once and actually helped stop a full on back heist by knocking down some of the people there as well as helping the police bring the safe back. There was a compromise that Ken made with the police as a result of him helping them out. They said that they would not try to arrest him this once for all of the problems he had created, but if he continued down this road, they would start to take some major actions. Ken didn't really believe they would do anything once they realized that he was the son of one of the workers at the office.

That was when I was starting to pick up on what Ken was doing and while at first I was willing to let it go, I was ready to confront him about it this time. I was just waiting for him to come on home and when he would be home, that was when I was going to ask him all of the details about it.

Ken was inside of his house and he looked around to make sure that nobody was seeing what he was doing but I was sitting there and he looked forward and then he started to get a really scared look on his face since he knew what was happening and what I was going to say. "I know that you are probably really mad, but remember when you promised me that you would not get on my case over it?" Ken asked and I thought that he didn't understand still.

"Look Ken, I get that you might have had some hint of a successful gig with this whole thing here and there, and that you might of actually helped some people out, but ask yourself this one question. Are you really helping yourself out?" I asked and then that was when Ken was stopping what he was going to say mid sentence and then he had to think about it. "If you are not helping yourself out and you are just blindly following the loose idea of full justice, then nothing can truly be done and nothing will really be done for you..."

Ken actually seemed to have considered what I had said there, and then he looked up at me and he was having a look of guilt. "I guess I have not really been helping myself out all that much to be honest. But I need to do something. I gave myself a task, and I will follow through with it. I will fight with my ambitions in mind until I get to the end of the road, and that means that if I can't be able to help myself, then that will be the price that I will have to pay I suppose." Ken said and then after he had told me that, I shook my head and then I went to my bed.

"Just know one thing. When your body ends up being found, I will not blame anybody besides you for what you done. Try and think about what you are putting our parents into. Even if you don't care for yourself or for me at all, at least try and care for our parents." After that, I went on and was getting ready to go on to sleep. Ken went to the mirror and stared at the mirror for a moment.

As he was staring at himself in the mirror, he was thinking about exactly what I had told him. He was thinking about what he was putting his parents through. But then he remembered what he would be putting the town through if he didn't follow through with his efforts so he shook his head again and then he started to walk off. He convinced himself that he needed to do this and that this was the best way to have him go down in history as the one who came out on top in a way. But despite that, he did need to get some rest, so he was going to resign himself that night and try and sleep for the night.

The next day Ken did one of the things that even I would have to admit he needed to do in his hero journey and that if he wasn't there to do it, then things would have turned out even worse than they already did and that the police could not have taken care of it. This was in later April of 1965, so about three months after he became a hero and people had been well aware of him by now.

It was all starting when Kens class was taking a trip down to a national park near by where we lived. On the way to the national park, the class was heading by a really familiar place Ken never thought he would have to return to for the rest of his life. That place being Wayside school. As Ken was getting ready to go on that trip down to Wayside school, Ken was sort of wondering if this was something that he would really want to do, or if this was just something that was going to just bring back a lot of rough memories. This was when I knew that I had to step up and get into the older brother role since I knew that Ken really needed me on this case, as much as I was dreading doing something like this.

"Ken, just think of it this way. you will be able to get to see a lot of your friends again. That alone really should be making this whole thing worth while. Just go in, and if your school allows you to hang out with your friends at all, then go in and just talk maybe see Todd, Maurecia, Myron and Dana and all that stuff again. Plus, if for nothing else, you can sort of resolve a lot of the unanswered questions that you have with Jenny. If you ask me, I say you really should go." I told Ken and then when he had heard my reasoning for it, he nodded and thanked me.

"I will be going. Thank you for giving me some motivation to do this." Ken said and then when he had said that, he put on his shoes and then he started to head right out the door to go on and catch the bus. But as he was doing so, he turned towards me and smiled. "Sometimes, I forget why we have so much conflict between us. You really do have your moments." Ken said and then he headed right out of the house to go on and get ready to have what he had hoped would be a really great trip.

It took Ken about ten minutes to get to the high school since he lived so close to it and then he went right in the bus after he sat by Taylor. "I was not originally going to go, since Wayside was where I went to school before and I was not really sure if I wanted to go by there again, but I am ready to take it on." I said to Taylor and he seemed glad that I decided to do this.

"Good, I was not really excited for how boring it would have been if you were not there." Taylor said and then with that, the bus went off and they were all on their way to Wayside. By now, the school was on its second year of rebuilding and for the most part, it was slowly getting there. Maybe another year or two to go before it was all done.

"So what was Wayside like back when you were a student there?" Taylor asked Ken and that was sort of when Ken was trying to decide for himself if he had wanted to let Taylor know more of if this was just something he wanted to keep to himself. There was only so much he could do to avoid it after all, and besides they were going to be there soon anyways and Taylor was most likely going to learn of how Ken was like at Wayside very soon anyways, so he figured he might as well just tell the truth and let Taylor decide for himself if Ken was on the right side of the deal on this matter.

"Wayside was one of the greatest places I went to, and for the two years that I was there, my life really did improve and I felt like nothing could go wrong. But it was really the end of the year that decided to make me leave the place. It was also when I decided deep down that I wanted to do something better with my life, and not just sort of be letting it come to a negative side affect in many ways." Ken said and Taylor wondered what was really so bad about the end of that year.

"I mean, there was this girl that I really liked. I felt like if I had the balls to speak up to her sooner, then maybe she and I would have had a relationship that I would actually be proud of, but I was scared and I choked, and besides she liked the man that I would call to be my best Wayside friend at the time more anyways, and that did create some form of a rift between us since I wanted to be there for her, and she clearly did not want the same from me." Ken said and then Taylor nodded. He knew that this must have been rough and it did sort of help him see where Ken was actually coming from in a way.

"Yeah, I never really thought of how that could be. That must have been really rough, to know that the girl that you like choose somebody else. Were you and him still friends afterwards?" Taylor asked and Ken nodded.

"Yes we were, and to some extent I would say we still are, but at the same time, it is odd how I would fall on the sword for the guy when I knew that in the end, it was not going to win me any points from that girl. She had made her choice, and I was just going to have to respect that." Ken said and then after he said that, the two of them remained silent and talked about tiny Wayside adventures that I don't really want to go into for the sake of brevity.

As Taylor and Ken were at the front of the school, Ken was telling himself to just relax and not worry about what was coming on up at any second. After all it would be just one day he would be there and then he can really try to move on his life again. After all this was nearly two years ago and he did sort of need to put it in the past. That was one of the many reasons I supported him going on this trip in the first place. I felt as if this would truly change his perception on the whole thing.

Ken took a couple if moments to really look around the place to see what was different about the place now that it had been two years since he even last stepped foot in the place. He had just hoped it looked as great as he remembered it looking. It did for the most part. Minus a couple if paint differences they decided to put in as a way to show their so called new and improved style of things. Ken wondered how many of these students from before would even be there now. If Todd was still there he would have been there longer than Ken ever would have been.

"I seriously can not believe that this place really is thirty stories high. It just is a little crazy to imagine. You would feel like people would just be sort of saying that for dramatic effect more than anything else and not because they are telling the truth." Taylor said as he was showing his bewilderment at the whole was thinking about how that was what they all say when they step foot in the school for the first time. Even Ken was one of those people who always had to remind himself of this fact every once in a while. But before Ken was allowed to go down memory lane Ken saw the person who had changed his life forever back when he had met him back three years ago on the first day of seventh grade.

"Hey Todd how have you been lately? I guess my school is coming here for the next couple if hours on our trip. I never thought I would get to see this place again with my own eyes. It really is kind of a crazy sight to behold." Ken Todd when Todd was now paying a littlebit more attention to him and not on the people he was casually talking with.

"I have been doing great Kevin. I really have enjoyed the time at wayside. I guess that should not be too big of a shock though. Maurecia and I are going out right now. Took a bit longer than most people most likely had expected. Dana and I are friends again like how we should have been. My to even is starting to not be so bad anymore. Most likely due to how he is taking the whole class president thing serious now, which is sort of turning around my original thoughts on the guy." Todd said and Kevin thought that this was all great. As if it wasn't all that bad that he left them behind at wayside after all.

"Do you mind if my friend Taylor and I hang with you for a bit now that we are here? If not, then we can just leave you alone and not bother you anymore..." Ken said and he was hoping Todd would not feel as if Ken was getting in his way and all that. He did not want the reunion between the two to have a bittersweet feeling or anything like that to it.

Todd accepted Ken's offer and with that he and Taylor started to follow Todd through the school a bit. Ken was hoping the school would be mostly back to where it was back in the day when he was there. He did not want to be there and feel like he was walking in some form of alien place if that made any sense. The three of then were on the fourth floor and the three of them were talking about how the last two years have been before Ken really began to notice even a single thing that was totally different than what it has been a bit earlier when he was a student.

"My life has been pretty calm after you left. I decided to give up on all form of fighting crime as I felt like it was just not my thing anymore and I did not want to deal with any of the negatives of it. Besides it seemed like after we dealedcwith closing that strange gate that the monsters started to finally go away so I felt no real need to keep it up anymore. Once I did that it seems as if Dana was able to trust me once more to not go crazy and bring a huge fight to the town anymore." Todd said as Taylor was having no real idea what was going on and what the duck Todd had been talking about. It seemed really fucking odd and he was not sure if he wanted to keep up.

"That really is great that things are going so well for you. I do wish I was still in wayside. Seems as if due to the lack of monsters that perhaps it would have been better for Mr to stay here and see how things could have gotten better ad time had gone on." Ken said and then something that confused him shower up.

It was a guy with what had looked to be no face staring at the three of them from across the hallway. All three of them looked arounnd to see what this was and Ken stopped what he was doing. "We need to go outside. That will help keep them away from here." Ken said and told Todd and Taylor to keep hanging out and to keep people distracted as Ken began to head down outside and the thing was following him to do so.

Most people never had or would have any idea how bold it was for Ken to decide to take that thing in all on his own and it did help him even in some form if indirect way to be the real hero that he so badly desired himself to be when he had first began this whole hero nonsense. But when he was outside he waited for the monster to come out and when it did Ken took something out of his back pack I had no idea he had but it was probably smart for him to do so. He had a large eighteen inch blade he was holding and the students wondered what Ken was doing as the monster started to get closer to him.

The monster started to change how their arms looked to make them appear to be claws and they started to get on their way to Ken who swung the blade on the monsters chest when it got relatively close to him. While it did not kill the monster, it did make them sort of slow down for a bit to capture what had just happened. Ken knew that if he lost there would be no wayside left and that this truly had to be done if he wanted to keep his former school intact while not making construction take a huge step back as well.

The monster grabbed Ken and then after they grabbed him just picked him up and then threw him down to the ground. Ken felt like he could feel his skull crush a little bit when this happened and he stood up trying to take control over what was going on. He grabbed his knife again and he was ready to try and stay down the monster again or something like that in which could make the monster gave to take it back for a bit and that was what Ken was sort of indirectly trying to do at the same time as all of this was going down.

Hen jumped up and that was meant to be his way of distracting the monster of what he was doing and make them feel disoriented over what was going on. But Ken jumped down and then he stabbed the monster in the chest. As he did so he saw the monster laugh a bit and then Taylor and Todd started to watch what he was doing and Ken was ready destroy the monster under any means that he had to or knew that he could do it under.

After the monster laughed for a bit they brought their fists out and started to punch Ken a couple of times and each time Ken felt like he was having the God damn world hit him and punch him back to reality. Eventually Ken was able to pull the knife out of the monster and then he stabbed the monster right in the chest a second time before pulling it out again and then slicing the hand off of one of the monsters. The hand hit the ground and turned into dust as quite a few if Ken's classmates watched to see what Ken was doing and if they could be able to help out at all. Taylor knew nothing about monsters but he thought that if he played the cards right he could still be able to help Ken out here.

The monster kicked Ken around several times and with each kick it felt more and more like he was just being beaten down to a miserable pulp. As this was going on though Ken was reminding himself of what was going on as well as who needed him then and there and that thought set truly did keep him going and not like he was losing every small thing that he had trained and fought for on his time of training and working on this whole the Concador persona. Todd felt awful for this since if he never gone to wayside he would have never gotten the ball that would have opened the gate to the monstercs which would have never given the man in the purple jacket reason to come to wayside at all.

Ken turned around and cut a huge mark on the back of the monster and he was now at the point the monster was moments away from death.

By now the blade Ken had been using was very covered in blood and Ken knew there was no real way to get the blood off of his blade or any of that stuff, but it really did not matter all that much since he knew the police would not come to him soon since his dad was a officer.

Then the monster started to scratch in Jen's direction for a bit but Ken was very much on top of trying to take that thing down that he did not let it even get close to him in any way.

Before the monster could truly take Ken down Ken stabbed the monster right in the neck area and the monster began to bleed a bit and the with that Ken dragged the blade out very slowly to make sure that the monster was truly dead and then the monster exploded and then Ken out the knife back in his pocket and then he slowly walked back to wayside as people were trying to figure out what they had just seen.

As Ken was in front of Todd and Taylor looked up at the school and took a deep breath As he smiled knowing by his time he did do his job and he could be able to hang with Todd again. Now they talked on school and how Maurecia was doing and hearing Todd speak like this made Ken happy. The last thing I will talk about on Ken and his side of the year is his meeting with Jenny and then I will move on to talk about Misty and her side of the year.

Ken was walking down the hall thinking if the battle he had just took part of. Honestly, he was not too sure how to feel knowing that monsters were still real and that he had not actually saved the school after all. It made him really question himself and all of the work he had done while he was at wayside. But before he could feel that way anymore, he saw the one person that gave him a incomplete feeling about the school, and he was ready to try and clear things up a but with her, to see if they were in good terms. "I will be back in a moment, just got some things to take care." Ken said as he walked in her direction.

"Jenny, I thought I would never be able to see you again. I'm glad I found you. How have things been at wayside lately?" Ken placed his hand behind his head, trying to be able to remain even a little but calm on this whole business. Jenny had a huge mix of emotions seeing Ken right there in front of her. On one end, she was glad, but she was also confused. Despite that, she was more wondering why he was not able to get over it after two years if this whole rejection thing being just how things were. Jenny dud that when Todd choose Maurecia. Todd made his choice and while Jenny thought it was sad, she was not going to pursue a matter she knew was just going to lead to things being even worse between them.

"Kevin, it is so good to see you. I hope that you new school gas treated you well so far. It was kind of hard seeing you move away. Like such a huge part of our normal life was gone when you moved away. Todd took it the hardest. Seems like you two really were good friends." Jenny said as Ken was wondering if the two can hang out while catching up with each other.

"Things have been okay. I slowly started to go on and follow Todd's foot steps on how to be a good man and a hero. He really changed how I looked at life, and I will try and follow the same influence that he has gone down." Ken said hoping that Jenny would take no real thought to it or that hell she would even admire it to some extent.

"I guess that you might not be the weak coward you used to be anymore if what you say is true. Which I really hope it is. I may not have liked all of the methods, but your plans and Todd's were still valid. I just wished Todd would see how much he means to everybody." Jenny said, letting her feelings for Todd come out just for this moment. Ken thought about that and how despite everything going for Todd, maybe even still there were some things he could be able to pick up on.

"I feel like a lot of the time though, that I am extremely in over my head. I guess that should be the natural feeling. After all, I am trying to save the city and a bunch of random stuff that most normal people would consider to be totally insane. I feel like maybe people are right and that I need to just take a break, relax, and sit down to think about what my true future is going to be. I mean, I am going to have one right? There is no way that at my younger age, that I would not have one." Ken said, suddenly aware of his own mortality at that very short moment he was having with Jenny.

"I don't really think that you need to worry about your future. Chances are you are not going to keep this up for more than two to three years from now. Go ahead and do this, if you feel that it is the right thing to do. Then when the dust settles, you can go on and start to live a life that people should actually be normally living. I think that once you graduate high school, you can worry about it, but until then, just go ahead and do this job of yours." Jenny said to Ken as he considered that sort of middle ground deal she was making.

"I guess that maybe you have put at least a little bit of thought into it. I am guessing it is because of Todd and the off chance that he might start to pick this habit of life up again." Ken said as he looked at Jenny and saw that she was slowly nodding at that assumption. "What do you like about him so much anyway? I am not judging you, I am just curious to see your side of it. I was jealous back then of it, but not anymore. Now I am just unsure what to think."

"He just seems to have a mind set of doing what is best for everybody. He saved my life, Dana's, Myron's, all of ours. When he saved mine though, I was able to really see what Maurecia saw in him. I thought he was just a general nice guy up until then. Nothing more, but nothing less. But then when he did that to me, and when he did so with little to no thought on the reward or anything, that was when it had all changed for me, and I started to very much respect him and everything he tried to fight for. If you see what I mean there." Jenny said and then Ken nodded at that, thinking if that was where he was or not.

"I wish I was half as good and caring as Todd. I will have to concede the fight there. He really does have a sort of true patriot sense of himself. I guess if I was even half of him on that regard, then maybe I would have had a chance of winning you... Not that it even remotely matters anymore though, as you clearly picked between the two of us." Ken sighed as he stared outside to think of the lost chance he had with Jenny.

"I guess that could have been the case. No point in dwelling about the past now though. You need to move on, and I have a feeling that you are sort of starting to see that. Which I am able to really be thankful for. The fact that you are seeing where the problem now lies, and that you are trying even a little to reverse that." Jenny said and then Ken nodded to that one. He was behind the times, but he was getting there slowly.

"I guess this may be where it ends with us. I think that maybe we are going to have to move on, and place this all behind us. In which case, thank you for speaking with me this time at all. Thank you for giving me a chance to talk with you once again, even if it was just for a little bit. It was what I really needed to move on." Ken said and then he and Jenny shook hands one final time as Ken started to head off and he was getting back to Taylor and Todd before he would continue his trip on with the school.

"That was what I needed." Ken said as he looked at Taylor and as he was looking at Taylor, his friend was able to understand what he meant and where he was going with that. Taylor smiled when Ken said that, proud that his friend was starting to move up in his life and was slowly becoming a man with a life. A man with a goal. A man with a purpose. A real human being in a way.

Todd, Taylor, and Ken talked for a bit longer until the three of them reached the first floor again, after they were done doing a full trip up the school and a full trip down the school. the three of them spent about two and a half hours doing so, catching up on life and filling Taylor in on a very short version of the school year. Once he was given the extremely short version of the school year Ken and Todd had together at Wayside, he sort of understood where Ken was coming from on a few things, but a lot of answers still needed to be give, but Ken said he would let Taylor read his notebook shall more questions come up soon.

"I have a feeling we will see each other again very soon Todd." Ken said, and he was proven to be right about them seeing each other again in about five years from then. But Ken and Taylor went to the school bus and headed off and continued their legacy in their way. Now I will be talking about Misty and her side of the school year.

Misty's side of the year and what she was up to all started to really go down soon after the year had started. Unlike Ken, who at least waited to about half way through the year to start his plan, Misty thought it was a fucking ten out of ten idea to do it right off the bat, which was even worse than Ken in so many ways that I could not even begin to ponder it. I was just sort of thinking I was lucky Ken did not know about Misty or else that would have made it all a thousand times worse to really handle. It was already bad enough what they were doing to not make the double influence even worse than it already would have been.

Despite the way Misty wanted to handle the plan being even worse than Ken, I would admit I felt like she was a little bit more ready than Ken, mainly for the way she had been developed a long the way. Sheldon and I hung out, it was on the early end of junior year. Which was the freshmen year for Ken. As Sheldon and I were hanging out, he seemed to be focused on something else entirely, and o had known him for about a year at this point, so I sort of knew what his cues were by that point in time. "What is really bothering you right now? Seems like you need to talk about something right now." I said Sheldon brought himself to reality, remembering that I could talk with him about Misty and Brad.

"It's about Misty. She is being really serious about her save the city idea. It also seems like she likes Brad more than me. I think they have a bit of a thing going on. But it is the next part that gets me. So her mother, if I even want to call it that, talked with Brad and I when she was gone. Turns out she was one of the androids she created. Which makes her really strong and easily able to do as she wishes. But her mom said in order to get the best product possible, she created a really terrible set back as a result. Misty only has one single seven year life span. Which she said was the longest one yet. The other androids only had four years so far, and before it was just one. She says with each model, she plans to increase the life span by three years." Sheldon said, and I looked at him shocked.

"She seemed so real. How many years does she still have? How many models does she make for each version?" I asked the basic questions I had.

"She says she makes four versions of each model. Misty was the first in the seven year she range, her first female version, and she is on the second version of this third model. She says it will be finished in one year. Misty has twenty one months left, so basically two years." Sheldon said and Brad over heard this as he was walking by and came to talk to us about this as well.

"I think when I am alone with her mother again, I am going to try and go on to extend Misty's life a little bit longer. I don't know how well it will turn out, but I don't want to keep trying to form a relationship with a person I know is going to die very soon. I can't believe that she forced Misty to have a bunch of fake memories that she created and implanted to make it pretend like she was actually born and had a life when none,of the stuff until these last five years were real at all." Brad thought on what it must have been like to have your whole life be fake.

"I truly am more curious to know why she is even making androids in the first place. I feel like it would just make more sense to just have a natural child every three to four years if you wanted to avoid being a horrible human being who is just trying to get power and nothing else. It is very obvious she only cares for power. But you can have power over your children when you gave some, so why not do something like that and male it more genuine than making a fake human for all intents and purposes?" I gave my piece on the whole situation, thinking of just the sheer amount of failure she truly was setting up for by doing this.

"I don't know how to feel. I still really like Misty and she is an amazing person, but what her mother plans to do is truly insane, and I am truly broken knowing musty us bound to die soon and that I can't do anything about it. I can try and maybe it can by some hope work, but I am not really too sure though." Sheldon was having his hand on the car wheel, since we were now in his car and he was getting ready for a drive around the nearly metal city.

"Misty is still an amazing person, no matter what may come up. No matter what she makes of this or what she dies shall she learn the truth, she has done so many great things in her first five years I doubt her last two years will really ruin it at all." Brad clearly was hoping Misty would like hi enough to pursue a relationship with him, but he clearly was not sure what to do to get that to happen.

"I guess if she is not going to live much longer anyways, there is no point on stopping her from doing as she wants with being a hero. You know to give the last twenty one months some feeling and meaning." I said as I was sort of slowly warming up to her trying the whole hero gig.

"I guess if I had to choose, then I suppose I would rather have a android do all this stuff instead of a normal human. Even if it is a android I do care about. Kind of crazy though, that we ourselves know one. Usually people just talk about them but since there are so few here, knowing even one is kind of a big deal. I do wonder if they feel and work on the same level that humans do, and if so, what really does give them the edge over normal humans. At this rate, we might see monsters or aliens in our life time. That would be one he'll if a thing to witness." Sheldon said and I guess I can sort of see the appeal to getting to know a personal android. Though I do wonder what Sheldon would have said about monsters if he saw the whole wayside thing. I doubt he would be so lose on what be would be saying then.

"Maybe when Misty will due soon, we can tell her the truth of what is going on. Maybe she can herself try and change what her fate is by talking with her creator about all this. I just hope she would listen to Misty of all people." I said my final piece on the matter.

"As do all three of us have that hope. Maybe when Misty only has a very small amount of time left, like only a month or so, then perhaps we can give her the reveal and she can get her mother to try and extend her life by at least a couple of years." Sheldon said his big piece on the subject as he was driving down the very busy road that was so damn loud nobody could gear or care what we were even saying.

"I wish that Misty and I can enjoy the final about two years of her life and make every single minute worth it. Maybe this is sort of a wake up call for us to just go on and enjoy what is given to us, and not what may be the case. Or maybe this is just all for a bit of sick entertainment." Brad seemed off in the distance as he was talking, clearly trying to pretend that none of this bothered him and that he could take it like a champ. Truth was though, I was very worried about him and I was worried of what he could try to do with these facts in mind.

We were driving down and sort of thinking about how things would be with Misty now with our knowledge, and I was worried what Ken would do, when Misty was having her first hero of the day moment where she was saving the city, a little bit in the same way Ken would later on, but in a slightly less violent and destroy the fucking city type of way.

Misty was going around the streets in the city, just looking for any possible sign of somebody being in trouble she can help out with. Besides, everybody was acting really odd around her and she was quite frankly a little bit tired of it all. She wanted to be looked at as normal, but nobody and not even her friends could be able to give that which was making her feel like nobody actually liked her. It was a silly fear and one she probably didn't need, but it was hard not to feel that way at all. But she knew she would have her chance to be a hero soon when she saw that there was a party in town hosted by one of her class mates. She decided she would go and attend the party for a bit to see what it was like.

As Misty was at the front door to the house of the party, the person who threw the thing saw Misty and he was totally confused what she was doing there when nobody had invited her in the first place. "This was not meant to happen, nobody invited you to come here. But since you are here, stay here and just enjoy your time, I guess." The guy who was throwing the party said as he was wondering what this freak girl, as he thought of her, would do coming up. He was worried she was going to ruin his part he worked so hard for. He was going to watch her very carefully to make sure she did not do anything he was worried she would pull off.

Misty was looking around the front room of this party hall and she was already feeling left out. She was wishing she would have hung out with Brad and Sheldon instead. They did show signs of caring, even if on moments they would be a little bit distant. But it was not like they just did not care at all, as she would never accuse them of being like that. Then she found a person she also knew from school and went their way.

"Were you invited to the party or not? I was not invited, I just came along when I saw what was going on here. I am going to get so wasted." This person and Misty sort of thought of the possible appeal to getting wasted as the other person started to walk to the drinking table and filled up their cup with some three percent alcohol.

Misty decided to go on and try it out. She just hoped Brad would not learn of this. Sheldon never seemed to mind it, but Brad would have a heart attack if he knew Misty had been drinking again. This would not be the first round of them getting into fights about it, and it was usually the main times the two of them would look like they were going to lose some form of their friendship.

"Do you like to drink a lot? I personally am a fan of it. Just taking a shot and then sort of losing track where you are or what you are doing. It is pretty fun." Misty said as sheets slowly convincing herself that one drink was not going to really be all that big of a deal and that as long as she didn't get drunk or start to abuse what she was doing, then it really would not actually be all that big of a deal. Besides, all she would have to so is just not tell Brad what she was doing, and she would be fine.

One drink was not enough to get her drunk, and she seemed to think that as long as she didn't get drunk, then her drinking was not really going to be all that big of a deal. She sat down and she was watching the other people have the party of their lives. The person she had talked with earlier already basically pretended like they never even saw her, so any faint chance of making friends here was gone, which was not all that big of a deal. She still did have Sheldon after all, and she knew damn well Sheldon would not comment or treat her like carp for doing something so fucking simple like drinking at a party. Despite him not saying so out loud, Misty was sort of sure that Sheldon did drink a little off on his side lines.

She really did think Sheldon was a nice bloke. At a lot of times she would have to wonder if she should choose Brad or Sheldon, and she did have good reasons for both. She wasn't really into Sam all that much, probably thinking I had too much of a no fun allowed keep you all safe attitude. I do see where that logic came from, and it was all Jen's fault. He sort of ruins any possible nice thing I would be willing to let the gang have with his constant getting into shit.

Misty was stopping herself from thinking more into this when she saw something on the back yard of the party house. A sight that would not only increase her stance as a hero, but she would later see could help see her learn more of what she was. But she never thought of that, and this up coming event was the first thing that made her start to feel a bit differently about the whole fucking thing.

Misty walked out of the house to the back yard not being seen by a single person on the way. As she was outside, she saw something that looked like a metal bird with a plague mask from back in the day as well as a black suit and Misty was wondering who this person was. The man held out his hand and a white beam was ready to shot out of him. Misty jumped on him and the he pushed her back as they flew up and away from there. Misty in anger stomped her foot on the ground but as she did so she caused a strange feeling, her starting to get ready to fly for the first time. She had a flame in both her feet and she was flying up as she looked down at the party, thinking of Brad as she was ready to fight her first target.

The two beings kept flying onward until it was at a point where they landed on top of some train tracks that were not being used that were a hundred feet in the air. Misty stared at the guy with the plague mask on. Under almost every other case, she she gave thought that this was the funniest thing ever, but given how intense this was, even she could not get herself to laugh at it all that much. "I guess you don't really know the truth. I almost pity you for that, but maybe you will start to see the truth now. But for now, I guess that none of this matters." The guy in the plague mask said and then Misty ran towards him and tried to punch him in the face but he swatted her down and then Misty screamed.

"You may think those memories are yours, but for good sake they are not. You are nothing, and you will always be that way, no matter how much you desire to change have tried to take away from me the one thing that truly matters." Misty stood up and kicked the guy in the plague mask in the chest but he got up again with no shout out to what happened.

"My memories are mine, and I have lived out my life to the best I can." Misty said as the man in the plague mask picked up Misty and started to walk her to the edge of the tracks.

"They will be yours only as long as you lie to yourself and you think you can make people feel like you are real. But soon enough you will see how false it is, and everything you will have done will be gone forever. Your entire life will be worthless. Nobody will remember you for who you were like, and it will be like you never existed in the first place. Keep pretending you are real, and soon enough they might even believe you." The guy with the plague mask said and dropped Misty as she screamed but then slowly remembered what happened earlier. She forced the fire to cone back and she flew all the way back to her room, tired and not sure what to think.

Misty was in her room, thinking that this guy was just forcing her to not be a hero and that he was a liar. She was real, she had to be. But the rocket thing was a bit odd, she had to admit. She will still be a hero, to prove him wrong and that she was real.

After that encounter with the guy in the plague mask, Misty decided that she needed to just talk with somebody about it. She had kept it to herself for about eight days or so, just pretending like her life was normal and that nothing had happened. But after eight days of waiting and trying to lie about it to herself, she just could not take it anymore. She then decided that despite the fact that we were not really super close, that maybe I was the best person to talk to this time just because of the fact that we sort of had a lower level of self disclosure with each other, and for some reason she was able to trust me knowing that.

"So Sam, I know that out of the three of you guys, that I know you the least. I know that you are worried about my plans and that you excessively oppose to all of them, but that is not what really matters now. I have a strange situation going on with myself, and I just need to talk to somebody about it. But in the extremely short version, I will just say that maybe you were right about this and that I was really in on over my head." Misty said to me as I took a deep breath and sat down next to her on her bed, since she had asked me to come talk with her at her house for some fucking strange reason.

"What exactly did you do that you feel like was stepping over the line?" I asked, as I was thinking about it and I was picking up the pieces and it was really worrying me that she was going through with it. Now it was only a matter of time before Ken went through his head on this whole damn thing.

"Well, I thought I was indeed ready to take on the world. I thought that I was ready to do something, and be the hero of the day. I thought that it was just going to be a easy ride from start to finish. One that I didn't even need to think about the possible out comes as I felt like I had already gotten them all figured out." Misty said and this was the first time I had ever seen her really start to show a full amount of regret to something that she was doing. It was honestly really hard to believe the whole android thing as she had done such a great job showing her emotions and how she truly felt about this subject. I was feeling like she really needed the help that I can give her, and that being here was only a first step to the whole thing.

"Misty, did something happen that change how you are feeling about this? If there is, what was it? I have never seen you look this uncertain about your plan before." I said as I started to drag myself a little bit closer to her, to try and comfort her more, but I was afraid that she might look at it the wrong way. But it was a risk that I would have to take, and there was quite frankly nothing that I can do about it at that moment.

"I saw this man earlier. He was telling me about how my memories weren't really mine, and that I am living in a fake reality. I told him that he was lying and that I have seen was real, and that he was just trying to fuck with me. I felt like that was what I could say, since everything that has happened in my life was from me, and that I truly am my own person. But the way that he was saying it, the level of his tone, it makes me think that maybe he is right and that I am truly living in a world that I think is real, and that I want to be real, but now that I see is just not real." Misty said as I was sort of thinking to myself what I should say, and if I should tell her the truth or pretend that I am just as blind to the situation as her. I figured that maybe that would be the best way out of this one, since she was clearly in a very rough place right now.

"Well Misty, what you are doing with me is real. You are not imagining it. Those memories are yours. What you take with them and do with them is up to you, and I will not try and act like you should be led down a certain way or not, but that is what you are. You are real, and you should never let what anybody says to you change your mind on that." I was saying the partially true answer, hoping that it would not make her any bit suspicious.

"You seem to get it Sam. You get that none of this is false. Thank you so much." Misty said and then she hugged me. I knew it was just out of appreciation and not out of spite or of love. I then looked at her directly in the eyes afterwards.

"Please Misty, keep doing what you are doing. If there is anybody that can do it, it is you. I feel like if anybody can free this city, you might be the only one who can do it." I was being honest on that, I felt like she could do it much better than Ken, although that was not saying much.

"If you even are getting this now, then I feel like I should keep it up. You are right, I will keep fighting for the city, and I will teach that guy that he is wrong if I ever see him again." Misty said and the look on her face was one of such pure joy that I could not get myself to tell her the truth. This was the one good lie, I decided to myself.

"I feel like when you save everybody, you will be known as a hero across the entire city. I will do my best to make sure you go down as that. If you do not get that honor, then I would feel like that is when we are starting to see the problem in our city today. Misty, just remember what you are meant to do, and go with it. If this is what you feel like you are destined to do, then it very could well be, and there is no reason to try and stop yourself from following that goal." I told Misty, and then I saw that she was almost starting to get a very bit mind with that, maybe a little bit too much for my own good, but I would rather have a confident person than a person who hated the world because of her being a android.

"Sam, you are a good friend when you try to be. I remembered because of this conversation, why we are still friends. I never felt like we weren't, but I was starting to forget why we were." Misty told me and that was when I felt like she and I talked enough on that matter at hand, and that we didn't need to go on any further with it.

"I think that maybe you get the point, and I know I certainly do. Let us just move onto a nicer subject, one that you will not be so uncomfortable with, and one that we can both get something out of. Like what are things like with Brad and Sheldon right now?" I questioned, knowing almost for a fact that she was going to pick Brad, but she did seem to have just a small enough of a thing for Sheldon that she felt like there was a small chance that she could choose him instead, albeit it was kind of faint though.

"They are both really nice to me. I think that Sheldon is nicer to me, and that I can talk with him easier to some extent, but there is something about Brad. His calm attitude and the fact that he seems to understand and be on top of everything so well all the damn time. It makes me feel like if I ever needed somebody, he would be the one for me that I could sort of go to for advice. That is not the way with Sheldon." Misty said and I can agree with that.

We talked about those two for a little bit longer, just comparing how they were and what their strong suits were or the lack of a strong suit on things that they needed improvement on. I was just doing it as a friend figure though. That being said, Misty did two more mini crime stopping acts in the city and that was helping her position of the town hero go down a bit better, and she was slowly learning more and more about her android powers. Soon enough, she ended up with a conversation with Sheldon about her life and his thoughts on her life.

"Sheldon, I just wanted to thank you for being there when it felt like nobody else was. I think you are the only person who has never lost any hope in me on what I have been doing, and has had some confidence at the least least in what I am doing and that I am doing the right thing. I really feel like you are able to understand me better than most for that reason, and I can't express my gratitude for that nearly enough. When I am hanging out with you, it makes me feel like I don't ever have to worry about what I am doing, or what I have already planned. You just listen to me and work with me and help me out no matter what the plans are. I thank you very much for that." Misty said and Sheldon was glad she was able to understand how he was doing his best there for her.

"You always need somebody in your life who is willing to help you out. I feel like you have some great ideas, and that there is nothing you need to be afraid of. I do not really see what the problem is. You have an idea for justice, and I want to see what you can do with that, and I will help you get that idea. I think that only is everybody worked together on this regard, there would never be the need of one person coming along and doing it for everybody else. We would be able to pull through and work out all the problems at once." Sheldon told Misty as she snapped her fingers in agreement.

"You seem to get it. I knew that it was a wise choice talking to you about it. I feel like when we talk with each other, we are able to work off of each other, and that there is nothing I have to deal with or fear over. I get you, and you seem to get me. I feel like Brad and especially Sam have had moments they do not get it. Like the whole hero thing with Sam, or the whole drinking thing with Brad. But you seem to get that I am living my life, my way, and that I don't need to follow any standards." Misty continued as Sheldon nodded on that.

"It really is your life. No matter what they may say, it is your life and you should be the one who chooses how to live it. I am glad you see that." Sheldon was saying being totally sincere there.

"I really think you are truly one of the greatest people I have ever met. You do not have any real problems with you at all. You are very easy to talk with." Misty said, and yet despite that, she still felt a bit uncertain and she still felt like she preferred to choose Brad at the end of it all, despite knowing Sheldon cared more.

"I just really appreciate what you do, the work you put in, what your drive is. I feel like it really is something to admire honestly. I think others can really use you as an example of what to shit for. I don't know how you feel on that, and I wish I was as strong as you, but I am not and I never will be as strong as you. But anything you want or need, I will do my best to help you out here. If you accept and what you do with it is up to you though." Sheldon laid it all down for Misty, hoping she would see his loyalty.

"I wish the others could see as you do. It feels like Brad is just sort of holding me back, and that Sam is sort of off on his own thing. Besides, a small part of this has become personal and I do worry that I might my emotions cloud my thoughts here." Misty told Sheldon, and that him to stop and wonder what she was on about there, and what he might be able to do to help, if he can at much as he hated to admit it with every my cell of his body, he was not sure he could.

"I think that you can really give the criminals what they deserve, and that you can kick their sorry asses out of here, I feel like it would give many people a bit of satisfaction actually, that is just me though. Plus, people will start to feel safer, and that is always a plus no matter what the case will be. If people stay and feel safe, I feel like maybe they will sort if forget about the other things they could consider a problem. Maybe that is just me thinking positively though, but nothing wrong with that." Sheldon continued to give Misty reasons to go at this.

"I think maybe you and Brad should talk this out. I like what you are thinking. I like how your plan works, and what you are willing to do to plan my side of the plan out. I just feel like I need answers, and none of them are given to me. I want more truth, I want something bigger, I want value. But I will never be given that. I just feel like I will never be given that, and that idea just hurts me on the inside to know." Misty said as Sheldon gave her a shirt hug for a brief moment of consolation, and thought on her point a bit more.

"Trust me, I will give you what you want. I will give you all the information you desire, no matter what the case may be. I will not fail with you now. If you need me, I have nothing better to do than follow down your path ways. I don't want anybody to tell you that you are wrong, there is nothing wrong with feelings and emotions." Sheldon truly did break through more to her as she heard that, something she wanted and needed.

"I see that you and I will have a very long friendship, one that will be good for both of us. You have already done more for me than anybody else, and no matter what happens, I can and will appreciate that. Brad is a good and lucky man, to be friends with you, me, and Sam. I feel like this will be good for him." Misty told Sheldon and he knew Brad was not the lucky one, Sheldon was. He had no life before this, and now being here with them, he did have one given to him for him to live.

"I needed this just as much, if not even more than Brad. He seemed like he was already in a good place, but I was not am probably will not be for a while. He had friends, while I didn't. Before Sam, I had nobody at all. Sam changed that, and soon enough you guys followed. I needed the help much more. At least, that is what I think on it while looking at it on the surface. But perhaps you know better than I do. Given how well you know him, perhaps you truly do." Sheldon was saying, wondering what details Misty could give him to prove him wrong.

"I guess you don't know him as well as I thought. Maybe if you ask him about it, he will be willing to talk to you more on it. I feel like you guys could trust each other, even if you are not super close right at this moment. I just doubt he would have true reason to push you off, but maybe I will be the one proven wrong on this case. I guess we will see." Misty said, and Sheldon considered it for a bit.

"I will test it out, maybe it will be what he needs. I guess if I talk to him, man to man, then things could go much better. I should probably try to know him better anyways, as that can be really useful. He and I can probably mutually grow as a result of this. I guess we can all use something to get us going, after all. Now you are the one helping me out here." Sheldon told Misty, thinking on how he and Brad could get closer by a result of this.

Misty kept up her hero stuff a bit longer, just focused on getting results more than doing what others thought she could and should have been doing. Brad and Misty had some time together I will go into, that way you guys get a bit of how she was with each of us in the year, and then I will go into her major battle of the year, which was in many ways more important than Ken's this year, but unlike Ken this year, who had a relatively happy ending, hers was a bit more bittersweet.

Her talk with Brad was a bit more serious than the other two by comparison in the way that she was just wanting to really get the truth from brad, no matter how it had gone. "I know that there is something that you are not telling me. I know that you don't want me to know something, I just can't figure out what that is. I need you to just be up front and honest about this with me. Tell me the truth Brad, I won't judge you no matter what you say. I just don't want to be living in a area of uncertainty where I am not even sure how to handle my fucking life anymore." Misty told brad as Brad was wondering on what regard she was talking about and was hoping it wasn't about the androids. "I feel like you don't trust me when you don't tell me these things, and I feel like it kind of hurts to deal with that face Brad."

"Well, I will admit that I am hiding something from you. But more because of how embarrassing it is for me, and it has nothing to do with you at all. I don't really know how you would react though, so I just never wanted to tell you." Brad said and this was something that he did want to tell her, and it wasn't about the androids, so he was thinking that maybe this could be able to help him win this one at the end. He can keep the truth of that way, while telling her the truth of how he had felt.

"What is it that you are needing to tell me? You do know that you can tell me anything that you want right? I have nothing to hold against you. We are friends, and I have no reason to throw something away just because of what you tell me." Misty said and then Brad decided that maybe he can go for it.

"Misty, I really liked you. Well, not really liked. I do like you. Like in the romantic sense. Not just in the friend sense. You are a really great person, and I want to have you see how important that you are. I have been wanting to ask you this for a while now, and I was worried of what you would say, but would you be willing to go on and go on a date with me?" Brad asked, not being able to believe how awful that was. After all, he said go on twice in the same sentence.

"If you mean it, I think that would be a great idea. I have been wanting to see if you wanted to do something like that with me lately, and I guess we are both getting what we wanted." Misty told Brad and then Brad was doing this while she was sitting down on her bed holding her hand forward while Brad was standing in front of her, both his arms to his side, while wearing a black vest and a white shirt under it and a pair of brown pants.

"I really do mean it. I think about the adventures and the things that we had together, and I feel like maybe we really could be a good item. I just hope that I am not proven wrong by feeling so. You and I have done so many things and you have helped me through so much of my problems, that I feel like you might be the person that I trust more than anybody else in the world right now, if you don't mind me saying that. Since you know, that could be a little bit over whelming for you to hear." Brad told Misty, and he was wondering just how far he can go before it was considered too far for her.

"I feel where you are coming from. I feel the same on a lot of aspects. I really do feel like we are a good combination. I am glad that you feel that way. Sheldon is a great guy, I feel like he is more of a friend. Sort of a friendzone thing. I don't want to ruin a friendship that I have with him, but you are somebody that I do feel safe with, and that is a really important thing at any moment." Misty told Brad as Brad got on her bed and was staring at the ceiling as he was laying down.

"I guess that maybe there is a certain thing that you don't want to ruin, because if you are not careful, you will be able to throw it all away. That was what cared me to even ask you in the first place, I was worried of how you would feel, and why you would worry about me in case I did my share of something stupid." Brad said and Misty laid down on the bed with him and they both had a short moment of staring at the ceiling.

"Do you think that Sheldon will really care if he knew that I choose you instead? I kind of feel like he might have already been expecting that I either had, or was planning to. I just don't really know if he can deal with the full and true fact all that well. He is a tough guy, but I do worry for him." Misty said and Brad shook his head.

"I don't think he would mind too much. He might be a bit sad over it, but give him some time and he will put it behind him. He may really like you, a little too much, but he is just having your best intention at the end. Let him do what he wants, and who knows, maybe this will branch him out to different people, which we both know he needed." Brad said and Misty was still not too sure if he was the one that needed it, she was still thinking deep down Brad was the one that needed it.

"Yeah, Sheldon may not be a tough guy on the outside, but on the inside, he is a really good dude. I think that he is probably fine, I just am not too sure. After what I had to deal with earlier with this plague mask guy, I am sort of questioning everything that I had seen earlier." Misty said, letting that detail slip before she added in a fast "Please don't worry about it." Brad was not really too sure on what to think, and he was sort of on the fence on if he should drop this subject or not.

"So Misty, how do you think you are going to remember this moment?" Brad said, sort of hinting at the whole android thing while not saying so. He wanted to see if all of those memories were hers, or if she was just sort of a robotic person at the end of it all, and that she has lost all of her way. Brad was really hoping she didn't have the memory problem, as memories were fort of a more special thing than he may have even realized, knowing that it could have been fake the whole time, and that none of this was real, and that whole thing was just sort of scary for him to really think about.

"Everything about this moment I will remember forever. This whole thing is precious to me. It shows that I am over coming any personal odds that I had with myself. It shows that I am not being left behind in this world anymore. I truly have made some friends, and not just some people who I thought were friends but in reality only cared for themselves. I think that perhaps you get what I am talking about, after all you seemed like you were sort of in a lost place yourself." Misty said and then Brad nodded at that one faintly, not wanting to admit it though.

"Just the whole thing with my family. I think you get it though, so I am not going to bother you with it. I don't want to think about the problems my family is having right now honestly. I just want to be at this moment, taking in everything around me. I feel like we got all the time in the world to just do something." Brad said and then he looked at Misty, wondering what she thought of that. She accepted, and they left the house to hang out.

Misty and Brad were hanging out at the ice cream shop, since Misty said that was something she would want, and Brad was willing to pay for her. They talked about the school year, what Misty did, they talked about Sheldon and I, and this over all was probably one of the few nights of the entire school year Misty gave zero fucks about her own personal mission.

The final bit of the school year was going down as Misty realized she had one opening, and only one, for her to do what she wanted. She only had one chance to finally defeat the crime bosses, while dealing with that one guy who was wearing the plague mask. But at the same time, she had to deal with the man in the purple jacket, which was even worse than the other one, but not by much. Misty knew from context clues he was going to pop up in the spring celebration coming up in just a couple days at the end of the school year. It was probably a thing they somehow knew Misty was doing and he wanted to track her down in a very public area.

Misty was hanging out with Brad, Sheldon, and I at the start of the event that day, and we were just hanging around and it was obvious she and Brad were trying to be clever and hide their thing but anybody, even Sheldon could be able to see through the whole thing. Even if he didn't want to say so, since it would be admitting he would have lost any chance of Misty being his girlfriend.

As they were going around, Sheldon saw that there was some form if music performance contest. Wanting to try something else out, and seeing if he could make his friends get a good laugh if for nothing else, he decided he wanted to go on and give it a round. Nobody was up, so he didn't think anybody would mind if he stole the spot light for a moment. He had absolutely no aspirations in music on any level, but he thought a short performance would be something that could be fun and if for nothing else he could laugh about later. He wanted to leave high school with some good memories after all.

Sheldon grabbed the mic and then he was staring at the audience a little bit, wondering what the he'll he had just put himself to. Either way, he started to sing. "I fucked up... In a perfect situation. I saw her, aimed at her, shot for her, and then after choking l... Let any chance of love down the drain. The pitch wad given, and I got a strike." Those were the first words, and people were wondering what the hell he was talking about, and they were intrigued. A guy like Sheldon, having a chance for love. That was some rich shit.

Sheldon sang for about ninety seconds, building up the song, talking about how he wanted to be a hero like the girl in the song, but how he wasn't cut for it. Then he gave a pause, where he was stomping his foot a but for the beat, and then after the rising action, he started to sing the climax. "Oh... The world. The world. The world. It is out to ruin my life. The world. Ruining some perfect situations." Sheldon stopped singing, as he dropped the mic and headed on to Brad, Misty, and I to go finish the rest of the event. As he was doing so, the people in his audience who wanted to listen to people sing started to cheer. Sheldon had managed to excite people with his performance, and that much was obvious.

"Sorry for that song, I just had a lot of my mind. You know, between school, friends, and what the hell I am going to do next year when this is all behind me. It really is a lot of material I have to ponder, and I just don't really know, and I feel like I have no fucking life at all, and I just wasted it all." Sheldon said and Misty shook her head. She needed him to see the bright side of things. Now he was the one that needed help.

"You did not waste your time. You made some friends, got a audience going, and did so well in school you were the only guy in your group to be accepted into a four year university. You got a life going on now, and I don't feel like you wasted it." Misty said, thinking on how great his life would be soon. It made her feel jealous. Sheldon was not too sure if he should tell them the truth on the four year college or if he should let them live in further ideas that nothing would be a problem and that everything would be alright.

"I guess I can see your point. I guess I am just looking at it a little bit short term. Not that it is really all that wrong to do so. Like the thing is we don't know how things will be now. If we ever really knew, which to be honest we fucking don't." Sheldon said as Brad was looking around, and he saw the school was having a water ball on contest. He looked at me and we both nodded. We wanted to partake on that contest, so we were heading off to do that.

Once Brad and I were at the water ballon fighting area, I grabbed a water ballon and for a moment, I saw Ken and I threw the ballon right at him, hoping to soak him to the core, as I thought it would be funny to once again one up him.

The ballon hit the wall instead of Ken and I rolled my eyes there. Brad threw a ballon at the girl who was about to throw one next to me. I then told mtsrlf not to get too wet since I was going to be meeting with Susan very soon, and we were going on a very big date, so I was just a little worried on how things would turn out if I wasn't very careful. Plus, she would most likely be wondering why I was so wet after a school day of all things.

Sheldon and Misty were walking around for a bit and that was when Sheldon thought that he should tell me the truth and that he knew about me and Brad. "I know you choose him instead of me. I know that you liked him more. I did hope you would choose me instead, but that is not happening. I guess that is why we became a unexpected hit for that moment, when I just made that song. Was no real secret I had made the song about you." Sheldon said and for a moment Misty was not really sure about the song thing, like she had actually not known that at first, which was a bit shocking shocking for Sheldon.

"Brad was worried how you would take it. Seems like you are quite the man about it. Maybe you really are cut out for the real world. I wouldn't doubt it. Besides, I think you are I are just fine as we are, being friends." Misty said and the two if them sat down on a wooden table, and Sheldon was so happy to just see her he didn't care at all. How could he judge her like this, when she clearly was happy where she was at and obviously did not regret her choice.

"Just know if one day, you change your mind, I will be there for you. I will be a person who would give you my umbrella if I had to in order to make sure you even had a chance of being dry. I know it is simple, but sometimes simple is just better than making a huge plan that will not work." Sheldon said, hoping that any tiny statement will get Misty to see the value of him as a romantic partner. He just was trying to not think about how she was an android so it was destined for failure even if she did chose him and not her.

"That is a strangely romantic proposal Sheldon. I will keep that in mind in case something does come up and I need somebody to keep me on track." Misty confirmed to him, and Sheldon thought that maybe there was a very small amount of hope for him after all, but before he could go any further there was a strange noise that stopped him right on his tracks. It was a sound to show the battle was starting soon now.

There was a loud noise and Misty knew what it was so she told Sheldon to keep everybody distracted, which he agreed to do. Misty started to run out of the school and as she was doing so, people only cared for a second. About half a mile away from the school, she saw where the plague mask guy was. He was standing on top of a tower and he was looking down at Misty, waiting for her to make the move. She stomped down and set off her feet rocket to make it up there.

By doing this, Misty knew that everybody was going to be wondering what was going on with her and if she was pulling something off with some advanced technology, but she knew that there was nothing that she would really be able to do anything about it and that she was going to have to deal with the punishments that were going to have to come along with it. Once she had flown up to the top of the building, the guy in the plague mask face looked over at Misty. "I see that you can't get yourself away from me, maybe you will truly start to see what my great ambitions are after all. Perhaps there is some hope left in you." The guy in the plague mask said and then when he had said that, Misty held her hands forward. If she was able to make herself fly, then despite how little she wanted to admit it, she might have the power to shot this thing down with her arms. Despite not wanting to say it, she realized that maybe there was a small chance that she could have had android blood in her.

"Just tell me the truth. Tell me why you care about me so much." Misty said and the guy looked over at Misty and considered that. It was pretty tempting to tell her the truth, and she had that look on her eyes that showed that she wanted the information badly, so he decided that he was going to give her the shorter version of it all.

"Well, I guess since you really don't have any clue, and you seem eager to know, I guess that maybe telling you a little bit about who you are will not bother you too much. The truth is, I am your father. Well, not exactly you may say. But I am your father in the way that I lived my life, done my own thing, became the man I am, and gave your mother these facts and she decided to use them for her development and her project. Now here I am, talking with you, the product of the idea that I had given her." The guy in the plague mask said as Misty was starting to get tears in her eyes.

"Am I starting to make you sad? Are you finally starting to see that everybody before these last five years are real? If it does make you feel any better, these last five years have been totally true, and those are your real memories, not mine." The guy said but then as he had said that, Misty jumped at him.

Misty punched the guy in the face a couple of times and as she was doing so, she was starting to cause the guy to bleed a little bit and she didn't even care how much it seemed like she was doing this terrible thing, she wanted to make this guy suffer. "Stop lying to me. My father died before I was born! My mother said so! My memories are mine, not just these last five years, but all of them." Misty then picked him up and then the guy in the plague mask laughed at her then.

"You will keep shooting this down and denying the truth for as long as you live, but in the end, this is still the truth, and there is nothing that you can do to change that. You might as well just accept it as it is, and try to adapt to your life being that way, or else you are just simply going to be living a life of a lie." The guy in the plague mask had said and then when he had said that, Misty placed him down and she was placing her left hand on her right arm.

"I don't even know who you are. If you were really my father, in any context, then why have you not gone out of your way to talk with me earlier? Why have you gone out of your way to pretend like I was not even here before?" Misty said and then the guy in the plague mask laughed as he had heard Misty saying that, as she clearly was not getting the full side of the, and no matter how long they talked, would they actually be able to really get her to learn the truth in full.

"It seems like you still think that I am the enemy. In the end, your mother is the enemy, and that you should be going out of your way to try and take her down. But I guess you will be in denial about that since she had been raising you your entire life and you just don't want to admit that she has been using you before. But I guess that none of this really matters." Plague mask dude said and then Misty shook her head.

"You are lying to me, and you are just trying to see what my reaction is. I will not believe what you are telling me. I can't believe what you are telling me. I don't want to think about my life being a lie. Would that mean that Sheldon, Brad, Sam, any of this is just something that I am imagining, and that you are the one doing all of this if what you are saying is true?" Misty questioned and the plague mask guy was holding her hand up.

"If you need to know, you need to just talk to your mother, if that is even the proper term to give her. I want to really make you understand what you have taken away from me. You have taken away so much from me, that I can't even live a normal life anymore and I have to pretend like I am just a phantom, and I am wanting to get my life back, and no matter what, I will get it back soon." The plague mask guy said and then when he said that, Misty looked away for a moment.

"I don't want to believe you. You are lying. I don't want to talk to a liar anymore. I can't handle this anymore!" Misty said and then after she had said that the plague mask guy was taking off his mask as Misty slammed her left hand to her right arm and then as a result the arm created a bullet that shot right through the chest of the plague mask guy, and then he seemed to smile when he had that happen to him.

The face of the guy was what confused her the most. The guy looked like Sheldon. Not just Sheldon, like the one she had went to school with, but a older Sheldon. One that looked like he was over a hundred years old and was already expecting the end of his life soon. He raised his right hand up and revealed a white button. "Just remember, in the end, I am your father. Never forget. Never try to deny it. I made you." The guy said and then he pressed the white button before placing his mask back on and then falling down the building to his death.

Misty stared down as she watched the guy in the plague mask was falling to his death. As this was happening, she saw that the building she was on top of was slowly getting destroyed from the ground up. Misty started her rocket once again and throughout the next ten minutes or so was trying to go through every single floor of the building flying through broken glass and creating her to bleed and she was getting people in three or four rounds and then placing those three or four on the ground. In the end, she saved about forty people despite there being several hundred in there. She knew that nothing she did could save them all, so she was just trying to save at least some.

After she had done that, the guy in the purple jacket walked through the fire and threw down the plague mask down at Misty in front of her. "He was telling the truth. You did a heroes a job. Too bad he won't live to see the end. But then again, who will?" The guy in the purple jacket said and then he just walked away, getting his entire point across and he already knew he was going to see her again eventually, so it didn't really matter.

Misty got down to her knees, trying to figure out why the hell the blood was not all over her, and just only on a couple of spots on her body. And it looked like the blood was starting to fade away. None of this made sense, and she was not even going to pretend that it did, but she was not going to change it. The next year was when Ken and Misty really had their lives start to get determined.

Chapter Text

Chapter 14: The Journal Part 3

So as Ken and Misty started to really change everything about their lives soon, Ken was having a bit of a crazy school year himself. He was sitting down next to Taylor one day and he was sort of mapping out what his big operation was going to be coming up. "I think that there are a couple of crime busts that we can really bring down. If we do that, we should surely be looked at as heroes. I just need to find all the right times for them, to make sure that I don't go too hasty." Ken said and Taylor looked at what he was planning.

"Are you sure that you will get away with this? I mean, I like the idea, but this is a little bit of a stretch. Do you think that maybe you should consider some other options? Like just staying in the city blocks or something?" Taylor said and then after he said that, Ken was shaking his head and Taylor feared that this was going to be Ken's response. "I was just offering, but now that you point it out, maybe there really are a couple of things that you can do, that can get them out more." Taylor said, sort of remembering some of the things that was going on in town. "Like remember how there is going to be a town hall meeting soon? Maybe you can try something out then. I think that this would be a good idea." Taylor said and then Ken nodded, liking Taylor's way of looking at it.

"I think that maybe the town hall would want somebody like me there. You know, somebody who can be able to protect them in case things start to go south? That would be a really smart idea." Ken said and then he held up his hand to Taylor, as if he was getting ready to high five him. Neither one of them knowing that in just six months, this whole thing would be a huge bust.

Taylor accepted the high five offer and then said "You may actually be onto something here Ken. There seems to be a method to the madness after all. Maybe your brother really was wrong about it." Taylor said, just not wanting to admit that he was also wrong about Ken as well. Ken was the only one who was starting to doubt this all. There was that increasing part of him that was really starting to think this was a bad idea, but he didn't want to admit it.

"I am scared." Ken admitted and then he said "That somebody is going to figure out it is me, and then once they figure out that it is me, they will find a way to get to my home, and then they will get to my family. I don't even know why this is scaring me so much now. Maybe it is a part of me maturing and seeing the true side of things. Maybe Sam is right. But since I started this, I can't get myself out of this." Ken said, and even I knew he was right about that. Ken did get himself here, and now he was stuck here until either he died or he was caught.

"I guess you have been putting more thought to this than anybody really ever thought that you did. Do you feel like you can really pull off some form of miracle here, or do you think that you are sort of getting yourself into some sort of suicide mission by doing all of this?" Taylor asked and Ken forced himself to try and actually think about it on what could really happen, and not what he wanted to happen.

"Realistically, I think that I am setting myself up for a death trap. I do not envision myself really doing too well on this long term. But that is not really the problem for me, as I never wanted to do this beyond high school, so it was a matter of basically just surviving these four years. But it looks like I am not really going to have a great shot on this unless I start to put more care into this situation. I guess Sam did have a point here. I guess that unless I get some help, maybe I can fail like Sam. I have been going at this for several months now, and here I am, just barely making any real progress. People know me on the news, but that is sort of the best it is going. Crime rates have only gone down three percent, which is barely even worth bragging about." Ken said and Taylor was impressed Ken was opening up this way now.

"Dude, you are only like fifteen years old. Even a three percent drop from a fifteen year old of all things is pretty great. Anybody who can reduce crime by three percent on a city as big as this should be proud of themselves and the work they have done. You truly are starting to make an impact. Don't tell yourself otherwise. I know that it may seem crazy, and to a lot of ways, it fucking is. I am not even going to pretend that it is not. But you have something going on, and you need to embrace what you have created. You have started a fire, and you need to continue burning it." Taylor told Ken to get him more energized.

Ken looked up at Taylor and there was a moment of hope on his eyes.

"I think that you may be onto something. Who cares if I haven't stopped it all? I have made a serious effort, and I made a dent. I made my place in the history of this town. What more can I ask for? I have made progress, and I have started to make the freedom here more work able. I think that maybe you can think about it in that regard, and I am truly doing well." Ken said and there was just such a burst of motivation there that even Taylor was able to be truly into it for a moment.

"I really think that you got this in the bag Ken. I know that this may sound crazy, and hard to fully over come. I do not blame you for it. You have done a good job though. I do not agree with all of your plans, and a lot of the time I may find them to be totally fucking insane and wrong, but you do have a decent idea what you are trying to do, and I am able to roll with that. You were never fully wrong about what you have said, and that is the thing that makes me think you could be onto something here. Just don't lose sight of what you have started." Taylor said and then Ken stood up.

"I really do have a good idea what I want with my life. I have been working on it all this time, and I just need to keep going. You seem to get it. I think that maybe I should have never told my brother about my ideas and just went to you. It seems like you seem to know more about this than he does. I don't really think he really gets it all, the problems that we are facing." Ken said and he was now ready to meet up with the town hall and get ready for their next big adventure. One of the last that he could be able to pull off with any amount of success I might add, but that is just how things are.

"Like you said, you planned to only keep this up for high school. Once you are done, then you can just leave it all behind, or give it to another person to pick up the mantle." Taylor said and Ken was wondering if he was lightly hinting at giving the mantle over to Taylor, which Ken figured was not too terrible of an idea, but he wanted to consider all options first.

"Let's go out there and pick up the job that we were going to do anyways." Ken said and then he and Taylor stood up and were going to just go straight to Ken's house, a block away, and start the plan with the town hall meeting.

So as they were getting ready, Ken did some studying and he was getting himself ready for all of the stuff that could possible come up when the final battle came up there. Well, I guess I should not really say the final battle, but the next battle. There were a couple of more that he did after this, and I am starting to think he had one just tonight, which could explain the gun I saw him having just a moment ago. But that is not important to this story.

One of the things Ken was doing during his research was finding out where the criminals who were planning on doing something to the mayor were, and then once he found them, what he was going to do to try and expose them, if he even could be able to expose them at all, something he was well aware of being a possible problem. There was something that was going to be a bit of a problem about a vigilante running around trying to tell the mayor that they were the ones who knew what was right and not them, when they were sort of not really operating by the law themselves, so that was something that he had to consider.

But at that moment, Ken really was not all that worried about it, he was just trying to take down these criminals and save the mayor from what could be a terrible thing, and he was willing to try anything out for it, even if that meant that he himself was going to have to stop operating fully by the law, something he never wanted to do but knew that he sort of had to do to get his full plan.

Ken was walking around with Taylor and they were sort of pretending to be talking about normal stuff, trying to make them seem like they were casual people, which was not too bad of an idea I suppose. As they were walking around, Ken was checking around a couple of specific areas since he was given some pointers that this was where he needed to go. The guy who said this was some sort of "Stranger" as Ken would explain to me when all of this stuff broke out and I forced him to try and explain all the shit to me to see if maybe I could let this be justified.

"I think this is the house. Just pretend that you are just waiting for your parents to pick you up or something if people start to wonder what is going on, I am going to go in there." Ken said and then Taylor nodded. There truly was something genius but yet terrible to this idea at the same time, and Taylor was not really so sure himself which one this was leaning towards. Either way, it was brave what he was doing regardless of how genius or terrible it was.

Ken looked around the yard a little bit and he found a bit of a hole that he could crawl into. So he forced himself into the hole and as he was forcing himself into the hole, he was already able to start to hear some of the plans that were going on, but like a dumb ass he was going further in. He was wanting to know every single thing that was going on. Taylor was just standing at the front, sitting down and doing his best to pretend like he had absolutely no idea what the hell Ken was doing, which to be fair, he didn't really.

Once Ken was inside of the building, he was looking around and he was trying to figure out all that he was seeing. It was a combination of really gross, and just simply kind of confusing. There were jars of what seemed to be piss lined up, but unlike actual real jars of piss, there was so hard stuff at the bottom, which meant that this was something else. Ken was wondering if he really did get himself too deeply into this, and the worst part was that he really had nothing to defend himself with shall something come up over this. As he was looking around, he looked at each jar, getting progressively more filled up and more green.

There was just something about it that made him feel a little bit sick. He was not even really sure why this was making him feel so grossed out over this, but he just could not really help it anymore. Before he could even touch one, he heard a bunch of people talking and he hid under a desk. He felt a little bit silly doing so, but it was the only thing he was coming up with and he didn't have anything to defend himself with, so he was just going to have to go with it.

"The mayor believes that we are just there for business related purposes only. He had no real idea what is going on. So for now, we are still on the clear. I am just more worried about that one so called hero. The one who calls himself the Concador. I feel like he might be getting onto something, and that the mayor might try to work with them just in case something comes up. If that happens, we might have to throw away our plan." The first person said and Ken was giving himself a point for being known to these people.

"He is nothing more than just one man in a suit. Even if he is the greatest martial artist in the world, which he is not, I would not worry too much about him. Get him alone, and he will be as weak as the others, and then you remove the suit, and he is nothing more than just a low life fugitive trying to be a hero." The other guy said and Ken could not really argue that one to himself.

"I would not really be so sure. He seems like he can hold his own. I would at the very least try and be careful what is going on. You might need to try and look into maybe hiring a few more people for us. Just in case something does happen. You never really can be too sure, and that is something we have to understand. But whatever you feel like is fine, I guess I will go with it, even if I disagree with you on it." The other guy said and then the stuff about the jars popped up for Ken to know about.

"Those jars will not contain enough explosive powder to make the entire city go up in flames unless if you add a little bit more. Then it would sort of be ruining the whole point of our plan." The other one was saying and then Ken took a loud gulp, not really too sure what he was thinking when he had heard that. It was quite the fucking thing to hear that they were planning on destroying the entire town. If he was smart, he realized that he was going to need everybodys help on that one.

"Well, we are mainly just trying to take out town hall. Everything else that comes along with it will be extra icing on the cake. Our boss even said that the only one that mattered was the town hall, so I really am not too worried about it. The pay will only just go up with everything else, which might not really be worth the risk of us not surviving." The second person said and Ken was trying to figure out what he was supposed to do.

"Just focus on getting the job done. Don't think about anything else. That is what I say on the whole matter." The second one finished his point and then the two of them just left the room.

Once they were out of the room, Ken stood up and he was looking around. Realizing what he was doing and how dumb it was, he grabbed one of the jars. He knew getting the others would increase his chance of exposure, but going after just one seemed to be just fine. Then he worked his way out of the hole and back into normal air.

Then he walked to Taylor as fast as he could while placing the jar in his pocket and said "We need to leave, now." Ken said and then with that, Taylor took his statement seriously and they began to head on out as Ken was ready to tell him what had just happened.

"Seems like things are a lot more serious than we ever expected them to be. I think that we're going to really have to step up our game if we plan on actually saving the mayor from any of what I just found out they were planning to do. Those people who were inside that building or honestly trying to bomb this city. And not just the town hall, but the entire fucking thing." Ken said when he and Taylor were alone, as he pulled out the drawer that he took from the basement in that one house, because he felt like he was a little bit more safe to do it now. It was totally crazy sounding and he had no idea how he was going to get the mirror to help him see what his point of view, if he would even be able to, but he knew that he was going to have to try.

"Are you sure that you don't want to go public on this one? I am pretty sure that the mirror would take the word of a public person much more to consideration than the word of a guy who just runs around in a cape and a bike helmet and all that stuff. I mean I'm pretty sure you could see you where I think that. I'm just trying to be realistic." Taylor said and wall candle not like the idea, he would be dumb to not see the benefit to it.

He had a lot of stuff to think about on that regard. He just wasn't really sure if he was ready to go public on any of this, but at the same time he thought that if he did go public with this tiny piece of information, that he could still probably be able to avoid his secret identity, just a little bit longer. It would just be more of a matter of if Taylor was right and the people would take his word more seriously if he was doing it publicly. Despite the fact that it was probably true, Ken was not really sure if he was going to take the risk.

Either way, he was given a very tough choice that he was going to have to make one way or the other, and that either way it was going to be something to his detriment. Can look over at his friend just trying to find a way to be sincere about any of the stuff that had happened.

"I'm so sorry about what I put you into. I have a feeling that once they expose me, you will be very soon to follow. And if that happens, then anything that would have happened to you would be 100% my fault. I don't really know I could be able to look at myself in the mirror ever again and try to justify that when I think about it. I just hope that no matter what happens you would be willing to forgive me if it does work against either one of our favors." Ken tried to apologize to his friend, but he wasn't really sure if it really cut it.

As Ken was thinking about that, he was wondering how Sam was going to react when the truth eventually came out to him. Either way they were way too deeply into this and there was nothing to be done about it. There was one main mission that was up and running, and they needed to do it. It was a necessity to do it. Even Sam must have been able to see this. That was what Ken thought at the very least. What Ken didn't know was that I just didn't really understand his motives to any of this.

It was very soon after that, that the operation was going to go down. Ken knew that in order for the mayor to really believe what he was going to say, he was going to have to percent that drawer as evidence at the very least. And he wasn't even sure if that was going to fully cut it. He was honestly considering what Taylor had said earlier about the just exposing himself. But for many reasons, he just could not get himself to actually fully go on board with that idea.

So he had entered the town hall a few days later, and as he had done so he was getting ready to talk to the mayor of the city. Once you talk to the mayor of the city, he would hope that things would be mostly cleared up and that everything would be coming to an understanding. Plus it could be able to show people he was serious about what he was planning. He just needed to get me on board with the whole operation in his opinion. Which is why we had a certain conversation at one point.

It had started when Ken walked up to me while I was doing my school work and getting ready for my date with Susan of that week like I had on every single other weak. I rolled my eyes at this because he always did this when I was getting ready to come on today. It was getting a little bit fucking annoying. "So Sam, I know you don't really like any of my ideas, and I know you were going on a date soon, but are you willing to just stick around for a little bit longer just to talk to me for a bit?" Sounded so desperate and in a way even since here when he was asking that, that I fell for once again.

I just simply nodded to give him the approval of letting him do this once again I can not believe in hindsight that I went for this once more. But I just thought that he actually knew how to excel contain himself and be able to handle the situation in a much better manner this time around, but I was proven to be very wrong as you will see very soon.

"Well, I was looking around, and there was something that is going to happen very soon that I feel like I need to try and help take care of." Ken said and I looked away from him, knowing full well where this was probably gonna go considering how Ken was and how he had bar none the worst idea of justice in the world, and it wasn't even close. But I figured that at worst, it would have just felt like he was wasting my time, and I have dealt with worse from him before to be totally real.

"There are some people that plan to blow up the entire town. I want to change that. I want to be able to have a chance to not just save the mayor, but the rest of the city. This is something I need to do if this town is to live on." Ken told me, but I figured that there was much more to it than this, and that Ken was sort of way over blowing this. But there was a small part of me that thought maybe he was right after all.

"I don't know if you are right or not. I guess that there is a small chance you are, but I feel like the police can still take care of this. I just have hope. But you have done some good things here, so I am willing to admit the chance you are correct. I will wish you luck. I don't like it fully agree with this, but I need to give you a chance, even if it does mean that I am the one who is making the mistakes." I said as I was thinking how much it would suck to admit that I was wrong, when there could or should have been no reason for me to be wrong under a natural case.

"I will be heading down there soon. I need to be there before the enemy does. If I do not, then all hope will be lost here, and there is nothing we can do about it. I have a job I need to do." Ken said and then he left the room, and I was sitting there, processing what had happened. Despite not thinking about it, I placed my hand on the chest as a sort of sign for good luck.

After that, Ken met up with Taylor and they were walking our way down to the town, where the moment of decision would be made soon. The second to last battle Ken would face while he was trying to be a hero, and the moment which made it painfully obvious now that I am writing this and thinking more on this, that he was doing this for fame and literally nothing else. He almost fooled even me with his intentions, but there was nothing that could truly change this.

Once at the town hall, Ken walked up to the mayor and he was ready to tell him everything about it. But then he thought of something, which was something he had wanted to do, but forgot about doing earlier. He turned around to Taylor and handed him the jar. "Keep this with you while I am going to be gone for a moment. I am going to change into the suit." Ken said as he was holding his back pack, which just had his suit. He knew that it was a bad set up, but he had nothing better going for him, so he had to do it.

"Alright, I will just keep this in my pocket." Taylor said slowly, trying to figure if this was a good idea or not, and wasn't really all that sure if he was appreciating the fact that Ken was forcing him to do something like this, when he was probably going to get caught and accused of being the one who was going to try and destroy the entire fucking city. But annoyed, he placed it in his pocket while Ken ran to the bathroom, and Taylor was thinking about how this was going to be something Ken would pay for if this did turn out the way that he was fearing it would turn out.

Once Ken was in the bathroom, he looked around and saw that nobody was in the town hall bath room as well. So he took his shirt and pants off as fast as possible and got himself dressed up in just a matter of thirty to forty seconds, not even caring if there were a couple of loose ends, since he felt like he needed to get ready as soon as possible. Then lastly, he placed the helmet on his face which was the part that he needed the most to try and hide his face. Then he slowly shoved the clothes he had in his back pack and then he walked out of the bathroom with nobody looking at all.

"Alright, just hand that to me, and I will try and tell the mayor about this." Ken said and then Taylor handed him the jar while Taylor was thinking about how suspicious this had looked, and how anybody worth their job or their lives should have been watching what they were doing, and been more careful about what was going on.

Ken then walked right up to the mayor of the town and he was holding the jar as carefully as possible, trying not to drop it for fear of what could happen. "Mister mayor, I need to speak with you right fucking now." Ken said and then the mayor looked at Ken and then Ken was forcing himself to slightly, although not annoyingly, change his voice to maybe be about three percent deeper. "There are some people who are planning to destroy this entire town, and this jar is one of the things they planned to use to destroy it." Ken said and then slowly pulled out the jar.

"Look here, I don't know what you are telling me, and I don't think I should believe in you. After all, you have been going around and messing up things in the city really badly, and you think I am just going to believe what you tell me, and act like you are the greatest hero who has ever lived? I am not going to fall for that. I have a lot of business to attend to, and you being here is causing me to question my very own safety." The mayor said and then Ken was not really too sure what to say to that. It wasn't technically wrong, which was the worst part.

"Well, would you rather take a risk with me and have a chance where I am lying to you, and then you can throw me away as a useless vigilante when it is all over, or take your risk here thinking you will be safe, but knowing that there is a small chance that I am telling the truth, and then end up with your death? If you would rather believe that I am lying and that you are safe here and that nothing can happen to you, then I guess that you are a truly lost cause and I will leave you alone as you wish." Ken said, and he was starting to walk away, and the mayor looked at him.

"If you are telling the truth, then I can not risk things for the people in this hall. For that reason, I will go with you and let you have the chance to prove me wrong." The mayor said and then Ken nodded and the mayor started to walk towards him with his guards, all of which were thinking that this was a trick he had, and the other people in the hall knew something was going on, so many of them were leaving it.

As they were all heading off, Taylor joined at their side once again and he was ready to tell them some things that were possibly coming up. But that was not really what Ken was wanting to hear and the mayor had no care for petty teenage problems, so he was sort of indirectly wishing that Taylor would not speak on that and it took about three minutes for them to walk down and out of the hall.

Once out of the town hall, Ken and the mayor walked down a couple of streets as a bunch of people were standing just a few feet away to see what could happen, with Taylor and the guards at the side of Ken and the mayor. It took them a little bit of time, but they all reached the end of the neighborhood, which was about three blocks and then the town hall blew up right when Ken turned around to see what was going to happen, and he was hoping that he could save some people before they got caught in the fire.

"It turns out that you were not lying to me after all young man. I guess that maybe I should have given you more credit than I did. But that doesn't change what you are doing. You are still going around trying to defeat crime while pursuing it yourself. I don't know who you think you are, or how you think that we are going to allow that, but if you think that we are going to allow you to keep this up, then you are sorely mistaken." The mayor said and then Ken rolled his eyes.

"You know, I just saved your life, and all you are doing is just taking down on me and acting like I am the villain here? You know, I should not even have bothered. You clearly do not care what I do, and you don't care what I did do to help you out. So with all due respect, go fuck yourself." Ken said and that was one of the first times he out right just turned down somebody for what they had told him, and the man stared at Ken with utter disdain over what he was saying.

"If it makes you feel any better, I am grateful that you saved my life. I will let this problem slide for now. But since you are highly pursuing this time, letting it slip this once is a tiny favor that will mean nothing. Just tell me one thing, how exactly did you know what was going to be happening?" The mayor said as Ken thought he could use this as another chance to prove he was not the one who needed to be brought down, and that he was perfectly justified where he was at.

"I found it in a house where a couple of people were talking about the plans to destroy the entire town. I found that jar I showed you, and then I wanted to use it as evidence. Turns out that one jar was not enough to stop their plans though. I am going to be leaving though. I don't want to ruin this chance that you are giving me here." Ken said, still with his helmet and not fully exposing what he was like, he left the place and then the mayor stared at him trying to make his mind up on what happened.

"I feel like there is more to this than he is letting on. I am going to try and get to the bottom of this, and expose him for what he is truly trying to do." The mayor said and then when the mayor had said that, he looked at the burning down to the ground and ashes town hall and didn't respond to that. Ken knew what he did was wrong, and soon enough they were going to expose him for the fraud that he was, with no other way to go around it.

After the incident at the Town Hall, Ken was starting to take things a little bit more cautiously. After all, he wasn't dumb enough to believe that the threat that the town mayor made was a lie. He was actually in that smart enough to believe that the town mayor was telling the truth about not laying him off the hook the next time. It was even getting to the point where in a sense Ken was even starting to question a little bit of his mortality in a way. It was one of the first times and the first time since Wayside that he actually was starting to do so. And a strange sense, that was showing his growth on this whole matter. Which I guess was a little bit of a benefit for me.

But despite the and this sort of pause that he took from the whole crime fighting and everything, there was one incident around March or so where he behind my back or behind everyone else's back with the exception of Taylor that he decided was so important that he had to do it. I guess when he was explaining it to me way down the road I was sort of able to understand it. But at the same time I still felt like it was such a dumb idea, that I couldn't wrap my head around the fact that he was still doing this stuff. I thought he grew up and finally grew out of it.

Ken may try to claim that he kept up the hero fighting for a little bit longer, but that just simply was not the case. I don't blame him and if that I was kind of glad when he started to slowly get out of it but it seems like it was not going to be a permanent engagement. All the stuff that he said about him keeping that up up until March is either a way to show just how much I did not buy the subject and how much he kept doing it away from me or the fact that he was trying to make himself look more impressive to everyone else. Which means that either way, regardless of which one he was talking to, he was lying to either me or you it doesn't matter which one it was still lie either way.

I guess I have built it up long enough and I guess it is time to really kind of get down to it. But I am starting to think that you know where this is going.

This was all about in the end the man in the purple jacket. The guy has shown up once again, and Ken thought that it would be up to him and only him for some strange reason that he had to take this guy on all on his own. He was basically acting like one big damn hero by doing so. Which I guess was sort of close to what he had wanted to do to begin with so I'll just tell the story now it's going to be a long one.

The final thing he tried to do in this hero persona that I was aware of took place on March 12th, which was only about two months ago. After this, He said he was going to stop and for once, given the tone of voice he had, I actually managed to believe him on what be said. He sounded like he was finally over it for once. Like he truly saw the errors in his ways. So it was straight after school that day and he was walking around with Taylor on the way to his house.

"Do you think that you might actually drop out of school this year? That seems like a big move, deciding what you want to do with your life this early on. I mean, I have nothing against your plan, it is none of my business, but I am just curious." Taylor said and Ken nodded. He just could not get himself to keep up with this anymore, and it was not really something he desired to pursue anymore with how his life had gone.

"High school is just something that I don't really want to go through with anymore. I get that some people love it, and they bit their peak there, but I am not that kind of man. I feel like I was sort of at my lowest point here when I went to high school. I want to do something in my life I feel like could be proud of." Ken said, hoping his point actually made sense. It just was not for him and he had hoped people could be able to understand that.

"If you feel like that is just how it is, then I guess I can't be able to force you to feel any other way. I feel like getting through these four years will be worth it for me, but I am not you so I guess things would be different for you naturally." Taylor said and Ken felt like there was some value to take out of the fact at least one person was able to see his point of view. But before Ken was able to keep this talk up any further, he saw something, saw someone that made him stop everything he was thinking or doing.

Ken saw the man in the purple jacket about half a mile away from his house. As he was seeing this, he looked at Taylor. "It is time to bring the Concador back for one final mission. I have some business I need to attend to." Ken said and he started to walk up the stairs to our house, and Taylor was not too sure what to think and even less sure what to say while he started to follow Ken. He knew that this one of those totally serious moments and he didn't date question Ken in this one. After all, he was running the show.

Once Ken was in his house, he started to get right to looking around the area for his suit and the helmet so he can get ready for the fight. Taylor was just standing there watching him get his stuff ready and he was really tempted to try and get to know more about this whole thing. After about five minutes of looking around, he found the suit and the helmet so he can get ready for the battle with this guy. He could have sworn this guy was killed like three years ago, but here he was again, alive and looking if anything even stronger than ever.

Once outside with all the needed stuff on, Ken was staring at the man in the purple jacket right in the eye. He had a million questions, but was much too scared to ask even a single one. "Long time no see my old friend. I thought that we might never see each other again, but it seems that even you can't put off fate forever. You gave it a strong effort though. You almost did pull it off forever. Had you not done any of this save the world business, then you just might have been able to pull it off."

Ken balled his fists while Taylor was slowly remembering the wayside incident again and the conversations that took place there. As the memory was coming back, even he was starting to get a little bit of fear running through him. Ken started to walk closer to the man in the purple jacket to start the battle.

Ken then ran right to the man in the purple jacket and then he punched Ken right in the chest and then Ken fell down to the ground. Taylor was just watching in horror this whole time, not really too sure what the hell to process here. "You have not gotten any better than when we last saw each other. I can't believe that you have done all of this stuff, and you are still just as dumb as you were before." The man in the purple jacket went down to the ground and looked at Ken right in the face. Ken was starting to feel helpless as this was happening, and he felt like for once in this whole time he had been there, that he was actually facing his mortality. He thought that he had earlier when he had that conversation with Taylor, but this made that look like nothing. He didn't realize how that was until this moment, aside from perhaps the Wayside battle.

"I just haven't planned my strategy out before." Ken said and then the man in the purple jacket stood up and then he started to walk away. Ken slowly got himself up and then he ran up to the guy when he was looking around and then toppled him down to the ground and punched him three times in the face.

"Oh maybe you weren't lying after all. You have a stronger punch than you did before. I will give you that much." The man in the purple jacket said and then the guy grabbed Ken and then picked him all the way up into the air. They were holding Ken by the neck and Ken was starting to feel the choking was about to kill him, and Ken knew that there was no way that he was going to survive this.

Taylor then grabbed a can that was on the ground and then he threw the can right at the man in the purple jacket. Once he threw the can at them, the man in the purple jacket dropped Ken right to the ground and then Ken needed to take a few seconds to let his body process what was going on and the fact that he was feeling like he had died. Ken realized that Taylor was in trouble and then Ken yelled over at the man in the purple jacket. "Hey, leave him alone! I will do anything that you want me to do." Ken said and then the man in the purple jacket turned around to Ken.

"If you are telling the truth, then we must be getting ready for the battle of the century now." The man in the purple jacket said and started to walk towards Ken and then Taylor was still standing there, not really sure what was going on, and he was still processing his opinion on this whole thing. "You probably should have thought about what you said before you told me that. Now I am going to show you everything that I am planning on you to go through."

"I don't care. I am going to die eventually anyways. Might as well try and see if this will be tonight." Ken said and he knew that it would be pretty early to die, only one month after his sixteenth birthday. "I have nothing to live for anyways, so prove to me that what you plan really is out there." After Ken had said that, the man in the purple jacket smiled and they were showing the silver teeth that they had. It was probably the most human thing that the guy had, which was really kind of impressive.

He grabbed Ken and then after he had grabbed Ken, the two of them vanished all the way to the soccer field. Ken probably didn't really know why this place was such a big deal. But then the man in the purple jacket punched Ken several times all around his entire body. Ken was feeling some bruises literally come onto him and then then Ken kicked the man in the purple jacket right in the chin as hard as he could. Ken kicked the guy a few times not really sure when he stop but then the man snapped his fingers and then they faded away somewhere else.

Once Ken and the man in the purple jacket brought Ken down to the one section in town that showed a giant statue of a guy holding a sword looking like they were getting ready to do some meditation. "When you die, I am going to dispose you with your father. You seem like you are too focused on your own thing. I don't want to use you. Your brother seems like he is the better choice. I need to convince him that my plans are the correct one." The man in the purple jacket said and then when they had said that, Ken was holding the side of his chest and he felt like he was about to throw up.

"What the fuck are you talking about? Why the hell are you using Sam or me for your own gain?" Ken said and then when he had said that he started to walk closer to the man in the purple jacket who was just so much more powerful than him, and he was probably not going to be able to battle him ever. Ken then grabbed the guys arm and was trying to push it far enough to break the arm.

Ken saw the man in the purple jacket grabbing Ken's arm and it was obvious that they were going to do the exact same thing that Ken was going to do. The guy was starting to move around Ken's arm around a little bit and then Ken was screaming a bit when he felt a tiny couple of bones break under him. The man in the purple jacket stopped though and then Ken felt like the arm was a little bit broken, but not enough to make him not want to battle anymore.

"Your family is easy to fool. I fooled your parents enough and then when I fool you guys, I can make your entire family my own slave, and I will have the strongest family in the country under my belt." The guy said and then Ken had no idea what the hell he was talking about. He knew for a fact that they were not the most powerful family in the country, and the man in the purple jacket was extremely out of date if they thought that he was, or anybody else in there.

Ken grabbed the man in the purple jacket by their face and then slammed him down to the statue a couple of times and then the guy was starting to bleed a little bit. Ken felt like he was going to be able to win this thing after all but the man in the purple jacket snapped their fingers again and then when they snapped their fingers the group were in the middle of the street, and it was a street with a couple of cars passing by, and Ken knew that this was a fucking hazard to do this.

Ken then walked up to the man in the purple jacket and then punched the guy in the face several times, making the guy start to bleed more and more. As he was bleeding more than ever, he took out a knife from his pocket and then Ken wondered what this guy was doing. He slashed the knife right across Ken's chest which made Ken bleed a little bit on the chest, and then Ken went down to his knees. As he was doing that, he was panting a bit and then the man in the purple jacket was bringing his hands up and Ken was probably imagining this when he saw this but he saw the guy was forming some form of claws or something like that.

Ken then jumped at him and grabbed the knife from his left hand and now Ken was the one who was holding the knife. He brought both arms to holding the knife. There was no real reason for him to do this, and it was kind of silly battle pose to hold a tiny piece of a knife like that. But then he had an idea.

He grabbed the knife with just his right hand and then he aimed right at the chest of the man in the purple jacket. This was quite the crazy idea for him to do this, but he was a man of crazy ideas. Then with that, he threw the knife right at his chest and then the man in the purple jacket started to bleed off a little bit. He looked up and then he stared at Ken. There was a part of Ken that was thinking he had made the wrong choice by doing that and indirectly giving the knife back to him.

The man in the purple jacket started to get closer and closer to Ken, and Ken was thinking that he knew what this guy was going to do next. The man in the purple jacket did not even bother to go on and address the knife that was in his chest. This was making the guy sound and feel way more badass than he probably should have been giving of the impression to be. Ken was looking around for something and as he was looking around, he realized that there was nothing that he was going to be able to fight with. This made Ken groan in annoyance.

The man in the purple jacket grabbed Ken by the back of his shirt and then he did one finger snap and this brought them right to the top of the school that Ken went to. Then as they were on top of the school, Ken looked forward when the man in the purple jacket moved his face that way. "I have some great plans today that I am going to show you before you die. Don't even bother trying to fight it, I have this all figured out." The man in the purple jacket said while he was still holding onto Ken.

"I guess that you don't really know how to appreciate the great plan that I have. Maybe I should have to show you what the plan is, and then maybe you can finally know what is going on." The man in the purple jacket said and then he started to speak to Ken in a one handed conversation. "Ken, I plan on destroying all of the weak things that people have created. People have thought that they have gone so far. But in that, they have started to prevent the digital world from being able to come and integrate onto this world. I feel like the integration is the best method to bring the peace that people are searching for, but sadly many do not even know of the digital world, such as yourself. What I plan to do is try to bring back all of the hell mouths. You already destroyed one of them, but there are still many more. I plan on destroying all the main industrial places of each state, and use what is left from the ashes to help give me the evidence that I need to track down the next one." The man in the purple jacket said and Ken was confused as hell.

"Your plan makes no fucking sense. You are crazy." Ken said and then when he had said that, the man in the purple jacket just refused to say anything to that. This guy did not understand the point of the perfection he was coming up with, and that was starting to really annoy him.

"I can't believe that I ever thought that you were the best person for the job. You seem to be totally naive to any of the beliefs that really matter. You do not understand why I am doing this stuff, because you were not there when any of these things happened. You were not there to appreciate the progress we made all of those years ago." The man in the purple jacket said and then when he had said that, Ken thought about it.

"Just because things are not the same anymore doesn't mean that it is a bad thing. It just means that we have progressed further along in our lives. You should look at all of the good things that we have done in our time on earth since you were born. You need to stop looking at things with rose tinted glasses." Ken said and then the man in the purple jacket refused to say anything to that.

"When you are my age, you will be able to understand how I feel." The man in the purple jacket snapped his left hand fingers, which were the opposite of the jumping around ones. Then he dropped Ken and made ken watch helplessly like a fucking dog when the business tower that was several miles away exploded and was going from the top floor down. Ken held his breath and he could not believe the horror that he had soon. Ken looked up to look at the man in the purple jacket in shock, impressiveness, and annoyance.

"I will do anything in order to get what I desire. Even if I have to destroy everything that everybody else had worked for in order to get it." The man in the purple jacket said and then Ken stood up and ran over at the man in the purple jacket. Just not sure what to do, he grabbed a large metal pole on the ground and then the man in the purple jacket was laying on the ground and Ken was ready to give this guy justice. He kept pounding the pole onto the man over and over and over again.

Ken lost all track of what he was doing, and the more that he was doing this, the more that he was feeling like he was slowly becoming the villain of the situation. The more he was feeling like he had been giving this man the justice that he should have been given many years ago. "You are the worst burden that the world has ever been faced with, and you should not even be here now." Ken said and then when he was done pounding, he saw that the man in the purple jacket was still on the ground.

He was starting to walk away after he stared for a few seconds, starting to think that he had actually killed the man, and despite the fact that this is considered to be one of the worst things that somebody could do, he honestly did not give a shit at all. This man had killed everybody else, and killing this guy, even if it had to be repeated again later, would give him some feeling like he had actually brought a hint of justice to all those who had to fall to his evil plan.

But when Ken was about to get himself off of the roof of the school he turned around once final time to see just to make sure what he was considering what true. What he had seen was something that scared the utmost shit out of him. He had seen the man in the purple jacket slowly get up and he was showing all the flesh on his face, which was entirely Ken's fault, and while he was tempted to throw up at the sight, he forced himself not to.

The man in the purple jacket raised his hand up while making a peace symbol. "You may have won this tiny battle, but you have not won the great duel of tonight." The man in the purple jacket slowly brought his two fingers together, and he was getting ready to snap. Ken stopped and waited for them to do this, since he knew exactly what their plan was. The man in the purple jacket snapped their finger and Ken vanished away again but this time to the place that he should have been expecting right from the start. He was brought right to the destroyed building, to try and frame him for what he had done.

Ken was on the ground at first, and he was still wearing just a pretty must fucked up version of the clothes and helmet that he had earlier. He started to stand up and as he was standing up, he was looking around and he was seeing all of the police officers coming around and trying to help the situation around. With them was the mayor of the city and Ken was absolutely certain that they were fucked now.

One of the police cars opened and showed his father and they were walking alongside the mayor. Ken could not get himself to do anything. He was in a streak of utter fear. He knew that this was the true end of the run, and that there was nothing that he could do about this. His father saw the guy and then realized that this was their chance to take down this vigilante man who pretended like he was better than the law. He walked up to Ken slowly with his older age wearing him down and then he grabbed the helmet. As he was doing so, the entire police force stopped to see what was going on and the mayor looked like he was having the time of his life.

He opened the helmet up and took it off of Ken and he was looking right at Ken's face. He dropped the helmet and he was trying to comprehend what he had been seeing. "Ken, why did you do this?" His father asked and then the mayor was just so shocked that the guy was just a sixteen year old guy that he couldn't even go through with his threats. His father walked backwards and away, just trying to pretend as if he had not seen that at all.

"I did something that nobody else was willing to do. I was able to go beyond the boundaries of what was given to me. You do not realize how messed up this system of law is. I decided that I would change it, and here you are acting like I am this horrible human being. I did the one thing that everybody else should have done before me. If you wanted me to never do this, maybe you should have done better at the job yourself or fuck, maybe even just take care of me better and be there. You should not have had Sam and I so late!" Ken said and for the first time in his life, he had the balls to straight up yell at his father.

The mayor walked up and grabbed Ken by his arm and just walked him into the nearest police car. He threw Ken right into the car and then Ken looked up at them as the door was slammed and the car was being driven off to the police station where he would be questioned for what he had done.

Chapter Text

Chapter 15: The End of the Journal

Once Ken was inside the police station, Ken never thought for even a second that his father could have so much strength in him as he threw Ken right into the prison interrogation room and then sat down on the officers chair. When asked if anybody should be with him, he said that this was a father and son conversation and that he wanted nobody to get involved with this. With that, he stared right at Ken and he took a couple of moments to process his anger at the situation before he was ready to start slamming his son over what he had done and how awful this idea was.

"You know Ken, I was giving you a benefit of a doubt. I honestly thought that Sam was lying about you. Then I remembered what was going on with Your time at Wayside, and how much you were a trouble maker then. But I thought that maybe you had learned your lesson then. I thought that you had changed. But it seems as if you will never be able to learn." His father said, and Ken was just trying to process the fact that his father was this mad at him. Something he never could have even fathomed he would have seen in his life.

"I did something that nobody else would dare to do. And yet you are acting like I am the one causing trouble. I went out there. I did the hard work. I did something that should have been done a long time ago. And now you are talking to me like this. I am the hero of this situation, and honestly you should be thanking me for what I have done." Ken said and his father shook his head, wondering if Ken would ever be able to get it.

"You are my son. You are only sixteen years old, and you are acting like you are suddenly the greatest thing that this town has seen? You should have stayed in school. You should have done something, anything, that would have gotten you out of something like this. Now here I am, having to basically deal with the fact that one of my children is going out of his way to do the one thing that I was supposed to track down and stop from happening. You are doing some crimes while I am trying to stop them." Ken's father said and then Ken slammed his fist on the table.

"Oh my god dad, I have doe things for this city. I have been able to prevent a few crimes before they were even able to happen. You dare think that I am causing problems. I have been the one who has been able to prevent them, and here you are, acting like I am the one who is the problem. You know what dad, fuck this. I am so done with people just throwing me around and acting like I can do no good, everybody does that." Ken said and then his father shook his head and he was getting angry himself.

"I get that you must be annoyed here, and that you must think that you are better than everybody else here, but you can't go out of your way to take things into your own hands. There is a system that we have here, and you coming along here starts to ruin the system." Ken's father said as Ken pounded his head on his table a couple of times and then he held his hand up in annoyance. "I don't see where you can even try and justify this here. I thought that Sam was wrong, but knowing that Sam is right, and that you have done everything that we have not wanted you to do, I don't think I ever want you to leave the house again."

"Well yeah, great idea, then I won't be able to go to school or any of those extra events. That is such a great idea dad. Have you even been thinking about what I have been saying or what you are saying? This whole thing is a dumb and pointless debate, and you just need to let it go and let me go along and live my life normally." Ken said and then when he had said that his father stopped for a moment.

"I guess that neither one of us can get what we fully want. Tell you what Ken. Let's make a deal here. And I am only going to offer this once, and I am not going to move the deal around at all, since you should be glad that I am even willing to play with you on this at all." Ken's father had said and then Ken sighed and rolled his hand forward to just let the guy know that he was willing to listen to this idea.

"I won't tell your mom or Sam about this, and I will even not ground you for this, but I need you to promise me three things. First is that you give this up entirely, and I mean never pursue this again. Throw away anything and everything you have related to your hero persona. Secondly, I want you to actually try and have a real social life from now on. Just do the stuff that most people would consider normal. Just have a normal and real life. Something you should have been doing in the first place. Third and final off, I want you to get a job in the summer. Doesn't matter what or where but you are sixteen years old. You are an adult, even if the law does not want to admit it. If you are old enough to work, you are an adult, and when you're an adult, you need to work. And I want that to start as soon as the summer commences." Ken's father said and Ken sat back.

"And what if I say no to these ideas?" Ken asked and then when he had asked that question, Ken's father remained silent really not wanting to listen to this bullshit. "I mean, when I turn eighteen, you need to be aware that all of these choices will be just on my own then."

"Then I guess that I don't have any further use for you. Then at this point, you might as well not even be my own son. Please, if you want to have any credibility in this house and have any respect from Sam or I, you need to just agree with me here Ken." Ken's father had said and then after he had said that, Ken thought about it.

There was something that he hated about this plan, and the idea of giving up his independent freedom was the one thing that he had hated. But he knew for a fact that he was not going to get anything that he would have wanted if he was going to actually earn any respect from his parents. "I don't really have any choice after all." Ken said and then he sighed. Then he held out his hand and then he shook his father hand. "I am only doing this because I don't want all of my freedom to go away."

"I will take you home now. You better be holding to your end of the promise. I can't even begin to think about what I will have to do if I actually found out that you are not doing any of this stuff." Ken's father had said and then when he had said that, the two of them started to leave the car and then afterwards, they slowly went to their normal car. Ken was looking down at the ground the whole time, and he was at the shot gun seat.

"Just promise me that you will start to really boost up the security of this place. I don't want to make this in vain." Ken said and then after he had said this, Ken's father just stared at Ken and then he nodded slowly just to get the two of them home and to end this pointless debate. Then the two of them were inside of the car and then Ken's father started the car. Ken was looking out the window the whole time and then as he was doing so, he was just wanting to stay quiet.

Eventually, the two of them went home and then Ken just went right to his bedroom while Sam and their mother was looking around. Ken was still wearing the suit, just not the fucking helmet, which was still enough to give the evidence off. Ken was just staring at the ceiling and as he had stared at the ceiling he was thinking about how life was going to be later enough. He could not believe that he put himself into such a pointless contract that he was almost certain he was going to fail on here.

Later on, when Ken was going back to school, it seemed like he was sort of slowly getting back to his normal self and even I was starting to pick up that something must have happened then. I was so tempted to ask him what had gone on but I knew that he was going to pull the 'none of your business' card which would have been really annoying. So I decided that if he was going to tell me sooner or later, he would and I would be more than excited to hear what had changed him there, but I was going to bide my time on that whole thing.

When time had gone on and everything, I started to think that Ken was becoming the man that he was in the early section of his high school career, when he was just focus on getting something done and making it all the way through the rest of the school year. I knew that he had wanted to drop out really badly, and that he was probably going to do it at the time the school year was over, which I was almost certain that he was going to do.

I was tempted to try and pick up some conversations with Ken, but I doubted that he was going to go along with it, and I guess that maybe it was for the best. Maybe we did work together when we were sort of just not telling anybody else what was going on, and what had happened. I knew that he would be willing to talk to me when he was willing to, and when he was willing to do so, I guess that I really had nothing to do, besides just pursue my relationship with Susan, which had been going on for two years strong, and it seemed like the two of us were getting near the point where I was honestly tempted to ask her to marry me.

I decided that during the summer of that year, I was going to propose to her, and that was something that was going to make me very happy. I then started to get ready for work on the final few months of school, since I just wanted to graduate so badly and even now as I write this, I am only one month away. It is killing me, the wait for it to happen.

When it had been two weeks since the event, I walked to Susan and had another date with her, and after the date we had our most passionate sex yet. That was after I decided that I was going to propose to her very soon, and that was making me even more aroused to see my future wife, if all things went well. After we were done, I told her that I was planning on moving in with her, thinking that this was going to be something that would move both of us forward, and I guess that we will be able to really have a successful marriage then.

Ken was talking with Taylor when the whole thing was all but in the past. "I know I made a promise to my dad, and in hindsight I am glad I stoped, but I still feel like I could have done more to help this city out." Ken said to Taylor, doing a sort of final reflection of that period of his life. The two were still hanging out, but it seems that week by week, that they were slowly losing touch. I feel like in five months tops they will not be talking with each other at all anymore. Maybe Ken losing the one person who sort of supported him could get him to step up into the normal life.

"To be honest, it probably is for the best that you stopped all of that hero stuff honestly. It seemed to really take up a lot of your time and thoughts. It was starting to worry me a little bit. This is the better life. Taking it easy, and not fearing what may come up in the future. Just relax bro and think about how great life will be now that thus is over." Taylor said and Ken stayed quiet for a bit after that. He considered all of the stuff he gave up on in the last two years to do this.

"You know, I think I rely want to go to prom this year. It is only a month away, and it seems to be one of, if not the most hyped things in a typical school year. This better be up to the hype though, given how everybody talks about it." Ken said as Taylor was glad his friend was moving up in life. "Besides, it can be a good final thing to do before I drop out, which I am almost certain I am going to do."

Taylor knew that this was what Ken wanted to do, and that no good would come out of fighting him on this, since he was basically certain that he wanted to do that. "I guess you will go out to get you job afterward then. Just like how your dad wants you to do. What do you think that the job will be, if you don't mind me asking?" Taylor was still interested in the life his friend was trying to make, and was hoping it would be a decent life that can make up for the fact he was dropping out of school soon.

"At first, I will probably work behind the counter at the gas station in town, seems as if that can be a good start up job. Don't intend on staying there for too long though. Plus, I need to find something that can be good enough for me to keep an apartment. I have a lot of stuff to do of I want to live on my own and that is just the first step. I need to start a life, and I needed to work to earn it." Ken said, looking forward at what was ahead of him.

The next week, Taylor's parents found out about his involvement of Ken's hero life and decided they were moving out, in a two week notice. The only reason they still let them hang with Ken at all was knowing that Ken so called turned his life around, and they figured that nothing too terrible could happen to their 14, nearly 15 year old son. It was hard for Ken to take the news, who grew a small level of normal humanity with him, but thAt honestly made me hate him more with how he was going to sooner or later fuck that all up.

The next week, Taylor and Ken hung out at the school track. Ken knew Taylor would leave a week or two before prom, and that sucked. Taylor said he would just it at the school he was moving to. Ken thought it was kind if dumb to make him move when there was only going to be five weeks left in the school year after he left. From what Ken heard from Taylor, whatever his grades were when he moves will be his final grades and since there was only one month left, he would just go there to get to know people with no homework for the rest of the year and that it would start next year.

On Taylor's final week, Ken and Taylor did one final reflection of their life and he seemed like he already missed the place, knowing it would be a place he would probably never be allowed at again. Ken apologized for it all, but deep down he knew that would not cut it. He did feel sorry for what he did. But he still felt like he did the right thing. Then he headed off and said goodbye to Ken, and that was when Ken realized he once again had no friends at all.

Then Ken started to focus on his school life mainly because he had no other choice to, and as we talked a couple of times, I wondered if he was sort of seeing the big picture and not what he was sort of wanting to see, which was a fucking miracle in my eyes. I saw he wanted to just go to prom and have a nice was day with no big problems coming up.

At prom week, Ken was just focused on the next thing, which was getting a date for the prom and all that stuff, but I guess he knew that I was more focused about Susan since she was my date, and that he was forced to do this all on his own, which was sort of a dose if life was normal and if he lived a normal one instead of the insanity he was doing. I could tell he was slowly learning from this all. That made me think he would just go through a phase after all.

Now that we are starting to run out of space here, and I still want to deal with one final thing here, I am going to talk about this year with Misty, which was another thing that had happened that started to show me the anger that I start to have towards heroes. Not because of her, but because of what happened to her. I knew it didn't matter since she would die soon because she was a android, but this was too much for her, and it should have been something that happened to her peacefully and not in this brutal and horrible fashion.

It started when she was hanging out with Sheldon one time near the start of the school year, and he was wildly debating the idea of just telling the truth to her. He liked Misty a lot, and he didn't want to lose any friendship with her, but at the same time he knew, despite how much he did not want to admit it, that it really didn't matter all that much in the long run what he told her, since she was going to die soon enough. "You know Misty, you were telling me about that one guy that you had battled earlier, the guy who claimed to be your father." Sheldon said and he was placing his hand on his chin thinking about how much time he had to spare while he was trying to get ready for his work in college.

"Yes I do, although I would rather not remember it. Can you please tell me the truth on this? Why are you trying to talk to me on this, it feels like you are trying to tell me something that I wouldn't want you to tell me." Misty said and then Sheldon nodded because this was sort of the truth.

"I know that you don't want to hear this, and I know that you actually hearing this will sort of be like your worst nightmare in the world, but the guy wasn't really lying to you. I was told by your mother, that you were one of her androids. That you were a creation she made. Seven year life span, and you are on your last year. That is why I have bee hanging out with you so much lately. When I was trying to get ready to head off for college, I decided that I needed to not only fill up that but just try to get ready for your death." Sheldon said and then Misty looked at him and while she hated this piece of news, there was something in the way Sheldon said it that made her realize he was telling the truth.

"Sheldon, why are you telling me this? Why would my mother not tell me this? I feel like everybody is betraying me now. Why is any of this happening?" Misty questioned and Sheldon knew that he should not have said this. He was slowly ruining any sort of respect that Misty had of him. But he had to tell her the truth, no matter how hard that would have been.

"I just had to tell you the truth. I know that you really don't want to know this, and if I was a android myself, I guess I would not really want to know about this as well." Sheldon said and then when he had said that, he was starting to get a tear in his eyes. He just knew for a fact that this was probably going to be the very last time that he ever talked with Misty. "I am so sorry. If there is anything that I can do to make up for it, just tell me what it is."

"I don't really know if I will be able to have you make up for this. You have been lying to me for the last few months. There is no real way that you can say otherwise. Pretty much everything that you and I have talked about, we have been talking with you not telling me anything about the truth. I don't really know if you can be able to make up for this at all. Sheldon, please be honest with me now if you are not going to at any other time. Did you want to tell me earlier and was our friendship actually genuine?" Misty had asked trying her best to not get angry.

"I did want to tell you the truth. Honestly, I really did want to tell you no matter how it went. But I decided to take the leap of faith now since I knew that no matter what I told you, it really would not matter all that much. I do believe that our friendship was real. I would not lie to you on that. There is no reason to lie to you on that regard." Sheldon said and then Misty was trying her best to remain silent.

"Misty, you got to believe me. I have no reason to lie to you. I wasn't really even lying to you. I just wasn't giving you the full story. That isn't lying. Please don't try and pretend that this is lying." Sheldon had explained and then when he had explained this, Misty was slowly taking a bunch of deep breaths and Sheldon felt like he was digging up his metaphorical grave as he was doing this.

"I want to believe you. After all, you and I have been friends all this time. But I don't really know if I am able to believe in you after all of this. I want you to tell me that everything you are doing is for the right cause. I want to talk to my mother about this, but I doubt that she would tell me the truth. I guess if for nothing else, you at least had the balls to be honest about it with me." Misty said and then Sheldon was trying to make sure if that was a compliment or a negative.

"Don't get angry at Sam or Brad. They are not the ones that choose to tell you this, and we were just as forced into this for the same reason that I was. Trust me, I don't feel like they deserve to be condemned for something that your mother will not tell you." Sheldon said and then after he had said that, Misty was wondering how many people knew about this.

"Please Sheldon, how long have you guys known about me? Like you, Brad and Sam? How long have you guys been aware of this part of me, and just been hiding it from me? If you promise to tell me the truth from now on, I just might consider forgiving you for all of this." Misty said and then when she had said that, Sheldon considered things for a little bit and he was nodding, figuring that there was nothing wrong with just telling the truth now. Sheldon sort of realized that he really did make the wrong choices here, but these choices were the only thing that he had felt like he was doing was actually right, and he was not going to take it back because of that reason.

"I promise you, that no matter how hard it may be and how much I may be tempted to keep something back, from here on out, I will tell you the truth. There is no reason that I would tell you something and not do it." Sheldon decided that there was basically no point of return here, so he was going to have to just go deeply into this whole thing. Misty was looking at Sheldon, trying really hard to decide if he was telling the truth or not. Eventually, she decided that he was and nodded.

"I don't like this Sheldon. But I trust you enough to believe that you were doing this just because you felt forced to. Promise me one thing though, if there are any further developments here that come up, then you must let me know right away. I need to know if Brad and Sam have something against me, so that way I can be ready for the worst." Misty said and Sheldon decided to nod slowly.

"I promise Misty. I will not keep anything from you from now out. Well, I think that maybe it is time for us to head off now." Sheldon finally finished this up and he started the car. "Misty, want to hang out a couple more times before I head off for college? I promise to stay here for the rest of the year. To get some funds for the school from various jobs, but I still haven't even gotten enough to get a first term here." Sheldon kept on going and then afterwards, he and Misty went quietly for a little bit.

"So, I know that it probably doesn't even matter anymore now, but I am still going to go on and ask you now. Is there any possible chance that you might pick me still over Brad? I know that you probably don't care anymore, and that it really is not something that matters at all anymore, but I just needed to get to know the truth." Sheldon asked the question, fearing the worst but also hoping for the best at the same time, and he was just wanting to get the true closure no matter what would matter.

"I don't really know what I am going to do now honestly Sheldon. I am just needing a lot of stuff to do right now. I have to really get used to what is going on. Just drop me off at my home, and I will take the time to process this whole thing." Misty said and Sheldon nodded. Soon enough, Sheldon dropped Misty off at her school and he took one final glance at her as she walked inside of her house and then he placed his left hand on the wheel and then he was ready to just start to place this all behind him forever. Then with that, he started to drop off.

About three or four days after this, when she had some time to truly process this whole thing, Misty was talking with her mother about the truth, and she was just wanting to know all of the details. "Mom, I really want to talk to you right now about something. Something that one of my friends had told me earlier." Misty said when her mother had taken a moment off of her work and then her mother looked up kind of annoyed and she was wanting to tell Misty off but when she saw the glowing look in her eyes, she decided that maybe it was better to just keep it inside and partake with her for the time being.

"What is it that you want to talk to me about Misty? I don't really have all that much time to take a break, so I am going to just give you about five to ten minutes here." Misty's mother had said, and then as she had said this, Misty sat down and then the two of them were getting ready to have the worst conversation of their life, and Misty was starting to think that this was a terrible idea after all.

"I was told by my friend Sheldon earlier, and he told me something really important. He had told me that I was one of the androids that you had created, and that I only had seven years to live, and that I only have less than a year left to live." Misty said and then after she had said that, Misty stared at her mother and her mother stared at her back and they had a short term staring contest and then Misty's mother nodded, taking a short moment to admit the truth.

"Yes, you are an android and yes you have lived about six of the seven years of your life so far. I know that you probably feel terrible for this now, and that you probably did not want to know this, but I do not really feel like I should be a able to justify my creation to you. After all, you are something that I did in order to keep up the funds in order to even live at all anymore." Misty's mother had said and then when she had said that, Misty decided that she was going to keep this thing up.

"Mom, I don't understand this. Why did you not tell me this from the start. At least I would have been aware of this stuff. But then here you are, just basically admitting to me that you are only just doing this for money now. I am only made just for your profit. Who is even your boss, but what are you doing now? What is even the point in letting me even live anymore?" Misty asked and then her mother stood up and was walking away.

"If it makes you feel any better, I will tell you this, and I truly mean it when I say that you are the best child that I have made. You are my greatest creation, and the only one that I can say that you are a true human being." Misty's mother told her and while that did made her feel better for a split second, she started to think that she was just trying to get her to be used for her own purposes now. Misty started to get back to her annoyance and she was wanting to know more information about this whole thing.

"Mom, please just try to find some way to give me more life. I want more life. I want to be able to live like normal humans. I want to do something that can actually matter here. I will be willing to accept the fact that I am an android, even if I absolutely hate to admit that, but please just try and do your best to give something to me, and maybe I will be able to put this all back in the past here." Misty said and her mother was wanting to break all her pencils, as her request was making her work stop, but then when she heard the desperation in Misty's voice, the desire for any amount of life, she decided that maybe, for her sake, that she would try to actually pull this off after all.

"Alright, I will try my best to find a way to increase your life. I make no promises here. I will try though, even if that turns out to not work in your life time. Even if it leads to your death first, then I guess that maybe it can be used for future androids beyond you for my later research." Misty's mother had said and then Misty started to walk away, just wanting to pretend that there was hope after all, something even she knew wouldn't happen.

Once Misty was inside of her room, she was just laying face down on the bed of her bedroom and she was starting to cry a little bit. She had been doing this every single night after she had started to find out and slowly accept the fact that she was an android. She was wondering what this whole sick joke was, and what her mother would really be getting out of all of this. This whole idea of her being a fake human being, something that honestly didn't even deserve to live at all.

The whole idea of her mortality was something that was so fragile to her that when it was literally so in front of her face that it made all of her other superhero problems seem like a very small deal in comparison. As this was going on, Misty was worried that she was going to die before her last year was coming up, or when she had lived her whole last year, but then it would turn out that this whole thing was just a false hope and that she would not get the extra life that she so truly desired.

Her mother was staring outside of her bedroom and then as she was staring outside of her bedroom, Misty's mother was starting to really get sad thinking that she really did set up the closest thing she had to a child to certain death and that she really only had a year or so to get used to the death of her daughter. She was truly going to try to extend her life, but she knew that this was not going to happen, but it was better than nothing at all.

This sort of created a strange, silent understanding of the two of them that showed that things were really more of feasible concept to understand than they had really imagined that it would have been. Neither one of them thought that they would be able to understand each other fully, but this whole thing for the first time ever was sort of able to start to drive them closer with each other. Misty was wondering if Sheldon could be the only one she would be able to trust, if she can trust him even at all.

"God, if you are real, then please just give my mother your blessing to make progress on this project that would further drive my life to being extended." Misty had said and then after she had said that, both of them were out of eye sight and Misty didn't even know that her mother was there, and honestly did not even care all that much after all. But soon enough, she was given her next saving of the day that made her sort of glad that she had android powers after all.

It was a week or two after the whole incident of Misty talking to her mother about the whole idea of getting new life when this happened. She was hanging out with her friends and by that point in time, she had pretty much forgotten about the whole thing by that point in time. By the whole thing, meaning the controversy of the event and everything. Misty was just sort of trying her absolute best to just live the normal life, just trying to have some friends and boosting the friendships that she had with Brad, Sheldon, and I that was sort of having a rough point in time, but she had seemed to make everything sort of all in the past.

She was in the middle of the school day, just having fun and she was talking with me. "You know, I think that in the end, Sheldon may have actually made the right choice in the end of the day. I guess that maybe he was just scared of how I was going to react to this whole thing, which I think to some extent, was actually a valid fear considering how I end up reacting to this whole thing. I have nothing that I could really do about this now. I am just hoping that my mother can find a way to increase my life span here."

"Don't worry about this whole thing Misty. Just find a way to make this last year or so really important. Just do your best here, and maybe despite your short life, you will be the one who will go down in history as the greatest hero of this town. Even better than that one that is named The Concador." I said, being one of the only two people who knew about Ken at the time, the other one was Taylor at the time.

"I am really worried about that though. What if I do something that will get me killed? What is everything that I am even working for, and will it even be worth it honestly? I feel like honestly none of this is actually worth it anymore." Misty had said and then I was starting to look forward. Before any of this could even keep up and before this subject really made any sort of sense, there was something that made both of us stop what we were doing at the very spot trying to comprehend what was going on.

There was a giant robot that was walking across the street, and it looked like they were trying to destroy some of the houses in the town a little bit. Misty looked at me and then she did something I was not prepared for. She hugged me and then she walked out of the car. After she was outside of the car, she stomped her foot on the ground a couple of times, which made her feet start to set off and she was flying all the way over to the robot to go on and fight them.

As Misty was landing on the street she was looking at the robot, to sort of process what she was seeing. "What are you?" Misty asked and then she was holding her left hand forward and she was getting ready to attack this thing. The robot turned around and they were coming closer and closer to Misty and then Misty fired some sort of laser out of their hands and then the robot was hit in their chest, which made Misty feel like she could be able to actually have a chance on this.

The robot came forward and closer to Misty after that moment of shock and then Misty was kicked in the chest and then she slid down on the ground and then Misty felt like her back was hurting really badly. She was standing up and then she was moaning in pain and then Misty started to charge her feet forward again and then she flew right to the face of the robot and punched them a few times in the face, making the robot hurt, or hurt as much as they could when they were a robot.

Jenny was taking a few steps back and as she was taking the few steps backwards, the robot was walking back a little bit and then Misty was seeing that this robot was in pain. Almost like they were indeed human. Which was really strange for Misty to consider, since this thing was even less human than she was, and she was wondering how the hell this thing was even created in the first place. Misty started to run to the side as the robot was starting to ride right towards Misty and she was wondering how the hell she was even going to be able to destroy this robot, if she was even able to do this at all.

Misty placed both of her hands together and then as she was doing this, the attack started to get really charged up and she used both hands to create a really giant beam to hit the robot which was starting to create a small hole in their chest, which showed that Misty was starting to win this battle. As I was watching this from the far out distance, I was thinking that she had actually got a chance to do this thing after all. The robot started to shot a bunch of bullets on their hand and the bullets were hitting the ground and when there was a ton of them, there was a couple of small holes that were being created at the ground.

The robot actually managed to hit Misty a couple of times on their left arm, and then Misty yelped a little bit as they had done this and then Misty was walking along on the street and then Misty held up just their right arm and then they were lowering their hand down and then the hand created something that looked like a small missile and then the robot was hit right in the face, creating a bunch of wires that were being exposed to this whole thing.

The robot flew to Misty a little bit and then they were starting to choke Misty a little bit, and then Misty was able to defend herself still and then she punched the robot a couple of times and then the robot was starting to show more and more of their creation and pieces of bits and Misty was thinking that soon enough, she would be able to destroy this thing and the battle would be won, and she would be able to go down as a hero once again, after taking a sort of short term hiatus on the whole thing.

The robot started to take a couple of steps back when Misty put her in pain left arm behind the robot and started to shot the robot in the back a couple of times which was starting to expose them even more, showing that this thing really did not have all that much of a mortality, and that sooner or later, this thing was just going to die now.

Misty got up right when she realized that she was the only one who was able to take this thing out and that she had a moment to do so. Misty started to fire at the robot a couple of times at their chest and everything was just really going in her favor, but she had thought that she would be able to find the weakness soon enough. As she looked around a little bit, she saw that there was a giant red button at the center of their chest being exposed. Misty had a feeling that this was needed to take the thing out.

Misty started to run closer and closer to the robot and then the robot punched Misty right in the chest three times but then Misty grabbed the button right at the center of their chest with her decent arm and then she slowly started to pull the button out, and that the robot was starting to fall down a little bit. Misty was holding the button after she had taken the whole thing, and then the robot was staring at their chest and then they started to fall down to bits and then right before they had fallen down fully, they had exploded and then Misty had realized that she had won the battle fair and square.

Afterwards, Misty put up her thumb at me and then she started to walk towards me slowly. I drove up a little bit and then when I was about ten feet away from her, she walked right inside of the car and then put in her seat belt. "I need to get some arm cast on my arm. Or at least some form of a cover. I really hate having a huge hole right in there." Misty said and then I started to drive off and that was her first huge victory in a long ass time.

After that had all gone on and everything, Misty talked with Brad a little bit and she was sort of really thinking about the relationship that is going on. She was wondering if this really was the right thing for her to do, or if perhaps she had made the wrong choice on this whole thing after all. Which was terrible for her to feel that way, but it was true that Sheldon was much better to her than Brad was, and he was the one who had told her the truth on this whole thing. "Brad, I have been thinking about this for a while, and I was wanting to really figure out what our stand is right now." Misty said to Brad, and as she had told him that, Brad was really confused on what the hell was going on.

"What do you mean? Is it because of the whole reveal about you being a android and that you are starting to really consider everything about your life now?" Brad had questioned and then when Brad was starting to pick this whole thing up, Misty was nodding and then Brad looked down and he was just remaining silent to this whole thing, fearing this whole thing.

"I just don't really know what to do anymore, I don't really know what answers are right anymore. I really hope that you understand why I am saying this right now. It is extremely hard to be taking the steps of my life without really knowing that I may have made all of the wrong choices on this whole thing. I hope that you that this makes sense. If you were something that you were convinced you never were, you would be thinking about your entire life now. I don't want to be doing this, and I never thought that I would be doing this, but now I am sort of forced to do this exact same thing right now." Misty was explaining and Brad put his arm over Misty's shoulders.

"As much as I hate to admit this, I really do understand where you are coming from. I was afraid that this day would come ever since I had found out the truth of what you were like, and that always made me realize that all of these things were going to come sooner or later. But Misty, please understand that no matter what, I will be there for you, and that nothing else will change that, even though you are a android." Brad explained as Misty was just silent for a good bit.

"Sheldon has been there for me. Taking care of me. He had the balls to tell me the truth. I feel like I may have made the wrong choice in hindsight, and I don't really know how else to handle this now. I hope that you don't take any offense to this statement." Misty said and then as much as Brad was hating this deep down inside, he would be naive to not see where her point of view was here.

"Sheldon is a nice guy, and I feel like maybe in hindsight you should have picked him instead. At least in theory. But that is not what happened. You ended up picking up, and because you had picked me, I am going to do my best to help you out and make sure that you are able to have the best final year of your life, as I am possible able to do here." Brad had said and then when he had said that, Misty was really trying her best to tell herself that this would work.

"Honestly Brad, I am really wanting to believe you here. I am going to go with you for the time being, but I don't really know how long this is going to last in the full on term. I guess in a year or so, none of this will really matter anymore. I just really am going to take this whole thing slowly, which I guess is the only thing that I can be able to take it now. It is the way that makes the most sense, and it is the most human way to do this." Misty had said and then Brad just remained silent.

"I have nothing better to do besides just to stay here right now. One of these days, I am going to really try and understand what it means to be a android. I still don't really know if I fully get it. I don't really think I will get it ever. Please Be able to understand that I will be there and I want to be the best boyfriend for you. I get that this is really hard for you to be able to get on board for, and I am able to sort of see where you are coming from, but there is nothing that we are able to do about this now." Brad said and then Misty was just trying her best to believe him, but she was just not able to at all.

"Brad, I am just so scared. I have too much to do, and so little time to do it. I need to save this city, and there is nobody else that can do it. Maybe that guy who called himself the Concador, but he is the only one who might be able to do it. Everybody else is sort of out of the option. I would not trust anybody else now." Misty said and then Brad did something she was not prepared for.

Brad just kissed Misty on the lips, and everything she was thinking stopped right here, and she was starting to sort of let the kiss sink in, which was pretty awesome, but she was just sort of doing her best to let it sink in. This was the best kiss that she had with Brad so far, and the passion and intensity to it was making her realize that Brad meant every single word of it so far.

They kept it up for a bit, and she was really starting to just let things wash away, and let the fact that Brad was truly there for her take over her emotions, which were so filled with confusing emotions that even having one easy one to follow was a really important one for her. After the kiss had been broken off, Misty was staring right at Brad and she was wondering what made him want to do that right then and there. Which was hard for her to feel that way, but she still did feel like there was anything wrong with wondering what caused such a out of nowhere and somewhat rare moment for Brad.

"Brad, I really enjoyed that, and everything, but can you explain what caused you do that?" Misty had said and then after she had said that, Brad was thinking for a moment and as he was thinking about this, he was sort trying to figure this whole thing out, not really too sure what he had really gotten himself into and all that stuff. He supposed that he should just tell her the truth.

"I was just sort of doing it on instinct. I didn't really know what I was doing, and I just jumped right into it. I just couldn't really keep it inside any longer." Brad said and then Misty nodded. Despite the fact that it was totally out of nowhere and made no sense, she would not be able to help but enjoy it, thinking that there was anything wrong with her getting something like this from her boyfriend. She knew in moments like these why she had chosen Brad after all, even if it was hard to really remember every once in a while.

"I will not go away until the day that you die. I will be there for every final day, and there is nothing that we can do about that Misty. You better get used to it now rather than later." Brad had said and then after he was telling Misty this, she nodded and she was starting to enjoy that confession a bit. "Just remember that no matter what else comes up, I will be there for you. Sheldon and Sam will be there to, but I am the one that is going to be there for you the absolute most out of all of them."

After Brad had said that, the two of them started to keep themselves together, remembering the promise that they had made with each other, and the stuff that they had worked together on and everything. But that was sort of over taken soon enough, when Misty had another battle that she had to deal with, although unlike the robot one from earlier, this one was much easier for her to win and she had a idea what she was needed to do during that battle.

The next battle had all started when Misty was seeing a giant light in the sky. There was something about the light that was making her think that maybe there was a battle that was going to be coming up very soon. It was a bit later in the school year, around the day that she had died and she was getting near the end of her life. Her and Brad had been going very well, she and I have done a few things like go and hang out at the skating park and everything, almost as if I was viewing her as a second sibling, a younger sibling or something like that. I was leaving high school that, I should say this year as well. As this was happening, I was wondering if there was something going on with Sheldon and everything.

"I need to figure this out. I wonder if this is related to that guy in the purple jacket." Misty had said, and then she had looked at me while she had said that and then she walked out of the car. Before she was done though, she had two people that she had to visit. "I think we have about ninety minutes or so before the final battle had started."

"Misty, before you go, I have something to tell you." I said and then when I had said that, Misty looked at me and she was staring directly at me, wondering what I did have to tell her and where I was heading on all of this. "Please be safe. I know that your life supply is running out soon, but please be safe. I want you to go peacefully, not in a round of violence." I said and then when I had told her that, Misty started to nod slowly and then I told her off.

As Misty was alone, she knew that this was going to her her final mission. She knew for a fact that it did not really matter what he had done. She knew it really did not matter who knew what she was like, or who she was or anything like that. She was going to confront her mother on the idea of getting extra life, and then once she was done, she was going to give Sheldon the long deserved present that he had been waiting for this whole time.

Misty had flown very fast and she was trying very hard to reach her mothers house. Right when she reached her mothers house though, she thought about it. She shook her head, finally accepting her fate once and for all. Then she decided that she needed to have a tiny thing resolved, and put it to rest once and for all. She realized that she had one final thing that she had to do. She needed to go on and visit Sheldon, to realize that there was something she should have done here to begin with.

Misty was flying on her way over to Sheldon, not wishing to tell anybody the truth of what had happened here, and she was worried that if somebody found out the truth, they would get really angry and then throw her away forever and while she knew nothing could change this, it was still too much for her to really handle. She didn't want to lose Sheldon, Brad and I. But as she was flying, Misty landed on the front door of Sheldon's house.

She knocked on Sheldon's door and then after she had knocked on the door, Sheldon arrived and then she was wondering what hell he was going to say here. Sheldon turned to the side and then Misty walked inside and then as she was inside of the house, the two of them walked to Sheldon's room and then Misty closed his bedroom. She was ready to give him the one final thing that he had deserved. Brad may not know this, and I just only knew because Sheldon told me, but in the end, she had made her choice. She choose Sheldon, even if it was only for a few moments.

So once Misty and Shelton were in their bedroom and they were all alone, Misty was ready to get right to the action. Sheldon was way confused what the guv was going on but he knew that whatever happened it would be for his own personal gain so he would go with it. He hoped if for nothing else he could touch the boobies of Misty and that it would be very exciting. " I was wrong to have chose Brad before you, but I seem to have been too scared to take the true step that I should have taken all of those months ago. But I can no longer afraid, I want to go right into it. I just hope that you don't mind that we're probably not going to get a full thing out of this, and I am going to die soon."

Sheldon was just so glad that Misty was accepting him at all, that he didn't even care if it was only going to be a short period of time or not. So he just looked up at her one final time, as if to make sure that she actually was understanding what her choice was and she was actually agreeing with this idea. Cuz he didn't want to get her into something that she would regret on the final hours of her life. So he had asked her and she nodded. She was very firm on this idea.

As this was happening, Misty was taking her shirt off. This was my Shelton was basically going off of what he had read in the books in order for him to have any idea what he was supposed to do. And if I had to kind of felt a little bit silly that he was put in this position at all, much less with an Android in the first place. But he was wanted to keep that part out of the story or when anyone wanted to hear his great first-time experience. Although he would personally not want to admit that he had waited till such a old age to do it. After all, he was already getting nearly into his first year of college. So he was definitely pretty late to the party. Most people would have lost it by 16 and he waited like an extra two to 3 on top of that. Or I mean I was I'm graduating high school this year and I'm about 19 or so, holy shit you can tell I'm getting tired, considering how messy some of these sentences and words or getting, but back to the point. And since he had already graduated high school last year that would technically me that he was 19 probably getting closer to 20, so in reality, was at your point like four years more.

Misty grabbed his shirt so they took it off, and this was when Sheldon knew that it really was the big deal and as a result he instantly got into it taking the rest of hers off while she did the same with him and they just simply had a good time. I don't want to talk about my friends or say experience inside be really weird so I'm just going to leave it at that and you get the point anyway so it's not like it really matters.

So after Missy had the best night of her life, she looked at scholten once again while he was on his bed looking like he was in pure ecstasy. She smiled, knowing that once and for all he was the right choice. But regardless she had a mission she had to fulfill, so she headed out of his house, never to see him again. Both of them knew that this was going to happen so when Misty was out of the house and she was on her way to the battle Sheldon went outside of the bed and walk to the edge of his window to watch as she was going away. As he was doing so he was on the near of the verge of the tears.

Misty had wanted more out of her final conversation with him, but in the end she knew that she had overstayed her welcome and that she needed to get right to the mission. She spent a few minutes on a couple spots around town either taking one last glance at them for the end or just sort of Scouting Around to see if maybe she could find some information about the enemy.

But then, she saw that there was some big giant blue robot going down the streets. Not just a big giant blue robot but it had missile launchers on it it was like a hundred feet tall it wait like seven hundred thousand pounds it had written all over it and it was going to destroy her. But missing you that she had to fight and keep on going or else the world will be on steak. As Misty landed on the ground she put her left hand up towards the robot and she was almost ready to do a yellow of Justice to get them to understand that she was the hero. But she knew she didn't have the time to waste for that, and that she needed to find something to distract the robot destroying anything else. Or else like an entire Burger Joint would go down like like make the McDonald's of the town would be destroyed.

So, she she found a lake like broken off like tire from a car and with all of her might threw right at the robot and the robot just looked right down at her and had like a moment of just like a staring contest with her. The robot raised their right foot up and was ready to stop Misty. But Misty sorta kinda figured out that this is what it was going to go for, and because they anticipated that movement was ready to come up with a counter-attack.

As she was trying to come up with her Counterattack, she was just trying I'll set the same time to just survive the moment. Which was like two very hard things going on at once making this whole thing and even bigger challenge than it should have been, if this really even should have happened in the first place which in all reality it honestly should not have been. The robot was about to stop right at her but she jumped aside and away just at the perfect timing to make sure that she really did not get stopped and wants she had that perfect moment she did her flying thing and flew right up to the upper leg of the robot, which is honestly the most she could or actually do given how big the thing was.

Once she was on top of that robot she kept punching at it and was looking for a site opening or weakness to get into it. She saw a very small opening that showed a bunch of wires so she took out her right hand and hit it a couple times and after she had hit it a couple times she saw a small red laser that was coming out of her middle finger so she use the laser on the wires it was slowly cutting the wires and half with the laser that she had. It was the best idea that she had at that moment, hoping that it would be able to make the robot stop moving at least a little bit or at the very least make the movements more haphazard and as a result give her a little bit of the advantage in the overall battle.

But that did not really look like it was going to be the plan as the robot picked her up with their left hand right afterwards. And it looked like she had gone her fair share of beating even more than she ever had up until that point in time. She even had to take a little bit of time to get herself up afterwards.

Once she had stood up and she was ready to take on the robot again the robot was raising the right hand to just crushed her. Misty flew right behind a car and she was doing that as a way to give her a couple minutes to really figure out what her strategy was actually going to be on this.

But before any of that could really go on the robot pick up the car and threw it right at a huge building so Misty flew by in order to stop the car from hitting that building which added a few more seconds on to the battle and a little bit more stress and extra effort that she had to put into the whole thing. As a result she stood up and threw the car right back at the robot and as it hit the robot it did a small amount of damage but not really enough to make it look like that she was now going to suddenly be the one who's going to come out on top or really change the outcome all that much.

Misty saw that most of the street was basically destroyed, and that this robot really did have the advantage over her here. The robot grabbed Misty with both of their hands which led to the girl yelping in pain and she could feel some of the pieces in her breaking, which was sealing the idea that she was going to die in the next day or two at the best. In all reality, she actually only really had mere minutes and once thusvduel was over, she should just accept the idea,of being buried. She was hoping Sheldon would be there for the funeral, as well as Brad and I to a lesser extent.

As the robot was putting more and more pressure, Misty was bleeding and the blood drops were going on the ground and it was breaking not only her on a physical level, bit also on a level on where she could be able to properly think at all. The robot threw her down and she slid for about six seconds until she hit the edge of the side walk. Misty was utterly broken, only able to function on a simple level. Most, if not all of her body parts showing to the public to make the android fact of her even more obvious.

Before she could do anything, the robot grabbed Misty's left arm and slowly ripped it off. This had nearly created enough blood loss to kill her all alone right there. Misty stood up slowly as she fired a few bullets at the eye of the robot, making them lose their right eye easily. This did give Misty a small opening to keep going. She now had a real opening in order to win. She kept firing hundreds, probably two hundred in all bullets to destroy more of the armor of the robot. The damage was fractional, and really while that did not do much to change anything, it was enough for more bigger attacks to come right in there.

Misty grabbed a huge chunk of the robots armor and forced it open. She then placed her hand directly above the wires and used the torch finger to set those on fire as well. Then she stepped back and once the fire started, she fired the one missile she had to do the final part of the job to destroy the robot. After they were destroyed, Misty looked down and saw how much they had been damaged and how little of a chance they could survive another battle.

Misty was watching the guy in the purple jacket walking closer and closer to Misty, and she was feeling like the robot was nothing compared to this man. Misty looked around, hoping he would not see her but that idea was thrown away when she saw him right in front of her and he was smiling. As if seeing her in pain was the funniest thing he has ever seen in his entire life. He grabbed her by the mouth and picked her right up, all the blood was coming out of her and she felt like a beaten up bitch while he was staring at her.

As the man in the purple jacket was ready to talk with her, Misty was not really all that sure what to do. All she could do was pretty much just stand there and watch as this guy pretty much just ruined her, and she didn't really know what exactly to do there. "You don't really understand what it means to not get in the way of my plans. My plans are much more important than your life, and I can end it at any moment, and then you will go down as a useless piece in the whole grand scheme of the puzzle, like you never even were born in the first place." The man in the purple jacket was saying and he was putting his hand right on her chest and he was doing a little bit of a dragging in there.

Misty was groaning and trying to form words out of her mouth, trying to say something to make this guy stop what the fuck he was doing, but deep down Misty knew that there was no way that this was even going to remotely happen. "I love how you are trying so hard to justify your pointless existence, but I suppose that you just don't really seem to get it. I guess that now that you are going to die soon, you will be fine hearing what my plan is. After all, nobody is here at all." The man in the purple jacket was saying and Misty was gulping really hard. He wad dragging his hand a little bit closer.

"I plan on uniting two different worlds here. The digital world, and this place called earth. When I bring both of these worlds together, I am going to be the supreme ruler. But I guess that is a little bit of a boring part that I don't really blame you if you don't care for. I don't really care about the after math details now." The man in the purple jacket now had some of his hands physically inside of Misty, and Misty was feeling the blood coming out of her.

"Honestly, you may be wondering how I am going to do this. Well, I need to get the androids to wok with me. That man who you killed last year. He was one of my top advisers on the androids. His name is Devon. He was indeed your father. In a technical sense. he just came up with you and gave some of his memories to you. Trust me, Devon had a full life. He was a true human. So much of a life that he can give a memory to all of his androids that are all different." The man in the purple jacket dug even deeper and all of the main fingers were slightly inside now.

"When Devon died, I was able to get his business. So a in way, I have to thank you for killing daddy. You did something even I didn't really have the balls to do. So with that, in a way, you helped me." The man in the purple jacket was now just having nearly half of his fingers in there.

"I will take the younger brother of your friend Sam, and when I grab him, I am going to have a great use for him. I am going to send him to the digital world and in a way, force him into a huge conquest of taking this world over. But that will only be a part of the puzzle. The other parts of the puzzle will slowly take over. I need to get this country to fall under my grace. Convince them to work with me, and I will have all of the files to work with." The man in the purple jacket pretty much had all of their fingers inside of the body of Misty, and Misty was having like a gallon of her blood coming out. She was basically dead, but he was keeping some of the blood in to keep a tiny amount of life in.

"Brad and Sheldon will be too broken to stop me from my plans. They will hardly notice that your plans did nothing in the long run, and that if anything, they helped me." The man in the purple jacket had his thumb in her body now. Misty was slowly having her eyes close now.

"It must hurt, to know that your plans did not really help at all. None of this was worth it. You basically just gave me more to work with. Man, I can't even imagine what it must feel like for you, knowing that you are nothing really worth it in the long run." The man in the purple jacket was now having his hand on the other side of the chest.

"I guess I have kept you around for a long enough amount of time. I guess you just need to go now. You have expired, and I guess that none of this matters. You are just a small piece of the puzzle." The man in the purple jacket had placed his hand and part of his arm all the way through Misty's chest. Misty had her eyes closed and she was dead right then and there. He laughed and then he removed his hand from her chest and then threw her dead body on the ground.

Then with that, he walked away and it was just in time for nobody to really be around to see what had happened, so he was about to get away with it for good. Besides, the death was not really what was important. It was just in time for Brad to pull up on the car and then he walked up to Misty and held her dead body. He screamed at the top of her lungs and he was crying and this was wondering who did this, and what he was going to do now, knowing that everything he said to her was a life. Waiting and being with her, and that never happened.

Things started to go by in a haze after this. Brad had gotten ready for her funeral, feeling like he was doing the one thing that he should have never done in his entire life, and this was the one thing he never really thought he was going to do. He thought that if he was going to have to set up a funeral, it would have been when he was much older and a person who had already seen all of the things that he should have seen in his entire life.

As Brad was setting up his funeral, I walked up to him one day and I was trying to go on and try to talk to him a little bit. I thought that maybe, I could actually get some real interaction with him. Seeing his way of why Misty was so special. I knew that she was a good girl, and that she had done a great few things, but this was something that I still felt like I needed to know now. "Brad, do you have a moment to talk?" I asked and then brad just stopped his arrangements and put down his cigarette. Which was something that he started pretty much right after Misty had died, and while I didn't agree with him I did see why he would do it.

"I am really busy right now. Trying to make this all properly set up. Please, just let me do this. Maybe later, we can talk about it." Brad said and then I stared at him for a moment, trying to see if it was one of those things where if I waited, he would tell me. But I realized that this was not going to happen, so I started to walk on away.

Right before I was out of the house, I looked around and decided to say one final thing to him to sort of give him a back up option. "If you ever need to talk with somebody, you know, to sort of let it all out, just come to me and we can talk about it. Or if perhaps you just want to hang out for a bit." I said and then Brad was just not saying anything and I knew that this was not going to work out at all. With that, I turned away and left him alone.

Brad was staring at the window, and Brad was sort of sinking in the fact that the friendship that we had was going to be over after this. Not that he had wanted it to be over, but this was just the fact that he was going to have to deal with. As this was going on, he was getting used to the fact as I was accepting the fact that I was never going to see him ever again for the rest of his life. But it would see like my brother Ken would have seen him very soon again, and I was not a part of it.

Brad attended Misty's funeral, just keeping his head down and trying not to force himself into any conversations that he had wanted no part of. Nor did he want to bring anybody into conversations about Misty that they would have to pretend like they cared about her, but if they had cared about her, they would have been there for her earlier and not placing her off forever. But it wasn't entirely their fault. Maybe Misty did have a hard time talking with others since she was a android and all.

After the funeral was over, Brad was walking by Misty's house to get one final look at it. Feeling like he wanted to give it one final look before he went on with his life, and he felt like he needed to just sort of really give his good byes. He had not been there once since she had died which was why he was shocked and looking around like crazy when he saw that the house was mostly destroyed, like there had been a fire or something like that. He felt like he needed to try and investigate and see what the hell had happened. Turned out the day that Misty died, the man in the purple jacket came along and turned down the entire house, killing every single android her mother had made, including the mother as well. Brad shook his head unable to believe what had happened as he looked around for any extra details

He found something that looked like a pink notebook. He started to open it up to one of the pages and he was looking at it. He then realized that this was Misty's journal. Something that she had been working on throughout the course of the those several years of her life. He then grabbed the journal, realizing that he had the seven years of Misty's life in there and he wanted the whole experience, so he grabbed it and headed on his way to the house, where he would give a reading of it there.

As he was on his way back to his house, he was wondering what all she had said about him, Sheldon, and I. He had wondered if she had other friends besides just them, and if she had lost touch with them or if they were still there, but she just never told Brad or the others about them. Either way, this was the final way he could get any knowledge of what Misty was like, and he needed to take that chance anyways.

As Brad was alone in his bedroom, he told his parents that he was not going to be doing anything for a little while. His parents didn't like it, but since Misty was only been dead for like a week or so, they decided they would give him a sort of loose like one month period of time before they would start to really get focused on what he needed to do. Which meant that he still had about three weeks or so left to go through before they would really get on his case once again.

Before he started, he took out a small blue pen and then he wrote on the front page "Journal of Misty Wakeman, 1950-1966." Brad decided to pretend like she was a normal human being. A person that was born and lived a full and normal life to this point in time. Brad felt like that was the least she had deserved after all that she had done for the group as well as the city. Then Brad smiled for the first time since Misty's death. He actually did something that he felt like was worth while.

After this, he opened up the first page of the journal and then he was ready to read through the seven years of Misty's life that was actually real, which considering the fact that she was only sixteen, was still nearly half of her persumed life. "February 1st, 1959, My mom bought this for me for my birthday. I had asked her to let me have one after I saw it at the store. She seemed really happy to give it me and I am going to write in it all the time." Brad read the first day and it looked like she was a couple of weeks 'older' than Ken at that rate. Even though by now, either way, he was older than her as of the day I am writing this.

"February 2nd, 1959, My name is Misty Wakeman. I am living in a city called Wayside Minnesota, which to to take honor in the school that had been build a few years ago, although the town is so big that it has like three different school districts there." Misty had said and then when she had said that, Brad closed the thing and then he stood up and he took out a giant cigarette and started to smoke it carefully.

Brad read through the entire thing in one sitting, and he missed the next day of school and was up for about thirty one hours reading this from start to finish, letting every word sink in. She somehow went the whole way not mentioning once about the android, which Brad thought was for the best and then at the end, Brad wrote "Misty Wakeman was the bravest person I ever knew. I loved her. Rest in peace. -Brad, her boyfriend." And that was the second and last time he wrote in her journal, and he decided that this was just too much for him to handle.

Sheldon one day was sitting down and he was just high as a fucking kite. Not really in the right spot to do anything, he wondered what it would be like to tell the truth. He sat down and opened up his computer and create a small document. The document that he was creating was a book that would be about a human fighting a huge army of androids and he would see the real life value of these. This was based off of him being the human and the androids were now about the life they have tried to gain and the trust of the humans. It raises the question of what humans are like really as well as if the idea on if animals are real or not or if they are just something that is fake that people created to try and justify their superiority. The book was called "Do Replicants Dream of Electric Sheep?"

If you ask me, given the context of what the title really meant, that the answer is yes. They do. But I guess that I have gone on long enough. I am going to end this off here, even I need some sleep. Please understand what I am telling you here. Understand that androids are just as much human as we are and while Ken is a piece of crap, maybe he did have a couple of good ideas here and there. I feel like I need to make up with him sometime soon. The end.

- The journal was found the day after Sam had died by the police force and was taken in and considered for evidence. While many felt that there was truth to it, some considered it to be a part of some insane mindset her had. Eventually, with this journal as well as how the gun was placed, and the evidence tape being seemingly impossible to find, Sam's death was ruled as a suicide from insanity. While his parents refused to believe it, there was no fighting the case and they decided to 'accept' the official story. Just as how they had accepted the fact that their second son was legally declared dead after being gone for more than six weeks and there was no evidence offered. Both their sons died in twenty four hours. That was the life they had to accept.-

Chapter Text

In 2018 once again…

T.K. placed the start to the big manuscript down feeling as if it was finally time for him to take a break here. He knew that he could not go on all night without being worn out of what he was doing. Even Joe was starting to show some fatigue of the story and that there was a time they needed to stop. "I think it might be time for us to stop for the night. Maybe we can pick this up tomorrow morning. We got the first four chapters done, which is more than I could have dreamed up of." T.K. said as he got out of his chair for the first time in nearly twelve hours. That was, by far, the longest session